}'

(S4^5 SYNTAX

OF CLASSICAL GREEK

FROM HOMER TO DEMOSTHENES

First Part

THE SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE EMBRACING THE DOCTRINE OF THE MOODS AND TENSES

BY BASIL LANNEAU GILDERSLEEVE

WITH THE CO-OPERATION Op' CHARLES WILLIAM EMIL MILLER OF THE JOHNS HOPKINS UNIVERSITY

NEW YORK •:• CINCINNATI •:• CHICAGO AMERICAN BOOK COMPANY Copyright, iqoo, by . . GiLDERSLEHVB.

Entered at Stationers' Hall, London.

Greek Syntax.

W. P. PREFACE

In compliance with the wishes of many of my former pupils, I have determined to pubHsh my Greek Syntax in parts. The framework was planned many years ago, and corresponds in its structure to the scheme of my Latin Grammar, the first edition of which was published in 1867. In fact, the Latin Syntax was based on the MS of the Greek, Doubtless the syntactician of to-day will find ample opportunity to criticise the arrangement, but to refashion the book would require more time than the speeding years will allow me to presume on. Nor will I under- take in this place a vindication of the principles that have guided me in my syntactical studies. A word, however, as to the order of the examples may deemed appropriate. A catena of syntactical usage would be a memorable achievement, and I do not deny that at one time I thought it possible to organize such a work, for which a large staff of helpers would have been needed; but I have learned to renounce this ambitious scheme, and even the present far more modest undertaking would have been impossible unless I had associated with myself a scholar who is acquainted with* every detail of my syntactical work, publish- ed and unpublished, and who has brought to the task not only a hearty sympathy with my views and methods, but a clearness of judgment and an accuracy in details that have been of great service to me in my own researches. In completing the list of examples, and in filling up the gaps in the presentation, I have availed myself freely of his help, and we have worked side by side in the collection and the scrutiny of the passages cited; and to this pupil, colleague, friend, Professor . . . MiLLER, the IV PREFACE completion of the work has been committed, in case the privilege should be denied me of putting the last hand to the labor of many years. Like myself, Professor MiLLER is thoroughly imbued with the conviction that the study of syntax is of the utmost importance for the appreciation of literary form, and we both believe that the presentation of the phenomena under the rubrics of the different departments of literature will be found useful for in- struction and even more so for suggestion. Taking the Attic Orators as the standard of conventional Greek, we have worked backward through philosophy and history to tragic, lyric, and epic poetry, comedy being the bridge which spans the syntax of the agora and the syntax of Parnassus. Individual syntax we have not been able to set forth with any fulness, but the differ- ent departments have been represented to the best of our ability and judgment. The plan has saved us from giving the usual medley of examples, it has forced us to rely largely on our own collections and to examine the texts for ourselves, and it will enable those who come after us to fill up these outlines with greater ease. Basil L. Gildersleeve.

The Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore, CONTENTS OF PART I

Simple Sentence, 1-467. Nominative Case, 3-13. As Subject, 3-4. In Titles, Inscrip-

tions, etc., 5. In Citations, Enumerations, and Indefinite Predications, 6-9. In Suspense, 10. In Exclamations, 11,

For the Vocative, 12. In Apposition with Vocative, 13.

Vocative Case, 14-25. i with Vocative, 15. Position of *,

16-18. Repetition of St, 19. Omission of w, 20. Position of Vocative, 21-23. Vocative in Exclamations, 24. Predicate

Vocative, 25. Forms of the Subject, 26-59. Adjectives used Substantively, 28-39. Masculine and Feminine Adjectives used Substantively, 28-30. aviip, 7VV11, av9pa>iros, expressed, 31. Ellipsis of Masculine Substan- tives, 32. Ellipsis of Feminine Substantives, 33-35. Neuter Ad- jectives used Substantively, 36. Neuter Plural of Adjectives and Verbals, 37. Ellipsis of Neuter Substantives, 38. Possessive Pro-

noun or Genitive with Substantivized Adjectives and Participles, 39. XpTiHia and irpaytia Expressed, 40. Abstract Noun used as a Concrete, 41. Plural of Abstracts used Distributively, 42. The Distributive Singular, 43. Plural of Abstract Nouns used Concretely. Plural of Proper Nouns, 44-46. Divergent Plural Expressions, 47. Plural of Feminine Names of Towns and of Parts of the Human Body, 48-50 Name of Inhabitants as Name of City, 51. Piuralis Maie-

statis, 52. Plural of Courtliness and Reserve, 53. First Person

Plural for First Person Singular, 54. Gender of the same, 55. Singular in Collective Sense, 56-58. tlire, ^epe, ove, etc., of more than

one, 59.

Copula, 60-67. Periphrases with -yiYvofAai. 61. Copula as the Predi- cate, 62. Forms of etvai at head of Sentence, 63. Copulative Verbs, 64. Passive Verbs as Copulative Verbs, 65. elvai combined with Copulative Verb, 66. Previous Condition, 67. Omission of the Subject, 68-82. Personal Pronoun Expressed, 68. Unemphatic tyu) and

"71. Subject contained in Verb, 72. 0eia pijiiara, 73. Divine Agent Expressed, 74-75. Impersonal Verbs, 76. Subject an Infinitive or Sentence, ^. Indefinite Subject to be Supplied from Context, 78 Ellipses of Time, Circumstances, and the like, 79. "One," how expressed, '80-81. Indefinite Subject of the Third Person Plural Omitted, 82.

Omission of the Copula, 83-86. e

jectiv^e, 109. Plural Subject and Dual Predicate, 11 -i 14. Plural the Rule, in. Plural Verb with Dual Participle, 112. Dual Verb with Complementary Plural Predicate Participle, 113. Dual Adjective Predicate with Verb of First Person Plural, 114. Transition from Dual Verb to Plural Verb, or vice versa, in

Same Sentence, 115. Dual Number, 116. Plural Subject and Singular Verb, 117-118. Sxiifia ITivSapuKov, 118. Special Exceptions, 1 19-136. Nouns of Multitude, 120. Organ- ized Number, 121. Agreement in Sense, 122. Periphrastic Sub- ject, 123. Agreement of Copula with Predicate, 124. Agree- ment of Verb with Appositive, 125. Neuter Adjective as Sub- stantive Predicate, 126. Demonstrative Attracted to Gender of

Predicate, 127-128. Demonstrative not Attracted, 129. Differ- ence between Ti and Tis in Predicate, 130-131. ti instead of tivo, 132. Tiva. 133. Attraction of Superlative Predicate, 134. Super- lative Predicate Agreeing with Genitive, 135. Masculine Re- ferring to Indefinite Subject known to be a Woman, 136. Forms of the Verbal Predicate, 137-467. Voices of the Verb, 137-182. Active Voice, 138-144. Transitive and Intransitive Verbs, 139. CONTENTS VU

Transitive Verbs without Outer Object, 140. Periphrases

with YiYvofiat, 141. Transitive Verbs used Intransitively, 142. Infinitive Active apparently as Passive, 143. Causative Active, 144. Middle Voice, 145-156. Direct Reflexive Middle, 146. In- direct Middle, 147. Active for the Indirect Middle, 148. Reciprocal Middle, 149. Causative Middle, 150. Active and Reflexive, 151. aixos eavrov, 152. Middle with Reflex- ive Forms, 153-154. Middle and Accusative of the Part Affected, 155. Details of Difference between the Active and the Middle, 156. Passive Voice, 157-178. Instrument, Means, or Cause, 158. Agent, 159-165. Interchange of Instrument and Agent, 166. Permissive Passive, 167. Future Middle in Passive Sense, 168. Aorist Passive for Aorist Middle, 169. Passive of Middle Verbs, 170. Active Serving as Passive, 171-172. Passives of Intransitive Verbs, 173. Passive of Verbs that take Genitive or Dative, 174-175. Impersonal Passive of Verbs Governing an Oblique Case, 176. Deponent Verbs, 177. Passive of Deponents expressed by Periphrasis, 178. Reciprocal Expressions, 179-182. oXXiiXuv, 179. Reciprocal Reflexives, 180. Reciprocal and Reflexive in Contrast, 181, Repetition of Cognates, 182. Mood Defined, 183. Tenses of the Verb, 184-360. Present Tense, 189-204. Specific Present. Universal Present, 189-190. Present Participle combined with Copula, 191. Conative Present. Present of Endeavor, 192-193. Present

Anticipating Future. Praesens Propheticum, 194. etfii, 195-197. Present in Passionate Questions, 198. Historical Present, 199-200. Annalistic or Note-Book Present, 201. Present of Unity of Time, 202. Perfect of Unity of Time, 203. Present for Perfect, 204. Imperfect Tense, 205-225. With Adverb of Rapidity, 206. Descriptive Imperfect, 207. Imperfect with Definite Num- bers, 208-210. Imperfect and Aorist Interwoven, 211. Inter- change of Imperfect and Aorist, 212. Imperfect of Endeavor, 213. The Same combined with Aorist of Attainment, 214. epeWov with Infinitive, 215. Negative Imperfect, 2 1 6. Imper- fect of Past Impressions, 217-220. In Description of Sce- nery, 217. Of Points Assumed, 218. Of Former Views, 219. Of Sudden Appreciation of Real State of Affairs. Imperfect 221. for Present, 220. Origin of Modal eSei, Ixptiv, etc., Imper- VIU CONTENTS

feet of Unity of Time, 222-223. Imperfect apparently used as a Pluperfect, 224. Of tjkciv and oix€«r9ai used Aoristi- cally, 225. Perfect Tense, 226-234. Perfect of Maintenance of Result, 228. Intensive Perfect, 229-232. Perfect of an Action that is Dated, 233. For Future Perfect, 234. Gnomic Perfect, 257. Periphrastic Perfect, 286-288. Pluperfect Tense, 235-237. Of Rapid Relative Completion, 236. As Imperfect, 237. Aorist Tense, 238-264. Ingressive, 239-242. Of Actions of Long Duration, Complexive Aorist, 243-244. Of Total Negation, 245-246. Present used in Negation, 247. Aorist for Perfect, 248-252. Translated by Pluperfect, 253-254. Gnomic Aorist, 255. Aorist of Comparison, 256. Gnomic Perfect and Future, 257-258. Empirical Aorist, 259. Aorist in General Descriptions, 260. In Passionate Questions, 261. Where English uses Present, 262. Of the Future, 263. Imperfect, Aorist, and Pluperfect Side by Side, 264. Future Tense, 265-278. Modal Nature of, 267. In Delibera- tive 268. the Questions, Imperative Use of, 269. |ii] and Future Indicative in Prohibitions, 270. oi with Future In- dicative in Questions as Imperative, 271. Periphrastic Future with (xcWw, 272-276. (xeWw with Future Infinitive, 273. With Present Infinitive, 274. With Present and Future, 275. With Aorist, 276. iaeXXw, I postpone, 277-278. With Present, 277. With Aorist, 278. Gnomic Future, 257-258. Future Perfect Tense, 279-284. Future Perfect Active, 280. Future Perfect Middle used Passively, 281. Future Perfect in Imperative Sense, 282. As a Future, 283. Periphrastic Future Perfect Middle, 284. Periphrastic Tenses, 285-296. Periphrases with Perfect Parti-

ciple, 286-290. Perfect Participle with citjv av, 288. Perfect Participle Parallel with an Adjective, 289. As Predicate of

Participle of }Ai, 290. Periphrases with Present Participle, 291-292. Present Participle Parallel with an Adjective, 292. Periphrases with Aorist Participle, 293-295. Aorist Parti- Peri- ciple with forms of <|)aivofji,ai, 294. With ex", 295. phrastic Perfect Participle with ex", 296. Epistolary Tenses, 297-298 Tenses of the Moods, 299-360. Of Imperative, 303. Of Sub- junctive, 304. Of Pure Optative, 305. Of Optative with av. 306. Tenses of Optative as Representative of Indicative, 307-312. CONTENTS IX

Present, 307. Aorist, 308. Perfect, 309. Future, 310. Re- tention of Imperfect and Pluperfect Indicative in Oratio Obliqua, 311. Present Optative representing Imperfect Indicative, 312. Tenses of the Infinitive, 313-328. Infinitive as a Verbal Noun, 313-326. As Subject, 314-319. As Object, 320-326. Future Infinitive as Object of Verbs of Creation, 326. Infinitive as Representative of Indicative, 327-328. Anarthrous, 327. Articular, 328. Tenses of the Participle, 329-360. Of Participle as Verbal Adjective, 329-353. Present, 330-338. Of Contemporane- ous Action, 330-336. Prior Action, 337. Subsequent Action, 338. Aorist, 339-347. Perfect, 348-353. Of Participle as Representative of the Indicative, 354-360. Present, 355-357. Aorist, 358. Perfect, 359. Future, 360. Moods, 361-467. Indicative Mood, 361-368. Expression of Possibility, Power, Obligation, and Necessity, 363-364. ISei, IxpTiv, etc., of Present, 364. In Generic Sentences, 365. Non-use of Certain Tenses of Indicative with Temporal Particles, 366. Indicative in Wishes, 367. In other than Simple Sen- tences, 368. Subjunctive Mood, 369-387. Name, 370. Theory, 371. Im- perative Subjunctive, 372-375. Imperative of First Person, 373-374. Imperative Subjunctive of Second Person, 375. Aorist Subjunctive in Prohibitions, 376-377. Present Sub- junctive Third Person as Negative Imperative, 378. Sub- junctive Questions, Deliberative Subjunctive, 379-384. First Person, 380. Second Person, 381. Third Person, 382. Sub- stitutes for the Deliberative Subjunctive, 383. rt Trdew; 384. Subjunctive in Half-Questions, 385. Homeric Subjunctive, 386. Subjunctive in Dependent Clauses, 387. Optative Mood, 388-400. In Wishes, 388. Potential Optative, 389. Optative in Questions, 390. Tenses of Pure Optative, 391-393. Imperative Optative, 394. Optative with ei0€, cl yap, 395. With el and us, 396. Pure Optative in Relative

Sentences, 397. Pot)\oip.Tiv av, 398. Optative in Semi- dependent and in Dependent Clauses, 399. Parallelism of Optative and Infinitive, 400. Imperative Mood, 401-422. Tenses of Imperative, 402-409. Present, 403. Aorist, 404. Additional Remarks, 405. Per- fect Active, 406. Perfect Middle, 407. Perfect Passive,

408-409. Third Person, 408. Second Person, 409. £76, i0i. CONTENTS

4>^, with Imperative, 410-413. Negative Imperative, 414- 419. Difference between Present and Aorist in Prohibitions, 415. Examples of Present, 416. Aorist, 417-418. Third Person, 417. Second Person, 418. Perfect, 419. Equiva- lents of Imperative, 420. Representatives of Imperative in Oratio Obliqua, 421. Imperative in Dependent and in In- terrogative Sentences, 422. Particle av, 423-467. Distinctions in Use of av, 424. Shifting from Definite to Indefinite, 425. Ktv^Ke), , 426. Etymology of av.

Indicative witli av, 428-433. Unreal Indicative with ov, 429. As Potential of Past, 430. Of Intermittent Action, 431. av with Future Indicative and its Representatives, 432. Non- use of av with Present and Perfect Indicative, 433. Optative with av, 434-450. Potential Optative, 434. Time and Tenses of Potential Optative, 435-440. Present, 436-437. Aorist, 438-439. Perfect, 440. ov with Future Optative, 441. Translation of Optative with ov, 442. Imperative Use of ov with Optative, 443. Combined with Indicative, 444. In Questions, 445. irws ov with Optative to Express Wish, 446. Optative with ov in Dependent Discourse, 447. Adherescent ov, 448. 60V, oTov, etc., with Optative, 449. Omission of av with Optative. Pure Optative as a Potential, 450. Subjunctive with ov, 451-456. As a Form of Independent Statement, 452-455. Omission of av in Subjunctive - pendent Clauses, 456. Other Uses of ov, 457-458. ov with other Moods, 457. ov without a Verb, 458.

Position of ov and €(), 459-467. After Verb, 460. With Negatives, 461. With Interrogatives, 462. After Participle, 463. With any Leading Modifier, 464. With Verbs of Say- ing or Thinking, 465. Rare Position in Relative Subjunctive Sentences, 466. Repetition of ov and k€(v), 467. GREEK SYNTAX

1. Syntax treats of the formation and combination of sen- tences. A sentence is the expression of thought in words. It is a

The necessary parts of the sentence are the subject and the predicate. The predicate is that which is said of the subject. The subject is that of which the predicate is said.

262 teams. is the avOptoTTos fiavOdvei, PlatO, Soph. C ; Man avSpwiros subject; [iav9dvei is the predicate. See also 2, 27, and 68-82. Sentences are divided into simple and compound. A simple sentence is one in which the necessary parts of the sentence occur but once, as above, dvApwiros |iav6dv€ For the compound sentence, see Index. SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE

' 2. The most simple form of the sentence is the finite verb :

el-|xi, / am ; SiSw-, thou givest ; <|)Ti-o"i, he says.

Here the form contains in itself all the necessary elements, the subject being indicated by the ending. Nominative Case

3. Subject.—The subject of the finite verb is always in the nominative case, or so considered.

K6v(i>v . . . Din. I, the eviKt)o-€, 75 ; Konon gained victory.

4. The subject of the infinitive is in the accusative case, or so con- sidered. See Infinitive. 2 GREEK SYNTAX

dSvvaTov . . • irdvTa Ka\u<; iroieiv, Xen. a avOpwirov Cyr. 8, 2, 5 ; For man to do all things well is impossible.

For the nominative with the infinitive, see Index.

5. Nominative in Titles, Inscriptions, etc. — The nominative is used as in English, not only as the subject of the verb, but in titles, inscriptions, and the like, which imply action or character.

Ne€'\ai, Clouds ; 2<}>t)k£s, IVasps ; Eip-rivT), Peace ; Barpaxoi, Frogs ; nXovTos, Phitus. etc.

KaWio-Tu NiKo4)iXotj 'AyytX^Oev, CIA. II, 1682. IIpoKXeiSTjs "i'lXo- kXcovs 'AYYeXiieev, CIA. 11, 1686. CIA. II, 1689. 1690. 1691. 1692. etc.

6. Nominative in Citations, Enumerations, and In- definite Predications.—Under the former head more prop- erly belongs also the use of the so-called nominative absolute in the citation of names, in enumerations, and in indefinite predications.

dvT)p %\ 'ycvd^evos 'Trpo£ ttjv tuv Trov»)p

7. Nam. in Citations of Names :

Aeschin. 2, 99 (see above).

Plato, Legg. 956 C : hiaiT-qTaX hiKaa-rmv Tovvofia fiaWov TTpf-rrov e;^oi/Tf?.

Soph. 218 E; oiov danaXievTrjs. Theag. 124 I^ • '"'"« 7"P ciWrjv (SC. eVcoi'u-

. . Ibid. 1 E. fiiav), ., irXrjv ;^pf;o-/i

Xen. Cyr. 3, 3, 58: irapriyyiia 6 Kiipoi (Tvvdrjp.a Zevs av pfiaxos Kn\ i]ye- fxwv. Oec. 6, 14 : tovs e^^oirras to crep.v6v ovofia tovto to KaXos re Kayados.'

Ar. : V s Koi aX Vesp. I185 fi ?! p^Weis Xf'yeti/ (so ). Eur. Tr. 1233 (but Kirchhoff puts a after larpos).

Soph. Ant. 567 : aXX' rj8e p.ivT0i p.i] €y(e).

8. A^07n. in Efiumerations :

Dem. 23, 207 : Tct Se T^ TToXewr olKobofirjfjLara . . . roiavra (SC. opa), . . ., npo- TTvAata TavTa, v € coao t koi, aToai, lleipaievs.

• : Koi Plato, Soph. 266 TiS-qui 8vo fii^.V 'J^oitjtlktjs e'lSr] 6 da p.fv dvOpco-

TTIVT) KT€.

AeSCHYL. Pers. 33 sqq. : aWovs S' 6 . . . NelXos tirep'^ev ^ova la Kdvrjs,

Urjyaa-Taywv AlyvTrToyevrjS, o re Trjs Upas Mep(f>i8os apx<^v kt€., And others Nile sent, Susiskanes, etc. NOMINATIVE CASE 3

This use of the nominative abounds in inscriptions:

: rahe CIA. I, 37 (= Hicks, No. 47). Ibid. 170-3 (= Hicks, No. 50) irape-

...... /ere. Ibid. Socrav . . . crT€(f)avos . . ., (f)id\ai . ., Koprj ., Ko'irrj ktL, 259 {— Hicks, No. 48), etc., etc. See Msth., Gr. d. Att. Inschr.* § 82, 3 d).

9. Nom. in Indt-Jiiiite Predications :

: S' eV wooded isl- HOM. Od. I, 51 vija- Sei/Spjjeo-o-a, 6fa Sw/iiara vaUi, A and, and in it a goddess hath her abode. II. 6, 395-6 : fifjaXrjTopos 'Heriwi/os,

'HeTLcov OS fvaifv. Ibid. lo, 4.^7 . 547. For the free and frequent use of this nom. in inscriptions, see Msth."^ § 82, 3 a-c. 'Avrihat- CIA. II, 809 C, 154-55 (325/324 B.C.): dno TTjS TfTpi]povs 'Ai/vo-eojy, pov epyov. From the quadrireme Anysis, the work of Antidorus. So often

: . . . koI in the same inscription. Ibid, i, 179, 7 sqq. (433 B.C.) Trapfboaav rpels

8fKa fjfjL^pai faeXrjXvdvlas.

10. Nominative in Suspense.—The nominative is some- times left in suspense {iiojninativus pendens, anacoluthon, want of sequence), an equivalent construction being substituted.

Si,aXe7iS|Jievos avrw eSo^e jioi, PlaTO, Apol. 21 C; Talking with him it seemed to me.

' ISOC. 4, 107-8: e^ovTes . . . KeKTrjpivoi . . . KparoivTf s . . . etSores

1 1 . . . ov8ep tovtoiv 12, 8. Ofias 7) fids enripe.

. . . ovv AnDOC. I, 16. Ibid. 29-30: Koi yap ol Xoyoi Ta>v KaT-qyopcov tovtoiv

. . . Ti Ibtd. ffioL tS)v Xoycov TTpocrrjKei ; 95.

Plato, Apol. 21 C (see above). Crat. 403 A {bis). Ibid. 404 C : ^^ppi- TToXXoi KOI TovTo TO Ibid. B-C. B- (puTTa Se, p.€t> (po^ovvTui ouop.a. 412 419

XeN. An. 2, 5,41 : Upo^evos 8e (cat Me'i/coi/ . . . irip^aTe avTovs Sevpo.

Cf. 3, 3, 16. 7,6,37. Hiero, 4, 6. Cf. 6, 15.

Hdt. I, 134.

Eur. . F. 185. Phoen. 283-5. Aeschyl. Cho. 520-1. HoM. II. 2, 350-3.

11. Nominative in Exclamations.—In exclamations, the nominative c/iaraclerises, the vocative addresses, the accusative

implies an object of emotion, and the genitive the source or sphere of emotion.

Plato, Phaedr. 227 C : w ytvvalos, eWe ypa^/^etfv 0)9 KTf.

Ar. Ran. 652 : avdp(x)Tro9 lepos. PI. 23: Xrjpos, Stuff and nottsensc!

Eur. Med. 61 : o) pcbpos, O foolish woman that she is! 4 GREEK SYNTAX

Soph. El. 1354. Ph. 254: u> ttoXX" eyw fioxOrjpos, 0} niKpos dfo'is. Tr. 1046 sq.

HOM. Od. 20, 194: biKTfiopos.

II. I, 231 : 8rjfxo^6pos ^acr iXevs, fTTfl ovTibavoicriv avacrcrm., Folk-devour-

that etc. : : : ing king thoii art, 2, 38 vtjitios. 5, 403 axfTXios. Ibid. 406 rjjTTtof. Ibid.jZj: ai8a>s. 9,630:

For the Vocative, see 24, For the Accusative in Exclamations, see Index. For the Genitive in Exclamations, see Index.

12. Nominative for the Vocative.— In the absence of a vocative form, the nominative is used as a vocative. When the vocative exists, the use of the nominative as a vocative has often a perceptible difference of tone. It is graver and more respectful, because it appeals to character, though sometimes metrical considerations come into play. In Homer, the nom- inative of proper nouns is frequently substituted for the voca- tive because of certain irregularities of metre.

. . Ktti Kai . . . . • ly ., yi) ^Xie crvveeris PcPotiBrjKa, AeSCHIN. 3, 260.

Aeschin. 3, 260 (see above).

: 6 Plato, Hipp. Mai. 281 A 'iTnrlas koKos re Ka\ aocfios, o)s 8ia xpovov rjfuv

Karfjpr 'Is ras Adrjvas.

Ar. Nub. • ^ Seo-TTor' • • • t I168. 264-5 ava^ I Xapnpos alOrjp.^

: S> iroa-is. : Eur. Hel. 1399 KXewos fjp,iv Suppl. 277 w ^iXoy, « SoKt/xd)- TUTOS 'EXXdSt.

Soph. Ai. 525 : A'las, and so regularly in Sophocles. (See Ellendt, Lex. Soph.).

P. V. : d) Sios Koi re AESCHYL. 88-90 aldrjp raxvirrepoi TTvoal, \ rroTapSyv

TTOvTicov T( re Ibid. • ^ TTTiyal KvpuTcov I avTjpidpov yiXaapa, napprjTop y^. 545 * (biXos, elrre. Fr. 207 : rpdyos, yivfiov apa TTfvQrjcreLS crv ye.

HOM. Od. I, 301 : Ka\ crv, (j)iXos, pciXa yap a-(f) KTf. 17, 415 : Soy, (piXos.

TiOfcrS' Kev e'liro). 19, 406 : yap^pos epos dvyarep re, ovop om

II. : {} KiiSiaTe 'He'Xtds 6" os 3, 276 sq. miTep "iSrj^fv pfBecov piyicrrf | rrdvT e(j)opas. For the occasional use of the Nom. Adj. with a Voc. Subst. or of a Voc. Adj. with a Nom. Subst., see Index.

* This is a curious coincidence with the Vedic rule (Delbriick, Synt. Forsch. V. of two vocatives ca but the word § 66) which prohibits copulation by (ri), requires connected by ca to be put in the nominative instead of in the vocative. vocative case 5

13. Nominative in Apposition with the Vocative.— The nominative with the article is sometimes in apposition with an expressed or unexpressed vocative which is identical with the subject of the verb. Similarly the pronoun oStos is often used in calling to a person.

6 olkoXovOei Ar. Ran. You this I iTttis, Sevpo, 521 ; boy, follow way oStos, t£ iroieis ; Ibid. Nub. 723 : You there, what are you doing?

a : 'J2 Plato, Conv. 172 ^a\r)pev^, e(f)r], ovTos '\iroX\68copos, ov irepi- firiaTas • Kai Kxi. fifVfls ; Kayo) TvepUjidva oy, 'AjroXXoStupe, e0»; (note difference between nom. and VOC). Ibid. 218 B : ot Se oiKerai koI ei'ny clWos fo-rl ^f^rj-

. . . . . Tois walv enidfcrde. : S> \os ., TTvXas Protag. 337 C civSpes, e4>1i oi ivapovres.

16 : Ka\ ol 01 XeN. An. I, 5. Upo^fve aXXoi TrapovTf s^EWrji/e s, ovk 'icrre o Ti TToteire, Proxenus and the rest ofyou Greeks that are present, you do not

are : I6i ovv know what you doing. Cyr. 4, 5, 17 ph crv, e(pr], 6 Trpea-lSvTaTos,

(cat la>v Tavra Ibid. 22 : crv 8 6 roiv Xeye. 4, 5' , €0?;, 'YpKavicov dp)(cov, inropeivop.

Ibid. 5, 3, 43 : fTTipiXfirde . . . o'l re ap^^ovre s Kai irdpTts 8e 01 (raxppovovv-

: (TV 8e 6 . . . Tfs. Ibid. 6, 3, 33 apxcov eKTarrov. Ibid. 8, 7, 28 : KaX navTes bk ol s km 01 aTrovres TTapovTf (fiiXoi ;^atperf. Mem. 3, 14,4: TvaparqpfiT , f(pr}, TovTov, oi TvXr) a lov.

Ar. Ach. : e's t6 ^Mlib. 242 irpoid^ trpoa-dev oXiyov, 17 Kavrjcjiopos. 723 (see

i : tI Ibid. o> above). Vesp. ovtos, nda-x^eis ; 1264.: ovtos, ovtos. Av.665-

6: : edeiaas, ovtos ; Ran. f) npoKVT], I tK^aive. Lys. 437 521 (see above).

Eur. Ale. : tI . . . : 773 ovtos, a-epvov /SAeVets ; Med. 922 avTT), rt )^ Upols

Or. 1 : . . . baKpvois Teyyfis Kopas ; 567 ovtos crv, pfj yj/aixrrjs (cru expressed with the ovtos).

Soph. Ai. : oStos, o-e ...... KaXa. Ibid. h Sevre- 71-2 | 89: OVTOS, Aia?, pov

AeSCHVL. Pers. ^ . . I55~0- ^a6v^a>va>v avacraa tj | P^Tfp Sep^ov ye- paid, x^'pf •

Od. : oi : HOM. 3, 427 aXXoi. Cf. 9, 172 clXXoi pev vvv pipper epoi ipirjpes eralpoi.

II. : oi : 3, 94 aXXoi. 19, 83 id. Cf. ibid. 190 : oXXot.

Vocative Case

14. The Vocative (the case of direct address) is not affected by the structure of the sentence, and does not enter as an ele- ment into syntax, except in the matter of concord.

15. S> WITH THE Vocative.—S> is commonly prefixed to the vocative. 6 GREEK SYNTAX

tS I Gentlemen Athens, ael w'A-n-oX- avSpes 'A0T)vaioi, Dem. I, ; of o|>ios el, You are X6Sa)p€, Plato, Conv. 173 D ; always alike, Apollodorits.

Dem. I, I : o) ai/Spss 'A^^i/aToi, and so hundreds of times in the same au- thor. 19,4: h uv8pfs SiKaarai, and the same phrase hundreds of times in the same author.

Aeschin. I, 122.

Plato, Conv. 173 D (see above). In the Conv. there are about 70 ex- amples of the use of u with the vocative of proper names, and only 8 in- stances of the vocative of proper names without w. (See Hug on Plat.

Conv. 'm't.). Protag. : All of about a hundred vocatives of proper names seem to have the i. (See Hug /. c).

: w Xen. Anab. with the vocative occurs about 40 times;' e.^. 1, 7, 3.

Thuc. : About 40 times;' e._^. i, 32, i.

Hdt. 7, 160. 161. Ar. Eq. 1194. Nub. 793. 794. Vesp. 136. Eur. Hel. 744. Soph. Ant. 49. 572. Aeschyl. Sept. 203. 255.

HOM. Od. I, 45 el saepe.

II. I, 74 ^/ saepe.

16. Position of . — Z> regularly precedes the vocative or the vocative and its attribute. In poetry it is sometimes in- terjected between the vocative and its attribute.

17. Normal Position:

Dem. I, I (see 15). 19, 4 (see 15).

Plato, Phaedr. 227 A: w ^I'Xe ^ai8p€. Ibid. D: & ^(krurre Soxcparfy.

Soph. 230 C : h iral (filXf. Ar. Eq. 108. Soph. El. 86. Ph. 1 128.

18. ExceptioJial Position :

EuR. Cf. El. 167. Hel. 1451. Or. 1246 : yivKqv'iha Z> <^t\tat. Soph. Ai. 395.

PiND. P. 2, I : /ifyaXoTToXtf? Z> 'SvpaKoaai.

: ^ HOM. Od. 8, 408 X"'Pf' ''^'^'''fp ifive.

II. 4, 189 : (^('Xos o) Mej/fXae. 17,716. _^

w. — S> is used sub- ig. Repetition of occasionally witl^^th stantive and attribute.

Soph. Ph. 799 : w t(Kvov w yewaiov.

S) HOM. II. 6, 55 : £ iriirov MfveXaf.

^ » Cf. Rockel, De Allocutionis Usu, Konigsberg, 1S84, p. 8. t. c. p. 5 sq. VOCATIVE CASE 7

20. Omission of w. —The omission of w in prose is passion- ate or late. are XripeiT', 'A0T)vaioi, DEM.8,31 ; You talking nonsense, Athenians.

Dem. 8, 31 (see above), avdpes 'Adrjumoi, as for example in 8, 35, is as for in rare by the side of w av8pfs 'AdTjvaloi. avdpes diKaa-rat, example

: elra 18, 196, is rare by the side of 2) av8p€s 8tKaaraL 18, 243 ip.^p6vTt)T\ vvuXeyeis; Ibid.2(^'. axovfis, Aiax^vr] ; Plato, Conv. 172 A. 173 E. 175 A. (bis). Gorg. 518 C: avdpane, II fnaids oi8fv nepl yvpLvaaTinrj^. Lach. 197 E. Phileb. A. Soph. 220 D. Theaet. 143 C. tL Xen. An. I, 5, 16 (see 13). Cyr. 2, 2, 7; avOpaire, noiels ; Mem.

2, 8, I.

Thuc. 2, II, I. 4, 126, I. 5, 9, I.

Hdt. i,S{bis). 9. II. 7.158. 162. Ar. Ach. 1097. 1098. 1099. iioi,etc. Eur. Hel. 858. Soph. Ai. 36 et saepe. Ant. 11. 223.

Aeschyl. Pr. V. 3. 144. 635. Simon. C. 145 Bgk."

HoM. Od. I, I. 60. 62. 64. 158. 337. 346, etc.

II. I, I. 17. 26. 37. 59. 106. 122. 131, etc.

21. Position of the Vocative.— In quiet passages the vocativ^e does not begin the sentence. When it heads the sen- tence, the omission of co heightens the excitement still further.

22. Vocative Postpositive :

Dem. more than a thousand times, as in 18, 5. 21, i. 23, i. 30, i.

AeSCHIN. I, 122: avTT] ixev eariv, w Tip.apx^€, dv8p6s dyadov . . . diroXoyia, and so in the other orators.

Plato, Conv. 173 D. 212 B. Gorg. 518 E. Phileb. 11 A (^').

Xen. An. i, 6, 6 (s). 7. 8. 9. Thug. Postposition is the rule for Thuc. as in i, 75, i. i, 76, 1.

Hdt. i, 9 (s). 11 (s).

Ar. Ach. 1099 (^). 1 136. Nub. 794. EuR. Hel. 744.

Soph. Ant. 11 (s). 49.

Aeschyl. P. V. 144 (s). 307 (s). 319 (s). 635 (s).

HoM. Od. I, I (s).

II. 1,26 (j). 131 (^). 158.

' In this section and the following, w is used in all those passages which are not followed by an s = sine. 8 GREEK SYNTAX

23. Vocative Prepositive :

Din. I, 72 (once in 67 times).'

as in i i Dem. rare, 8, 35 {s). 20, (j). 32, (.y). Aeschin. I, 121 (s) (only once, and that a quotation).

ISAE. 3, I (S). Plato, Conv. 173 E. Crito, 46 B. Euthyphr. 3 C.

Xen. An. I, 5, 16 (s). 7, 3. 3, I, 27

Thuc. 2, II (s). 71 {s). 4, 10 {s). 95. 5, 9 (j). 7, 61 (j).

Hdt. I, 8 (.y, bis). 7, 158 (j). 160. 161. 162 {s). Ar. Ach. 432. Eq. 11 94. Vesp. 136.

Eur. Hel. 858 (s).

Soph. Ant. 223 {s). 572.

Aeschyl. p. V. 3 (5-). Sept. 203. 255. Od. 81. HOM 1.45. 6\{s). 158 (j). 337 (.y). 346 (^f). 384(-f)- 389 W-

400 {s).

II. 122 I, 17 (.y). 59 (-f). 74. 106 (.f). (j). 442.

24. Vocative in Exclamations.—The vocative may be used in exclamations.

'HpaK\£is, Dem. 9, 31 ; Herakles!

Dem. 9, 31 (see above). 19, 308: 'HpaxXeis. 21, 66: zV/. 22, 78; w -y^

Kai Qio'i. 24, 1 86 : id. 39, 2 1 : id. 40, 5 : zi/.

Plato, Prot. 310 D : w ZfC *cat ^fot.

Xen. Mem. i, 3, 12: « 'HpaicXeiy.

Ar. Nub. 153; S ZeC ^aa-iXfv. Ibid. 184: £ 'HpaKXety. Vesp. 143 : ava^ Iloo'eiSoi' Ibid. 161 : 'AttoXXoj/ dnoTponait. Ibid. 420 ; 'HpoKXeir. PI.

374 : m 'HpaKXds.

Eur. Med. 764 : & Zf{l A/kj; re Z;;^? 'WKlov re (pas. Soph. El. 1466: aZd. O. C. 221. 532. O. R. 1198.

: ot Aeschyl. Ag. 1257 ororol, Avk^i' "AttoXXov, e'-yo) f'ytt),

fr. : at ttoctis AlCMAN, 29, Bgk.* Zev ndrep, yap t'/jLos etrj.

HoM. Od. 4, 341 ; Zfv T€ TTorep Kot 'Adrjvairj Koi "AttoXXoj/ (not real prayers).

II. 2, 371 : id.

25. Predicate Vocative.—The vocative, not being a case proper, cannot take a predicate, but the predicate (nom.) adjec- tive is occasionally attracted into the vocative. Clear cases are late:

fr, 21 T/iou wast called avTi yap eKXrjBrjs "ipL^paae Uapdeviov, CaLLIM. 3 , (Imbrasus), O Imbrasus, instead of Parthenius. thou oX/3te Kovpe, yivoio, TheoCR. 17, 66 ; Happy laddie, tnayst prove {so).

' Rockel, /. c, pp. 49-50. VOCATIVE CASE

In the classical period the examples are only apparent, or, at most, the the predicate may be picked out from the attribute which precedes verb.

Ar. Av. 627 . ) 0iXrar' e/xoi iroKv irpfa-jBvTcov e§ exdio-rov iifTairiiTTav. Tr. ad r S> TTOT ovcra Ka\Xii>i,iC€ Eur. 1221-3 fivpioiv | jirJTfp rpoTvaioiv, (TaKOS, "EKTopos (j)iXov I (TTffpavov. Ai. ^ Hav Hav KvWavias Tre- Soph. 695-6" aXlnXaynTe, \i,ovoKTinrov (

S> 6ea}v Ph. toj lia Tpaias diTo 8eipd8os (f)dvr]d\ xoporroC liva^. 759-60: Bva-Trjve

(TV, 8ia ttovcov navruiv (jiaveis. I 8ii(TTr]V( drJTa AESCHYL. Pers. 674 S) TroXi/KXavre davav bwdara.

26. Forms of the Subject.—The expressed subject of the finite verb may be in the form of a substantive, a pronoun, or some word or phrase used as a substantive.

. . . the iroXXwv K6vuv eviKT|are, DiN. I, 75 , Conon gained victory. xP'HHki- T»v TO xPT<»"''ov elvot Xvo-iTcXeoTcpov IcrTi, DeM. 36, 52. owtos ^Y^l^e, DeM, 21 This man married. [46], , got

Din. I, 75 (see above). Dem. 36, 52 (see above). [46], 21 [id).

Lys. I, II TO iraibiov (I36a, The baby was baivling. 13, 85; d \ikv to

eV avTo(f>a)pco p.r] Trpoaeyeypanro.

116 ra ov , E. Plato, Ale I, C. dyadd (TViJ.cf)epei Tj Rpb. 372 ii-^a dnfp

nai ol vxiv f'xovcri..

XeN. Cf. Hell. 4, 2, 21 ovK diriOavov avrap trXriv ei tis KTe. (Part. gen.

as subj.)

ThUC. I, 126, 9 oi . . . fierd rov KvXavos 3, 108, 2' 01 Kara to 8( ^lov

' "' ^^ tov ''E.TViTd8av. Kepas fviKcov to Kad' eavTOVS 4> 33- irepl HdT. I, 62 ol d/Kpl U€L(TL(TTpaTov. 3, 76. 9, 69.

27. Even prepositional phrases like ets 6KTa)Kai8eKa, etc., without the article, may be treated as the subject.

el KaTa(rKa(j>€iT) Toiv rtixiov twv |J.aKp(ov eiri Seko (TTaSta cKaTcpov, LYS. tSu/ is the 13, 8. (Strictly speaking, Teixcov partitive genitive dependent on

KaracTKacpeiT] and eVt 8eKa aTd8ia IS an adverbial modifier.)

Lys. 13, 8 (see above). 18 XEN. An. 3, 4, 5 ^woi f\r)(f)dr]aav els 6 kt m KaiSe Ka, Abouf were 10 taken alive. Ibid. 6, 4, 23 ets 8i(txCKiov^ dvdpcoTTovs Hell. 6, 5, efpvyou ..-Trepi 6 KT a KO cr I OV S- 2. Ka\ e'iKO(Ti ive- ThUC. 3, 20, 8e av8pas 8iaK0(T iovs fidXicrTa idekovTai. fj.ei.vav TJ] f^68cp

t e cr e Hdt. 5, 64. Kai (T(pfa)v fwea-ov lire p a p dKO vTa av8pas,Andof them there fell above 40 men. 6, 1 1 7 dnedavov .. kutu e ^a kio- xI'X lov s.

28. Adjectives used Substantively. — Masculine and lO GREEK SYNTAX

feminine adjectives and participles are used as personal substan- tives freely with the article in both numbers, less freely without the article in standard prose.

2g. a. With the artick:

DeM. I, I . Tmc ^ov\o\iiv(i>v. 3- '7- tov? alriovs. Ibid. 21 : rov ofiayvvfiov.

4.44- Tcjp XeyovTcov. 20, 74' tovs tcoiXvaovrai. 29, 44 "• oi 8iKa^ovTfS.

ISOC. 5, 24: Tols {TriTTjdflois tois f'/xoTy.

Ant. 5. i8- Tois ijiois ivpo(rr]Kovcnv

6 . . . 6 Plat. Ale. I, 113 A: epcoraii/ dwoKpivoufvos. 125 B : tovs dyadovs.

181 '. 134 B: ol KOKOL. Conv. 178 E; rov epMfxevov. B ol (paiiXoi. 204 D:

ol : 6 ()v. Lach. 180 D ; tjXIkoi iyod. Legg. 868 A tw KeK-rripivta. Rpb. 409

: ; (rc3 C 6 ex<>>v- Theaet. 147 D tw 6p.u>vvp(o.

XeN. Apol. 20: Tois yeivapfvois. 27: rols epois fvvois. Hell. 5. 2, 33;

Tols vfieripots hv(Tp.fvicn. Mem. I, I, I : oi ypa'^dpevoi.

Thug. 3, 4, 4 ; rav . . , bta^aWovTOiv. 5' 32. I • '^ovs fj^avras-

HdT. I, 120 : Toiis yeivapivovs. 3, 65 : rotv . . . olmjioTdrav.

1 1 PI. • AR. Eccl. 26: TTJs ffiris KfKTrjpivrjs. 495 '''ovs dyadovs.

El. . o t eKeivov TSKutv. Eur. Ale. 167 ; avjav Tj TfKov(T{a). 335 Hipp. 413 : rds aacfipovas. Or. 51O' 6 Keivov yevo pevos.

Soph. Ai. 456: x'^ kukos t6v Kpeia-a-ova. Ant. 520: ovx 6 ;^p;70-r6s rw

fr. KaKw Xa;^eri' 'icros. 321 N^'.tov 6vt]t6v.

AeSCHYL. Suppl 951 : Tols apa-eaiv. ThEOGN. 1026: Twv dyaBcbv.

HOM. Od. 15,324". To'is dyado'ia-i. IJ, 2l8; rov opo'iov {bt's). 20, I33: rov

. . . dpeiov{a). 224 : rov bvarr]vov.

: . . . : 01 =: 1 ; II. 3, 255 rw viKt]a-avri. 6, 435 apurroi. 8, 342 1, 178 rov oni-

(Trarov. lO, 237: rov dpeio). II, 658: ol apiaroi.. 13, 279; roii . . . KaKov

1 6 rpeTTerai xpu>s. 6, 53' rov opo'iov. 21,207: rov apLurov. 23,663; VLKrjOeis.

30. b. Without the article:

DeM. 18, 70; w Xe'ycov (vxfpa)S on civ ^ovXrjdrjs.

AnTIPH. 3 /3 12 : dBXiardrco 8vo (aCC.).

Plat. Ale. I. 119 C; & Spia-re. Conv. 194 B; voiv i'xovri oXiyoi e p-

B: . . . (fipoves TToXXcov d(f)p6vci)v (f)oj3fpa>T€poi. Legg. 795 8ia(f)€pfi padiov

: Tim. E : pTj padovros. Phaedr. 239 A fpapeva. 29 dyaSa.

XeN. Hell. 5, I, 19 .' fVt TToXXas vavs KeKrrjpfvovs.

: w AR. Nub. 518 : w 6ea>pfvoi. Pax, 384 nnvTjpoL

EUR. Hipp. 682: 0} TrayKaKia-rr). I. A. I 244 : ev vrjiriois. Soph. O. R. 334: ^ kuk^v KaKiare. Ibid. 1397:

: S) kokcov KaKwv KUKKTrt. Ph. 384 ; /caK kukcov. Ibid. 984 KUKiare Koi roXprj- ararf. Ibid. 1371 : kukovs.

AeSCHYL. Ag. 861, 1231 : aporej/os. Suppl. 393, 644 dpcrevav. VOCATIVE -CASE II

ThEOGN. 1025 . SetXot.

HOM. Od. 3,74; aK\o^aivo'i(Ti. 4, 822 bv

" II. 3,48 dWo8aTroi

31. Of course dprjp, yvvr], and avOpaTros are often expressed, dvrjp is at once more poetic and more homely than the article.

DeM. 15, 23 . ^ap^apov avOpaiTov (fem.). 19, 196 : ^0\vv6iav yvvaiKa.

• koX Ant. I, 14 dvr]p KoKos re dyaOos. 2,h, <^: 6fpjxov koI dvbpeiov avdpooTTov.

• rt 5, 72 ov yap tcTTiv o av 6pyi^6p.(vos avdpanros ev yvoit). Plato, Ale. I, 125 B: tovs dya6ovs ih8pas. Gorg. 470 C: (pfXov av8pa.

Legg. 846 D. dv8p6s fiTixoipiov. Menex. 247 D, Ovr^ria dv8pi. 335 E: tov btKaiov dv8p6s. Prot. 316 C ^ivov av8pa. 3^6 D: rav naXaiup dv8pS)v. Rpb.

331 C . (pikov dv8p6s.

P. I • PiND. 4. Trap' dv8p\ (f)!X(o. ThEOG. KUKolai 8e dXX* aU\ rav 3I~"2 fir] npoaofiiXei | dv8pd(riv dyadwv f'xeo. 43 e/ saepe.

II. 108 : o t HOM. 3, OTrKoTfpcov dvbpaiv. <), 320 depyos dvrjp. I3, 278: 6

. . . 8eiX6s dvi]p. 23, 704 dv8p\ 8f vikt]6(vti.

32. Ellipsis of Masculine Substantives.—When per- sons are not meant a substantive is understood. Ellipses of masculine substantives are rare but clear.

6 Kv^iKT)v6s (sc. a-Tarv^p), The Cyzicene (a coin).

LyS. 12, II , TerpaKoaiovs kv(^ikt]vovs (sc. (TTaTTJpas), but 32, 6: rpiaKovTa ararfipas Kv^iKrjvovs.

Thug. I, 47, 2, and elsewhere : 6 Trefdy (sc. a-rparos) (but 6 Tre^oy o-rparoy,

4, 8, 2). 3, 107, I . TOV 'AfinpaKiKov (sc. koXttov). 6, 30, I : tov 'idi/toi/ (sc. koXttov). 34,4: {id.).

HdT. 3, 25. TOV TTeCov. 4, 128: 6 Trends and tov weCov {bis) (but I,8o;

TOV Tte^ov (TTpaTOv).

Ar. Ach. 1229: aKparov (SC. oivov). Eq. 105 : aKparov . . . ttoXw. Ih'd.

1 1 87 : fx^ ""' TTtetv Ke Kpap,{vov Tpia icai 8vo. Com. Fr. Mein. 3,462, 13-4. tV noTr^pia yXvKvv (sc otvoj/). 4, 563:

TOV TTulv TOV : 6 TToXvs TTpo \ ciKpoTov fjpMv. 4,352, 420 oKpuTos oXty' dvuy- Ka^fi (ppovflv. Much makes your senses crooked, ifyou take it straight.

Eur. Cycl. 569: oo-rt? av mtj ttoXvv (sc. oivov). Ibid. 573. HOM. II. 9, 203: fwpoTepoi/ (sc otj/ov?) 8e Kepau, Don't draw it too mild.

33. Much more common are ellipses of feminine substantives, such as ayKvpa, yx), yvaprj, 8paxp-r], rjpepa, Xa^ai, p.ep'is, p,olpa, 686s, oIkiu, TrXt)yr], rixv^i Xeip, X°P^h^ X<^P"' ^n^os. 12 GREEK SYNTAX

DeM. 1 8, 281 : ovK eVt Tr\i aiTqs (SC. dy Kvpas) opfiel rols rroXXois, He does not ride the same afichor as the at, depend on, people. 21, 84: 17 Kvpia (sc.

Tjnepa) . . . els ttjv xxxTepaiav (sc. f}p.ipav). 24, 7: S^Xe x'-^^^^ (SC. 8pa-

XP-). 27,34: rpia rdXavra Koi ;^iXiay (SC. Sp a;(/xas) 6tX»;<^ora, Three talettts and a thousand drachmae.

ISOC. [l], 43 '• ^ TTfirpapevT) (sC. pot pa). 18 Plato, Apol. C: eprjprjv (sc. biKTjv) KarrjyopovPTfS. Gorg. 465 B: TTJ

Ibid. : (yo- laTpiKTj (sc. TfX^Thi h d\lroiTOUKTj, tjj yvppacTTiKTj, rj KoppwTiKrj. 465 C

(f)i

1 D : evavTiav o . . . i'dero. 862 : (dv 84 rffv (SC. >// ^ (^ i/) Legg. A rj y iprj (sC. yvuyprj) viKa. Phileb. 13 D: dviovres els rds opoias (sc. Xa/3ay). Ibid. 41 B:

Kard 1 C: to ye ttjv eprjv (sc. yvapriv). Soph. 23 opOrj yap tj Trapoipia, raf a dndaas (SC. X /3 d j) pfj paBtov elvai 8ia(j)evyeii>.

XeN. An. • ...... 3, 4. 37 '".V va-repala (SC. fjpepa) ttj rpirr] Tjj TerdpTi]. Ibid. iav 3,4,46: Trp> XoiTTTjv {sc. irope ?) iropeviropeda. Ibid.\,(),\2: tj rpaxela

or '''ois Troalv lovaiv or (sc. yrj x<^po) dpaxe). evpevearepa rj tj SpaXfj (sC. yfj

Ibid. 12 : . . . X^pa) Tas KeCpaXds ^aXKopeuois. 5, 8, tovtov dvtKpayov cos oXlyas

77 X TTalaeiev. Ibid. 20 ; Hell. : eVi (sc. 7; -yds) 7, 8, t^ varepaia. 4, 4, I3 ^ye ttjv

Meyapa (SC. oSof) and ttjv enl .\aKedaLpova dnexmpei. Ibid, y, 2, 13: ttjv

. lepTO tt a (TVVTopov (sc. obov).. d(f)iKe(r6ai, and ttjv p a to Telxos. Hiero,

2, 8 : Std TToXepias (sc. y^s or x'^P'^^)-

ThUC. 5. 26, 5 • (pevyeiv Tr)v epavTov (SC. y^i'). Ibid. 6, 54' 5 • di^oaTTjv (sc. pep id a) . . . Tvpacrcropevoi twv yiyvopepav.

HdT. 3, 64: Kaipir] (sc. irXrjy^) e8o^e TeTv(f)dai. Ibid. 5. 17 : (riivTopos (SC.

6 8 /(^/V/. : ds). 8, 27 T) beKdrri (sc. po7pa).

Ar. Ran. 685: Kai/ i'o-ai (sc. yJATJcfioi) yevcovTai. Ibid. IO96: TVTTTopepos Tala-t, TrkaTeiais (sc. x^P^'-^)- Ale. Eur. 7^4- ''"'7'' avpcop peXXovaap (sC. rjpepap).

Soph. Ant. 1308-9: dvTaiav (sc. TrXaydi/) eTzaiarep. O. T. 810: ov prjv

Phil. 1 : Xarjv (sc. binrjv?) y' eTi

AeSCHYL. Cho. hiavTaiav . . . ovto.. 639-40: ^i

TyRT. 15 Bgk.'' : Xaia (sc. X^ 'PO M^" ''^'"^ Trpo^dXea-de.

HOM. Od. 4, 588 : epdeKdTT] (sc. TjpepT]) bvcodeKUTT) Te. 9, 42 (= 549= H.

II' [7°5])' aTep^opevos . . . la-rjs (SC. poipT]s?). II, 594- dp(poTepr}aLp (SC. Xepa-ip). II. 10, 542: Sfli.^ (sc. x^'pO.

34. There is often no conscious, or at all events no definite, ellipsis

(cf. Lobeck, Paralipp. pp. 329-388). So in the examples of the preceding sections the exact ellipsis is often doubtful.

Dem. 14, 6 : dn ta-ris.

Xen. Hiero, 6, 8 : ov yap i^ e popt las popov dXXd Ka\ ndpTodep.

ThUC. I, 15. 2 ; oiS' . . . diro ttjs la-rjs KOLpds (TTpaTeias enoiovPTo. I, 27, I '. NEUTER ADJECTIVES 13

I : «Vt TT] ta-rj Koi otio'ia. 4, 33, and 35, 3 e'^ ivavrias. 4, 105, 2: rr/s la-rjs Kot ofjioias fieTiXOvra fieveip.

HdT. I, 109: TO Traidlov KfKO(Tfir]fiivov rrjv enl davdrci. 3' II9 • f8r](re ttjv dnl davdro}. S>7'^'- KciTedrjaav rrjv eTrl davdra. 7' 62 : rrjv avrrjv Tavrrji/ fo-raXnevoi. y, 84: ttji/ avTTjv ((TKevaanevot. 8, 6: f k . . . Tijs avriris -rrpos- irKieiv ov kw o"(^t edoKee. PiND. 0.7,82: liXXav {vIkuv}) eV «XXa.

HOM. II. 2, 379 ". es ye fiiav (/SouXijj/?) jiovXevcrofiev.

35. So the feminine adjective is often used adverbially for locality, in distance, direction. Regularly the case of hr^^oa-'ia, I8ia, koivj), Tre^^jj, for examples of which see the dictionaries.

DeM. 4' ~3' Xr](TTeveiv dvdyKrj . . . ttjv tt pa) ttjv. 1 8, 36: ri ovv avvi^rj fierd ravT fvdvs, ovk els fia Kpdv ;

Plat. Legg. 683 C: p.aKpav (sc. 6b 6 v}) av '4\doip.i eycaye. Theaet. 200 A: p.aKpdv TTfpieXdovres. Xen. An. 3,4, 17: UvTfs jj-aKpdv. Ibid. 7, 8, 20: ottq)? otl fJiaKpoTdTrjv fXdoi. Hell. 4, 5, 8 : ^Keiv Trjv TaxiO"rr]v. Mem. 3,6,10: rrjv irpdirrjv.

ThUC. 6, 98, 3 : diToaKibvacrdaL paKpori pav.

Ar. R. 434 : prjbiv paKpav diviXdrjS. Eur. Phoen. 906: ov paKpdv ImecTTi.

36. Neuter Adjectives and Participles are freely employed as substantives in almost any relations, but Homer's range is limited, and the boldness of Thucydides is to be noticed, nor is poetry ever very free.

TO ... to ... to . . . the irapeXTjXvGos [xeXXov irapdv, Dem. 18, 192 ; The past

. . . the ov iv 8v' oo-Tei' Ibid. 206 future present, rj eiirwcriv. 23, ; If they say one or two clever thiftgs.

-Dem. 18, 192 (see above). 19, 151: bvolv xPW'-l^o'-v- 20, 26: fh hiov.

: 6 23, 51 bvo brjKo'i diKaia (sc. vopos). The law sets forth two lines of legal 120: procedure. 23, iravr rjv 'AXt^avdpos. 23, 2o6 (see above). [61], 6: dvo'lV To'lV KaXX ICTTOIV.

AeSCHIN. 3, 165 : TO 8' iaopevov. 3, 2l8 : dpKei yap poi piKpd nai pei- (^ovav alcrxp^s ovk eTndvpo).

ISAE. I, 22 : 8volv Tolv ivavTicdTdToiv.

ISOC. [l], 29: TO piXXov. 31 : TO . . . aKaipov. 34: to . . . d(f)aves sk tov

f iv ^^ ^^ovtl. (f)av poi. 4<^ piy tCTOv eXa;;^i(rr(». 3' ^9' '"^ 4> 4-- ^v p.i(T(f Tris EXXdSor. 4> 54 • ^oXv . . . ivpo tHjv TpcotKwi/ . . . koi piKpov npo rovTuv. 4> 189: peydXa . . . piKpd. 11,43: dvolv toiv ala xicrToiv.

AnTIPHON, 6, 31 : 8vo TO) /xfyi'cTTm /cat i cr;^ vpoTor o).

Plato, Charm. 158 A: to. 6patp,eva rfis 'ay. Conv. 186 D; eo-Ti Se 14 GREEK SYNTAX

e)(di(TTa ra e vavTiasTara, ^v^pov depfiM, niKpov yXvKfl, ^rjpov iiypco. Ibid. 195 B: ofioiov ofioico del 77fXafei. //?/(/. 220 C: e^ eatdivov. Euthyd.

282 C: dno TavTOfidrov. Ibid. 304 B: ro (nrdviov. Euthyph. 5 D : to o(tiov

. . . KOL TO avocTLov . . . Tov p,kv 6(TL0V TTavTos . . . TO OCT 10 V Kai TO dvoatov . . .

TO ocriov. Ibid. 6 D : to oaiov . . . ev ti ^ 8vo . . . tu>v ttoXXcov oaicov

. . . TrdvTa TCI ocna . . . Ta Tf dv6

. . . to Se s. ev deals 7rpoo-(/)iXe'y /117 irpo(r(f)iXe Gorg. 449 C: jBpaxvTfpois.

Ibid. 473 B : TO dXijdes. Ibid. 488 D : to Kpelrrov Koi to ^(Ktiov koI to laxvpo-

Tepov. Ibid. i^Z E: to "ktov exeiv. Legg. 642 A: irepX crpiKpov ttoXXo.

6 1 . . . Ibid. 731 E: Tv(f>\ovTaL irepl to (fnXovpevov cf)LX(ov. Ibid. 79 E: Tedv

TO yevviap.evov. Ibid. 796 E: els kolv6i>. Ibid. 816 D-E : avev yap yeXoiav

TCI (nrov8ala koi ttovtcov Tav ivavTicav to. evavTia p.a6e'iv . . . ov Swotov.

Ibid. 829 C: uiKrjTrjpia. Ibid. 875 A: to p.ev * oivov . . . to de 'i8iov. Ibid.

885 A: els Koivov. Ibid. 932 A: fiexp- tS>u fcr; otcov tov ^lov. Lys. 214 B:

TO opoiov Tco 6p.oia) avayKTj aei (ftiXov eivai. Ib.'d. : nepl . . . tov oXov. Meno,

89 A : TO Q}(f)(Xi.pov. Parm. 145 B: to ye p.ecrov 'icrov Ta>v icrxaTcov direxfi- Ibid. 166 B: TroXXa. Phaedo, 90 C: ndvTa tci ovto. Ibid. 92 D: 8id twv flKOTcov. Ibid. 100 D: tw KaXca ndvTa to kuXL yiyveTai KoKd. Ibid. 112 B:

TO vypbv TovTo. Phaedr. 230 C: to evirvovv tov tottov. Phileb. 56 A : to

. . . to : to Ibid. : to p.r] cracpes ^e^aiov. Rpb. 33^ D ap\ov. 4IO E fjpepov.

Ibid. 4-2'^ A: bid navTos. Ibid. C: to inroXe i(f)dev eKelvcov, el to Tpi'a evpoi- p.ev . . . irepl Beivcov Te koi prj. Theaet. 184 B : Ta XevKa /cat peXava . . . to. d^ea

Koi Ibtd. E: ev . . . ttoXv 'iKavois ^apea. 187 crpiKpov fjifj irepdvai.

All. 619 Ibid. XEN. Ag. I, 15: iTTTTiKov ovK et)(fi/. 2, 5, 38: eiTJjKoov. 3,

I, 21 : ev picTco. Ibid. 3, 3, 9 : TToXXoO. Ibid. 3, 3, 17: fVl ^paxv. Ibid. 4,

7, 3 : els KoXov. Ibid. 7, 6, 8 : iv eTrrjKoco. Conv. 3, 3 : els fiecrov. Cyr. 1,3, 18 : dvTi TOV (iacriXiKov to Tvpavvindv. Ibid. I, 6, 14 ^ Ta TaKTiKd. Ibid. 1,6,

8 : ev 35 : ev ipvpvca. Ibid. I, 6, 38 : ev to' povcriKo'is (neut.). Ibid. 2, 3, Koivcf.

8e . . . ev Ibid. 3, 3, 28: e'v 7TepiTeTa(f)pevpevco pev, KaTa(f>nveL d(pave- and ... to : males o-TaTto. Cyr. 4, 3. 2 to TfXeicrTov c'i^ia (including females)

Ibid. : tov . . .to. (plXTaTa (including males and females). 5, 3, 37 ^apvTUTov

lo: . . . airecTTiv. Odrrov lovTa. Ibid. 6, I, 29: tu nXaTea. Ibid. 6, 3, ttoctov

: tu e'v toi ... to ev Ibid. 7, I, 4 : ev 'la-cp eweadat. Ibid. 8, I, 31 (pavepco alcrxpd

. . . : 12: dvTi k v. Ta dcpave'i. Ibid. 8, I, 34 noXepiKcov. Ibid. 8, 2, peydXa pi pa

: : ovk IV KuXa avTovs Hell. 2, I, 2 eK TOV epcpavovs. Ibid. 2, I, 25 e(j)r] oppelv.

: and tov : Ibid. to Ibid. 2, 2, 16 Tpe'is prjvas /cat TrXetoj. 2, 3, 29 dcfiaves (pavepov.

: rd : Ibid. avavTes. Ibid. 6, I, Ibid. 4, 5, 15 els TO. yvpvd. 5, 4, 54: irpos 15

. . . e/c Ibid. 6, paXaKd. Ibid. 6, 2. 29 : eVt nXeov tov opaXov, di/)' vyj/rjXoTepov. 4,

Ibid. I, 21 : TO 8eovTa. Ibid. 6, 5, 24: e'm toIs evnpocrobcoTdTois. 7, 29:

oven. I, I, lo : ev (TTevdv Trjs 680V. Hiero, 8, 5: toIs eK tov 'icrov rjplv Mem.

: Ibid. 16 : Ibid. 2, 6, TW (f)avepa. Ibid. 2, I, 6 ev vnaiOpa. 2, 6, e^ eToipov. 23 ;

ev toIs vai -iKo'is. Ibid. lO, : to els TO peTapeXrja-opevov. Ibid. 3, 5, 18: 3, 5 HeyaXoirpenes Te Kal eXevdepiov /cat to TaTreivoi Te Kai dveXevOepov /cal NEUTER ADJECTIVES 15

koi to re Koi TO (r

Ibid. Ibid. 6 : to dvTi tov 2>< 10.9: TQ Seopeva

: to. Ibid. : hia vos. Ibid. 4, 5, 7 avTi rmv d^eXovvTav ^XaTTTOvra. 4, 6, 15

Ibid. • koi tS>v poKifTTa 6po\oyovp4va>v eTropevfTo. 4. 7' 5 ttoXXwi/ ucfieXipcov.

2 : toji/ decnrocrvpcov. : Oec. 7, 8: twv didaa-Kopevcov. Ibid. 14, Hipparch. 4, 17 aei pfVToi TO) laxvpoTepco to aa devi(TTe pov (sc. xph) G^pav. R. Eq. 7, 3:

. . . roi) . . . fK Totv de^iMv . . . dvaTrr]8av roiy Se^toi? aapaTos toIs dpiaTepol.s

. . . Tols dpiaTe pols toIs Be^iols.

ThUC. 1,3, 3: TToXXw . . . iXTTepov . . . Tcbv Tpoiiicav. 1,4: vavTiKov eKTTjO-aTo. I, 6, 6 : TO naXaiov 'EWtjuikov . . . rm pvv ^ap^apiKM. I, 13, 5 :

I : (K . . . TO Xrja-TiKov. I, 18, I : fTTt TToXv. I, 18, TvoKaioTaTov. I, 36, 3: Tpia vavTiKa. 1,77, 5- ''o irapov. I, 80, 4- ^v Koiva. 1,90,2: to /3o vX6/if 1/01/ xai

: to vavTiKov. to A i o v v cr i a. vTroTTToi/ T^f yj/w/xT/s. I, 14.2, g 2,15,4: dpxaioTtpa

''o t to 2, 21, 2: eV Tc5 ipav€'i. 2, 59. 3^ opy ^o^ei'oi' riyr yvwp-qs npos rjinai- Tfpov Kai ddeea-Tfpov. 2, 62, 5: (v tw aTrdpo). 2, 63, 3: to ciirpaypop . . .

• . . . cTn 1 : ra pera tov Spacrrrjpiov. 2, 64, 5 ^v tw irapovTi ttoXv. 3, 1, 3 »cpa-

: : Si' I • ^o dKOvaiov. rtCT-To. 3, 18, 4 eVt Twi/ KapTepwv. 3, 21, 4 oXiyov. 3> 40>

: • ''"" 6: to 3, 43, 3 e/c rou Trpo(f)avovs. 3, 72. 3 pfTecopa. 3' ^2, I'uyyej/ tov fToipLKov dWoTpiaTepov iyivfTO. 3, 82, 7 : oTro toC irpocpavovs. 3' 83, I : to

ex ttoXXoO. 2 : rw : tvrjdfS ... TO •yevi'atoj'. 4, 32, 4: 4, 36, dSoKi^rw. 4, 61, 5

I : to TO dvdparrfiov, Bia ttovtos, tov ('Uovtos, to emov. 4. 63, fWiirts, fs didiov.

: I : : to 8eov. 2 : c/c 4, 63, 2 f^ tVou. 5, 16, TO d/ciVSui/oj/. 5, 66, 3 5, 69, ttoXXov,

: 810 to av Si' oXt'you. 6, 2, 5 to peaa. 6, 34, 4: ^vvr^Oes rj(Tvxov fJKKrT o^eas jTeiBoiade. 6,89,4: ndv to fvavTiovptvov. 6,92,4: to (f)iX6'rroXi. 7,36,6: 2: Ev- fS oXiyov. 7,7S'7' onXtTiKW 7rpocr€;^oj'Ta? /xaXXoj/ ^ vavTiKa. 8,95,

(3ota avTols . . . TrdvTa rjv. 18: HdT. 1,8: Ta KaXd. I, II: TaXeyopeva. I, 13: es twvto. I, to opoiov. to kukov. to. irdvTa. I, 20: Trpos TO Tvaptov. I, 22: es i'crxaTov I, 30: irdvTa, 1,30: ToXexdfV- 1.32: TO dflov. 2,2: c'lXXa paTaia TToXXd. 3,2: ra Ufpa-fcov

^ : to 8e cio-tiktov voptpa. 4, 5: e'poi oil iri(TTa XeyovTes. 5> dyevves (Keicpi-

: . . KaKa. to vovtikov. Tci). 6, I : edavpa^e . to yfyovos. 7> 5' ^oXXa 8, 3

9, 2: TO o-d. Ar. Eq. 187: oaou TTenovdas dyad 6 v. Nub. 26: tovtI to KaKov. Vesp.

. . eV biovTi. Thesm. toIs tov- 3: KaKov . piya. Pax, 272: 23: Trpo? dyadols Toiaiv. Av. 382: pdOoi yap liv tis kotto twv exOpaiv ao(f>6v. Ran. i: tS)p sc. to. fKfl (1(o66t(ov. Ibid. 421: KdcTTlv ( 'Apxe8rjpos) TrpwTa Trjs poxdrjplas.

Plut. 2 : TO ^eXTLO-ra. Com. 2, 3 (M): ovk eaTiv olKflv oiKiav (ivtv KaKov. 2, 9: tcoi/ KUKciv nap-

toIs ciXXoicriv . . . KaKa. 22: irdvTa oylriSes. 4, 13: to. napa 4, Xtyova-i pdXXov j]

tuu : to Ti Tdyadov. 4, 39: TrdvTtov d(poppr] KaXav evpiaKfTai. 4, 41 TreTrpco- nXeiov to . . . fCTTiv. TO XvTTovv pivov cicjjfVKTov 4, 44: rj trto^ov. KQKov Eur. Ale. 199". V """^ a-Tevd(eL T0ia-i8' "A8pr]T0S KaKots. Andr. 184:

Bacch. 2l6 : . . . KaKa. El. : i'trov ye dvr]Tols to veov. veoxpa. 43I (pepei. l6 GREEK SYNTAX

Hec. 120: TO . . . (Tov . . , Hel. : dyadov. 271 iid^ov rijs dXrjdeias kokov.

Heracl. : Tyjs re Koi tov diKaiov 570-1 a-^s evyf/vxlas \ {eKari). Here. F. 509: ra ovofiaa-TU Tvpaaaoiv. Hipp. 379: xprjo-T enia-Tdp.ecrda. I. A. 408 : es koi- vbv dXyeiv to'is (piXoiat, xph ^'"^ovy. I. T. 559: kukov dUaiop daenpa^aTo.

Ta Med. . . . Ion, 969: dvTjTO. ToiavT{a). 330: epwrey kukov /leya. Or. 397: Toi TO oi to Phoen. (ro(f)6v (ra(fi€s, fj.f] (Ta(j>es. 597: (/)iX6\//'u;^oi/ KaKov. viKa S' o TOV SiKai' Suppl. 435: /xdcov p.eyav e;^'^''- Tro. 489: dpiyKos ddXiosv

KaKav. fr. 21, N'': ovk dv Ka\ : 3 yivoiTo ;^cBpts ea6\d kuku. 8o (pfv (jiev, to. Kai kuku. (leydXa [j.fydXa wda-^^ei 236: avv fivpioiai to KaXd yiyveTai ttovoh. 275.4* '^^j/ a-fXiKp' e^r] Tis, fieydX' exfiv vofii^eTa.

Ai. : 'l8

O. C. 77^ ' 'o tovt{o). O. T. IIO-I : to 5e a-vyyevfS ^TjTovpevov \ dXcoTov, eKC^evyet 8e Tdp.eXovfj.evov. Ibid, 800: TaXrjQe^ e^epa. Ph. 446: ov8ev nco

KaKov y dnaXeTO. Ibid. 674-5; ™ • • • voaovv. Ibid. 919: crcoo-at kukov. TO TTodovv. Trach. croi Tr. 196: 474: ndv (ppdaa TdXrjdes. fr. lOO N" : TO

fr. N' : . . . fr. N'': KaXas TTeCJivKos. 321 (f)pove'iv taa. 326 to. i^evbrj Xeyeiv. AeSCHYL. Ag. 79: TO ff vTTepyrjpav. Cho. 212: evxov to. Xonrd. Eum.

: iv Pers. 228 : eKTeXolTo : 276 8i8ax0eis kokois. Si) ra XPV^'''°- P- V. 26 tov napovTOS d^drfboiv kukov. S. C. Th. I : ^P^ Xeyeiv to Kaipia. Suppl. 77: to fr. N^: 6 BiKaiov l86vTes. 390 xp^f^i-p-' eiScoy, ov)( 6 noXX' elbcos cro

N' : pavddveiv ao(f)d. fr. N": ovk 8^ TrAG. adesp. 31 a^tw p.LKpa>v a-e, peydXa ovk exa>. Ibid.

513, 2 N^ : Tdpa yap /caXcoff f^f-

Find, (not overcommon). O. i, 31 : dnavTa . . .to. pelXixa. Ibid. 2, 36 : Ibid. dreipel criiv dyaOca. 2, 62: oibev to peXXov. Ibid. 9, 28: ojTracrai' to

TfpTTv{d). Ibid. 9, 94: KaXXia-Ta . . . petals. Ibid. lo, 55: to aa(f)aves.

Ibid. 12, 9* ''''^v he \jLeXX6vTv TeTvCpXcovTai (f)pa8aL Ibid. I3, I03: Ta t

Ibid. • . . . ecra-opeva tot dv (palrjv cracpes. 14. 5~^ ^'^'^ "Y^P vppiv to. yXvKe' aveTai ndvTa ^poTois. P. I, 86 : prj irapUi KaXd. N. II, 42 : fV dfie i(iovTi.

BaCCHYL. fr. I, I : polpav . . . KaXatv.

SiMONID. C. fr. 37, 13 : TO ye 8eiv6v.

SaPPH. fr. • 8e ecrXa Ta 51 dpdcravTO irdpirav \ ydp^pco.

fr. • '^ Solon, 4. 3- c^a n\e'ia-Ta TToXet Svavopia Trape'^^et.

AlCAE. fr. 35, I ; ov XP^ KaKoiai 6vpov eTTiTpeirqv. Arch. fr. 20: KXaia> to Qacriav, ov Ta MayvTjTcov KaKa.

Hymn. HOM. 4, 44: Ke8v' elSvlav.

HeS. O. et D. 40: oaco nXeov rjpia-v ttuvtos. Ibid. 91 : aTep Te KUKav

Ka\ ttovoio. Ibid. 1 ea6Xd 8e ndvTa To'unv aTep ;(aXf7roIo 16-7". \ e'ljv. Theog.

28: dXijdea yr)pv(Ta(Tdai. Hom. Od.l, [i4o]=4. 56 = 7, 176= 10, [372] = 15, [139] = 17, 95: napeovTav.

1,274: eVi (T

: TTevrdtTes Ka\ I18: 2, 369: eVi ao7(ri Kadrjpevos. 3, II5 ye e^deTes. 3, elvdeTes. NEUTER ADJECTIVES 17

3,247: aKr]6h. 3,277: (fiiXa eldores. 4,460: oXocfxiiia elSas. 4,695 = 22, el8ws. 319: ivfpyioiv. 4, 696 and 711: nerrvvfifua 4- ^37- aj/e/xcoXta /3a-

ev 166 : evhov ^fiv. 5,182: ovK diTo(f)(j)XLa fl8a>s. 5-476: TrepK^aivofxtva. 7,

262: f's iovTOiv. 7,310: a'iaifia Tvdvra. 8, 66 = 473: fxea-cra. 8, fifaov. 8, 405: TToXeof. 8, 584: Ke;^apto-/iei'a eiScoy. 9, 189: aOefiia-Tia ij8(i. 9,474: Idvla. ol8(v. 12: ro KepTOfiioicriv. 11,432: Xvypa 13,405: rJTria 14, fieXav

8pv6s. 14,91: viecrdai eVi (r(ji(Te p(a). 14, 125 : dXridea. 14,288: dtraTijXia 88: veladai eldcos. 14, 433: al(Tip.a jjda. 15, 77: fVSoi/ eorrcoi'. 15, €(p' rd Tjfierepia). IJ, 452: dXXoTplav. 17,456: aXXorpiois. 18,404: x^P^i-ova.

os . . . 18,414: erri prjdevTt. diKaico. 19,248: apria Tjbei. 19,329: dTrrjvea tlbrj.

20, 177: KfpTop.ioi(Tiv. 21, 85: efjirifiepia (ppoveovTfS. T to HOM. II. I, 70: rd T eovra rd T ((Taopeva Trpo (ovra. l,Io6: Kprj- yvov. I, 107: rd kuk. I, 539: Kepropioicn. I, 542- upvirTabia (ppoveovra. re re tv I, 576: rd xfpeiova. 2, 213: uKoa-pd noXXd ^8ei. 3, 69: peaaa. 4,

: ev : : 161 : avv re peydXw dneria-av. 4, 185 Katpia. 4, 256 peiXixioLaiv. 4, 541 Kara ptacrov. 6, 162: dya^a (j)poveovra. 6, 376: vrjp^pr^a pvdrjaaade. 6,

: . . . 8, = lO, 382 : aXr/^ea. 7, 238 em Se^ta eV dptcrrepa. 7, 277: pecra-co. 491

to . . . II, Kara 199: eV KaOapa. 9, 579: ij/xto-u. lO, 357: bovprjvfKes. 336: to-a. 1 2, 436 : eVHo-a. 1 3, 824 : tt 010 1' eetTres. 17, 431 : /xeiXtxt'oio-t. 21,214:

: oj/etSetoto-ti/. and : rd Trepl S' al'o-i^Xa pe'Cft?- 22, 497 23, 275 538 irpcoTa, first second noXeos. ttoioi; prize. 23, 538: Seiirep(a), prize. 23, 562: 23, 570:

1 : rwi/ For : last i'pe^as. 23, 751 Xoi(rdT]i{a), prize. 24, 53 Xvypcoj/. ^elviov, Diet. ^eivia, ^eivTjiov, ^avrjia, vid. Hom.

37. Neuter Plural of Adjectives and Verbals in -to? and -T60S.— Especially to be noticed in this connection is the use of the neuter plural ot adjectives and of verbals for the singular. This use is not a P. 1-21 and standard prose use. See Bishop, A. J. xx (1899), 121-138.

irXoifxioTepa Ive'veTo, Thuc. I, 8, 2; Greaterfacilities of navigatioti ensued.

Oratores Attici : No occurrence according to E. R. Schulze, Quae- stiunculae grammaticae ad oratores Atticos spectantes, Bautzen, 1889. Plato: In Rpb. 416 E, Kriiger suggests d(Tia for oaia., and Ibid. 562 A, cited by Matth. § 443, is not an example. rov imrov eVet 8e XEN. An. 3, 4, 49: eo)? pev ^daipa rjv, em rjyev, a^ara Ibid. ti ^v, KaraXiTTav tov Ittttov fa-irevhe ireQ. 4, 6, 17: idvirep ana^ Xd^wpev

Tov opovs, (^ard Kal Tois Inro^vyiois fcrrai.

Thuc. I, 8, 2: Karaa-TdvTos fie tov MIvco vavrtKov nXo'ipaTf pa iyivero nap'

: 2: 86, 8ia- dXXrjXovs. I, 72, I TrapiTTjTfa. I, 79, noXeprjTea. I, 3: napahoria,

dpdeKTea. 2, : eSoKft ovv Kpirea, Tip(i)pr]Tea. I, 88: 7roXe/ir;rea. 1,93, 4= 3, 3 2: and €TrLxfipr]T€a flvai. 2, lO, 2, and 56, I: irolpa. 3, 16, anopa. 4, I, 3

5, 14, 4: d^vvara. 6,25, 2: TrXeucrrea. 6, 50, 5: iroXeprjrea.

. . neTr dhvvaTd ivTi dno- HDT. I, 4: S^Xa . on. I, 91: Trjv papevrjv poipav 1 8 GREEK SYNTAX

Koi (j)vyelv Oew. 1, 112: j3f/3ovXfv^ei/a ea-riu. I, 194: ola re, et saepe. I, 207:

ei 1 brjka, sacpe. 3,61: aKovcrria. 3, 109: jiiaa-ifxa. 5, 24 and 6, 13 : abvvara.

6, 106: id. 7> 185: npocrkoyicTTia. 9, 2: ^^aXevra.

Ar. Ach. • oi' Ibid. : ou htiva 770 ^fi-va; 1079 /xi) '^elvai fie /Ltj;8' foprdaai;

Eq. 30: Kpdrio-Ta. /did. 6og: 8fivd. Av. 1033: oi Seii/a; Lys. 626 : Seii/a.

661 : ft Com. 4. diidT^ra y' tovt' rjXdfs eniTd^cov (fjLoi.

Eur. Ale. 218: 6^Xa ((^/j). Bacch. 1039: o-vyyvoxrTd. Hec. 1 107: /^.

H. F. 583: SiKOta Tovf TeKovras (subj.) dycfxXf'iv TiKva (obj.). Hipp. 269:

u

Ibid. 677 : diivvT4{a). Ibid. 678 : rjaa-rjTea. Ph. 524: alaxpd. Tr. 495, II16: 8iKaia.

AeSCHYL. Pr. V. 216: KpaTKTTa.

PiND. O. I, 53 • anopa. P. I, 34: eoiKora. 2, 81 : d8vvara. 4, 247 : p,aKpd.

N. 8, 4 • dyanard.

HOM. Od. 8, 299: ovKfTi (pvKTa TvfKovTO, but Od. 5, 359: odi pot (f)dTO (pv^ipov eivai. II, [45^1 • ^'""f' ovk(ti Triara yvvai^iv. 14. 489- ovKeri (f)vKTa

neXovTai. 20, 223 : ovKtr' dveKTci ireXoiirat,.

II. : ... evKTci 128 : 14, 97~8 6(f>p{a) I Tpcoai pev yevTjTai. 16, pfj 8fj vrjas fXaxTi Koi ovKert, (jiVKrd TreXcovrai.

38. Ellipsis of Neuter Substantives.— Definite ellipses of neuter substantives are rare.

. . . bathe in 6ep|j.i^ (vSoTi) XovtrOai, Ar. Nub. 1044 ; To hot water.

HdT. 2, 37 : Xovvrai 8i. Si? t^j rjpeprjs fKdarrjs yjrvxp^ (SC. vSari.). Ar. Nub. 1044 (see above). Eccl. 216: jBaTn-ova-i dtppa.

Com. 3, 445 : t6 6(pp6v.

ThEOGN. 263 : -^vxpov pot irapa Tfi8f (f)iXoi Trivovcn TOKrjfs.

39. Possessive Pronoun or Possessive Genitive with Adjectives and Participles used substantively.— Un- less an adjective or participle is fully substantivized it does not take a possessive pronoun, and seldom the possessive genitive in attributive position.

Toij interests. TO 8ti|xov

o-<3 Tw 6[i.wvij|Aa), Plato, Theaet. 147 D ; Your namesake.

Din. I, 107 (see above).

Dem. 3, 21 (see above). 18, 47: to tov ttpo8l86vtos a-vpcpepov. 18, 138: to tcov but ibid.: TO Trjs TToXfo)? crvp(f>epov. 18, 139: ix&p^v (rvp(f)epov, Trepl

TroXei. I : tov 8iKaiov tovtov. 28 : tov Ta>v (rvp(f)fp6vTo)v tj] 37, [56], ptTci avp.- (bipovTos Toi) TUP 8avei(TT(i>v. XPHMA AND nPAFMA 19

AeSCHIN. 3. 80 : Tov Vfierepov (TVfxf^ipovros.

ISOC. 5, 24 : Tois €inTr]8fiot.s rois efiois.

LyS. [2], Ji: Tovs irpocrriKovTas a\jTa>v eXeelv, but [2], y6: tovs tovtois

: ra TrdXet • • • • ^cou tovtovI npocrfiKovTas, and 12, 72 rfj (rvp.(p4povTa. 12, 79 T^apo- avrov. trvvapxovTcov. 12,87: tovs (Tvvdp)(ovTas

And. 2, 9 : Tw e'/iw alcrxp^- diKalo). ^^- '""'^ but Ant. 5, 7: Tt5 i/xeTtpco 5' e'/ioi? TrpocrrjKovcnv, 5> 59-

• '^'' eKfivov TaJi/ ffio\ TTpocrrjKovTcov. 5- 59 dvayKaitov.

Plato, Apol. 34 B : ol tovtchv npoa-TjKovTes. Cf. Legg. 868 B : rav TTpoa-qKov-

Tcov Tci TfXfVTrjaavTi, but just below : tovs Trpoa-TjKovras roii rfXevrrja-avTos. Cf.

I'dzd. : ol z'di{^. 868 C : roU TrpoarjKova-i tov TeXevrrjaavros, and 947 C TrpocrrjKovTfS

TOV TfXfVTrjcravTos. Phaedr. 240 A : to uvtov jXvkv. Rpb. 338 C : to tov

. . . and often. Theaet. D Kpe'iTTovos ivp(j)epov, similarly 147 (see above).

: Hell. : . . . XeN. Apol. 27 To'is epo'is evvoLS. 5, 2, 33 rots vfierepois 8v(Tp.e-

vi(Ti.

: I '• raJ ThUC. 2, 61, 2 eV Tfj.r]s. 5' 46. eV p-ev (Keivav to

HDT. 3, 65 : VTTO Tcbv fCOVTOV OlKTytOTaTCOI/.

Ar. Eq. 845: dira^aTravTas tovs (povs e;^^poi'r fTnarTopi^fip. PI. 631 :

& ^eXTKTTe Tav aavTov (pCXcov.

avTti>v TfKova El. : o t fKeivov Eur. Ale. 167: coa-nep t] dnoXXvpai. 335 I. A. 0118' eVi to neivov TfKau. Hipp. 1007: TO cr(o(f)pov Tovpov. 1270: ^ov- Xopevov (XrjXvda. On the use of a Neuter Adjective as the Predicate of a Masculine or Feminine Subject, see under Concord, 126.

often 40. xp'HI** 3^nd TTpaYfia—xP'Hf'O^ and irpoYna are used to make a

substantive of an adjective. The use of xp'Hf''* and irpaYixa resembles that

of dvTqp.

Icrri, is a Kov({>ov 7ttp XPTK-* iroiiriTiis Plato, Ion, 534 B ; A poet light

and airy tiling. Oratores Attici: xPW^ "ot in Dem., Lys., and Antiphon. DeM. [35]. I5~6: AaKptros peya iTpdypa,^laoKpdTovs padrjTrjs. Plato, Gorg. 485 B: iriKpov tI poi SoKel xRW*^ dvai. Ion, 534 B (see above).

8 : ti '^"^'^ XeN. Cyr. I, 4, (cara/3aXXfi Tr]v eXa(f)ov, KaXov xPVH'^ Mf'- Trdv and Hdt. 3, 53: TvpavvLs xPVP't^ (Tcf^aXepov. 5, 96: xPVH-c- eKivee, XPW'^ elsewhere in Hdt. in Ar. Nub. 816: Ti xP^P'^ Trda-xfts; and similarly elsewhere comedy and tragedy. Lys. 511: peya irpdypa. Ibid. 677: lirinKaTaTov . . . XPVP^-

PI. 856 : (TxeTXia . npdypaTa.

: . . . Kai Com. 4, 4 SrjpoTiKov TTpdypa acoTrjpiov. Eur. Or. 70: anopov xP^P<^ hvcTTvxoiv 86pos. 20 GREEK SYNTAX

Soph. Ai. 288: n' xPVH-^ ^pas; AeSCHYL. Clio. 10: Tt xP^M" ^fva-a-co;

PiND. O. 9, 104: XP'JH'' eKaa-TOv.

41. Abstract Noun used as a Concrete.— Akin to the use of an adjective as a substantive is the employment of an abstract as a con- crete. So

ayifiuvivfia = rjytfxtJV, tcarmrav^a, iriifia,

dico\ov9ia, (fain, KaTljIpEll], TToOog,

dXijfia, icijStvfia, woifivt],

aTT], KpuTtJua, •JTovog,

fiioQ, livelihood, KlOKVfia, irpid^tia,

Xrjpog, irpefflievpara,

ytXwg, laughing-stock, Xoxevpa, ffTvyog, yevtd, kindred tor kinsman, piyfBoq, avyykvua, yEvtOXr), fikXtJua, avufiaxia,

ykvitTig, phvip-a, Tifiai,

yivoQ, prjvie, Tplfifia,

yovog, flj'lTlC, TpO(t)i],

SovXtia, fiiaapia, v^pidfia,

tXiyxea, ^vyykvtia, I'TTTiptffia,

tpiQ, veoTtjQ, ipQopog,

fTaipia, voffog, plague, (jiiXoTrig,

Z,r)\wfiaTa, vvjxrpivyia,

ifXiKia, oXiGpog, (p6vog,

Gfpantla, ofirjXiKir],

cast. TTipiTpiUfia,

Many of the above examples are exclusively poetical, others are col- loquial or vulgar, and some belong to neither sphere. For references see the dictionaries. A few illustrative passages are cited below. Compare " Massinger, Careless harlotry"; Skaks., "What trade art thou }"

o-oi 8' . . . 1 1 op€TTjs, w KdOap|A(a) Tis |j.€To\jo-ia ; Dem. 8, 28, You and vir- tue, you offscouring of tJie earth, what have you in common with her f

Dem. 18, 127: TrepiTpi/xix dyopas, 6Xe$pos ypafXfjiaTtvs. Ibid. 128 (see above).

Plato, Phaedr. 228 D: w (fnXorris. Ibid. 252 A: Koifida-dai . . . iyyv-

Tarca roii irodov. Theaet. 176 D: o'lovraL aKovfiv on ov Xrjpoi tla-i, yrjs aXXcos axdrj.

XeN. Cyr. 5, 2, 7 : rrfv Ovyarepa, hfivov ri kuXXos Kai y^iytdos. An awful beauty and divinely tall.

ThUC. 2,41, I: ^vveXuiV re Xiyut rrjp re ndaap iroXip Tijs 'EXXdBos Trat'Seu- (Tiv {school) fivai. PLURAL OF ABSTRACTS 2i

Hdt. I, 31 : TovTOLo-i . . . ^ios Tf dpKeatv vtt^v, They had substance enough. Ar. Nub. 447- ire pirpififia 8ikwv.

Eur. Phoen. • ^^ toJ' u)biva)v novov 30~I V ffiov I fiacTTois v(f)€LTO. [Rhes.]

€(TTL 8" 'Odvtrafvs. fr. : Be 498-9: at/ivXcararoi/ | KpoTrjp,' 530 Kinrpi8os fxia-i]- " ix(a), Cf. She is my pet aversion." Soph. Ant. 650: yjrvxpov irapayKdXia-p.a, Hugging-piece (wife). O. C.

: . . . . as . . T

AeSCHYL. Cho. : KTavelv t4 ovK avev 1027-8 (pTjui p.rjTtp' diKTjs, \ narpoKTopov fiia(Tp.a Koi Oeuiv crrvyoi. PiND. P. Totv b aKovaais avros VTravTiaa-fv 4, 135—6: | Tvpovs ipaanrXoKafjiov

yeved. Ibid.iz^o: (^ovov., murderess.

HOM. II. 2, 235: KdK eXeyxeia). Ibid. 9, 538 : hlov yivos.

The Greeks had no terms for our abstract and concrete, which are im-

perfectly represented, the one by irpdyfia, the other by a-wfia. What we call abstract formations are largely feminine and neuter, feminine collec- tives, neuter collectives: the feminine goes back to personification (the

mother gender), the neuter to result (fruit), mass.

42. Plural of Abstract Substantives used Distribu- TIVELY.— In Greek, the plural of abstract substantives is used distributively with far more freedom than in modern English, " In Old English compare Lete us two preue oure strengthes," Morte d'Arthur, 193, 22, and similarly elsewhere,

ov8' diTE^Xctl/ev (sc. 6 Sij^os) els tois ovo-ias tols tovtcov, Dem. 21,2; The com-

mons had no regard to their substance {property). iroWwv ^ap to, (icprj t6v his brother his in aSE\4>ov diroorepei, 36, 36 ; He deprives of share(s) many thiftgs.

2 : Dem. 21, (see above). 30, 21 dSeXc^oJi' koI dvyarepav ^Lovs fyxftpi^o-

Hfv, vnep oiv rds da-cfiaXeias fidXia-ra (TKonovfiev. 36, 36 (see above). ISOC. 2,46: Tcis dXrjdelas Ta>v irpayfidraiv. 3, 15: to-S laoTijras to7s fifT(xov(Ti Tap TToXiTficov ^rjTovcTi. 3' 20: rds evvoias f'xovcriv. 4' 15^ • to . . .

(Tap-ara bid tovs ttXovtovs Tpv(f)aivres. (In Isocrates the plural is SO marked a mannerism, and is so often suggested by the avoidance of hiatus, that it is not necessary to insist on sharp distinctions in that author.)

Ant. I, 28: ov . . . p-aprvpav y (vavTiov ol fTTL^ovXevovTes roiis Bavdrovs Tols TTfXas prjxavavTai.

Plato, Legg. 625 B-C: tcvirapiTrmv re eV TOLS aX(Teaiv vylrrj Koi KdXXr),

The height and beauty of the cypresses in the groves. Rpb. 425 A : o-tyar re Tav v((OTfpa)p Trapd Trpetr^vTepois, Silence of the juniors in the presence of seniors.

XeN. Cyr. 3, 3, 19: pap.ai.s. Hell. 6, I, 5 : rats ^Xikluls. 22 GREEK SYNTAX

- • • • • ' 55' n'o^fO'' vav^ Kai imvov^ tcai fieyidrj (x^ov(rais.

HdT. r, 202; 2, 10: fieyddea. 3' I02 : fivpfiTjKts fjLcyddea e'xovTfS Kvvav fiep Ikdcraova, dXaireKcov fie fit^ova. 3- 'O? fJ-eyddea. 6, 58 : roii' ya/) Si/ jSap^d- paiv 01 TrKevvfs tco avrco pofia ^piinvTai. Kara rovs davdrovs tqjv ^aaiXetop, J4t the death of their kings. 7, 103 : pfydOta.

Ar. pi. 530- '^'aTioiv ^aTTToov Sandvais.

Eur. Phoen. 870: ai & aip.aruiiToe 8epyp.dTa>u 8ia(pdo pai.

Soph. O. C. 552: Ta? aliiaTrjpds Ofip-droiv 8ia(f>dopds. Ph. 304 : ovk ivGdb' oi ttXoI Tolai (Tu>(f)po(riv ^poTav.

AeSCHYL. Ag. 404~5 • Xnrova-a 8' dcrroiaiv . . . vavlBdras onXicr p.oiis.

PiND. O. 4. J2 : Tpocf>als ero'ifxov 'imratv {=: ImroTpocpLais). Ibid. 9, 19 : orc-

(f)dvan> aoiToi. Ibid. 12, 9: twv . . . \LiKk6vT

43. The Distributive Singular. — The distributive sin- gular of abstract nouns is less common in Greek than the plural, and the distributive singular of concrete nouns is rare.

KaKoi Aeschin. Base soul. TTjv \|/vxiiv, 3, 47 ; of

Aeschin. 3, 47 (see above). B: Plato, Rpb. 452 p.r] rjbels ttjv o>|/-ii/.

XeN. An. 2, 3. I 5 '• 0nvp.daiai Toii KdXXovs Koi ptyedovs.

ThUC. 2, JO, 3 • f^fXdt'iv avTovs • . . ^vv fvi iparici), yvvaiicas 8e ^vv hvoiv.

3, 23. 2: Tov dpKTTfpov TToSa fiovov vTTodedffievoi. 3, 22, 3: yJAiXoi ScoSe/ca ^vv

^i(f)idici) KOI ddipaKi dvf^aivov, but ibid, just below: -^iXoi oXXoi . . . ^vv dopariois ixoapovv. 4> 4- 2: tov tttjXov . . fVi tov voitov ecpepov, They car-

2 ; de koI ried the clay upon their backs. 6, 44, dyopa ov8e liaTei, vdarL opjiat.

8, 96, 5 • 8ld(f)0p0l . . . TOV TpOTTOV.

Hdt. 1,31: TovToKTi . . . virrfv . . . pat fir) awfiaTos. Ar. Pax, 607: Tas (pvcTfis vp.wv dfdoiKws Kai tov avToda^ rpoTrov. Av.

643 : Koi Tovvop. fjfjuv (fjpdcraTov.

Eur. Cycl. 225 : crw/xa (TvpLiTfTTXtynevovs. H. F. JO'^: KovfifidOe (Tayjxa.

O. T. : aXX' T€KV(ov Soph. 1375 f] dfjT' o^is Tjv fcjiifiepos. AeSCHYL. Pers. t 441-2: oKfialoi. (fiva-iv I yf/vx^iv upiaToi Kevyevfiav

SKTTpeTTfls.

44. Plural Abstract Nouns used Concretely.—Plu- ral OF Proper Nouns. — Pluralizing abstract nouns makes them concrete; pluralizing proper nouns makes them common.

cases death. So (laviai, attacks of madness/ edvaroi, executions, of

Tos 'AXK|xr,vas, Ar. Av. 558; Yoiir Alcmcnas (women like Alcmena). DIVERGENT PLURAL EXPRESSIONS 23

45. Plural of Abstract Nouns :

5ta : Dem. [26], 19: TOLS TovTOiv diTovoias. ^S, 21 (f)6voi Koi vjSpeis, Mur-

ders and outrages. [42], 8: Trepl rtov aWaiv aKoiKrecrde iracras ras dXrjde ias.

ISOC. 7> 4- ''"O'S' nXovToii, rals dwacrrflaii, rals (vdeiais, rais TaTTfivoTTjcrc. ei^oTes ras bia ras ras Se 7,44- anoplas /xej/ dpyias yiyvofievas, kokov pyias 8ia Tcis dnopins. 8, 90: eV (riTo8e lais Koi iToXiopKiais. (See note On

Isocrates above, 42.)

Plato, Phaed. 84 C: woWas yap 8q en i'xet (SC. ra "Kexdevra) viroyj/'ias Koi dvTiXa^ds. Hell. 8: eotKare tv i(ri TroXire lais XeN. 6, 3. pavp fiuWov r; rjdofMevot,

I : T€ KaToiKicrf is koi ThUC. 6, jy, AfovTivMv ^vyyfvcov 'EyeoTai'wf ^vjjl-

fxdx

HdT. 3, 40: epol de al (rai. fieydXai evrvx^ai ov< dpicTKOvai.

AR. Nub. . . . Tjdovuv . . . 6v p-iXXeis 1071-3: aKf'^ai drroiTTepe'Lcrdai, |

iraiboiv, yvvamav, Kri. 1075 • tos ttjs (pvaeois dvdyKas.

Eur. H. F. 835: p.avias. '

Soph. El. 873:

forms of ibid. I PiND. O. I, 14: dperdv. So dperai, 92; 2, 12; 4, 9; 5, ;

15, etc. Ibid. 9, 39: pavLaia-iv. Ibid. 9, 99 and N. 9, 31 : dyXaiaia-iv. N. II,

48 : paviai.

HOM. Od. I, 297: vrjTTidas. 12, 34I : rravTes pev (TTvyepoi Odvaroi SeiXolcri

^poToiai. 17 > 244: dyXatas.

11.4, 107: eV 7rpo8oKJj(Ti. 9, 115- ^V"^ aras KareXe^as (metre would admit of sing.). 10, 391 : iroXXfjaiv . . . uTrjcri.

Not so clearly concrete is the Homeric use of many other abstract in and forms of nouns in plurals, chiefly datives -rja-i, -avvr). Metre may

have had its influence. See also Stein on Hdt. 3, 52.

46. Plural of Proper Nouns :

218 : Plato, Conv. A and B opmv av ^ai8povs, 'Ayddavas, ^'Epv^ipdxovs,

Havcravias, 'Api(TTo8r]povs re km 'Apicrrocpdvas. Crat. 432 C : 8vo KpariiXoi.

: IleXoTre? ...... Menex. 245 D KdSpot A'tyvirroi Aauaoi. Theaet. 169 B : HpaKXees re koi Qrjaies.

Xen. An. 3, 2, 31 : pvpiovs o\frovTaL dvff" evos KXfdpxovs.

I : o(Toi Thuc. 6, 27, 'Eppal rjaav XiOivoi eV ri; TrdXet, Statues of Hermes.

Hdt. 3, 160: ^a^vXaiva'i . . . e'lKocri npos ttj (oixttj. ' Ar. Av. 55S~9 • ™^ AXK^rjuas . . . ras 'AXottos koi ras Se/ie'Xar. AeSCHYL. Ag. 1439: Xpvar)i8o3v peiXiypa roov vtt "IXlco.

TraG. fr. adesp. 289 N^: f^riXdov"EKTopes re Ka\ ^apTTrfdoves.

HOM. II. 18, 157 : 8v A'iavres. Cf. ibid. 163 : 8vco A'lavre.

47. Divergent Plural Expressions. — Plural expres- sions that diverge from English proceed from different concep- 24 GREEK SYNTAX tions. irvpol, zvheat (grains), KpiGaC, barley (corns), Kpe'o (pieces of) meat, SXes (grains of) salt.

|v\a, irvpov9, Dem. 1 9, 145; Wood, wheat.

Dem. 19, 145 (see above). 19, 189: nov 8' aXes; 19, 191 : tovs SKat.

Plato, Conv. 217 D: SteXeyd/ij/i/ TToppco Tu>v vvKTCDv, Till late in the night (watches). Prot. 318 E: XoytT/nouy {computations) re Ka\ aarpovo- plav . . . SiddaKovTes. Rpb. 372C: okas. Hid, 62I B' jxicras vvktus ytveadai (so regularly pecrai vvktss).

Xen. An. 6, 4, 6 : Kptdas koi nvpovs . . . koX fifXivas koi (Trj

Cyr. 2, 2, 2 : (cpea . . . rpia. Hell. 3, 3, 7 : ^vXa.

I : , . . 22 : THUC. 4. 16, 8vo )(^OLvi.Kas dXcpiToiv. 6, nvpovs koi nftppvyfie- vas Kpidds. 7,87,1: 01 . . . TjXioL {Heat of the swt on successive days). Hdt. 4, 8: OTTO r\Xlov dvaroXeayv, and SO dvaroXal elsewhere. 7, 30:

Xlp.vqv (K TTJs aXes y'lvovrai. Ar. Pax, 192: TO. Kpea TavTi, and Kpea very often in Aristophanes.

Av. 622 : Kpidds, nvpovs. /3zd, 626: nvpovs oXiyovs.

Eur. Cycl. 122 : ydXanTi koI rvpolai (sc. ^S)

PiND. fr. 168 Bgk.*: aapK^v . . . ivoirdv.

of : HOM. Od. 4, 604: TTvpo'i, and forms nvpol elsewhere. 9, 219 and 225

Tvpaiv. II, 123 and 23, 270: dXea-ai, but 17, 455 : (tv y av . . . ov8' aXa doirjs.

18, 77 : a-dpKes, and forms of adpKes elsewhere. 22, 21 : Kpea, and so forms of Kpea often in Iliad and Odyssey.

II. 5, 588: KoviTj(ri(v), and so regularly, but 23, 732 and elsewhere: in KoviT). 23, 15: BevovTo yfrdfiadoi, and forms of -^dpadoL often Iliad and Odyssey.

48. Plural of Feminine Names of Towns and of Parts of the Human Body. — Feminine names of towns in the plural are dualistic. So also symmetrical parts of the human body, not a common prose usage.

'A9r\va.i, Athens (upper and lower towns') ; ©nPai, Thebes; vSyra^back;

(TTcpva, o-n]0T], breast; itpofTiaira., countenance ; V^Tuyna, forehead.

49. Names of Towns :

: : . . . . . Ka\ Dem. 9, 27 ttXtjctiov Otj^cov koI 'Adrjvaiv. 16, 25 ras . Qea-TTias

Tas nXaraids. 18,48: dn-coXeo-e Qr]j3as. 19,158: els ^fpas. [56], 5 : els'Adrj- vas, etc.

Plato, Legg. 753 '^ • H-^y^ • • 4>povova'iv al 'Adjjvai.

Xen. Vect. i, 6 : rds ^Adrjvas.

' Sometimes explained as a locative mistaken for a plural (Johannson). PLURAL FOR SINGULAR 25

^ ThUC. 1,31,3: ray K6r]vai. 2, 8, I : eV raZj 'A^iji/ais.

HdT. I, 60: 'Adrjvas.

Ar. Nub. 207 : aide fxfv 'Ad^vai.

Eur. I. T. 1087 : ds ras 'Ad^vas.

Soph. O. C. 107-8 : a . . . 'Adiivat.

AeSCHYL. Pers. 231 : ras 'A6r]vas.

PiND. P. 7. I • o' /xfyaXoTToXte? ^Adavai.

HeS. fr. 129: 'AdTjvdwv lepdcou. HOM. Od. II, 323: ^Adrjvauiv Updutv.

II. 2, 546 • 'Adi'ivas fixov.

50. Parts of the Human Body :

Wi. Plato, Prot. 352 A: 8t] p.01 dTroKaXv\fras Koi TCI a-TTjdr] Kai to fj.eTn(pp€- vov enidei^ov, and forms of crrrjdr) of a single individual elsewhere. Xen. An. 2, 6, 11: avTov iv rot? it pocT

' Cyr. 4> 6, 4 TraiVas eis to. a-Tepva top . . . Traida, and so forms of crTtpva else- where, but An. I, 8, 26: TvaUi KaTCL TO a-Tipvov.

THUC. 2, 49, 3: e? TO. o-T^drj.

Ar. Lys. 810 : rd irpocrcoTra, if the reading is correct. Thesm. 1067 : da-re- poeidea voiTa.

Eur. El. 1321 : irepl p.01 a-repvois (rrepva Trpoaa^ov, and so forms of aripva elsewhere. Hel. 1568: fieTonTra (SC. Tavpov). Tr. 763: e'/xoiy vwtolcti, and so forms of vaTa elsewhere.

Soph. El. 1277 : rwi/ a-oiv Trpoa-oDTTCdv, and so forms of npoa-coTra elsewhere.

Tr. 1090 : u> vu>Ta Ka\ (TTipv{a), and so forms of vu>Ta and a-Tepva elsewhere.

Aeschyl. p. V. 65: (TTepvav 8iap.Trd^, and SO forms of a-Tepva else- in /did. va>Tois where ; sing, not Aeschyl. 430: (of Atlas).

PlND. P. I, 19: a-Te pvaXa^vdevTa. N. 9, 26: vSyTa.

HoM. Od. 6, 107: p,eTa>TTa (the only instance of the plural of this word in Iliad and Odyssey). 6, 225: vmTa, and so forms of vmTa often. 8, 85:

Trpoo-coTra, and so elsewhere. 18, 69: a-Tr)6ea, and so forms of a-Trjdea often. a-Tepva not found in sing, sense in Od.

II. 8, 94 : vmTu. 13, 290: a-TepvMv. 18, 414: TTpoa-oi-n-a, and SO forms of

Trpoa-ana elsewhere. 18, 415 : a-Tr}dea, and SO forms of a-Trjdea elsewhere.

51. Name of the Inhabitants as the Name of the City.—The name of the inhabitants is sometimes used instead of the city : (ol) Ae\(j)oi,

Delphi, (01) AeovTlvoi.

Kai tov tv Thuc. KpaTi^cravTCS A€X4>ois Upov irapeSocrav A£\<{>oi9, I, 112, 5 ! And having jnade themselves masters of the sanctuary at Delphi {among the Delphians), they handed it over to the Delphiatis.

DeM. 19, 65: 6tir Ae\(j)ovs. 21, 51 : e'/c AeXcjitov Ka\ eK AcoSavrjs. 25, 34: in eV Ae\(j>o'is, and similarly often Derh. 26 GREEK SYNTAX

ISOC. 9, 27 : (T(j>6i\^ els ^oXovs TTjs KikiKias. C: ex of Plato, Legg. 738 AeXtpiop i) AwSwj/?;?, and similarly forms

Ae\(j)oi often.

XeN. An. I, 2, 24: €v SdXoiff KoX ev 'l(rcroIy. I, 2, 26: dji/ re TrdXtj/ rovs

Tapo-oiif biT]pTTa(Tav. 3, I, 5: eXdovra ds AeXcjiovs, and similarly forms of

AfX(f)ol elsewhere.

Thuc. I, 112, 5 (see above). 6, 3, 3 : Aeourlvovs.

Hdt. I, 14: e's AfX(f)ovs, and similarly often. — 52. Pluralis Maiestatis. The use of the plural often gives the idea of fulness (oyKos); cf. Ar. Rhet. 3, 6, Ps.-Longin. § 23; hence it is

often used in poetry, e. g. 86fioi, apartments ; fieyapa, halls ; ydp.01, nuptial

rites ; Ta(f)ai, sepulchre {bicrial-grounds). Compare also the poetical use of Tix^wora, rexvaa-fxaTa, handiwork, Traidevnara, nursling-, etc., and the prose expression i:aihiKa, favorite, which is used only in the plural form.

ISOC. 9, 16: iJLovov TovTov (sc. HrjXecos) (paal tcov TTpoyeyfvqfiivodv vtro decSv eu TOLS ydfiois vfievaiov acrdr^vai. Plato, Protag. 315 E: Tvaibiica liava-avlov Tvy^avei &v, and SO ivaihi.Ka

elsewhere. Rpb. 383 B : eV toIs avrfis (sc. Qfribos) ydfxois.

Xen. Ven. I, 7" ''"Wf . • . fieyi(rTa>v •ya/icov fiovos ervxtv (sc. MeXavicov) 'AraXdvTJjs.

Thuc. I, 132, 5- dvr]p 'ApylXios, TratStKa irore cov avTov.

Hdt. 3, 10 : €Td(f>T] (V rfjai Ta(prjai . . . rds avTos oiKodoprjaaTo. 5i 63 : racfiai.

Ar. Ach. 450: dna)dovp.aL topcov (parod.). 456: Sd/icui' (parod.). Vesp.

1026: Traibix favrov. Pax, I2o6: troi . . . els roi/s ydpovs. Av. 132: earidv ydfiovs. Ran. 423: ev rals raffyalai {parod.).

Eur. Hipp. 11 : 'imroXvros, dyvov liirdecos TratSev/xara. Ion, 192: XP^~

(Teais apnais. Or. 1053' p-vrjfia . . . Kedpov rex^dcr fiara.

Soph. Ai. 231 : KeXaivois ^[^ea-iv. Ibid. 1090 and 11 09: eU Ta(pds, tomb.

O. R. 825: ydp.01^, and sim. elsewhere. Ibid. 861 : "lapev es 86fiovs. Ibid.

1006 : (Tov TTpos 86fiovs eXdovTos. So hofioi and forms very often. Ph. 35-6 :

. . . re eKTrmpa \ x^^ P'O.T{a).

AeSCHYL. : P. V. eV Ag. 1265 a-KTjiTTpa. 909-10: rvpavvlbos \ dpovuiv T{e). Ibid. PiND. O. 3, 28: dyyeXiais Evpvadeos. 7, 29: €K daXdpcov MiSf'a?.

P. 3, 26 : XiKTpoKTiv. Ibid. \, 242: iXvpas ev 8 p. IS.

HOM. Od. 3,476: appaT{a). 5' ^ '• *'" ^oipatri vvp(})7]s. 8, 268: e'v 'H0ai'-

(TTOio ev\ . . . dopoiaiv. 21,424-5: peydpoicriv | fjixevos. r. also II. 3, 17: KapiryXa To^a, bow ; bow and arrows. 5, 745: oxea (always m plural in Homer). 14, 238: 8cj pa 5e' roi doicroi koXov 6p6vov, and

so ficopa elsewhere. 18, 141 : biypara n-arpos. 22, 503 • evbecTK ev XeKrpoi-

V. . is (TLv. 24, 455: KXrj'i8a dvpduv, but 453 dvprjv. However, 6vpai usually to be translated as folding-doors. irvXai,gate, is always plural in Homer, PLURAL FOR SINGULAR 27 — 53. Plural of Courtliness and Reserve. The plural is some- times used for the singular as a more courtly or reserved mode of ex- pression.

Eur. Andr. 403: cfiovevaiv "EKTopos Wficfifiiofiai. Hec. 402—3: icai ail nai TOKtiicriv (SC. 'Exa/S/;) eiKtircos I. A. AaepTiov, \ ^(^aKa dvpovfievois. I015:

iKeTfv' eKflvov irpiora prj KTeiveiv reKva (sC. l(f)iyeP€iav).

Soph. O. T. I : . . . ois '"' °^ 184-5 necfiaa-pai ^iiv (sC. r^ M'7''"pO I XPV^ o/aiXwj/ ovs (SC. TOP Trarepa) re p ovk eSet Kravcov.

PiND. P. 3, 66: foKolcri. Trapaa-xelv avdpda-iv (sC. 'lepavi).

54. First Person Plural for the First Person Singular.— The use of the first person plural for the first person singular is due to modesty, which readily becomes aflfectation. The particular is sunlc in the generic, the individual in the class, the woman in her male kindred. It occurs less frequently in Greek than in the more rhetorical Latin.

ISOC. [l], II : fTTiKiTTOi S' av rjpas 6 iras xpovos, et Tracras ras fKfivov npa^ds

. . . . • f • Karapcdpricraipfda BrjXdxropfv ^evr]v6)(apfv. 5> ^°5

Xen. Cyr. i, i : evvoid nod' Tjplv eyevero, etc. (15 times without change to singular). Mem. i, 2, 46. Eur. Ale. Andr. H. F. 383^(see 55). 355-61 (see 55). 858: ffKiov pap-

Tvpopea-da Spcocr' a 8pdv ov jBovkopai. lon, 391 : Ka>\v6pe

Ibid. . . Ilvdla , eKdoTOS de ^ovXopai. 1250-I: SiaiKopecrda | yj/rjCpco Kparqdela'

I. A. -fbi'd. 8' ri wi/ ylyvopai. 823-4 (see 55)' 1025-6: rjv av prj 7rpd(r(T(i) pev deXco irov a avOis Med. f'yo) (Klytaemestra), | oy^ropecrda; (to Achilles). 314 -315 (see 55).

Soph. Ant. 926 (see 55). El. 399 {ibid.). Tr. 491-2 {ibid.).

PiND. See comm. on P. 4, 27.

HOM. Od. 16, • Be Kol aWodi iv 44~5 V*^o, ^elv' Tjpels brjopev ebprjv \ crraOpa

Tjperepcp. II. Ibid. TO vv o 3, 440' 13, 257-8: yap Kared^apev, nplv e'xecrKov, | da-nlBa Arp(^6fioio ^aXan> (Meriones speaks). Ibid. 21, 60-1.

55. Gender of the First Person Plural for the Singular. —The gender of the plural attribute in examples of the foregoing sec- tion is the mascuhne. The masculine is the generic.

EUR. Ale. 3^3' dpKovpev Tjpels (Alkestis) 01 TrpodvpcTKovTe s credev.

Andr. : el nalba Ka\ 355-361 repels (Andromache) yap a-fjv (f)appaKevopev I injdvv ws eKovres ovk aKovres ovbe tti- e^ap^Xovpev, aiiTT] \eyei, \ ^apioi \

Tvovres avTol ev trolai. olcriv ovk eXdaaova | ttjv blKrjv v(f)e^opev | yap^pols, ffKd^rjv dn-aidiav. ovv roioibe- 6(PeiX(i) Trpoa-Tidela | rjpels pev (Notice change 28 GREEK SYNTAX

to sing, and fern. sing, attribute.) Cf. I. A. 823-4: ov &av\ia cr rjiias (Kly-

ois Med. : koi taemestra) dyvodv, fifj Trdpos \ npoa-riKes. 314-5 yap rj8iK7]iJ.t- voi (SC. Medea) | (riyt]a6fif

56. Singular in a Collective sense.—The singular is sometimes used in a collective sense.

a]i'irf.\o

icmv i)v TroXtrei'a 6 6 81- LYCURG. 79- fp'^-o. yap e^ rj avvfCTTqKev, apx

XeN. An. I, 7, 10: dpidpos fyevfTo Ta>v pev ''EWtjvwv da-nls pvp'ia Koi rerpa- Koaia. Oec. 21,8: peyuXj] xeipi. 2: re Ka\ Thug. 2, 4. Xidots Kepdpai. 3, 89, 4: Kvparos e7Tai>ax

3, 96, 3: TToXXf] ;^ftpi. 4' lO' 3- '"o'' TToXe piov bfivorepov e^opev. 4- 9°' -•

apTTfXov KOTTTovTes • . . Kal X1.60VS apa Ka\ irXivdov . . . Ka6aipovvTfs. 5- ^^> 9-

Ittttos. • ^ ^^ ttoXvs Ka\ ar 17 HaXuLbiKr] 6, 24. 3 opiXos paTiwr-qs.

Hdt. I, 80: rfj Se Kapr]Xco enea-dai. I, 174: noXXfj ;;^etpi (sim. elsewhere).

d(TiTi8a. ''"^ 1 ittttov 5, 30: 6KTaKi(T)(i-Xir]v 7> 193' Kvpa. 8, 13- ttjp ttjv ;^tXt'jyi'

. . . TTjV oXXtJP ITTTTOV'

Ar. Ran. 1466 : 6 SiKaa-TTjs.

Eur. Heracl. 275-6 : ttoXXtjv . . . alxprjv- Ibid. 337 : ttoXX^^ . . . xnp'i. Ibid.

1035: X^P'" Med. 86: ttos avrov rov TTeXas {his neighbor) pdXXov (piXd

(as in English). Phoen. 78: ttoXXtjv . . . d(TTT'ih{a). Ibid. ^\-2 : pvp'iav ayav ^^- -43 ^'- liXKipov I Xdyx'?"' dXiyov bopv.

Soph. O. C. 1251 : hdKpvov. Aesghyl. fr. 304, 7 N*: a-Tdxvi (sim. elsewhere in tragedy).

PiND. O. 7, 19: 'Apyeia avv atxpa. HOM. Od. I, 162: Kvpa.

II. 4, 422 : Kvpa, and sim. elsewhere. In 5, 490: vvKvas re Ka\ rjpap, and elsewhere, ^pap is an adverbial expression. 16, 11: BaKpvov (more than

one tear is shed, as is shown by 8dKpva deppd x^'^" ^^^ '''f Kpfjvr] pfXdwBpos, in II. V. 3), and sim. duKpvov elsewhere and Od.

57. Those Nations whose names are thus used are chiefly 6 barbaric despotisms (" as one man") : 6 IlepCTTjs, l/ie Persian; AvSos^ Hivite and the 6 MaKcSoiv in con- the Lydian ("the Hittite") ; (Dem. SINGULAR FOR PLURAL 29 tempt). Thucydides, however, 6 'ABrivaios, the Athenian; 6 2vpaK6- o-ios, tlie Syraciisan.

DeM. I, 23: Tov ye Yla'iova kcli tov iXXvpidi/.

i : Thuc. I, 69, 5 : TOV re yap M^Soj/, and elsewhere. 6, 78, rov iih ^vpa-

: 6 k6(tiov . . . tS \\$r]vai(o. 6, 84, 3 Xa\Ki8evs. ^ HdT. 1,69: T6v"'EXXT]va. 8,2: 6 AiiKcov (?) 8,136: tov Adrjvaiov. 9,12:

TOV ^TrapTirjTTjv. AR. Pax, 214: vvv uiTTiKiuiv Scocrel ^lkuv.

58. But the National Appellative with the article is often used of the king, the ruler, the general, and in some instances it is doubtful whether the nation en masse or its representatives are meant.

AeSCHIN. 2, 74: T^s eV "^akaplvi npos tov IlepcrTjv (Sep^rjv) vavnaxias, tO be compared with § 75 : ttjv . . . ev nXaraials npos tovs Htpo-as ire^ofxax^av. Dem. [7], 6. napa tov MaKeBovos, Philip. [17J, lO sqq. : 6 MaKeScoj/,

An. 12 The Cilician i, i, 6 Xen. I, 2, sqq.: r] KiXia-cra, queen. Cyr. 4: 6 ^Kvdris ... 6 epa| ... 6 'iXXuptdf. /^/V/. 2, I, 5: 'Ao-o-vptos, and elsewhere.

/^/^. 2 : TOV and SO 6 and forms often in Xen. 3, 3, T] yvvr) 'A.pp.eviov, 'App.evios Cyr.

Hdt. I, 141 and elsewhere: 6 AuSds = Croesus. 7, 173: 6 MaKeScoj/. 8,

108 : 6 JJfpa-rjs and toi' liepa-rjv, and so elsewhere. On the distributive use of the singular, see 43.

59. elirt, €>€, ave, ETC., USED IN ADDRESSING MORE THAN

ONE.—elire, sajf, is often used in fervid or familiar address when several are to the of the shifts. spoken ; eye speaker Compare

also the interjectional use of <|>ep€, aye, with a plural verb.

elire avTuv Ti DeM. •fj PovXetrO', |xoi, irepiiovTCS irvvOavecrOoi, \e7eTa1 Kaiv(Sv;

4, 10 (and sim. elsewhere).

Dem. 4, 10 (see above). 20, 21 : Spa S' ovTuxri (addressed to the judges).

: in 25. 73 f'pf ^ T^pos 6ecov KOKelvo aKe-^aade, and sim. ^e'pe elsewhere Dem. and other orators.

: et sim. alib. Plato, Theaet. 151 E dWa <^ipe 617 avTo Koivfj a-Ke-^apeBa,

Prot. 311 D : etVe' poi, a ^uKpaTes re Kal 'iTrnoKpares, et sim. alib.

Xen. : alib. Apol. 14 aye 8tj aKovaare Kal oXXa, et sim.

. . . Hdt. I, 97 '• ^f'pf (TTTjcrcopev, but 4, 127: (pep ere Treipdcde. alib. AR. Ach. 319: etTre' pot, ti (f)ei86pe(rda tSv Xidcov, a> SrjpoTai; et sim. alib. Ran. Pax, II15: c'iye 8r], dearai, 8evpo (Tv(niKayxveveTe, et sim. 1417: (fiepe, nvdeade pov raSi, et sim. alib. 30 GREEK SYNTAX

Eur. • Atoj/vcrov TralSfj • • • fv8op Cycl. 59^~I ""y^ ^'7i I fxev dvTjp.

Soph. Tr. 1255 : «-y' ('yKOVt'ir, a'lpea-de.

: aXX' . . . alib. Aeschyl. Pers. 140 sqq. aye, Tlepaai dcopfda, et sim. ; but Cho. . . . 803-4: (iyeTf \ Xvaa(T6{().

PiND. P. I, 60: (iy . . . f^fvpoofjLev.

Od. 212 : clXK' et sim. alib. but HOM. 2, = 4, 669 aye poi Sore, ; 22, 252: aye 6' . . . dKovTia-aT, et sim. alib.

II. 2, 331 : dXX' aye pipvert, et sim. alib. COPULA

60. When the predicate is not in the form of a verb, but in the form of an adjective or substantive or equivalent, the so- called copula is generally employed to couple the adjective or substantive with the subject. The most common forms of the are copula the verbs tl\i.l., I am, and viYvojAai, / become, turn out, prove, behave.

dpi :

1 is o^toi 6dvaTos y] t,y]\i.La, loTi, LyS. 3, 69; T/te penalty death, dvSpcioC Lach. These are brave. elo-iv, Plato, 195 C ; So everywhere. y'lyvopai'. T«J T NT. 2 a becomes ours. ao-e'Priixa T|fji6T6pov -^{.yyvrax, A 3 ; The impiety

LyS. 1,7- T^avTUiv Twv KaKwv diTO&avov(ra alria poi yfyivqrai. S' Ant. I, 4: ovTOi TOX) pev Tfdvearos (jjovrjs yeyivqvrai, ipoi dvTidiKOi Ka- Bfo-raa-i. 2 a 3 (see above).

Plato, Lys. 223 B : /caraye'Xaoroi yeyovaptv eyco re . . . kcli vpe7s.

XeN. Ag. 10, 4 : I3aai\(vs e'yeVero (SC. 'Ay»;o-iXaos). (See 64.)

Thug. 3, 2, 3 : Tei/e'Siot . . . prjvvral yiyvovrat, The Tenedians turn in- formers.

HdT. 8, 86 : rjcrav ye Koi eyevovro Tavrqv ttjv fipiprjv paKpco dpeivoves avTol i(t)vrav, They were really and showed themselves that day to be far better than their wont.

Ar. Vesp. 207 : crrpovdos avfjp yiyverai, The man turns to a sparrow.

Soph. O. C. 272 : ovS' hv wS' eyi.yv6pr]v kukos- 615 : ra repTTva iriKpa yiyve- rai Kavdis (f)iXa.

PiND. P. 10, 22: evhaipav . . . ovros dvfjp y'lverai {approves himself)

(To(jio'is.

MiMN. fr. '• dXK^ 5, 4~5 oXiyoxpoviov yiyverai SiO'irep ovap | r^^rj ripT]e(r(Ta.

HOM. Od. : ol TTveiovres) re 4, 361-2 (SC. ovpoi pa vrjcov | TTopTrrjes yiyvovrai.

'• at & aXos iTTTTOi 708-9 I dvdpdai yiyvovrai, — 61. Periphrases with 7i7vo|iai. Periphrases with yiyvopai are espe- COPULA 31 cially common in elevated style. In addition to the pomp (oyKo?) gained by the fuller expression, the moral character of the agent or action is to the consciousness. Aesch. brought more distinctly (T(ott)p yevov fj.01, acoa-ov than Cho. 2, is much more than fj-e, pva-inoXis ytvov, Sept. 130, pvaai,

. . . Ai. 1 than See rrjv TToXiv, and fiT] i^pia-TTji yevjj, SOPH. 09 1-2, prj vf^pia-jjs. further the comm. on Ant. 1,2: nucopovs yepf adac, and Thuc. 3, 2, 3, and compare Periphrastic Tenses, especially 293,

62. Copula AS THE Predicate.— Strictly speaking, the cop- ula is itself a predicate, as is not unfrequently shown by the translation when it stands alone or with an adverb.

cl Tav6' 16 matters stand thus, 8* £

1 1 20 ; The other is still €Ti, And. , {daughter) living.

Dem. 20, 64 : tovtcov 8' IVcos i'vioi rdv dvdpoiu ovaeT el(Tiv. dWa ra f'pya ra

Trpaxdevr eorii/, eVeiSijTrfp ana^ iirpaxdr]. [58], 16 (see above).

Ibid. • S' LyS. I, 4- 11:6 yap avdpconos ev^ov rjv. 13, 44 dvdyKrj ivTiv, Ibid.

: hv icTTiv atria. 1 II • crndvis €

And. I, 1 20 (see above).

: takett Plato, Charm. 153 B fidx^] iyeyovtiv {had place) iv rfj IloreiSata.

Protag. 325 B : (TK4i\rai ws davpaa-icos yiyvovrai (act, behave) ol dyadoi (see the commentators, and comp. Thuc. 3, 10, i, below). Ibid. 335 D: idv yap

(TV f^eXdrjS, ovx opoiuts riplv ecrovrai oi StdXoyot, If YOU go out, our discussions will tiot go on as well.

Xen. An. 7, I, 28 : eVn n? ovroa a(f)pa)v oaris oterai; Breathes^ there the man who is so foolish as to think?

Thuc. 3. 10. I • * ' MV M^'" dpeTTJs Sokovcttjs es aXXijXous yiyvoivro. 4' IIO.

2: ova-Tjs rfjs iroXeas npos X6

(nrov8ai eviavrbv ecrovruL {are to last).

Ar. Eq. 1027 : epol ydp icTT 6p6(os iTtp\ TOVTOv rov kvpos.

Eur. Ale. 1076: ovk ea-Ti Tovs davovras els (f)dos poXf2v. Bacch. 773-4: oivou 8e ovtos ovk eariv ov8 aXXo ov8ev en. prjKeT KvTrpis | reprrvov dvdpdiTTOis fr. 236 N' : (Tvv pvpioicn rd KaXd yiyverat novois.

Soph. Ph. 1241 : eanu ns, ecTTiv os ae KcoXixrei ro 8pdv. 16 Solon, 13, Bgk'': ov ydp 8riv dvrjTols vjBpios epya Tre'Xet.

HOM. Od. 19, 312 : MS ea-eral irep, How things will turn out. 21, 212.

HOM. II. I, 211 : cos eaerai irep. I, 564: ft 5' ovTa> rovr eariv. 4' 319- ^^

6, : ov8e . . . : wr How it was. ; epev. 130-1 | 8r)v rjv. 9, 528 rju. 9, 551 T6(f)pa

ill. 1 : 8e KovprjTea-cri KaKc3s ^v, fared 1, 762 ws eov. 23, 643 : cos ttot eov,

' Cf. Find. N. 6, 2-3 : e/c pidg Si irvkopev {we have our breath-=-we have our

being) \ parpog dpiporepoi. 32 GREEK SYNTAX

63. elvoi at the head of a sentence or clause is regularly emphatic, and eoTi is equivalent to the later ovtus ecm, is really, is in fact.

Dem. 20, 18 : ecrri hk tovQ^ ovTuxyi fieu aKovaai \6yov tiv eyoi/. LyS. 1,16: eoTt S', 6(^7, 'EparoadevTjs O'irjdev 6 ravra Trparrav.

B : etVi w eVtat rwi' Plato, Gorg. 449 /xeV, 2., diroKpLO-eav dvayKoiai 8ia fxa- Kpdiv rovs Xoyovs TTOielirdai.

XeN. Cyr. I, 4, 3 : /cai ^p fiiv IVcoy rroXvXoyeorfpos.

ThUC. 7- I. 4 • ^'' ouK dSui/aror.

HDT. . . . 6 oi/K 5, 124: Tji/ yap 'Api

^(rdv ye Koi eyevovTO . . . dfieivoves avroi fotvrdv (see 6o).

Ar. Lys. 1037 : as ea-re dcoiriKoi (l^vaei.

Soph. O. C. IOOO: ei ov SUaios. O. T. : el to yap 255 yap rjv irpdyfia p^r) 6ei)kaT0v.

AeSCHYL. Ag. 95^ • fcrii' 6aKa(Tcra, ris 8e viv Karaa^ecrei;

PiND. O. I, 36 : ecTTL 8' dv8p\ (fidp.ev eoiKos dp.(fH daip,6va)v Kokd,

Sappho, fr. 85 : ecm p.01 KoXa ndis.

HOM. Od. 2, : etVt 8e noXXal ev . . . 292-3 vrjes \ 'iddicrj.

II. 10, • ffTt ev8ov 378-9 yap I ;^aX(cdy.

64. Copulative Verbs.—Other Copulative Verbs are:

aKoveiv, Kvpelv, chaiice, Tv^oxew, happen,

8iaT€\€iv, XaYx*''*''*'* xnrdpxetv, be (a basis),

8vvao-9ai, [ie'veiv, remain, (}>aivo)xai., appear,

Ka0ivvai, comp. fiiisse, (often in orators), TtXe'Beiv, etc.

In the better days of the language such verbs as Kadiaraadai, Tvyxdveiv, virdpxfiv, and (f)wai are not mere fluxes for the predicate. The frequent use of (f)vvai and Tvyxdvew arises from the Greek division of all manifesta- of In tion into the two spheres (f)v(rLs and tvx>]. vndpxeiv, which ultimately became colorless, the idea of a basis, of something to fall back upon, of resource or residue, was not wholly effaced in the good period.

Dem. 18,461 dvTi yap (plXcov Kai ^evav a tot' wpofid^ovTo, viiv KoXaKes Ka\ =i Beols ex^poL Kai ndvd' d irpoaTJKev dKovovaiv, hear are called. 57> 47 • «'

/U€i/ eXax^v lepevs.

Lys. [6], 4- dv wvi 'Av8oKi8T]s d$(3os dnaXXayfj . . . Ka\ Xdxj] ^acnXevs. 8' Ant. I, 4 (60): e'/xoi dvTi8iKoi KadeaTdai.

: tl ol Plato, Charm. 154 B cr;^eS6r yap poi ndvTes ev TJj rjXiKiq KaXo\ (f)ai-

vovTai. Ibid. I 54 C : KCLi Tore eKelvos ep,o\ 6avp.a(TT6s ecpdprj. Hipp. Mai. 300

A: ov8e av 81' . . . 8ia Tavra Prot. E: y >] dKorjs T]8ovr], Tvyxdvei xaXij. 313

rvy\dv(is e'Tria-Trjpoiv. Theaet. 146 A: 6 8e ap.apTa>u . . . Ka6e8e'iTai . . . ovos, The fellozv that misses will sit down an ass.

XeN. Ages. 10, 4: (f)iXorip.6TaTos 8e Tre(pvKa)s, drjTTtjTos 8ieTeXe(Tev, enei COPULATIVE VERBS 33

/3ao-iXcvf eyfVfTo, Born ambitious, he continued unconquered after he became king.

ThuC. 4. 69, 2: Kai aX oIkim . . . avrai vTvrjp-^ov epvfjia, The houses them- selves served as a fortress. Hdt. 4, 1 10; hvvaTai 8e to ovvofxa rovro Kara 'FXXd8a ykatacrav avbpo- KTOVOl.

AR. Pax, 1045 : TLS apa TTOT icrriv; las aka^oiv (fiaiverai.

SC. to. Eur. Hec. 1229: vnfjpxif). 1011,412: fieraTrea-oi ( (rvp.^6\aia)

^(Kriova. Med. 229 : KUKiaros avbpav e'/c^e^r;;^' ovpos Tr6(Tis. Ibid. 285 : -ni-

fr. 8 N'^ : N''' :

Soph. El. • ° airols i 45~^ y^P I /^e'y'0"''0£' Tvy)(^dve Sopv^fvav.

AeSCHYL. Pens. 59^-

PiND. O. I, 47 • ^^ ^' n(pavTos eneXes.

HOM. Od. ". iv ndcriv reXeBei. 7. 5'~2 dapaaXfos yap dvfjp dp.(lvv \ epyoicriv

II. I, : viv 8' r Ka\ iravTcov eTrXeo. 4-^J-S apa aiKvpopos o'i^vpos wepl \

65. Passive Verbs as Copulative Verbs.— Passive verbs of making, taking, choosing, calling, and the like are used as copulative verbs, and like the others take the same case in the subject and predicate. Such verbs are :

alp£i(r6ai, €vpio'K€(r6ai, XcYe(r6ai, aipccrOai, laraa-Qai, vo^i^eo-Oai,

aXio-Kco-Oai, KaOicrracOai, (cf. 64), 6vop.d£car6ai, diroSciKwoOai, KaXcicrOai, iroieicrdai,

av|dvEcrOai, KaTaXciirco-dai, riTvx6ai, Tv\Bi]va^, yiYviuaKeo-Bai, Kpivea9ai, vrroXaix^dvecrOai,

SifXovo-dai, Xa|xpdv€(rOai, X^*'PO'^o^^^<''^''^''> ^nd others.

: 8 : . DeM. 2, 5 peyas rjv^rjdr}. 2, rjpdT] peyas. 4, 18: iv(a) . . dcjivXaKros

21 : fK . . . XT)(j)d^. 9. peyas piKpoii ^[Xnnros rjv^rjTai. [12], 14: edv pev fprj

. . . , idv S' : ai) yvaxrOfj (SC. 17 vriaos) vpertpa KpLdrj. 18, 282 toIvvv ovros Tjvpedrjs. 27,63: (I KaTfX(i(f)dr]v p(v (viavaios. Ibid. 64.: oIkoi raXavTialoi Ka\ dirdXavroi KOTaXeKpdevTf s.

ISOC. 12, 5- ov)( oios elfxt. yiyvcocTKopevos dXXd toiovtos v7roXap,^av6- pevos oiou Kri. Ka\ LyS. 13, 66: eXr](f)dr] poi)(^6s. r6, 8: noXXovs S' avTcov (TTpaTTjyovs Ka\ imrapx^ovs Ke)(^€ipoTovr]pevovs.

Ant. 6, 1 1 : eVfiSij ^(oprjyos KaTearddriv.

: . . . rdv biKaiorar av Plato, Legg. 689 D rj pfyiarrj ^vp(f)u>vi(3v peyicrrr]

XeyotTo (To(f>ia. Phaedr. 236 B : acjyvprjXaTos iv ^OXvpnia ardOrjTi. Rpb. 566 D: Tvpavvos dvrl irpocTTdTov drroTereXe a pevos.

XeN. An. 7. I. 26 : noXepioi pev eaopeda aTrodebe ly pevoi AaKedaipoviois. 3 34 GREEK SYNTAX

ThUC. 3, 82, 4: roX/io [liv yap aXdytorros dvBpla (piXiraipos ivopia-Bt), Daring without reflection was considered bravery of good comradeship.

'"o ^^ 5, 95- plcros 8vvdp€(os napddeiypa to'is ap)(opivot.s br^\ovpevov. 6, 33, 3: cicppaKToi Xr]cf)dr](T€cr6€.

HdT. 2, 141 : Koi vvv ovTos 6 ^acnXeiis (arijKe , . . Xldivos. 2< ^^ • ^apf'ios

. . . ^aaiXevs dneSfSeKTO, et sim. alibi.

Ar. Nub. 1079: poixos yap ^v fvxTI^ aXovs. Av. 798-9; ^urpi<^T)s . . .

Dpedr]

Eur. H. F. 150: av 8' a>s dpla-Tov cfyutTos eKXrjdrjS bdpap. Soph. El. O. T. 95'-*- M^'''* XeXt ippe dov. 576: oi ydp Brj (fyovfiis aXa>-

KTopai. Ph. 908: BfVTepov Xrjcpda kokos ;

AeSCHYL. Eum. 353 : naXXevKcov Se TTfirXcov apoipos povva €tvx6t)v. Pers.

S' . . . I35~9' Ilfpo-iSes fKacTTa . . . XeiTrerat povo^v^. Sept. 698-9: KaKos ov Base shall thou not be called. k(kXtj- I a-rj.

: 5' PiND. O. 9> 46 Aaoi ovvpacrdev. I. 3. 25-6: ripdfvres . . . Xcyovrat

I irpo^fvoi r(e).

HOM. Od. 9> 335 • ovfdp eym nepTTTos pfrd roifriv iXeypr]v. 20, 67—8 : a\ 8e XiTTOVTo iv I 6p(f)aval pfydpoicri.

II. : I, 293 ^ ydp K€v 8fiX6s Tf Kal ovTibavos KaXeoiprjv. 4< ^4 '• Zeis, or r' dvOpancop Tapirjs iroXtpoio rtrvKTai.

66. elvai COMBINED WITH A COPULATIVE Verb.—Even after these " to be is in e. called tipai is sometimes found as English ; g. Paul to be an

apostle.''

ISAE. Cf. 2, 41 : ov flvai wvopdadtjv.

Plato. Cf. Apol. 23 A : ovopa Be tovto Xiyeadat a-o(f>6s fivai. Rpb.

428 E ". o(TOi firKTTTjpas e^ovTfs dvopd^ovTai rivfS elvai.

Hdt. 5. 25 (ter). y, 154- d7rf8(\dr) Trdtrris rTJs ittttov dvai Innapxos, PiND. O. 10, 8' eVdXfcrcre viv 63-4'. pdrpcoos \ l(ra>vvpov epptv.

HOM. Cf. II. : • • xaXXiTres Ka\ 17. I5C>-I '2apTTrjb6v{a) | 'Apyfioiaiv eXup Kvppa yevea-dai.

67. Previous Condition. — Previous condition is represented by dvTi or €^ with the gen.

Din. I, III : evpr^crerf ydp tovtov . . . dvTi ptv Xoyoypd(pov . . . irXovaiu-

Tarov bvra Tciv . . . ev rfj TrdXet, avri 8 dyvcoTos evSo^ov yeyevrjptvov.

Dem. 9, 21 : piyai eV piKpov (see 65). 18, 46 (see 64). /bid. 131 : ttXov-

(TLos ex . . . a TrT(o)(ov y(yovd)s, A rich tnan {plutocrat) from pauper.

LyS. 32, 17 '• dvri irXovcridiP TTTa^ovs. Plato, Rpb. 566 D (see 65).

XeN. Cyr. 8, 3, 39 : f k ntvTjTos TrXoixnos yeyevrjaai,

Hdt. I, 87 : noXtpiov dvTi (pCXov epoi KaTa

Ar. Cf. Av. 627 (see 25). Ran. lOII : in xPIO'tSv Kal yewaiav poxdrjpoTd- Tovs dnfdei^as. OMISSION OF THE SUBJECT 3c

Soph. Tr. ' ^'^'^ "^ '^'"'' 148-9 Trapdevov yvvT] | KkrjOrj.

PiND. O. ; S' avTiKa 13. 66-7 e'^ ovflpov \ rjv inrap. On the Double Ace. after Active Verbs see Index. OMISSION OF THE SUBJECT

68. Personal Pronoun expressed. — The personal pro- noun of the first and second person is not expressed unless it is emphatic, as, for example, in contrasts.

Tt ai) jiaWov €fxov KaTT]Yop€is T] ' o-ov; Dem. 1 8, 1 96; Why do yoii accuse tne ratlicr than I you? ovtos ficv -yap vSup, kyi> 8' oXvov irivw, Dem. 19, 46; This fellow {drinks) water, I drink wine.

Dem. 18, 196 (see above). 19, 46 {id.). 21, 28 : fyw . . . vjiels (see 88).

LyS. I, 26: ovK eyci) (Tf drroKTevm aXX' 6 rijs noXecos vo/ios, (It is) not I that am about to kill thee, but the law of the state. (Cf. Ar. Eccl. 1055-6, cited below.)

Plato, Conv. 172 B :

XeN. An. I, 3, 6 dXXa eVet vfiels ffiol oiiK edfXfze nfiOardai, ov8e errecrBai, e-yo) crvv vp.lv d'^ojiai.

ThUC. 6, 14: Kai irpvravi, ravra . . . eVf»|/'i^0i^e.

' HdT. 6, I : rovTo TO vTTobTjpa eppa^j/as p.ev crv, v7re8t](TaTO Se ApiaTayoprfs.

: ei dXX' ovk eKe'tvoi. 7, II Tjfiels rjcrvx^lriv a§opev, Ar. o-v Eccl. dXX' OVK dXX' 6 Vesp. 1426: Xe'ye. 1055-6: eya>, | j/d/ios

(XKei (r(e).

Eur. Hec. a-v S' av . . . 609-10: Xa^ovaa revxos, dp^aia Xdrpi, | i'vfyKf devpo.

Soph. Antig. 508 : a-v tovto p,ovvr] rSfde Kab^dcov Spas. av tv 10 times. PiND. e'-yo) 27 times, and together

fr. 2 : t6t' Solon, etrjv 8t) eyw 4>oXfydj/Sptos T] 2iK.Lvi]TT]s.

HOM. Od. I, 303-5 : avTap iyoiv eVl Vrja Borjv KaTeXevaofiai. ^8r) . . . croi

8' aiira peXfTco.

: Se avvdeo. : . . . II. I, 76 Toiyap ey

Te, 'iarf re iravra, Se KXeoi oiov ovbe tl \ rjpels duovonfv, 'iSfiev. — 69. Unemphatic eyu> AND «rv. The emphasis of the first and second persons is not to be insisted on too much in poetry or in familiar prose. Notice the frequency of eyaSa, eydp-ai. Noteworthy also is the return of f'yw in Aeschin. 3.

70. Omission of the Subject of the Third Person.— The personal pronoun of the third person has no nominative. Hence, the unemphatic subject of the third person is omitted when it can be readily supplied from the context. 36 greek syntax

71. Subject Omitted even when there is a sudden Change of Subjects. —So free is the Greek in its omission of the subject that there is often a sudden change of subject with- out further warning.

... bis TO iva tov tit9ov avTw 6i8w Kol •^ y'"*'''! OLTrT]€i iraiSlov, (sc. r] yvvri) p,T) ^o^ (SC. TO 7rai8iov), LyS. I, IO.

Lys. I, 10 (see above).

I, 26: TTcos ovv fXff'iv fOTiv AnTIPHON, TavTTjv {sc.Tivd) ("i^iov *] atSoOr

Tvyx'ivfiv (sc. Tavrt]i/) Trap' i/fxayv f) aWov tov;

26 : avTov entiae Koi Xen. An. I, 2, 17 ywi) TricTTfis eXajSe (SC. 'Evevvfcris).

Thug. 2, 3,4' ^X'^P^^" (^^- °' nXarat^s) . . . eV avTovs (sC. rovs Orj^aiovs), KUTci oixri ol koi OTTcos firi ^wy BapcraXeaTepois Trpo(r(f)e pcovrai (sc. IlXaraiij?) (r(f)L-

aiv fK TOV I'o-ov yiyvo)VTai (SC. ol Qrj^aioi). 3, 62, 5 ; eVeiSij yoOi' o re MTySo?

(cai roiis I : u>s avTo'is ol Tf oTT^X^e vopovs eXa/Se (SC. ?; ttoXis). 8, I02, (ppvKTcopoX

ol ra . . . fcrrjiJiaivop Koi rja-OdvouTO (sc. A^r/i/atot) Trwpa f^alcPvrjs ttoXXo (pavevTa. Soph. Ai. 549. Tr. 362-3 (where see Jebb).

PiND. O. 20-2 : Kal dtdXav 3, o(f)da\p.6v dvTf(f)\€^e Mrjva, | peydXcov ayvdv

. . . P. So elsewhere. Kpia-Lv \ drjKf (sc. 'Upaickrjs). 9,45-6. 4, 23-5.

HeS. fr. Rz. : ou5f ol vnvos inTVTfv eVt 8' 5 I 0X(

"Apyoy) ep,Tvehov auL

HOM. II. 23, 704-6 : dvbpX Se viKTjdivTi yvvaiK es p-icraov edrjKfv (sc. n?;Xfr-

TToXXa 8' eTTLo-TaTo tiov fie e (sc. ); (sc. \ Sr^s), I yui^/;) epya, 'A;(atoi) Tfaa-apdjBoiov. Kal ' (TTTJ 8' 6p66s p,v6ov iv 'ApyttoKTiv eemfv (SC. YlTjXfidrjs).

72. Subject contained in the Verb. —The subject is sometimes omitted in the third person, when it may be involved in the verb as the definite function of a definite character.

€Kiipv|£v, he proclaimed (6 KTjpv^), etc. In a suit at law, the clerk is often addressed without any further note. In dramatic pas- sages, a servant is often supposed to be at hand.

6 Zi?/ read, iirei oLvaYvuTu (sc. ypapiiaT(vs), Dem. [44], 45 ; (the clerk) to, oirXa eo-dXiri-ylt (sc. 6 (raXTriyKTrjs), irpo^aWo^s-ivoi eirfjo-av, XeN. An. I, 2,

1 IV/ien the etc. 7 ; trumpet sounded,

Dem. [44], 45 (see above).

Lys. 19, 27 : a hi KaTeXinev (sc. 6 'Api(TTo(f)dvT]s), dvayvacrfrai (sc. 6 ypap.-

fiaT(vs) vfiiv. Ibid. 57-

Xen. An. 1,2, 17 (see above). 2, 2, 4 : tVeiSai' . . . crr]p.r]vrj. 3, 4, 4 : eVjj-

Ibid. : 2, 12 : onoTap 6, : ecos [i.i]Vi. 36 fKTjpv^f. 5' a-rjpTjvrj (bis). 5, 25 (rTjp.aipoi.

' Note also N. T. Marc. I, 31 : kuI dcpiJKev avTrjp u nvpirbg evOtwg, Kal SitjKovtt

(sc. iKtivt)) avTo'iQ. eEIA PHMATA 37

Tov 2 : Conv. 5, 2: iiovov, f(f>f], XafiTrTrjpa fyyvs Trpoa-eveyKaTO). Cyr. 2, 2, rjp^aro (SC. 6 aprafjios). 4, 5, 42 : Krjpv^aTO}.

: u>(TT€ ak\a bC ol ThUC. 3, 21, 3 ndpodov p-rj fivai, avrwv pecrcov di^crav (sc. duovres) = those who had to go through = ol cj)v\aK€s.

HdT. 2, 47 : eVeai/ dvcrrj. 2, JO : iireav . . . beXeda-r). k 6 Com. 3, 502 : ttjv rpaTre^ai/ rj e)((ov (sC. hovKoi). PiND. P. I, 48: avlx evplcTKovTo 6e(>iv naXapais Tip.dv, Htero CUm fra- tribus.

ThEOGN. 473 : olvoxoeiTa.

HOM. Od. 4, 214: ;(euai/rcoi' (sC. depdirovres). 21, 142 : olvoxoevei (sC. 6 olvo\6os).

II. 18, : . . . (sC. 492-3 viip(f)as I Tjyivfvv vvp(f)ay(i)yoi).

73. Oeia ptifiara.—Not essentially different from this use is the use of the so-called Oeta pt]iJ.aTa, in which the name of the divine

vet 6 vcov = agent is omitted, such as (sc. Zevs), he rains {the rainer

= Zcus). So PpovT^, he thunders ; vi

{Poseidoii).

LyS. fr. 75, 4 (Sch.) : r\hr] a-va-KordCovTOS.

Thug. I, 51, 2: ^wea-Kora^f yap vbrj. 4, 52, I : Koi toC avTOv firivos laTapevov i' cr e icr t.

22 : v(Tai . . . i -^ • ovk vei HDT. 2, x^ovi^e (bz's). 4' '''V'' f*^" oypalrju Xoyov a^iov ovdfv, TO Se dtpos vav ovK dviei (note the masc. ptC. lJcoi/). koi AR. Ach. II41: vi(f)ei. fr. 2, 963, 13: ^vvvevo(f)f koI x^'^H-^P'-'^ ^povra paK ev. Com. 2, 2: 8' V{TfTa> pev d\(f)iTois, \ ^UKa^iTa aproKTiv, i'rvei. HoM. No example. See 74.

74. Divine Agent Expressed. — In Homer the divine agent is always expressed, as it often is in poetry, and even in prose that aims at reproducing the language of the people. That the notion of god is never abandoned is shown by the use of the genitive absolute, and not the accusative absolute. SovTos, when it is raining. See Participial Acctisative.

Ibid. II : XeN. Oec. 8, 16: orav x^'^f^d^Tj 6 6e6s fv rfj daXdrrj]. 20, vScap

6 (ivco '• I : 6 6e6s. pkv dfos nap( x^ Ven. 8, orav vif^irj

Tov v e i 6 Of 6s. So elsewhere. Hdt. 3, 117: pfv yap x^i-i^^va (T

Ar. Ach. 10- II : Kavrols 6 Uoafibwu . . . ae icras . . . ras oIkIgs. 5 \ ep^dXoi

• : 6 1 : Nub. 368 ri'y vf I, Av. ^yo: ^povrdra vvv peyas Zdv. LyS. 142 ;^&) ^eof aeiav apa. So elsewhere. 38 GREEK SYNTAX

Soph. O. C. 1606: KTVTrrja-f ixiv Zevs x^°^'-°^-

PiND. O. 7, : 6 Zeiis) . . . noKvv vcre I. 6 49-50 /iei/ (SC. | xP*^o-6i/. (7), 5.

fr. i/'ei o AlCAE. 34: /Liei/ Zfus.

HOM. Od. 14, 305: Zfvs 8' a^vdis ^povTTftTf.

II. - Zeiiy Se daT e i, 9, 236-7 O"0t Kpon'Srjs evbi^ia (rrniara (paivcov \ piinT

12, : ^e S' Zevs. 12, ore t' Zfvs v v.^ 25 npa 279-80: aypero firjTUra | i.(j)e p.f

75. 6^^;/. ^^J. .•

fr. : LYS. 75, 4 (Sch.) r/Sr] ava-Kord^ovTOS.

Xen. Hell. I, I, 16: vovTos TToXXS.

Ar. *'"" ^^ to Vesp. 773~4' *".'7' Trpos nvp Kadrififvos (sc. lyXiao-ei), | vovros,

6icrft.

76. Impersonal Verbs.—The same principle lies at the basis of all so-called impersonal verbs. Sometimes the subject is contained in the predicate, as when the passive is used imper- sonally, or when the infinitive is used without a subject.

£ji.oi . . . 8e8LT]7T)Taw, Antiphon, I, 31 ; Afy tale has been told.

• ovv Koi. rdi AnTIPHON, 1,31 ^\>-ot. [lev dedirjyrjrai ^e ^ori Otjtqi rf- dvecoTi Koi Tw v6fj.a). 5- 75 • ofj-ws S' oiiv Kt KLvSwevaeTai.

ev z'h'd. Plato, Rpb. 457 E. /xaX' av dfKpia-^rjTrjdeirj (cf. D: dp,(f>i(Tl3T]-

T'qcriv ytveadai).

Xen. Hell. I, 3, 20: eTrel 8e avrols TrapeaKeiiaa-To. Mem. I, 7, 2 : ap' ov

. . . kul TO. e'^ca Trjs T€)(vr]i piprjriov tovs dyadovs avXrjrds ; TOVTcoravTa TVOirjT iov

. . . Kai TovTW TToXXovs enaiveras irapaaKevaaTfov.

Thug. I, 46, I : 01 Se Koplvdioi, eVeiSi) avro'is TrapecrKfvaarTQ, eVXfov fVl

I : re Kai to T^v KepKvpav. I, gi, rft;ct^eTai rjdr] {;\//'o? Xa/x/3ai/fi (sc. Telxos).

. . . ''^cii'd re 7, 25, 9 : coy 8ia7rfiroX(iJir]a-6p,evov. Cf. 7, 77' 3 yap Toli TToXepiois

»; vrv;^7/rai.

: Ran. AR.Thesm. 1227 dXXd TTfTraia-Tai fifTpiois Tjfxiv. 376: rj pia-TrjTai,

S' e^apKovvTcus. HOM. Od. 9, 143: ov8e n pov(f)aivfT' ISeadai. 19, 312: dXXd p-oi S)S' dva dvfxov ouTai, (OS eceTai. irep. II. 22, 319- ^^ alxpr^s diT4Xap.TT evriKeos. For additional examples of the impersonal passive, see 176. For the impersonal neuter plural in -Tea, see exx. under 37.

77. Often the subject is practically an infinitive or a sentence.

So in the case of such verbs as Set, SoKel, elaep-)(^erai {ela-rjei,

1 Note also PoLYB. 31, 21, g* avaKOTn^ovroi; dpri tov Qtov. ^ Compare also Polyb. 31, 21, 9 (see above). INDEFINITE SUBJECT OMITTED 39

ovk elcrrjXOe) fie, ivSe^erac, e^ecTTtv, ecmv, e^^et \6jov, ecrrcv, nrape" ^^^' yet, TTpeirei, 7rpo(rr]Kei, avpi(^epeL, ^aiverat, XP^>

airavra Sei Lys. lo // z's to tell all the ^ap toiXtiOtj Xc'yciv, 3, ; necessary truth, The whole truth must be told.

DeM. 19, 204: oiiTi yap cos (TVfx

Lys. 3, 10: f8o^€ p,oi Kparicrrov eivai dnoSrjprja-ai €K rrjs TToXecor.

ThUC. I, 120, I : XP"? y^P """ovy rjyepovas . . . ra kolvcl TrpocrKOTTf'iv. I, I20, 3: (V Se napacrxov, fK iroXtpov naXiv ^vplBrji/ai (sc. avbpatv ayadti>u icrriv).

HdT. 3, 7^ • fTTeiVe Se is Aapelov diriKero yi>a>pr}i> arrocjiaivecrdai. 3- I42 •

"i^" 6, 84 Ktos veiv, eiiT av Kal fiot. napex^'- vyii(i>v apx^iv. 27: (jiLXeei irpoa-rjpai

kuko. ttoXi e'dve'i but below : ravra fifX^U fifyoKa t] 17 'ia-ea-dai, just pe'v

68 : rt on irdvTa to. tS>v crrip.r)ia 6 dfos TTpoibe^e. 9, Sr;Xot poi Trpriyfiara ^ap^d- fK piDV TjpTrjTO Tlfpaeoov. Eur. H. F. b' et reKvcov 302-3: rjSr] eo-^X^e /x' irapatTrja-aifieda \ (pvyas

T0)v8Qf).

HOM. Od. I, : ovS' eVt

II. 2, 24: oi XP'I TTavvvx^-ov ev8eiv ^ovKrjC^dpov livbpa. 9, 337"^ • t' 5e Sel' TToXfpi^epfvaiTpaxa-aiv \ 'Apyeiovs; For Other examples, see 37, and on the infinitive, see Index.

78. Sometimes an indefinite subject is to be supplied from the context. This is very easy in the dependencies of the infinitive, as that form always involves an indefinite accusative subject.

ISAE. 2, 13: [6 vopos] KfXevei to. iavTov i^elvat diadecrdai onats av edeXrj. So elsewhere.

AnTIPHON, 5. 9^ '• ^'^ P'^^ y^P dKecrra irpdypan Kai dpy?j xPl^^^ip^^ovs kol

dLa^oXjj TTidoptvovs eXaacrov eortj/ e^apaprelv p,eTayvovs yap en av opdcos /3ov-

XevcraiTo (sc. 6 . . . xPWo.pfvos Kvi).

: ovk eanv fav else- Plato, Men. 97 A 6pda>s Tjyda-dai, pr) cf)p6vipos fj. So where. Cf. Rpb. 347 C : ttJs Se ^rjplas peyicTTr] to vno Trovqporipov apxfo-dui, edv pr] avTos edeXi] cipxeiv.

: Kidcovl HdT. I, 195 ecrBrJTl 8e T0ir]8f ;^p€(ai/7-a£, TTo8rjvfKfi Xivecp, Ka\ eVt tovtou

i 6 2l6: 8e aXXov elpiveov Kidrnva iive v8vv€ (sc. ;(p€coju.ei/o?). I, ovpos tjXikitjs crc^i ' iiredv Se kt€. TTpoKeerai (iXXos pep ov8el.s yepcov yevqrai Kupra 2, 38: 8oKLpd-

...... 6 : . . . laTdai . . . StSot fovtri Tjv iSr/rat (sC. 8oKipd(a)v). 2, 65 evxopfvot

(sc. 6 fix'^H-evos).

Eur. Or. 428: pKTOvpfd' ovT(i)S a>aTe pr) tt pocreuveTre iv (sC. Tij/d).

' The only instance of del in Homer. 40 GREEK SYNTAX

: zW. : HOM. Od. 5, 400 : oo-o-oi' {ofTOv) re yf-yciJi/f ^orjcras (?). 6, 294 9, 473 z

Ka'i a II. 13, 287 : ouSe Kfv evda t(6v ye fievos ^etpo* ovotro, fault-finder. a dreamer. 22, 199: a)S (=as) S' eV ovelpa ov bvvarai (fxiiyovra 8iaiKfii>,

79. Other ellipses of Time, Circumstances, and the like co- incide with the English.

// was late, Tqs 8' Spas l-yi^ver' 6\|;€', DeM. 21, 84; getting ^v irpbs Ti|i€- pav, Lys. I, 14; // was drawing on towards day.

Dem. 21, 84 (see above).

Lys. I, 14 (see above).

Plato, Con v. 217 D : a-KrjiTTofifvos on oylre e'irj. fvda ov XeN. An. I, 8, i: ^St; re rjv dfifpl dyopav TrXrjdova-av. Ap. 23:

20 : eVei ctkotos . . . irpoa-^arov davdra. Hell. I, 6, e'lr], e^6/3i/3affi' eVeiSi) ^Sj;

[xecrov fj/jLepas rjp. matters. i: Thug, i, 109, 3: wy Se avT-w oi) 7rpovx<^pfh 2, 56, eVeiSi)

e'f eXTTtSa toO e'Xeij/, ou fTolpa Tjv, things. 2, 56, 4: /aei/ ^X^oi/ pevToi npofx.<^-

: ey -ra fVi I : koX 7, 84, 4 pr](T€ ye. 4, 93, tj8t] yap Tijs r)p.ipas oyjre rjv. ddrtpd Se ro re Tov TTorafxov Trapaa-Tavrfs 01 2upa(c6(rtoi (71/ KprjpvwSes [sc. ;i^a)pt'oi'J). es HdT. 3, 82 : (K 5e TOV (povov aTTf^T] povvapx^i)v. ws ft HOM. II. 22, 410: rw Se pd\iaT ap e'rjv (the situation) eVaXtyKioi/, Kre.

See also exx. under 37.

80. One. — One may be expressed by ti<;, or, chiefly in second an phrases, by the Ideal person, imaginary j'ou.

lo : etTToi rty and SO elsewhere. : Dem. I, 21 : (firjo-ed ns av. 3, ai/, 4, 25 roivvv (iv tls I'Sot. ei yap tpoiro tis i/xas. 18, 252: navTaxddfv pev

C. 220 D : rt ns liv, fXnoi KoKXiov ; Plato, Legg. 905 Soph. f} QeaiTrjre, and so elsewhere.

: elsewhere. Xen. An. I, 9, 3 Karapddoi av tis, and and elsewhere. Thug, i, 6, 6 : ttoXXo S' av Kal oXXa t« a7roSei|etf kt£., TroXXa eari tSfiv to. tls HdT. I, 32: ep yap Ta paKpd XP"*"? p€V pi]

: orav tis Ar. Pax, 833 da-TepfS yiyvopfG" , dnoddvi]. to. : 6eo\ fv S' oTav dfV Soph. O. C. 1536-7 ydp piv, 6-^i elaopoia, \ d(f)fis

: tis €V and SO often. TIS els TO paivta-dai Tpanj). Ph. 505 ;^a)Taj/ Cijy HOM. Od. 4, 535 =11,411: w? TIS Tf KaTfKTave ^ovv iiTi (fiaTPTj. and SO else- : Te iSobv II. 3, 33 ci)s S* oTf TLS BpaKovTu TzakLvopaos dweaTT], where. INDEFINITE SUBJECT OMITTED 41

81. Ideal Second Person:

Plato, Protag. 347 D : ottov hi koKoi Kayado\ (rvfiTTOTai Kal Treiraihevixlvoi

(laiv, ovK av iSotr ovt avXrjrpidas ovre Kre. (?).

: ovre XeN. Cyr. 8, l, 33 eireyvcas 8' av eVei ovSeva opyi^ofifvov Kpavyrf ovre tw ovtl eis vaipovra v^ptcrTiKcos ye'Acort, aXXa I8a)v av avrovs rjyrjcra) KaWoi ^ijv.

: Ibid. : av I'Soiy Hell. 16 : Siv Ibid. 8, 3, 42 o\|/-ft (?). 8, 3, 43 ovUva (?). 6, 4, ol av be ^(Dvres T]yye\p.€voi rjaav (SC. Trpo(Tt]KovTfs) oXiyovs el8fs.

Hot. 2, 29: cr^olvoi 8e Sua)Se/

. . . will o-at (which one must ). xal eneira drrl^eai is (and then ^^^^ reach)

TreSiW Xeloi' .. . ij^eis . . . Troir'jcreai . . . TrXevcreat . . . rj^eis. 2, 30 : ev taa>

. . . oaco . . . 28: ov Xpovco oXXco rjieis iv rjXdfs. 4> vdap €/c;^e'as TrT}\6v Tvoirj-

CTfis, TTvp Se dvaKaiciiv iroir] ere is irrfKov.

Eur. H. F. 1 196 : ovk. av elhelrjs (?).

Soph. O. C. 431 : ewrot? av (?).

PiND. p. 10, 29 : vaval S' ovre Tre^os lav &v evpois.

HOM. Od. 3, 124 : ov8e Ke (f)air]S.

II. 4, 223: e'vd' OVK av jSpi^ovra i8ois 'Ayafie/JLVova 87ov. 4,429: ov8e' Ke OVK av ^airis. 5, 85: yvolrjs. 15,697: (pairjs K(e).

82. Indefinite Subject of the Third Person Plural OMITTED. — In the third person plural, the indefinite subject may be omitted, chiefly in verbs of saying and thinking.

5s ^aa-i, Dem. 4, 9; As they say, and so elsewhere.

Dem. 4, 9 (see above). 19, 193 : eme'iv 8i] cfyairi tov ^drvpov, on Kre. 1 9,

194- f'Tfii/ (fyacriv avrov.

Plato, Legg. 803 D : oiovrai . . . r]yovvTai(?) Rpb. 428 B : ov yap TTov

dfiadia ye dXX' einaTr]p,rj ev ^ovXevovrai.

XeN. An. 1,9, 5 • eKpivov S' avTov.

e'v ThUC. 7. 69, 2 : OTTep Trda xovaiv rols fxeyaXois dycixri. eK es ^aKaiav Kal eK HdT. 2, 106: TJj re t^s 'Eepeaitjs ep^ovrai. tt) 2ap8ia)v

is 2p.vpvr]v.

Ar. Pax, 832 : a Xeyova-i.

Soph. Ph. 335 : «s Xeyova-iv.

PiND. O. 2, 31 : XeyovTi. P. I, 52 and P. 2, 21 : (ftavrL eK HOM. Od. I, 220: TOV p.' (f)a(Ti yeveaOaL.

S' II. 4, 375; Tre'pt aXXoiv (f>a(r\ yevecrdai. 18,487: KoXeovaiv.

83. Omission of Copula.—The forms iari and elal of the copula are omitted in saws and proverbs, in short statements and questions, rapid transitions, abstract expressions. So reg- ularly with -Teov, avdyKT], wpa, and the like. Other forms than ia-TL or elal more rarely. Cf. also g. 42 GREEK SYXTAX

6 is . Ppaxvs cXryxos (sc. eWiV), Lycurg. 33 ; Brief the proof

84. ecn I and el(T l:

Lycurg. 33 • O-iiKoiv r6 hiKmov, pabiov TO aX.T}d(s, /3pa;^iiy 6 eXey^^oy.

DEM. 1 8, 242 : TTovqpov . . . novTjpov 6 crvKocf>dvTqs.

AnTIPHON, 5> 7 •' V M*'' *'^'' o-^TTjais u> updpfs icai voplpo): icai ocrlms txovcra (sc. (OTlv).

Plato, Euthyd. 304 B : t6 yap (nrdvioi', S> "Evd., Ttpiov TO 8f v8a>p fi'covo-

TUTOV. Euthyphr. I 5 E : Kai p.01 lopa dmevai. Gorg. 507 '^ dvayKi] ravr' flvai

: ^^ ''^dcra ovTas. Phaedr. 245 C apx"? aTroSet^f coj ijSe. '^^'X'} dOdvaTos. to yap dftKlinjTov dddvaTov. Theaet. 144 D {dis). 145 A : a-KfTrriov.

XeN. Ven. 1,1: to pev (vprjpa Ofciiv . . . liypai Koi icvvfs.

ThUC. I, 32, 5 : dvdyKT) (SC. fWiV) . . . ^lyyvajprj (SC. eWtV). 3, Sz, 2. J, yj,

7 '. livbpes yap rroXis, Ka\ ov Ttt\T) ovSe vrja dvSpwv K(vai.

HdT. 6, 129: ov

AR. Ach. 8 : a^iov yap 'EXXdSt. /li. 40 : dXX ol irpm-dpfis yap ovToii pfOTjp^pivoi (sc. (laiv). Id. 41 : TovT iKilv ovyia '\iyov. Nub. 2-3. Id. 207 : ' aibe plv K^r\vai (SC. flcrlv). Ran. 658 : ySaSicrre'oj'.

EuR. Hel. 276: Ta ^api3dpo)i> yap 8ov\a ndvTa Trkfjv fvos. Hipp. 43^- "' is I. 8evTepai ttwj ippovTides a-o(f>a)Tepai, Sober second thought somehow best. A. 334. fr. 234N», etc. Soph. O. T. 84. iio-ii (36\ etc., etc.

AeSCHYL. Suppl. 99S : Tipiiv OTiU)pa S' ti(f)vXaKTos ov?>apa>s.

PiXD. O. I, • 8' eirtXoiiTOi elcrlv). Ibid. 34-5 apfpai | pdpn'pes croc^wraroi (sc.

1. N. 6. 1-2: fv €v 6f(ov Pindar seldom uses the 6, 9-1 dvdpmv, I yevos. copula.

HeS. O. et D. 3x1 : tpyov S' oibev OffiSof, depyir) 8e t ov(l8os. Ibid. 346: irrjpa KaKos yetVcoi'. (Common). 8e icai vttvov. Ibid. HOM. Od. II, 379: (opr] pfp noXiav pvduv, S>pr) [456], and elsewhere.

II. I. So. 177. etc.. etc.

85. Other forms of the copula :

TrXewi/ DeM. 4, 18: eiSw? €VTpfTre'is I'/zn? (SC. ovTas). 4. -9- f'>"^ fdfXovTrjs

eav Tavff' oiVw? ^^" ' KaiTOi irda-Xft" oTioi'P eroipos (SC. elpt), pt] exil- -77 tyaty tovs aKovovras to vXticrrov ovTas). opS) Trjs Twi' Xeydi/Tcoi' 8vvdpea)S Kvpiovs (SC. Ka\ ov

Ka\ O€o~is ^ ')• (sc. e I) ; fx^P°^ 7* (S'^- ANTIPHON, 1,4: vpf'ti ydp pot dvayKa'ioi (sC. iaTe).

Plato. Rpb. 499 D ; mpl tovtov tToipoi (sc icrpiv) rw X6ya 8iapdxfcrdai, kui 8iKaiois • as KTf. Theaet. 143 D:

Ta re aXXa koi €V€Ka. Ibid. B : yap (sc. ei) yecoperpias I46 e'-yo) pev yap dtjdrjs loith this talk. rrjs ToiavTTjs 8iaXeKTov (sc. flpi). I'm unfamiliar style of OM/SSfON' OF J'FA'N 43

: rocraiSt kuI ThUC. I, 23, 2 o{jTf (fivyal livfipanTayv cfiovos (sc. (yt vodto).

Soph. (). T. : d TMvbt k\v(ip, 91-2 X/'.'iC*'^ irXrja-ui^uuTQiu I (Toifios (sc. tlfii)

fliTf'ii', (tre Kdi aT€i\fiv (

IIOM. Od. 4, 206 = 18, 126: Ttnov yuf} Km Trnr/xlr (sC. ( cr a F).

' : oiiK II. 9, 225 X'"/'' '^X'^*^ ^MTos fitv (.icrr]s (Tn^fVfis (sc. dfiev). 20,

"i-^ti S' (Til 8e credtv ttoXii 434- on |u,eV fcr^Xiiy (SC. «criv (SC. (lfj.i).

21, 482 : ;^(zXe7ri7 rot f'yw (SC. et/it) /ieVor dvTi({)ep(a-6ai, and SO clscwhere.

86. /// Dipciulcnf Clauses:

okovct' w a. 'A. T»is iirioToXrjs, u; KaX'^ Kal iXdv0p(i)iros (sc. earli/), Dl'.M.

19. 39-

DKM. TTci^fi/ oin> o tmv . . 4. 29: nofycii x.f)t]niiT

8, 6 16: d rnvra . . . Xe'^o). (rcl. sent.). 9, ^tv yap fiiKpa aXXor &p tit) Xoyos. 20, 55: eafxfv in rel. cl. 11: (iXX' LYS. 18, (HS fl(l\l(TTa TTpOCrtjKOV (SC. ^ju).

r". : ols tiv . . . An 5, 32 tV/)' (sc. ;}).

A : i)v tiv airols Plato. Rpb. 371 xpf«'« (so. .»/).

XkN. Apol. 23 : fvda ov TTpotrlSdTbi' (SC. firj) davdrat.

: Sc . . . ThUC. I, 32, 5 eVftSij neyas 6 Kivdvvos (sc. fa tiv). 2, 53, 3 : o rt fie

rf 2, 62, : (v rw ( it ^5;; »/('5i; (sC. rjv). 5 tjs htto/^o) (sc. tiv) t) laxvs.

AK. Acll. iiS VVV, OTTOt' ...... 19-20: I (pTJpOS (sc. e'oTtJ/) 17 TTJ/V^ tlVTT)l.

Eur. : toT* ^jy Hipp. 659-60 fK^rjpo^ x^"""^ I ^^o^fvs (sc. r/).

PiND. (Jrti/fij/ (V ouTip O. I. 84: ui'dyKd (SC. eWtV). /(^/V/. 3, 42: et S' dpt-

OTfvei pep uSw/j, KTf lii/coj' (^e ;^pii(roy «tSot«'

Hl'.S. O. Ct D. 40 • <)i!'S« (CTHtrtj', 0(ra) nXt'op tjpKrv napTi'ts (sc. ((tt'ip). HoM. Od. oiiSe W o-f 15, 393-4: xP'h I ^P'" '^W (sc.

II. I, 116: ei TO Ibid. 1 : -y' tipfipov (sc. fartv). 56-7 eVfi 7 pi!iKa TroXXa

re (TKiofpra //vV/. : dXX' &i/ k' (wifiKes pera^ii \ oi'pfu (sc. eWiV). 547 /ie'j/ (sc. e?;)

: ov Ac' aKovfpfp. 5. 480 fTn8fVT]s (sc. e//), and so elsewhere. 20, 434 (85),

87. Omission of tiik Verbal Predicate.—As in other

lane^uaj^c.s, so in Greek the verbal predicate may be omitted when it is more or less distinctly suggested by other words in the sentence. This happens most frequently in the case of verbs of Going, Coming, Doing, Happening, Saying. There seems to be no ellipsis of a definite word in examples of this kind.

LyCURG. Ti SoKovcrip 119: vp'tv, i uvdpts (sc. TTOieip?)', ctpd ye opoiuis vplv Twp (i8cKovpTU)P irepi yiyvuxTKeip ;

Dl'^.M. : Kcil 24, 187 nep\ pep tovtov tcara (T)(o\r]p (sC. epu)?). [$6], 50: 8evpo (so. idi ?), At]pi)ad(P(s.

ISOC. 8, : ov8ep dXX' nuXip 37 (sc nowvaiv}) tj (Tvp^ovXevuvaiv I'jpiP rrepl 44 GREEK SYNTAX

dv8paTTo8i

An DOC. I, 150: bfvpo (SC. ire?) "Ai/ure, Kf (j)a\e, ert Se Kol ol ^vXeVat ol

^pTjfievoi fioi (TwdiKelv, QpdcrvWos Koi oi aXXoi.

Theaet. : & TrdXai Plato, 142 A cipn, Tep'^lcov, ^ €$ dypov (sc. fJKfis) ;

XeN. An. 7, 7, 57 : (fiau(p6s ^v o'UaSf (sc. teVai ?) irapaaKeva^opLfvos. Hell.

2, 3, 20 : KfXfvaavTes eVt rd oirKa (sc. livai ?)

Ar. Nub. 690: SeCpo SeOp', 'A/xwi'a. Vesp. 142 : (Til Se T^ 6vpa irpoaKtia-o.

TavT, Si bitTTTOTa (cf. Plato, Cratyl. 440 E: ravr' ea-rai, Si 2a)Kparey). Vesp.

982: es KopaKas. as ovk dyadov e'crrt to po(f)elv (cf. Ach. 864: uav' fs Kopa-

Kas. Nub. 133 : jSdW €s KopoKas. Plut. 604 : i'pp' is KopaKas). Thesm. 241 : v8oip v8aip (sc. (f)fp€T€?), Si yeiTOves. Ran. 1 279' f'f to ^oKavdov (SC. levai?)

/3oi)Xo/Aat. Plut. 526: es Ke(paXr]v

: a croi Koi rois oi deol K{(f)aXT]v TpdiroiT ifioi. DeM. 18, 29Q crois rpe'^eiav fls

KeffiaXrjv). CONCORD

The Three Concords.—There are three great concords in Greek :

1. The agreement of the predicate with the subject (88-136). 2. The agreement of the attributive or the appositive with the sub- stantive (see Index). of relative 3. The agreement the with the antecedent (see Index).

Agreement of the Predicate with the Subject — 88. The Verbal Predicate. The verbal predicate agrees with its subject in number and person.

v Kai tovtov Tovro Yap avTov iyi} irpovPaXd|XTj irepl ttjv \|/tJ(|>ov oi, irep eycvcctOtiv, a|X(j>(0 CTcXcvTTjaoiTTjv, ISAE. 6, 6; He had both his brothers to die cltildless. it', Zt ficYicmis IlaX- XdSos irao-oiv ir6Xis, SoPH. O. C. KaXov|xcvai. | 'A0T]vat Tip-iwrd-n] 107-8.

For the use of a verb of the First Person Plural with a subject of the First Person Dual, see 105.

89. The Adjective Predicate.—The adjective predicate agrees with its subject in number, gender, and case. Be 8d|T) (lev XP^H^*'''''* KTTiTa, 86|a \i^t\^a.TU>v ovik iv-qxY], ISOC. 2, 32.

LyS. 8e . . . iracruv ^v PeXTiaTT) (sc. ^ €(at) yvv{\), I, 7. iyw (AccrTos tiv viroij/ias, CONCORD 45

Ibid. 17. al SevTtpai xws <|>povTi8«s (ro(]>cSTEpai, EUR. Hipp. 436 (84). alo-xpo« <|>ovov|xai, SoPH. Ph. 906 (Neoptolemos speaks).

90. Concord when the Subject is an Infinitive or A Sentence, or the Verb is Impersonal.—When the sub- ject is an infinitive or a sentence (77), or the verb is impersonal verbals in is (76), the predicate adjective (including -Tkoi) regu- larly in the neuter singular.

' ati cLKoWai 7' a|iov, Ar. Eq. 624; Tis worth the while to lend ear. ovSev Scivov 21 It was evi- (|>avcpov y\v on iy^yovii irepi tt|v irdXiv, LyCURG. ; dent that no calamity had befallen the city. Seivov . . . el p,axov(JicOa, Ar. It's we' to et irov elSele'v ti Vesp. 426 ; dreadful if got fight. cp<$|i,cvos x^piov

• . . €V0a oil irpoo-parov BavaTW, XeN. Apol. 23 (86). PoSuo-xeov rap' ecrriv eU oYopav Ifioi, Ar. Eccl. 711.

Lycurg. 3. Ibid. 21 (see above).

1 1 LyS. 12, 36: hfivov fl Tovs . . . (TTparrfyovs . . . i^rjuiaxraTe. 8, 5. 34'

: S) et . . . ovk ovv . . . II Seti'oi' yap av fir], 'A., alcrxpovel ;

And. 1,8: Hfia 8e irepi TrdvTcov eiTTflv ddvv arov.

Ant. I, 26: TTcoy ovv ravTrjv fXte'tv ci^iov eariv ;

Plato, CritO, 53 C: apa li^iov a-oi ^rjv earai ; Thcaet. 187 E: Kpelrrov TTOV (v ttoXv iKavcos yap (TfiiKpov rj prj irepavai. Xen. Apol. 23 (see above). Mem. i, 7, 2 (76). Ar. Lys. 292. 293. Ran. 652. 656. 658. Eccl. 711 (see above). 875-6: ((tti kov ^aSiartov \ opocr' danvrja-ovra fieWr^reov. Ale. nadovra Tr. tov Eur. 1078: pdov irapaive'iv fj Kaprepe'tv. 472. 637:

(ffv 8e XvTTpcos Kpelacrov e'crri KardaveLV. 1225.

PiND. P. 4, 272 : pa8iou pev yap TroXtj; a-flaai.

Solon, 7 • fpypacnv iv pfyoKois iracriv dSeii/ p^aXeTrdi/. 10: avTiKa MiMNERM. 2, Tedvapevai ^eXriov fj (iioTOS.

HOM. Od. 5, 359: 061 pot (ftdro (f)v^ipov ehat (37).

II. 2, 298. 5' 253- ov yap pot yevvalov aXvcKci^ovTi pa)(f

91. Agreement of the Predicate with the Subject OF THE Leading Verb.—When the subject of the infinitive is the same as the subject of the leading verb, the subject of the infinitive is commonly suppressed. In that case the sub- stantive or adjective predicate of a copulative verb, or the pred- icate attributes of any verb, agree with the subject of the lead- ing verb. AnDOC. itoKv av avTTJs (idXXov l^w TroXirtjs Se^ail^'nv elvai rj tTepwv irdXewv, 46 GREEK SYNTAX

1,5; Far rather would I be a citizen of her (my country) than of other Se ravr' liri Ibid. that states. l8o>v e<|)Tj Aavpiov Icvai, 39 ; He said when he

had seen (all) this lie went on to Laurion. d|iovpcv cXcvOcpoi elvai, Xen. Cyr. 8, 1,4; We claim to be free. For further exx., see Infinitive.

92. On the use of the Predicate Vocative for the Nominative, see 25.

93. Agreement of the Substantive Predicate.—The substantive predicate agrees with its subject in case.

Twv Kttl Tuv ... 6 Ztvs ISOC. ZeiiS Yoip ofi^pwv ovx|A««>v Ta|xias €(rTiv, II, 13 ; is the dispenser of showers and droughts, eirei o{)Toi 76 <|>avepd Io-ti . . . Since these 8ca<{>6opd TWV avyyi7vo|j.£'vci)v, Plato, Meno, 91 C; fellows are a fnanifest ruin of those who go with thevt.

Isoc. II, 13 (see above).

Plato, Hipp. Mai. 284 C : v6\iov hi Xeyeis, S) 'In-Tria, ^XajBrjv TToXetof eivai

^ tl>(f)tXfiap ; Meno, 91 C (see above).

: Se 6v(ravTi eiriKeeTai. HdT. 2, 38 d(TT]fj.avTov ddvaros fj (r)fiiri

PiND. P. I, 88: TToXXav Ta^tas eaat.

94. On the use of the Predicate Nominative, etc., where the Latin uses the Dative of the Object For Which, see under the Dative.

95. For the Substantive Predicate agreeing with the Subject of the Leading Verb, see 91.

96. SUBSTANTIVA MOBILIA.—Substaiitiva mobilia are treat- ed as adjectives and follow the number and gender of the subject.

. . . TTJs 'A<|>po8i-nfjs Oepdirwv Ye^ovev 6 'Eptos, PlatO, Conv. 203 C ; Eros is nian-sc7-vant oi Iv o-oi the i^'alct) of Aphrodite, Yap cotiv •ye'vei -q dvdpu-iros, oiBe Dem. The wenck is no kin to not even a eepdiraiva, [47], 70 ; of you, tnaid {-servant).

Dem. [47], 70 (see above). Plato, Conv. 203 C (see above). Politic. 301 B: ^aa-iXea {sc-airov)

KaXovfifv. Tim. 22 D : rjfuv he 6 NelXoy . . . trcori^p.'

Xen. Cyr. I, 4, 9 : av yap vvv ye rj^iov i'oiKas j3a(TL\fvs elpai. " Hdt. I, 7: Aypu)v . . . /3aa-iXevs iyevero ^apblcov, Agron became King

Sardis. : . . . of I, 205 riv he ywf) Ta>v Mao-o-a-yerewi' ^aalXeia.

Ar. Ran. 1 127: cr(x3TT]p'' yevov fioi (To Hermes).

' It must be noted, however, that the inflection is capricious and ffiorijp is found for (Twrupa. NEUTER PLURALS 47

General Exceptions

97. Neuter Plural with Singular Verb.—The neuter plural is treated as a collective, and takes a singular verb.

will be Siapirao-O'qo-eTai to. xp^fAaTa, Dem. 8, 54 ; Our money {treasury^ pil-

TO. Riv. 1 lads ivere to, laged. TJcrOT) |i€ipa,Kia, Plato, 34 B ; The delighted,

. . . Kai 1 8 Poodles learn KvviSia KvPioToLv aXXa iroXXa )j.av6dvci,, Xen. Oec. 3, ; to turn a somersault, etc.

Dem. 8, 54 (see above). [59], 58 : ravT io-ru) vfxiv reKfiripia.

Ant. 5. 20: (rvv€Tr\e I be to. re dv8pdTro8a.

Plato, Crat. 402 A: navra x'^pf' ''"'' ov8ep fievei. Riv. 134 B (see above).

Xen. Oec. 13, 8 (see above).

ThUC. 6, 32, I : eVetSi) . . . e a e K€ iTO iravra.

Hdt. 7. 9" y) '• o^*^ ^'^ ToiiTo Spdaeos apTjKfi rd ''EXkhvav tt pr^y jxara. Ibid. : diTo 77€ipT]s TrdvTa dvOpanroKTi. (piXeet yiveadai.

AR. N. : rd 8e • • • *'^ dnavTa 39-40 XP^^ I ''"'7'' 'ff^a^'7*' tt]u crrjv Tp€\j/fTai..

Vesp. 818 : ra S' aXX' dpiCTKfi poi.

Eur. Heracl. 838: rjv Se 8vo KfXfiKrfiara. Ibid. 1004: roiavra dpavTi

Tafi' iyiyvfT da(j}a\TJ.

Soph. Ph. 1 13 • alpe7 rd ro^a ravra Trjv Tpolav pova. AeSCHVL. Pers. vtvtiovto 8e vfwv. 418-9: I a-KdcpT]

PiND. O. I, e'i ri, e'f 77~^'- (jii^i-a Swpa Kvirplas ay' lioaeihaov, X^P'" I TeWerai.

ThEOGN. : ov Toi deatv ovt ovre 171-2 arep \ y'lverai dvdpainois dydO' KOKd. Homer. — In Homer, neuter plurals are found sometimes with the singular, sometimes with the plural. There is a long list of neuter plurals' verb that are construed only with a singular ; other words, such as Trdvra, raira, dppara, hovpara, etc., occur with both singular and plural verbs, and a few are used exclusively with the plural. Examples of the neuter plural with a singular verb are: Od. 4, 703:

TTjS 8' avTOv XvTO yovvara. 5' ^97 • ''«'' '''O''"' 'OSucro-Jyo? Xvto yovvara.

: : 8' II. 10, 252 d(TTpa be 8?j irpo^ejSrjKe. 24, 420 avv eXKea Trdvra pe- pvKev.

98. This construction is ascribed to the form, for some of the neuter plurals seem to have been originally collective singulars.

' See Vogrinz, Gram, des hom. Dialektes, pp. 288-9, ^"d compare Monro, Homeric Grammar^, § 172. 48 greek syntax — 99. Adjective Predicate of Neuter Plural Subject. The adjective predicate of the neuter plural subject is, of course, plural.

TavT* eoTiv is aXT]6T], Dem. 2, 19 ; That true.

100. Neuter Dual Subject. — The neuter dual is found with the dual, the plural, and the singular.

ocro-e W. dual: HOM. Od. 4, [662]. II. I, 104: oa

oa-a-f w. plural : HOM. II. I, 200: Sfii/cb 5e ol oaae (fxiavdev. 19, 16-7.

oWe W. : HOM. Od. 6, : eV 84 ol oaa-f baUrai. II. 12, sing. 131-2 \ 466. 23.477.

loi. Accusative Absolute in Plural accompanied by a Parti- cipial Predicate in the Singular.— In the accusative absolute, the participial predicate sometimes follows the analogy of the verbal predi- cate. See Participial Accusative.

102, Neuter Plural with a Plural Verb.—When the neuter is merely a formal neuter, the plural verb may be used. So also when variety is emphasized (distributive plural). In older poetry, this occurs frequently when the plural form of the verb would be more convenient than the singular, yet not with- out a tinge of personification or a suspicion of dualism. In the mechanical syntax of later Greek the neuter plural with the verb plural becomes common.

ov Toi . . . dW € ir v e- fJiTiv fjieipaKia tt)v aiTT|v efiot •^u>Y'f\v e

. . . «K€tvov 8c the lads did not fake o-av KaTe4>p6vT)o-av, Isoc. 12, 229 ; True, the same view with me, btit (for all that) they applauded me and despised him.

ov ra Isoc. 12, 229: firjv fieipaKia Ta naai Trapayeytvr] fie va tovtois ttjv avTTjv fp.o\ yvcofxrjv taxfv, aW ejie fiev enrjvecrav cus buiKtypevov re veapcore'pcos

. . . eKeivov 8e ovk fj TTpoaedoKTjaav, KaTecj)p6vj](rai', opdms yiyvmcrKovres aXKa birip-apr-qKores d/icporepwu f]pa>u.

Ant. 5, 34: ovhfTfpa w(f)eXriaav, Neither did any good (sc. TaXrjdrj . . . to. in yjrfvBii); but Blass follows Reiske and the Zurich editors reading w(f>eXrj- aev.

Plato, Lach. l8o E : ra yap fxeipaKia TCiSf npos aWrjKovs oiKOi StaAf yo- fifvoi dapa enipe pvT]vTai 2KpaTovs koi (r(f)68pa eTraivovcr lv. These lads, while conversing with each other at home, o/teft make mention of Socrates, and praise him highly. Legg. 856 D-E : Ttav Se \axovT(i>v ra 6v6p.aTa els DUAL AND PLURAL 49

^fk^ovi Tr€fi(f)6evT(ov, Let the names of those luho drew the lot be sent to Delphi.

XeN. Cyr. 2, 3' 9 • wcTfp ye xal roXXa fwa (ttI aravrai riva fidx^v e

ara . . . Kal a-rravra (fivXaTrea-dai y\ e(f)r], ravra eirloTat'Tat. 5, I, 14: ra

fio)(6T]pa avd ponTTia TracrSiv olfiai raiv inidvfiicjv OKpaTrj e'crrt, KairetTa epcora aiTiavTai, The wretched mass of hutnanity is powerless over all its desires,

and then they (the individuals) blame love. Hell, i, i, 23 : irapa hk 'imroKpa-

Tovs . . . els AaKe8aip.ova y pap,p.aTa Tr€p

8 : TO. ThUC. 3. 82, de p-f (ra tSjv TroXtrcoi/ . . . 8if(pdelpoi/ro, The neutral

the citizens the were to 2 : party of (in state) exposed ruin. 5, 75, Kapj/eta

. . . ervyxavov ovra. The Karneia happened to be holding, but Hdt. 7, 206:

Kdpveia yap a(})i rjv ep-TToSav. 6, I3, I : e7ndvp.la pep €Xa;^tcrTa Karopdovv- rai, irpovoia be TrKeicTTa.

Hdt. • 'o'crt 8e iv 4. 149 TTJ (\)vKrj ravTrj dvbpdcTL ov yap VTvipeivav ra reKva,

• IbpvcravTo . . . Ipou Ka\ pera tovto vire pe ivav.

Ar. Ach. : ris evhodev Ta>v to7s 805-809 eveyKaray la^ddaiv | ;^oipiSiot(rtr.

; oiov a> iro^aird apa ^ajBai, | rpa>^ovTai poQia^ova', iroXvTiprjd' 'HpuKXen. |

TO ' ^^ dAX' ovtl irda-as x°'-P'' Tpayaa-ala (paiverai (note sing.). | Karirpayov ras Icr^dSas. \ 12. 10 PiND. O. 2, 92. 8, (II), 85. P. I, 13. 4, 121 : eK S' ap avToi

7rop(f>6Xv§av bdicpva yrjpaXean/ yXe(f)dpa)u. 9, 88 : rd (SC. vdara) viv 6pe\jravT0 Ka\ 'icpiKXea, Which waters reared him and Iphikles. HoM. See remark on Homer, 97. Od. 4, 132: XP^'^V ^' ^'''' x^'^^^ Ibid. ocrcr' eVi ndvTa KeKpdavTO. 417-8: yaiav \ epTrerd yiyvovrai. 437: 8' ecrav (sc. ra beppara) veobapra.

II. 102: 7, viKfjs rreipaT' e'xovTat ev ddavdroLai deola-iv. The cords (['it. = rope-ends) of victory are in the holding of the immortal gods. (Else- where in Homer Treipara takes a singular verb.) Ibid. 16,403-4: ex 8' apa The reins a of Xeipa>v I Tjvia fjixdrja-av. leaped {like pair living things).

103. Neuter Plural Subject with a Dual Verb.—The neuter plural subject may take a dual verb when the subject comprises but two. Plato, Tim. 56 E: 8vo nvpos croipara els ev ^vvicTTacrdov el8os depos, Tiuo corpuscles of fire combine into one figure of air,. Compare ibid. 56

D-E (124), where yevoiaQr^v is due to the neuter plural predicate 8vo (rlop-ara.

104. The singular, however, is the rule : 116: AeSCHIN. I, 8vo Se pot Tr)s KarrjyopLas e'lSr] XeXeiTTTai., TlVO heads the accusation — of are left me / have two heads of the accusation left.

On the use of the Neuter Plural Adjective Predicate for the Singular, see 37.

105. Dual Subject with Plural Verb.—When the sub- ject is of the dual number, but of the first person, the verb is 4 50 GREEK SYNTAX regularly of the plural number, for in the first person the dual and the plural forms of the verb coincide, the dual in -y^eQov oc- curring but thrice in classic Greek, and being even then ques- tioned by some scholars.

eweSiKao-aijieOa a(j.4>a), AND. I, i2o; We laid our claims (to the heiresses),

us. . . • botk of vu KaTaPdvTC els to Nv(j.

Andoc. I, 120 (see above). Plato, Phaedr. 278 B (see above).

106. When the dual subject is of the second or of the third person, the verb is occasionally in the plural.

Sktctw iiririKois e-iri OTaGevr' 70p do'Tcp ^vyots | €Kpv\j/av ap|xa XvYaiu V€'<|>€i, Eur Heracl. Twain stars the horses' did and 854-5; atop yokes perch \ hid the chariot with a murky cloud.

Plato, Phaedr. 256 C: cfylXoo fxev ovv kcCl tovtoi . . . aKkrjKoiv hia T€ Tov epooTOS Koi e^o) yevofievo) 8idyov(ri.

AR. Ach. I • 8e ...... tt o arX a t cr 6^ , S} 216-7 ff^ov ye a(j)a> aix(f>a> | p ^ (f)i\ai.

Heracl. Or. . . . Eur. 854-5 (see above). 141$: e^aXov t^aXov aij.(f)a>. Cf. Phoen. S' eXoures ntXas TTiiTTovcriv 1423-4' ya^av 68a^ dWi]\(ov | ap.cf)(o Kov Ibid. S i ciOXtov 8io>pi(Tav KpaTos. 1454- afi(f)

Both at once breathedforth a wretched life. Soph. Ant. S' 8vo KaQ' avTOKTOvovvTf 55~7" Tplrov dbtXcpco p.iav Tjfifpav I

Tct) Koivbv nan And third (both) TaXaiTToipco p-opov | ipydrravT iTvaXXrjXoiv— x^poiv. our twain brethren in one day self-murdering the ill-fated pair—wrought out a common doom with mutual hands.

HeS. Sc. eVi hi Soto) 233-4: ^a)VT](n dpaKOvre \ dnrjut pei)VT{o).

HOM. Od. 4, 20-2 : TO) S' avT €v TTpodvpoiai dopcov . . . aTTJcrav.

II. I, 321 : TO) ol ecrav arjpvKe koi orprfpo) depdirovre. 16, 2l8: dv dvipe 6

107. The Dual Subject with a Plural Participial Attribute (Semi-Predication).

Plato, Euthyd. 273 D: eytXaadrrju ovv ap(f>(o (^Xeyj/avres els dXXrjXovs, Then they laughed, both of them, looking at one another. Compare Phaedr.

259 A : et ovv 'ihouv Kcli via Kaddirep tovs ttoXXovs iv pecrrjp^pia. prj diaXeyofie- 1/0 us, aXXa vvcrrd^ovTas.

108. Dual Genitive Absolute with Plural Participle.

DeM. 24, 9: 8iKa(rTT]pioi.v dvolv . . . eyp^rjcpicr pevoiv. [50j> 20 : eVtre-

Tpir)pap)(rj pevcov 78?/ poi bvolv pTjvol.v. DUAL AND PLURAL 5 1

109. Dual Subject and Plural -Predicate Adjective.

(X ISOC. 12, 156: yap Tis

yfyevrjo-Bai, If any one should say that both these cities have been the authors of many blessings. (The dual in -a does not occur in the orators, and is

rare elsewhere ').

iio. Dual Verb with Plural Subject.— The dual verb is used with the plural subject only when the dual notion is ex- pressed or in some way suggested. Of the Attic orators only Antiphon, Andocides, Lysias, Isocrates, and Isaeus use dual forms of the finite verb.'

aviTtu vUts ISAE. there -were i\ \% e7iYV€

Isae. 8, 7 (see above).

LyS. 13, 37 : bvo bi TpdiTf^ai ip rw TvpoaStv rav rpiaKOvra eKeitrdrju, Two tables had been placed {r=z stood) iti front of the Thirty.

Plato, Rpb. 47^ A-B : elnep . . . Swdfitis . . . dfKpore pai itTTov.

II. : HoM. 4, 27 Kap-eTTjv 8e p.01 Ittttoi. 9, 198 : 0I (Aias and Odysseus)

fioi aKv^op.fvco Trep A)(aici)v (fiiKTaroi e arou. 23,392-3. 417—8 = 446-7.

111. Even here the plural is the rule.

Kal Tas £lopas e Icre vt] voxao'i v d|i6Tepoi iraaas, ISAE. 6, 60. Svo TpoTToi TVYxa'»'o^

' : DeM. Trao-iV etVt . . . 8vo 23, 75 npdypaai. npoa- drJKai. 142 eV drj Aap-

Tives : ^jrdKm avdpwnoi yiyvovrai 8vo. 180 r]8iKr]vTO . . . ol 8vo tu)v jBaa-ikeoov.

ISAE. 2, 19: 8vo yap elaiv avTT]. 6, 60 (see above).

Isoc. 7, 46 (see above). Ant. 6, 42 (see above).

112. The Plural Verb is found with a Participle in the Dual.

Ktti to \onr6v Siairpalafievco t]8t) xp

Med. ff. : dXX' S) . . Eur. 969 riKv, elae'XdopTe . 'iKeTever' f^aire'iade.

ff. : . . Phoen. 1404 apirdaravTi . tjkou, avplSaXovre S' . . . dp,(f)i^dvT'

' See den Dual bei den Keck, Uber Griechischen Rednern, Wiirzburg, 1882, p. 14. ^For entire subject, see Hasse, Der Dualis im Attischen, Leipzig, 1893. 52 GREEK SYNTAX

HOM. 11. ttcos, wj Xlvov aXovre 8v(t- 5, 487"^: /lit; iv^ncri navaypov, \ dv^pdai

Kal 1 1 • ttoXXoI S' fjLfVffcraiv (Xaip Kvpfia yevrjcrdf. 6, 37^*- (v Td(f)poi (pvadpfiaTts

WK€€S "iTTTTOl €V XlTTOV dvdKTUtV. \ d^aVT TVpiOTU) pvjxiji dpfiaT

113. The Dual verb occurs with a complementary plural predicate par- ticiple.

kukXovs "YoiJv 7pdaiv€'

114. Of course the use of a Dual Predicate with a verb in the First Person Plural is not a violation of the rules of con-

cord. See above 105.

Be €v Phaedr. are eo-ficv (iovo) £pT)(i.i(j,, Plato, 236 C; We alone (Just —all alone. you and I )

115. Transition from a dual verb to a plural verb, or vice versa, takes place even within the limits of the same sentence.

' • • ^"^^ wTf. MeSovTidSa . . . Kal CY""! H'-*"'*' IvvwKeiTTjv, LyS. fr. 4 (Scheibe). Kai oT€ TraiSia Kal evGvs tjcttiiv 7€v6fA€voi iqirierTacrOe ; PlaTO, Euthyd. 294 E.

iirirous 8' 'ArpeiSao kix«iv€T€, [iTjSe XiirrjcrOov, HOM. II. 23, 407.

116. Dual Number.—The dual number carries with it the notion of " " a pair, natural or artificial, and emphasizes the notion both rather than the notion "two." It goes back to the beginnings of Greek speech, but is not found to any great extent except in the language of the epos and in Attic. It is a stranger to Asiatic Aeolic, is absent from Herodotus, and even in Attic dies out towards the end of the fourth century, by which time it had become more or less literary and studied, as is shown by Plato's usage. The dual declines from Aristotle to Diodorus, and rises again after Christ, but it is limited to a few familiar nouns, and of dual

verbs there is but a trace. See A. J. P. xiv (1893), 521.

117. Plural Subject and Singular Verb.—As the sin- gular is the generic, and the plural the specific, a plural subject following a singular verb may be regarded as an afterthought. In Greek the oblique cases of eo-nv 01 are common, but eo-nv 01 itself is very rare, elo-lv 01 being regularly used instead.

aKcov 8' eoTiv ovs eiraivJi Kal Prot. be €70) <|>iX(d, Pl.ATO, 346 E ; There those tuhotn—there are some whom—I praise and love against my will.

Plato, Prot. 346 E : eWii/ ovs (see above).

: . . . : eVrtj/ o?. : Xen. An. I, 5, 7 r]v ovs. Cyr. 2, 3, 18 Hell. 3, i, 7 ^1/ 5e SXHMA niNAAPlKON S3

: Ibid. 6 : i'a-Tiv ois Koi as. Mem. I, 4, 2 tcmv ova-nvas; 2, 3, T] ndw aptcrKti;

Vect. 3, II : ecrri Se ay . . . TrdXeis. Koi e

118. SxTJiAa ITivSapiKov. — Outside of these phrases, the construc- or Pindaric tion is commonly called the (j'yr]iia YlLvBaptKov, Figure, though the name is hardly justified by Pindar's usage. When the verb precedes, the genuine examples are to be explained on the principle given above, but many of the examples cited are to be accounted for on other grounds, and in many the reading is doubtful.'

8e koi irevre raXavTOV 8' ijv Tov 8avei(r|J.aT09 TCTTapaKovra |jiev [)xvai] e|iai, EviepYov, Dem. 37, 4; In the loan there was forty-five minae of mine and a talent of Euergiis's.

• Dem. 37, 4 (see above).

And. I, 145 : yeyevrjrai (?) (vid. Blass^ ad loc).

Plato, Conv. 188 B: Trd^vai, K.a\ )(^a\a^ai Ka\ e pval^ai . . . ylyverai

(all MSS.). Gorg. 500 D : d ean TovT(o Sitto) tq) /3i'a), If the existence of these two different lives is accepted; but see B. L. G. on PiND. O. il (10), 6. Legg. 732 E, eWt agrees with pred. (124). Rpb. 463 A: W ovv ; fo-n

TToxj Koi eV re Kai eaTi 8i koi fiev Tats aXkais TroXeaiv lip^ovTis dtjfjLOS, iv avTTJ ; There is such a thing as, etc.? Theaet. 173 D, anacoluthon.

is not the of tu' avrl : Thug. 2, 3, 3, ofia^ai subject TfLxovs fj. 4, 26, 5

airiov he rjv 01 AuKebaifioviot rrpoeiirovTes. Here the sing, is due to attrac- tion of predicate (see 124 and 126). 8, 9, 3 (see 124 and 126).

26 : 8e . . . eiTTa , • Se kiTTa HdT. I, ecrri

'AjSvSou €s TTju cmavTiov, It is seven stadia from Abydos to the opposite shore.

AR. flf. ; ovk ecrr ovre e/c 8ovXa> Vesp. 58 ij/iZi/ yap Kapv' (popfiidos | Siappi- TTTovvTe Tols deaiixfvois, kt€. For we have no such thing as a brace of servants, etc.

Eur. Bacch. 1350: alai, dedoKvai, Trpttr^v, rXij/ioi/ey (f)vyai. It is decreed

—decreed is bitter exile. Hel. : rot hvvarai 1358-61 \i,iya vf^pStv \ irafnroi- KtXot (TToXiBf s Kiacov Tf fls There is \ I (TTf(f)df'i(ra ^Xda vdpdrjKas lepovs, great virtue in, etc.

PiND. See Gildersleeve, Pindar Ixxxviii, and note on O. 11 (10), 6.

HOM. 11. 17, • Se Kai atel re 3^5 S*l*l' Ka/idrcp tSpdt va)\ep.€S | yovvard KVTJfjiaL T€ TToSes 6' eKdarov t' re TvaXdacrero vTT€V€pd(v \ x^^P^^ d(^6a'Kp.oi papva- fievoia-iv. (The emphatic position of yovvara keeps it before the mind, and re is treated as cum would be in Latin.)

' B. L. G. Pindar and R. S. xi Compare , Ixxxviii, Haydon, A. J. P. (1890), 182-192. 54 GREEK SYNTAX

Special Exceptions to the iig. The natural relation may be preferred artificial, the nearer to the more remote. Hence:

120. Nouns of Multitude.—Nouns of multitude often

take the verb in the plural.

. . . . Oeovs, PlATO, C ; jlepos . . . TU . . av9poSTruv ovx T|7oilvTai Legg. 948 in A portion of inankind do 7iot believe gods. Plato, Legg. 948 C (see above). to roiv koX rtbv 'nrnfcov XeN. Cyr. 2, 4, 20: \j-Iv nXrjdos 7TeCo)v a>y fievov

be aKova-aa-a ttoXis . . . eiXovTo avTot. Hell. 3, 3, 4: Toiavra fj 'Ayrja-lXaop

|3acrtXea.

: 6 Se oXXo? Kara TTavra Thug. I, 89, 3. 125, I. 4, 112, 3 ofxiXos ojjLoicos alike. ia-KebiivvvvTo, The rest of the multitude scattered in every direction Xecoy. Ibid. AeSCHYL. Ag. 189: evT(f) . . . ^apvvovT 'AxauKos S77-9-

...... (ttoXos . . eiratra-dXevaav. Tpolav iXovres 'Apyetwj/ Xdcfivpa

: eK S' PiND. P. 2, 46-7 iyivovTO arpaTos \ davp-aa-Tos.

: ttX I ott/o-o-w 17 7- HOM. II. 2, 278: Q>s 4>d(rav r} ttXtjOvs. 5, 304- 5 aurap | Cf. a>S re epxerat 6vs em vijas 'Axaiav dnoveovTO. I?, 7SS-7- fapav ve(jios lovra 1 : KoXoiav, ovXov Ke ore Tvpolbuxriv \ KipKOv. 23, 56-7 Tje I KXrjyovres, ' re Xaos TveiaovTai 'Arpetdr], (roi ydp pdXiard ye Axaioiv | pvQoun.

121. Organized Number.—Organized number is singular. The often shifts. So h?)iJbo^ of the (official) people. conception The was lord 6 8t)|ios 8€

Dem. 3, 30 (see above).

: 6 . . . et Lys. 13, 20 (see above). 35 S^/xos eyj/rjcfyia-aro, saepe. which : ttoXis, The on XeN. Hell. I, 4, 12 r]pepq. ji IiXvvTr]pia rjyev 1) day

: Ibid. the Ibid, i, 7. ^] ebrjae. the city was celebrating Plynteries. 3 ^ovXfj deivov elvai el tis e'daei tov npaTTeiv I, 7, 12: TO 8e ttXtjOos e[36a pi] hrjpov out that it was an the com- o av ^odXrjTai, The multitude cried outrage if the mons were not to be permitted to do what they would. (Here t^X^Qo^

claims to be the S^/^ioy.) eni to The Thug. 3, 22, 5: to he o-TpaToneBov Te^x^s Sypprjaev, army

. . . : 6 es rushed to the wall. 3, 72, 3 pev d^pos ttjv uKpoTroXiv KUTacpevyei to the citadel and held the Km rbv 'YXXaU6u Xipeva e^xov, The people flee they eiredevTo 2 : 6 (=01 ttoXXoL) Hyllaean harbor. 5, 82, h^po^ dvadapa^aas took heart attd they attacked the oligar- To'is oXiyoLs, The commonalty again he Ka\ 6 liXXos airas ios etirelv 6 ev ttj TroXei chy. 6, 30, 2 : ^vy

Kai a

4in a^i6)(p€(i>v Ka\ I'micrTov didvoiav. Soph. Ant. O. C. iras a-e \eo)s KaXtl 733, 741-2: KaSnelav | BiKalas. Tr. 194-5.

AeSCHYL. Pers. 127-8 : Xeas a-nrjvos ^? eKXeXonrfv.

PiND. N. • S' 6 TrXei

OTTKrdf oj? ei'Soi/ro Kre. 18, : ttoXXos S' I TpaiKos, 17, 755 (I20). 603-4 lp,ep6- €VTa re 8e eiTrero •)(op6v TrepiiCTTad' opuXos \ pTTopevoi. 23, 133: fierd vfCpos

122. Agreement in Sense of Participle or Adjective WITH Subject.—The adjective predicate may follow the nat- ural number or gender (or both) of the subject. So especially often the participle.

6 . . . ox^os Tj9poicr9Tj irpos xas vaxis • . . I8€iv Pov\6|ievoi tov 'A\KiPia8T)v, Hell. T/ie rabble Jiered to the Xen. 1,4, 13 ; gat meet ships, they wishing to see Alcibiades.

DeM. 21, : Kai TavT Kai 117 eXf-y' 7/ fiiapd dcaiS^f avrrf (ce^aXjj, e'^eX?;\i;-

003 5 KT e.

AeSCHIN. 3, 133' Q^^aii TToXt? dcrTvyeiTv oXoju ovk 6pda>s

^ovXevcr dp.€ V 01, dXXd . . . kttj adfjie vol.

Plato, Lach. 180 E: rd ydp pe i pdKia rdSe Trpos dXXrjXovs o'lKOi SiaXe- y6p,€V0i Bapd empepvrjvrai ^(OKpdrovs (see 102). Cf. Phaedr. 239 A: ovre 8rj

KpeiTTca ovT€ laovpevov e.Kutv ipa

Xen. Hell, i, 4, 13 (see above).

ThUC. 3, 2, I : Aecr/Soy ttXiji/ Mrjdvpvrjs diTea-Tr] drr' 'Adrjvaicov, ^ovXrjdevTes fiev . . avay Kao' 6 ivT€ s be Kre. 7> 75' 4' ^o'Tf bdKpvai irdv to orrpdrevpa Kai TrXrjcrdev diropia. TOiavrrj prj padicos d(})oppdcr6ai, Kaiivep (k noXepias re Kai pei^a)

Kara rd ire Ta>v iv r] duKpva pev TreTTOvdoras rjbrj, rd Se pi d(f)avf'i SeStoray pi) irddixxri.

Ar. • i^^v Tea ov8els TTWTror' edv Vesp. 594-5 Sjj/xo) yvaprjv iviKr^aev, pfj \ flWi; rd BtKaaTijpt' dcfxlvai npaTia-Ta piav 8 iKdcravras. HoM. II. 17, 755-6 (120). 18, 603-4 (121).

123. Periphrastic Subject.— In the case of a periphrastic subject like TO or rd with the genitive plural, h TrjXepdxoio and the like, the verbal predicate regularly agrees in number, and the participial or adjective pred- icate in number and gender with the real subject which is contained in the genitive. 56 GREEK SYNTAX

Plato, Legg. 657 D: to hk twp TrpealSvre pcop (^:=ol Se TTpea^vTepoi) fjficav, eKflvovs (SC. tovs veovs) av deapovvres 8idyeLi> rjyovneBa irpfirovToSy

X^aipovTf s KTe. Cf. Phileb. 45 ^ •' ''"^ ^^ ra>v d(f)p6vo)v re koi vjSpicrrwi/ (op- posed to TOVS fj.€v ao3

Tovs anepyd^frai. Rpb. 563 C: to peu yap to>v drjpiav . . . oaco eXevde pa>- fCTTip ivTavda iv ovk liv Tts TreidoiTo Tepd rj aXXj], ("nrfipos. Soph. Ph. dXX' TCI twv Biokovcov, ajy eiKos, 497—9: ^ TidvrjKev, rj \ oip.ai, iv tov o'iKa8 cttoKov," But either Tovfiov crp.iKp

HOM. Od. II, : K eVt 90—1 TjkQe "^^x^ QrjfSaLov Teipfaiao, | xp^^^ov aKrj-

: S' ts t's nrpov €x6aXfiola-iv iSa>i».

II. 11,690: eXBoiv yap p etcaKcoa-e ^irj 'HpaKXrjfLrj. Cf. 17, 755-6 (I20).

124. Agreement of Copula with Predicate.—The cop- " ula (copulative verb) often agrees with the predicate. Cf. TAe wages of sin is deaths This is true also when the copula is in the form of a participle.

i was a small re MvKTJvai. p.iKp6v TJv, Thug, i, 10, ; Mycenae affair. t\ irpoi| oYSoiJKovTa (ivai Yevi^o-ovTai, Dem. 31, 7: The dowry will amount to eighty minae. virele'BcvTo ras OvyaTepas (sc. 'A7roXXo0aj/ovf) iraiSi' ovt' els "OXwOov, Dem. 19, 194; {For safety's sake) they removed his daughters, who were little children, to Olynthus.

Dem. 19, 194 (see above). 31, 7 (see above).

2 8 : ...... Ant. y al ^ elcnpopal (v8aipovLas p.ev crrjp.e'iov icTTi.

Plato, Legg. 732 E: iO-Ti Srj Cpva-fi dvOparreiov p-dXiara r]8oval Ka\ XvTrai Kal fTTidvpiai. Ibid. 735 E: tovs yap fieycara e^tj p,apT7]K6Tas, dvid-

Tovs 8e ovTas, p.fyiaTrjv be ova-av ^XdjBrjv TToXecos. Meno, 91 C (93). Prot.

359 ^ '• fTftS^ TO TjTTO) elvai eavTOv evpedrj dp.adia oi/aa. Tim. 56 D—E : to

8e depos Tp.rj paTa f§ evos pepovs biaXvdtvTos SiJ' av yevoladrjv aatp-ara TTvpos, The divisions of air from ofie particle when broken up may become two cor- puscles offire.

Thug, i, io, i (see above). 4, 26, 5: oItlov hi r]v oX AaKeBai/iopioi

• Ka\ TrpofiTTovres. 5- 4- 4 KaTaXap^dvovat BpiKivvlas, ov epvpa ev ttj AfovTivrj.

8, 9. 3 • a'lTiov 8' eyeveTo ttjs dirooToXrjs tu)v veiov 01 pev ttoXXoI twv X/coi/ ovk (186t€s to. TTpaacTopeva ktL

1 : tov elal Hdt. , crrdStot Ka\ 8vo 93 Tj pev 8f] irepLoSus (Tt]p.aTos 1^

: icai koi Tre tov ovk crTaStoi eicri TrXedpa. I, 163 yap t] plodos reixeos oXiyoc

KTe. 2,15: TO 8^ a>i> TrdXai al Qrj^ai AiyvTTTos e KaXeeTO, Tijs to ire pipeTpov

CTTaSiot etcrt €iK0(Tt Kai eKaTov Ka\ e^aKiaxiXioL. 2, 142 : yeveaX yap Tpeis dv-

8pa>p eKUTov ere a ecrri, Three human generations are one hundred years. 3, NEUTER ADJECTIVE PREDICATE 57

I08 : Se \iaiva eov Koi iv t'lkt€1 77 S)7 la^v porarov dpacrvrarov arra^ rw /3/&)

(V. 6, 112: 8e ordStot ova eXdaaoves to avrmv o/crco. Tjcrav jxer ai)( fiiov rj

Eur. Hec. tw ere i8a S', didcrcov 123-4- Orj o^co 'A.dr]v

125. Agreement of Verb with Appositive.—The verb sometimes agrees with the appositive instead of with the subject.

ir6X.is . . . 0T]Pai, ao-rvveiTtov, dvij pirao-Toi, AeSCHIN. 3, 133 ; Thebes, a city that is our iieigJibor, has been swept away.

Aeschin. 3, 133 (see above). XeN. An. Trdi/Tfs S' ovrot Kara I, 8, 9: i'dvr) iv nkaifTKa nXrjpei dvdpconoiv

eKaa-Tov to Conv. : koi Ka\ edvos eiropfVfTo. 4, 44 p,r]v to a^poraTou ye KTTjp.a

del : TTjv (TXoXfjv Spdre p.01 Trapovcrav. Hell. 1,7, 5 yuerd Tavra 8e 01 o-TpaTTj- yot ^paxe(os eKaaTos dneXoyrja-aro. HdT. evi TovTav Ta>v ol 7. 104: dvBpcov ''EXKTjvaiv eKaaTos (prjo-i Tpiatv a^ios fivai.

HOM. II. 16, '• ol 8' irds TreTerai Koi 264-5 oXkiimov rJTop i'xovres \ TTpoatra dp-vvfi otcri TeKfaai.

126, Neuter Adjective as the Substantive Predi- cate. —The neuter singular adjective is often used as the sub- stantive predicate of a mascuhne or feminine subject, whether singular or plural.

€ Thug, i, 10, i (124).

Dem. I, • ^f^'- oXws awiCTTov Tois TToXireiaiy is. 5 oip.ai ij Tvpavv 19, 336: pr) Xey <»£ KaXov el p-qvt), prjS' its (rvp

Plato, 506 E: rd^fi koi kckoct ia-Tiv Gorg. dpa TeTaypevov pt] pevov rj Uda-Tov; E: KaXov S) Kol dpeTTj Legg. 663 ph 17 d\r]6eLa, ^(ve, p.6vip.ov.

Ibid. : eVri 732 E Sj) (\)v

XeN. Mem. 2, I : 3, ;^pr;o-t^a)rf poi/ vopi^ovai ;^p;7/xaTa f) d8f\cf)ovs. Oec.

: eaTiv la. 12, 15 Kfp8a\eov fj empeXf

Thug. I, 10, I I, e'SoKei tto- (see above). 138, 5: ydp (SC. 17 Adpyj^aKos) XvoivoTUTov Tcbv t6t€ flvQi. 3, 37, 3. 4, 26, 5 (sec 124). 4, 62, 2. 8, 9, 3 (see 124). Hdt. 108 3, (see 124). 7, 10, r] (see above).

Ar. PI. 203 : SetXoTardi/ ecr^' 6 nXovTos. EUR. El. 1035: papov pev ovv yvvalKfs. H. F. 1292: al peTajBoXai KvTrrjpov. Or. 232: 8v

: S' eV KaKols ov Soph. O. C. 592 ^ /it(upe, 6vfi6s ^viKpopov.

PiND. fr. 1 10 Bgk/ : yXvKv 8' dnflpoKri TToXf/ios, A sweet thitig is war to those that have not tried it. HOM. II. 2, 204: ovK dyadov Tro\vKoipaviT]. So a Neuter Relative or other pronoun may have for its antecedent a Masculine or Feminine substantive. See Relative Sentences.

127. Attraction of the Demonstrative by the Pred- icate.—The demonstrative pronoun is commonly attracted into the gender of the predicate. is cKcivos 8' lo-Tiv i\(.y\o% [xcyio-tos, Lys. i6, 6; That the most cogent proof.

Lys. i6, 6 (see above). 25, 23: vop.i^ovTes koI ttjs noXecos ravrrjv LKava-

TaTTjv elvai cra>Ti] plav Kai rcof i^Bpatv p.eyiaTT]v Tip,a>piav. tci Plato, Men. 71 E : avrrj ea-rlv dv8p6s dperi], iKavbv eivai t^9 TToXetof to be to state. TvpoTTfiv KT£., Tkis is a man's virtue, able tnanage affairs of

• : ft Se koL tcov XeN. Cyr. 8, 7, 24 /i.17, napa irpoyfyevrjfXivoiv fiavddverf avTT) Ka\ia. yap dpLCTTr) diBacr

Thug. I, I, 2: Kivr^cris yap avTT] peyicrr-q . . . iyivero. ' This is the HdT. I, I : 'HpoSorov AKiKapvTjcrfreos IcrTopirjs dnode ^ts rjde, settingforth of the research of Herodotus.

Ph. 1-2 : . . . Soph. dK.Tr] pev ^8e | Arjpvov.

II. : al8a)S vvv . . . "iXiov its kt€. HOM. 17, 336-7 pev rj8e \ dva^fjvai

128. /n the oblique cases:

to This is Lys. I, 16: raiiTTjv yap ri^vr^v e'xei (sc. yvvalicas 8ia(})6fipeiv), his trade. w Plato. Cf. Euthyphr. 2 A: ovtoi 8fi 'Adrjvalol ye, Ev6v(Ppov, 8iKr]v do not call it dike but avTrjv KaXova-Lv, dXXa ypa(})T]v, The Athenians graphe. haec est Phaedr. 245 E: w? TavTr]^ ov(ti]s ^uo-eco? ^l/vxns, "Nam propria natura animi atque vis," CiC. Tusc. i, 23, 54.

— is 129. Demonstrative not attracted. The attraction sometimes pretermitted, especially in definitions in which the pronoun is the predicate. is is ineant malice TovTo eoTiv H'lrpovoio, Lys. 3, 28; This what by prepense (Answer to the question W ^ -npovoiai). uirepPoXri vop dSiKias TOVTO Y£, Dem. 18, 16.

Dem. 18, 16 (see above).

Lys. 3, 28 (see above).

elvai, to . . . Ant. I, 5 : Bavpd^ui S' . . . d vopl^a. TOVTO fva-e^fiav p.r)

7rpo8ovvai. TIS AND TI 59

: oh Plato, Gorg. 478 C yap tovt' tJv €v8aifiovia, cos eoiKt, kqkov OTraX-

: koI Xayr). Cf. Phaedr. 245 C dXXa to'ls aXXois 6(Ta Kivdrai tovto (sc. to avro

Kivovv) 7Tr]yj] Koi dpx^ Kivrja-ews. But Cicero, Tusc i, 23, 53, translates: Qui'n etiam ceteris, quae inovetttur, h'xc fons, hoc prznczpzttin est movendi.

I, 10: tovt' Cf. 6: o Ti XeN. Cyr. 3, cip' ^v rj larjyopia. Mem. 3, II, av ivTavda ep-iricrr], tovt a Tpoffyf/ ^pavTai.

130. Difference between ti and tis in the Predicate. —In questions distinguish between rl, the essence of a thing,

and Ti<;, the classification of a thing.

8' 6 Kal aviroO . . . Ti eoTiv XP*'''0S tis i] ^iai^ a8T)Xov eoTi, ArISTOT. 218 a time is and what its nature does not Phys. 4, 31-2 ; What appear.

Ti :

16 : KCLi TI 8e tovt' ti DEM. 9, iJLTjBels fiTT?/, ea-Tiv, 7] TOVTCOV pitXfl Ttj TToXft ; 6 Se tI Plato, Crat. 398 C: 8f) fjpas av f'lrj; What might "hero" bef

: tI (Ivai Prot. : o rt Se Trore 6 Men. 71 D (f)r]s dperrjv ; 312 C (To(l>i(TTr]s ecTi,

Oavjjid^oip.' av fl olada.

tL . . . koI . . . XeN. Mem. I, 2, 43* TavTa icrn; Tavra vopos {(ttI ; Kal TavTu vopos (caXeirat. 131- ''c-

E : aXX' ovSels noia tls Plato, Gorg. 448 vjpaTa f'lr] rj Topyiov Tex^rj, dWa

Tis Kal ovTCva 8eoi KaXelv tov Ibid. A : eiTre n's '^''' Vopyiav. 449 17 re^^V

KaXeiv Phaedr. E : a> Tiva Topyiav xpr] rjp.ds. 278 'laoKparr] tov koXov, tI

en tiv' avTov elvai drrayyeXfls, 2a>KpaTes ; ({)r](TOfi(v ;

132. Ti INSTEAD OF Tivo.—When the subject is a neuter plural that may be considered as a unit, ti is regularly used instead of Tiva, unless the idea of selection is to be emphasized.

T i :

Kai ov aKovcrai. Set Ti ovv €

Dem. 19, 217 (see above).

: tI Plato, Phaedo, 57 A ovv 8r] eanv uttu elnev 6 dvTjp irpo TOV davaTov ;

: Ti '''''' Kal 01 Ibid. 58 C TJV Ta X6;Y^f """o Trpax^e vra Tives irapayevop-evoi Ta>v

trriTribfLcov t(3 dv8pL ; (Best MSS. W. Schanz and Wohlrab both read W,

Herm. Tiva.)

XeN. An. 2, I, 22: Tjfuv TavTa doKtl anfp koI ^acnXeu Tt ovv TavTu fcmv; 6 e(})r] ^aXlvos.

133. Tiva :

dXXa a)v av o VTTf Dem. 18, 246: jjLrjv y pTjToip vOvvos (lij, ndaav f^fracriv

Xan^dvfTe ov napaLTovp.ai. tiv' ovv eort ravTa; But 19, 217 (13^) : ti. 6o GREEK SYNTAX

102 : ahXh riva ra Plato, Phaedo, A hx] rjv fiera ravTa Xex&fvra; But z'bid. 57 A and 58 C cited in 132 : ri. For the Attraction of the Relative with the Predicate, see Relative.

134. Attraction of the Superlative Predicate.—The superlative predicate may agree in gender with the subject rather than with the genitive.

8€ 6 'qX.ios Tov iravTa xp°*'o*' ttoLvtcov Xap-ir ptJraTOS i>v 8i,api£VEi, XeN. The sun abideth the ?nost brillicXJit all Mem. 4, 7, 7 ; forever of things (thing in the world).

E: 8e iariv a . . . Plato, Gorg. 487 "navrinv KaXXicrrj; r] K^y^is irtpi

TovTcov cou ktL Tioi. 29 A : 6 fiev yap (SC. 6 kov aiTicov.

Xen. Mem. 4, 7, 7 (see above).

HdT. 4> 85 ; TTfXayewv yap cnrdvTcov nfcfyvKe dcov paaiwraros (sc. 6 Ildi'-

Tos). Cf. 6, 37 : TTirvs povvT) iravTiov bevbpiav iKKOTTflaa ^Xacrrov ov8(va pfTid, Of all trees the pine is the only one that after being cut lets out no aftershoot.

Com. : voauiv diseases hardest to bear 4, 231 xaXfTra>TaTos \ (f)d6vos. Of (all) is envy.

Ho^L Cf. Od. : ovSe k^v 13, 86-7 ipt]^ \ KipKos Spaprrjaeiev, eXaCpporaros TreTfTjvwv.

135. Superlative Predicate agreeing with the Geniti^'e :

6 8e irais irdvTtov Orjpiwv coTi 8 v

Plato, Legg. 808 D (see above). itTTi all HdT. 5, 24: KTT]paT

25-

The dramatic r]pa.^ for ey&) of a woman is masculine. See 55.

136. Indefinite Subject, referring to a Woman, treated as Masculine.—The masculine, as the more generic, is sometimes used of an indefinite subject, even when the indefinite subject is known to be a woman.

ovk tlktovtus aX- Eur. Andr. ovaa \ 711-2: x] aTe7pos p.6a-xos dve^erai

Xovs, OVK fxova' avTT] reKva. • KaKas : ea-riv ovbe Soph. El. 770-1 8fiv6v t6 tIkt^iv yap \ nda-xovTi piaos a mother. Not even S)v TfKji npoa-yiyvfTai, Strange is this thing of being to hate the child that one has when one suffers wrong can one be brought VOICES OF THE VERB 6 1

Tr. 1-2 : tot T19 wtl VV. borne. 15 (sc. [orof] irapdivov yvvrj \ KKqdrj ktL, 148-9) av Tts avrov aKOTroiv KaKoicriv oty elcrldoiTo, Tqv \ npa^iv, tyo) ^ap-vvojiai,.^ FORMS OF THE VERBAL PREDICATE Voices of the Verb

137. There are three voices in Greek—Active, Middle, and Passive.

The distinction of passive from middle is a distinction of function, not of form. The terminations of the passive are either middle or active, and only one comparatively late form is uniformly differentiated, the is on the basis of itself future in -6f]

138. The Active Voice denotes that the action proceeds from the subject.

21 T/ii's man married to iroiStov ovTos «Y^P'«» Dem. [46], ; got (26). ipoa,

1 1 , 1 The Lys. ; baby was bawling (26). — 139. Transitive and Intransitive Verbs. Verbs that regularly take an object are called transitive verbs, verbs that do not regularly take an object are called intransitive verbs. So KTfivco, I kill, is a transitive is an intransitive verb. But verb be verb ; o-kottco, / am silent, any may transitive or intransitive, according to its use, and the traditional dis- tinction given is a mere matter of convenience, and does not rest on a difference of nature.

140. As all verbs involve an inner object and may take an inner ob- transitive to verbs that take an outer ject, it is better to confine the term object, and when such verbs are used without an outer object, they serve and I to characterize the subject. So (fiovevco, I commit murder., i/tKco, gain and / a victor a victory, become / am a murderer ((f)ovevs), am (viktittjs). is in the van. ayei (PiND. P. 2, 17), s/ie is a leader, she

— is 141. Periphrases with 7tYvo|jiai.. The analysis given above some- into times expressed. So oj/arpeVco, I overturn, may be analyzed avarpoTzevs a or I subver- yiyvofj.aL, I show myself subverter, avaTpon^v Tvoiovp.ai, produce sion. The former dwells on the character of the agent, the latter on the character of the action. Hence the solemnity of both the periphrases, in- 61 A. P. volving as they do moral responsibility. Compare and J. xx, in.

' Eur. Med. 1018, Soph. El. 145 and 1026, are sometimes unjustly cited as instances of this usage. In eacli of these examples a woman makes but a personal as well as application of a rule that applies to men women. 62 GREEK SYNTAX

ISOC. 2, rcov 17: \i.aki(TTa \ikv tvpfTr)s ylyvov [ieXriaToyv, d 8e /xij, fiifiov ra To'is uWois tS)v TTapa 6pdo)s f\opTa. 10,42: Be Scopecov avajKaa-dels yeveadai KpiTTjs. Ibid. 43: enfdvprj(Te Ato? yevia-Qai KrjdeaTi] s.

Ant. I, 2 I, 5e re (see 6l). 4 (60). 2/^2: €fj.o\ ^av avdpcoiros avarpo-

• TTevs rov o'Uov kt€. "«' twv ...... iyivero 5- 47 p.eu Xoyoou tovtovctI Kptras Tj^iaaaTf yeveadai, Tu>i> 8e epyav avTol diKacrral eyeveade, et sim. alib.

Plato, Conv. 218 C : crv 8' e ep.ol BoKels, rjv eya, efjiov paa-rr) s u^ios yeyo- vivaL C: iav be 8ov\ov p.6vos. Legg. 872 ns KTeivrj nr]8ev ddiKovvTa, ^o/3ci) 8(, kol firj firjvvTTjs al(TXpv epycov KaKwv avrov ylyvqTai ktL Xen. Ag. 10, 4 (64). THUC. i^ol TWJ' KvK\a.8a>v 1,4- vrjcrcov rjp^e re xai oiKKTrrj s irparos rcou TrXeia-Tcov iyivero. I, 132, 5: firjvvTTjs yiyverai. I, I36, 3: 'iKeTTjs yev6p.evos.

I : 3, 2, 3 (60). 5, II, (TWTfjpa . . . yeyevi](Tdai. Cf. 8, 48, 6: Tropiaras ovras Kai rcov KaKOiv ea-rjyrjTas rw Sij/xo). 8, 86, 4: kcoXvttis yeviadai, et StJU. alib.

Ar. Ran. 11 1 : ii/a o 52: acorripyevov p,oi. 19I /ii) 'KTpa(f)els y iv ito tov irarpos (povevs.

Eur. Cf. : a-v S' dXXa [Rhes.] 167 yr]p.as n.piap.Lbcbv yap.^p6s yevov.

Soph. Ai. : . . . 1092 (61). O. C. 582 orav a-v pov Ta(j)evs yivjj. AeSCHYL. erXa S' ovv Cho. Ag. 224-5: ( dvrrip yepicrdai BvyaTpos.

2 . (61). Ibid. 246: decopos . . yevov. Sept. 130 (61). Find. P. 4, 274' f' M 0fos dyep.6veaai Kvjie pvarr] p yivqrai. HOM. Od. 17, 223: e'i poi boirjs CTTadpcov pvrrj pa yeviaOai.

II. ICX) : Se 18, eyLteO Sirjaev dpijs dXKTTJpa yevicrdai.

142. Transitive Verbs used Intransitively.—Among the active transitive verbs that are freely used intransitively and are sometimes called immediatives may be mentioned IXavv«, / and its the of drive, compounds; compounds itjiai, T send forth ; PaXXw, I hit, east, and compounds of pdX.\w.

The following is a more complete list of the verbs belonging to this class : dyeiv and cpd.', aipeiv and Cpd., cpd. of aXXdrreiv, Cpd. of dvveiv, ^dX-

Xetv and cpd., cpd. of 8i86vai, divelv, iXavveiv and cpd., iTreiyeiv, e^eiv and cpd., livaL and cpd., dvaKaXinrretv, Kevdeiv, cpd. of KXiveiv, cpd. of Xap^dveiv, cpd. of

XeLireiv, cpd. of fiiyvvvai, fiivvdeiv, viKav, vcopdv and cpd., oiKelv, oppdv and Cpd.,

•jraveiv, Trpdrreiv, (rriXXeiv, (TTpi(f)eiv and cpd., reiveiv and Cpd., reXevrdv, (paiveiv and cpd.,

tyi} Si, €4>Tj, e-n-l TovtrSc, rjv cm are Kivuvrai, IXw, XeN. Cyr. 1,4, 20; / lai/t ride against (charge) tJicse people, if they undertake to fno7'e against you.

• c 1 tr I Se . . . 8ia 1 1] 'Axepouaia \i|xvt] €S OaXacrcav 8e ttjs OecrrrpwTiSos 'A.\ip

' cpd. stands for one or more compounds. CAUSATIVE ACTIVE 63

an outlet into the sea, while the river Acheron, fiowing through Thesprotia,

empties (itself) into the lake itself.

DeM. 19, 163 : a-nripav Sta rov TroiKffjLiov crTparevfiaTos ds Hayaads.

Plato, Phaedr. 228 E : nave. Ibid. 229 A : Trpdaye 817. Ibid. 229 B :

Trpodyois av. XeN. Cyr. 1,4,20 (see above). Ibid.: 6 Kva^dprjs Xa^av rav (pponiivmv "iiTirayv re Koi dvSpcov tt poa e\avvei.

2 : ThUC. 1,46, 4 (see above). 6, 60, KaS" r)p.ipav fTrediSoaau pdWov is

TO dypiUiTfpov.

Hdt. 2, 8 : ovpos uXko TTerpivov reivei . rerafifvov top avrbv rponov ktL

Ar. Eq. 243: ovK fXdre irpos to Senior Kipas ; Will you not ride to the right wifig? N. 133: jSaXX' is KopoKas, Get thee gone to the buzzards (a common imprecation). Ran. 580: TraOe TraOe tov Xoyov.

Eur. El. °^^' o'^^ TivfS 1233-5 Sd/xwi^ vi^kp oKpoTdrav | ^aivovai baifio- Pfs dfcSv Tcov fj I ovpavicov. Soph. El. voels vvv. O. R. 6 Se davav KevOei 1435: § erreiye 967-8: \

/cdro) 8)7 y^?.

HeS. O. et D. 244 : pivvdova-i 8e OLKOi. Sc. 449 : dXX' aye nave pdxrjs. 8' K vtv ov86v HOM. Od. 7, 130: f) (sc. pi] VI]) eTepcodev avXrjs irjaiv. II, 239:

OS TToXv KoWia-Tos TTOTapav eVi yaiav trja-iv.

II. 12, 268: veiKeov, w tlvu Trdy)(v p>d-)(r]S p,e6ievTa ihoiev. 23, 75^~9 •

Z)Ka S' eneiTa \ eK^tp 'OLkidbrjs.

143. Infinitive Active apparently as a Passive. — The infinitive being a verbal noun is not so strictly bound by the voices as the finite form. The infinitive as a complement to adjectives and the so-called epexegetic infinitive often coin- " " " cide with the English idiom in which good to eat is good for food," "fair to see" is "fair to the sight," and in Greek the active form is more common and, if anything, more natural than the passive. koXos \^e.v, fair to sec ; xa^e-n-o edpetv, Plato, Rpb. 412 B, hard to find; but xa^^-n-o^ • • • y*'«<^1''*^» Antiphon, 2 a i, hard to recognize, '^to^ Infinitive.

144. Causative Active.—As in other languages, the sub- ject is said to do what it causes to be done, qui facit per aliiim, facit per sc. Xen. Hell. senate them in "0 PovXt) gStio-c (sc. axjTovs), I, 7, 3 ; The put jail.

LyS. 12, 23: TOV dhe\<\)hv yap p.nv, coaTrep (cat npoTepov eiTrov, EpaToadevrjs aTTeKTeivev (Polemarchos drank the cup at the command of the Thirty, 64 GREEK SYNTAX

Plato, Meno, 94 C: GovkvSi'Sj;? av Bio vlf7s tQpfi^f . . . koI tovtovs

€irai8fv(r€ rd re (ikXa tv Koi eVaXato-ai/ KoXXicrra 'A6r]vaia>v, et si?n. ah'/).

10 • 5 avTov SC. koi Xen. An. I, 4. Kvpoy ( top napddeiaov) f^fKoyj/t ra

/SacriXeia KarfKavaev. Hell. I, J, 3 (see above).

HdT. 8, 118: u>s 8e (Kfirjvai rdx^ia-Ta es yrjv rov Sep^rfv . . . dnorap-flv rr]v K€(f)aXrjv avTOv (sc. tov Kv^fpvrjTov).

For Intransitive Verbs of Passive Signification, see 171,

Middle Voice

145. The Middle Voice denotes that the subject is in some especial manner involved or interested in the action of the verb. In some of its uses the middle corresponds to the English re- flexive, but the signification is much wider and shades off from what is practically a direct reflexive until it ceases to present any translatable difference from the active.

146. Direct Reflexive Middle.—The interest may be that of the direct object. This is limited chiefly to natural or habitual actions. The only middle for self-murder is oiraY?a

eirciST) 8€ €Xov

DeM. [50], 35 : XoxxrQai iv ^aXaveico. Plato, Phaedo, 116 B (see above).

Xen. Cyr. 3, I, 25: ol p.ev pnTToivres eavTovs, ol 8' aTrayxofitvoi, ol S' aTToaffiaTTo pf vol.

Thug. 3, 81, 3 : fV T(3v B(v8pa>v nves aTn'jyxovTO. Hdt. 2, 40: TVTTTovTai TrdvTes, All beat their breasts (natural expression of : tto?? maid grief). 2, 131 17 dirriy^aro. The hanged herself Ar. Ach. 17: e| oTov 'yw pvTTTopai, I scour myself. Av. 1 163: dnoviylro- pai, I'll wash myself, i. e. my hands. Thesm. 230: ttoZ a-rp€(f)fi; fr. 2,

I JOO, : dXX' KarfXiTTOu a tv ivviXco. 9 dpri'co? avTi)v puipivrjv \ rrj

: Ibid. : Twi» PiND. O. 7, 15 (ivbpa Trap' ^AX(f)€ico arecfiavcoa-dpevov. 80-I av6f(Ti e 8is. : Aiayopas \ crrecfiavoiaaTO 12, IJ (rTe(f)av(i>(rdfievos.

Sappho, fr. 62: KarTvivrfcrQe Kopai.

Simon. Am. 16: KrjXf itpoprjv pvpoicri kol dvapaaiv.

HOM. Od. 5>49I • <^f 'oSuo-fi)? (f)vXXotai KaXv-^aro. II. 10, 576: Xofo-avTo, They bathed themselves. INDIRECT MIDDLE 65

147. Indirect Middle. —Much more frequent is the indi- rect middle, in which the subject is more or less remotely in- volved, sometimes with sharp distinction from the active, some- times without any perceptible, or at any rate translatable, differ- ence. See the examples of this and the following section.

Be Kai virvov Xen. 6, ; Drunk- HcOt]v 6|ji,oi«i>s evc'Spqi (|>vXdTTo^ai,, Hiero, 3 enness and sleep Iguard against like an amhish. (

LyCURG. 85 : ovS(e) . . . Tr]v 6 pe-^anivrjv . . . Tols TToXffiloLS 7rape8o(rav, Nor did they surrender to the enetny the country that reared them for herself.

: TroXiTelas to toIs DeM. 20, 17 Tjs av TWOS Kofii^eadai. tovs evvovs Kade- avTav ecra. (TtSxtlv X'^P'*' *^«'^?/^» ov fiiicpav (pvXaKriv Tavrrjv dcprjprjKoiS

Xen. Hiero, 6, 3 (see above). [R. A.] i, i : ei5 8ia(TTai rrjv iro\i- Telav, Excellently well do they preserve their form ofgovernment.

Hdt. 2, 121 : fivrjpLoa-vua eXtTrero to npoTrvXaia. 3' 79 '•

•who wished to make a us. Ibid. : • . . (nvovhas treatyfor 130-I e/iol | iroirjaai jrpoff Aaiie8aip,oviovi fiovco.

Com. 4, 355, 539 : x^^^ ndvra KOfiL^ei Kai ndXiv KOfxl^eTai, Earth bringeth everything a?td takes it back again ; Nam terra donat ac resorbet omnia. diXeis I AeSCHYL. Sept. 718: dXX' avTd8fX(f)ov alfia 8pe'^a(rdai ; What

brother s blood? fr. : 8k -wilt thou make thee a harvest of thy 44 i] (sc. yata) iriKTeTai re Kai ^lou Ai]fj.T]Tpiov. ^poro7s | firjXcov (BoaKas

PiND. O. 7, 42 : (Tfp.vav6valav6efi.fvoi. 8,68—9: d'7rfdr]KaTO...v6(rTov

N. 6-10 !• 60-1 : vLKas dnb tv6i(TTov. 2, (14^)- 5' lipavTO yap nayKpaTiov \ Tpfls.

II. fK S' ^c"^d(raTO From out HOM. 4, 529-30: o'fiptpov eyX°^ I (TTfpvoio,

621 : ike breast he plucked the ponderous spear, and similarly 5, e'o-7ra(raT(o), but the active is used 7, 255: cKo-Trao-o-a/xei/o), and 13, 510: fdirda-aTip); 5, 859; 6, 65; 12, 395; and 13, 178 (see 148). 11, 802-3: pfla 8f k dKprjTfs ioaaiadf ucttv vfav arro Kai KXiaidcov, and Simi- KfKprjoTus avSpas dvTrj \ Trpori

but : 84 k' ; ; 16, larly 5, 691 ; 8, 295 ; 15, 418; 16, 592 655 44-5 pfla aK/x^res ucttv vfwv utto Ka\ KXtuidav, and SO the KfKpijoTas (xv8pas dvTrj | acraipfv TrpoTi active 8, 336; 13, 193; 16, 569; 17, 274 (see also 148). Homer has a certain fondness for the middle. So, for example, ISfo-dai occurs 38 times over against the 19 instances of iSeeii/ or I8fiv. The middle forms of opdcD are not uncommon, whereas in prose we have only npoopd- a-dai. The verse has something to do with all this. So l8o)v is the only possible form for the aorist participle. 5 66 GREEK SYNTAX

148. Active for ^^he Indirect Middle. — The middle is not compulsory. The use of the active where the middle might have been expected may sometimes be ascribed to the aristocratic disdain of effect (see Pindaric examples below), just as in late Greek the middle is sometimes used in order to pro- duce a grander sound.

TO. • • • his out XPTF^'T"' «C€i«6|iio-e, Lycurg. 38 ; He got money safe.

Lycurg. 38 (see above).

Plato, Protag. 324 D: 01 av8pes ol dyadol . . . Toiis avTwv vieis SiSa- aKovai a StSacrKaXwc f^f^'*'' with which compare z'dut. 325 D: oi dyadol livdpes . . . TCI fiev ciXXa SiSacr/coi/rat tovs v'uls . . . ra fiev tikXa apa tovs vlels 8i8d(r KovTni.

; Tov Se TO. '^^ HdT. 2, 51 'Epp.((i) dyaXpara opdci e^^"' aldoia TTOLfiivTes ovk dn AlyvTTTLCJv pepadrjKacTL, dW dno IleXao-ycoi/, with which compare just be- low : opdd £l)v f'x^"' ''"'^ -8oia rdyakpaTa tov 'Kppea AdrjvaioL npcoTOi 'EXXtjvcov pad6vT€S TTopa IleXaaydiv iiroii^aavTO. 2, 143- dp)(ifp€vs yap eKaaTOS avTodi terra {v. /. laTaTai) fVi ttjs ecovTOv ^oj;? et/coi/a iavTov.

PiND. P. 1,49: olav (sc. Tipdv) ovtls 'EXXdvcav Spinel, and similarly P. 4,

130 and 6,48; with which compare N. 2, 6-10: oc^e/Aet S' eVt . . . dapd pep

l(rdpu'i8o3V bpinecrOai koXXicttov "kjhtov . . . Tipovoov 7raiS(a).

HOM. II. 5, 859 : €K 8e dopv (nrdaev avris, And out again he plucked the shaft ; and similarly 6, 65; 12, 395; 13, 17S. (For the use of the middle in similar examples, see 147). Ibid.%,y^6: o\ S' \6vs Td(f)poLo ^adflrjs S)crau

'Axai-ovs, But they thrust the Achaeans straight toward the deep trench ; and the use of the middle in simi- similarly 13, 193 ; 16, 45 ; 569 ; 17, 274. (For lar examples, see 147.)

149. Reciprocal Middle.—As the reflexive may be used for the reciprocal, so the middle, which represents the reflexive relation, may be used to intimate the reciprocal relation. Such verbs are (idxe«r9ai, sc battre, sick schlagen, d7&)vi£€

to close ev xtp

Thug. 7, 5, 2 (see above).

Hdt. 2, 63 : KecpaXds re avvapdaaovTai, They butt one another's heads. Ar. PI. ftveica crB' endcTTOT ev 329-30: TpLoyjSoXov pev \ oxtti^o pe TrjKKXrjcria,

We hustle one another ; but Ach. 24-5 : uxttiovvtui . . . dXXr]Xoia-i.

Soph. O. C. 424- ^s (sc. pd^rjs) viv 'ixovTai KdrravaipovTai dopv. CAUSATIVE MIDDLE 67-

PiND. O. I, 98: Ta-)(yTas TTohmv f pi^erai =:Taxf'is TToSes epi^ovrai.

HeS. O. et D. 37 : K^rjpov f8a

HOM. II. 23, 735 : ixTjKer epeidea-dov. No longer press each the other.

150. Causative Middle.—As the active is often used of what one does by an agent, so the middle is used of that which the subject has done for itself. This is an occasional use of the middle, but it is not a characteristic use, and must not be pressed as differentiating it from the active.

0e|xi(rTOKXTJs K\£oavTOV tov vlov lirirca |i£v e8i8d|aTO dyaOov, PlaTO, Thcmistocles had his son K. to be a Men. 93 D ; taught good horsoiian, but

. ibid. 94 B : tovtovs . . iirire'as (J-ev cSiSa^ev ovScvos x^'P"'"? 'AOrjvatwv,

ol . . Plato, Meno, 93 D (see above). Protag. 325 B: dyadoX avBpes .

. , aXKa TO. fiev aXka 8t8daKovrai tovs vlels .rd fiev lipa rovs vlels 8i8daKovTai, but 324 D: oi av8p€S ol dyadoi rd p,ev oKXa tovs avTcov vlels 818 daKova- iv, d

8t8aa'KdXci)v e'x^eTai.

ThQC. I, 132, 2: eVt TOV TpinoSa . . . rj^iaxrev (SC. Ylavcravias) emypd'^a-

(rOai avTos I8ia to eXfyeiov rdSe, but § 3 • '''o M^'" o^'' eXeyeiou ol AaKe8aip,6pioi e ^eKoXayfrav evdvs Tore . . . Kai ewey payp'uv dvopacTTi tus noXeis uTe.

Hdt. I, 50. erroie eTo [sc. Kpolcros] 8e Kai XfovTos eiKova xp^trov drrecfidov, Croesus had an image of a lion niade for himself out of refinedgold.

Ar. Eq. 5 • 7rX;;yay del it po

151. Active and Reflexive.—Direct reflexive actions are the active and the reflexive commonly expressed by ; so, regu- larly, unnatural actions, and actions which circumstances have made unnatural or difficult.

love OaXar- €|AavTov (f>iXw, DeM. [47], 73 ; I myself. piirTei airov eU tt|v 6 throws into the sea. Tov, Dem. 32, ; He himself

Dem. 32, 6 (see above). [47], 73 (see above).

AeSCHIN. I, 53 o^*^ evovdeTTjaev eavTov.

ISOC. [l], 15: edL^e a-eavTov. 2, 29: e^t^e cravTov. $, I18: ediCeiv

Plato, Legg. 861 A : epcoTwpev r)p.ds avTovs, Let us ask ourselves. Phaedo,

96 A : TToXXaKtff epavTov dva> tcdrco peTe^aXXov. Theaet. I48 E.

Xen. An. I, 2, 7 : oTToTe yv pvdcrai jSovXolto eavrov re Koi tovs ittttovs. Hell. I, 6, 10: ovK e8vvdpT]v epavTov mlaai, I could 7iot persuade myself.

Thug. 2, 4- 4- eppv^av . . . u<^ds avTovs. 4- 3^' 3- ™ oirXa Kape8o(Tav KCLL a(f)ds avTovs.

Hdt. 2, 116: ov8ap^ (iXXtj aj/fTroSio-e icovTov {sc."Opr]pos). 3,36: 'icrx^ Koi KOTaXdpjSave ere covTov, 68 GREEK SYNTAX

Ar. : ovrui^ (TeavTov 'i (t 6 n^ at Vesp. 286-7 iirjh' \ Stop gftauiitig yourself so. Ibid. 996: eTTuipe cravrdi^. Ibid. 1213: )(yT\a(jov creauroi/, Dump yourself.

Thesm. 230: e;^' uTpefia aavTov.

Eur. Ale. 188: Kappiyj/ev avrrjv. Ibid. 250; enaipe cravrrjv. Ibid. 788:

(vcfipaLve aavTov. Soph. El. 988: iravaov 8e (ravT7]v.

AeSCHYL. p. V. 748 : i'ppiy (pavTi)v.

152. oviTos eavTov— Extreme unnaturalness is expressed by avros kavT6v and the like.

Hell. ovTos avTov 8ie'<|)8eip£v, Xen. 7, 4, 19; He made away with him- self.

AeSCHIN. 3. 233 • KaraKikvKiv avros tj)v avrov hvva

Plato, Menex. 243 D: r^pils 8e airol rjpas avTovs Ka\ (viKfjaafiep KaX f]TT7]dr]p€V.

Xen. Hell. 7, 4, 19 (see above). HdT. 1,93: CKbidovai. Se airal iaivrds.

153. Middle with Reflexive Forms.—The reflexive relation may- be brought out more clearly by adding the reflexive forms to the middle.

wTTo vvKxa TTjv (TWTtjpiav aviTois IjieXXov 7ropitE

Lycurg. 70 (see above).

AeSCHIN. I, 132 : KaTacTKOTTOVfifvos (avrov.

Antiphon, 5, 13: avTos (ravra vofiov defKvos, Having laid dowft a law for yourself. Xen. [R. a.] 2, 10: 6 Se drjpos avros avr

PiND. O. 13, 53 • Mrjbeiav depfvav ydpov avra (^=avra),

154. Of course when the middle has acquired a special significance this is necessary.

. . . To ransom eavTov Xvaao-Oai, AntiphON, 5, 63 ; himself.

Antiphon, 5, 63 (see above).

Plato, Protag. 346 B : avrovs iavrovs TTapapvBfla-Bai.

Com. 'Eavrbv rijxapo{ip.€vos, Self- Tortnentor (Title of a play by Menan- DER).

HOM. II. 10, 378 : ipk Xva-opai, I will ransom myself.

155. Middle and Accusative of the Part Affected. — Of course an accusative of the part affected may be used with the middle.

TO, 61 their (i€T«ira KOTTTovTai |xaxaipT]o-i, Hdt. 2, ; They gash fore- heads with knives. ACTIVE AND MIDDLE 69

61 Hdt. 2, (see above). 3, 14: iiv\r)^aro ttjv Ke(f)a\T]v, He smote his head.

4, 71 : rpixas irepiKfipovrai, /3pa;^toi/ay Trepird/xi/ovrat, neroiTTOv Koi

: 011 plva Kara^va-a-ovTai. 4, 75 -yap Si) Xovovrai vdari to napdirav to aSfia.

Ar. Eccl. 63: aXef^afxivq to crafi oKov.

Soph. Ai. 245 : Kupa KaXvfilxaai Kpyyp-ufKvou. PiND. N. 10,44: eTTteacru/xei'oi varov jjiaXaKalcri KpoKais,

HeS. Sc. 243 : KaTa 8' eBpvTTTOvTO Trapfuis.

• ^'^ HOM. Od. 6, 224--5 TTOTapov XP°'^ vi^eTo . . . aXpT]v.

II. 18, • ^^ ndcrai 30~I X^P^*- | (TTrjdea ivcnXrjyovTo.

156. Details of Difference between the Active and the Middle. —The details of difference between the active and the middle belong to the dictionary. Many of them are conventionally of great im- portance. diroSiSwiAi is / 7-endcr, restore, diroSiSoixai,, / sell ; Savei^w is / letid borroiv (on interest), 8av€i£ojj.ai, / {on interest); Kixp'n|ii is / lend to use, Kixpa- / borrow to use, the aorist in use (xai, being g-rrio-aiATjv ; ex" means I have, / to ; duxi exojJ-ai, cling iyi\^ signifies / married, {of the man), lYT]|jidfiT]v, I the is got married, 7tupsi {of woman) ; (iio-ew / let, |Jiio-0ov|j.ai, / hire. There is a long string of differences between iroieiv and TrouitrOai with verbal nouns in which the active gives the literal side "to fashion," "to bring about," whereas the middle serves to form a periphrasis with the depend- ent substantive for the corresponding verb. So Xoyov iroieiv is to compose a to make a is speech, Xdyov iroicto-Oai, speech (Xeyfiv) ; 68ov irouiv to construct a road, 68ov to 7nake 07ie's irouio-eai, way (oSevetj/) ; tlpijvrjv iroffjo-ai, to bring about a peace (between two contending parties), €ip>ivtiv iroieio-Oai, to fttake an peace (with enemy); vofiovs TiOe'vai, to be a vopoderrjs, to be a lawgiver those who desire (for legislators), vdjioajs Tie€

A few examples by way of illustration are given here.

ISOC. I : 6, ToaavTTjv Trenoirjpai rrjv peTa^oXrjv.

And. 3, I : 6Vt noLela-dai 8iKaiav e'aTiv p^v elpi^vr^v apeivov rj noXepelv.

2 : 6 6 3, oripos K6-qva'ia>v elprjvqv f7roir](raTO izpbs AaKedaipoviovs.

Plato, Lach. 180 C : ivTavda ael Ta9 SiaTpijias TTOiovpfvov.

XEN. An. 6, : TavTa ovTe 7, 41 airohopevos "Zevdrj airebaiKev ovTe rjpii/ Ta ... ovv yiyvopeva ^1/ (T(o(f)pova>pev, f^opeda avTov.

ThUC. 2: oa-Tis Tols . . . 1,40, pi] 8e^apevois -rroXepov avT flprjvrjs iroirj- but 2: (Td, 5, ly, ^vi'f;(a)petro wore a eKUTepoi TToXtpco ecrxov dnodovTas t^v fiprjvTjv TTOLfladai.

Hdt. erroiffTo Se . . 7,42: ttjv 686v. 8,40: /SovXiji/ . TToirfo-aaBai {=:fiov- Xeva-aa-dai). 8, 74: rrjai vT]va\ ovk eXni^ovTes eXXdpylre adat {act. := to shine Not to Upon), expecting make a brilliant record with their ships. 70 GREEK SYNTAX

You sold the Ar. Ach. 830: 7a xo'pt'fit' aTTf'Sov, pigs, but Vesp. 1128:

. . the three obols. GTre'ScoKCa) . rw Kpa(f)ei rpia^oXov, I paid fuller Lys.

...... but 8di/€ ktou 1056-7: ooTts af have'i(TT\rai fjn) aTToBta, Pax, 374-

Tpels tpaxfids. AeSCHYL. fr. 13: (Toi pev yapflaBaL popaifiov, yape'iv 8' epol.

AnACR. fr. 86 : /cat ^aXa/noy, iv t

ThEOGN. 32 : dXX' ale\ ra>v ayaOdv fX^°- HOM. Od. 14, 393: aXX' oye vvv pi]Tpr)v Troir](r6 fifd{a). Ibid. 21,70-1 : oiiSe TtK* ebvvaade. aXX;ji/ | p.vQov Trot.T](Taa-6ai e7ria-;(6a-i>;i/ 11.7,2: Zfvj fie ^ewi/ ayopfjv woLrjaaTO repniKepavvos.

Passive Voice

157. The Passive Voice denotes that the subject receives the action of the verb.

IIoXTJo-TpaTos . . . o-vveXij<()9Tj, Andoc. I, 13; Polystratos was arrested.

6 Tfjs TroXecos . . • Ko

Toij 8€o-[itoTi}piov TcGveus, LVS. 12, 18. Xc'-yerai, Dem. 24, 212; // is said. SiSdo-KCTai dvOpioTTos, Plato, Meno, 87 C, which is actively expressed by dvBpwiTos [lovedvet, PlATO, Soph. 262 C.

158. Instrument, Means, or Cause.—With the passive, the instrument, means, or cause is expressed by the dative or by a prepositional phrase, for which see Prepositions.

Dative :

«» • '"*'•- Xi9w ireirXTivfie'vos, Ar. Ach. 1 2 18; Struck with a stone, x P T I* *

I. To o-OTJvai, Thuc. 2, 21, Xi|Ji<3 8ia<}>0apTivai, ThuC. 3, 57, 3 ; perish of (by, with) hunger.

Dem. 23, 156: Xr](pdTj(T€Tai . . . T(3 . . . Xipoo. 55' 3° • peyaXois Xidois cbroiKo8opr]d(PTOs.

Plato, Rpb. 469 E : ols av (so. XiOois) ^XrjOwai. Tim. 38 E : hfcrpo'is re fpyj/v^ois . . . 8e6evTa.

I : XeN. An. 2, 3, ^aa-iXfvs i^ewXayq rfj ((poSco.

Thug, i, 126, 8: rpvxopevoL rfj ivpoa-ebpiia. 2, 21, 1 (see above). 3, 57,

3 (see above). 7,47, 2: voa-co . . . eme^ovTo, They were pinched with sickness.

HdT. I, 34: alxP'fi (Tidriperi ^X-qOivra. 1,41 : avp

: S' \i6(o. Vesp. 1296 e'-yw dnoXcctXa (TTi^opevos ^aKT-qpla.

AesGHYL. p. V. 237 : Trrjpopalai. KapiTTopai, I am bowed with thrills of anguish. Sept. 607 : nXriyiXs deov ixdcrnyi, Smitten with god's scourge.

PiND. P, 3, 48 ; TToXtoJ p^aXKtu p,iXr] T£Tpa)p,evoi. AGENT OF THE PASSIVE 7 1

HOM. Od. lO, 532 : e(T(f)ayneva vriXh ;(aXK(». 11.8,455: n^Tjyfvre Kfpavva.

159. Agent.—The agent of the passive is put in the geni- tive with VTTO.

. . . I oi . . . Tvpavvoi wo AaKcSaijioviwv KaTcXvSTjorav, ThUC. I, i8, ; Tyratits were abolished by the Lacedaemonians.

Dem. 21, 36 : inro Yi.okv^r\Kov TrXrjyrjvai. 21, 74" ^y<^ S' i""' e)(0pov . . . xi^pi-

vtt <"^ r Koi ^ofxrjv. [47], 15' fTrXi'jyrjs ijxov. 54> 33- ^^ 7^ irputTov fTrXrjyrjv

fiaXiad' vjBpiCTdrji'.

Plato, Conv. 217 E : i'n fie t6 tov ^rj^Bevros inb Tov e_;(ea)r nddos KOfie e'x^''

Xen. An. 1,3, 10 : vop.i^ec vn ipov rjhiKrjddiii.

ThuC. I, 18, I (see above). 4, 12, I : aveKonr] vtt6 tcov 'Adrjvaicov.

HdT. I, 35 : e^eXrjXapevos . . . vtto tov Trarpos.

AR. Av. 285 : VTTO Tcoj/ (TVKo(f>avTa)i' TiXXeTai.

Soph. Ai. 164 : vtto toiovtcov avSpav Oopv^rj.

PiND. N. 2, 20—2 : aXka Kopivdiuv vno (parcju . . . o/cro)

HOM. Od. 9, 66 : Kikovwv vtto 8r]oi6(VTei.

II. Xaol vtt 13,675^6: 8r]i6ovTO I Apytioiv. For the so-called Dative of the Agent with the Passive and, with Verbals, see Dative.

160. Other prepositions than vi:6 are sometimes used with special verbs and in special authors.

in Ik, ot(t of, often in poetry and in Herodotus; Attic prose with the notion of emanation from a source.

ANTIPHON, 281: To>v e^ epov irpaxBivTOiv.

Plato, Theaet. 171 B: i^ aivdvToiv . . . dp(pi.(T^r]Trjcr€Tai.

Xen. An. 1,1,6: TroXeis ... ex j3a(TiXems deBopievai, Cities a gift of the king's.

2 : iK ThuC. I, 20, Twv ^vv€i86t(ov (TCJiicTLi' 'imria pep-qvixrdai, "That infor- mation had been conveyed to Hippias froin the body of theirfellow-conspira- tors. "ShxWtto.

Hdt. 3,62: TCI fvTeraXpeva €k tov Mayov, The orders given of, by the Magus. HOM. II. 2, CK Aios, were loved Zeus. 668-9: ((f>LXT]d(v I They of

" 161. If [^6%, before (comp. Engl. from before ").

Dem. 29, 20 : el . . . prj 7rpoa)poX6yT]TO Trpos tov8' eXevdepos eivai.^

I b. d. att. Redn. Vid. Lutz, Prap. , p. 155. 72 GREEK SYNTAX

Xen. An. 20 : . . . 1,9, cf)L\ovs ye p.riv o^iokoyt'iTai npos ttuvtuiv Kparia-Tos 8ff yeviaOai depaweveiv, He is acknowledged on all hands, etc.

1 1 1 HdT. 8, : "AfSptot . . . alrTjdivTfs npos QfficcrTOKXeos ;^pi^/xaTa ovk eSoaav.

Ar. Nub. II22 : TTpos Tjficov oia Treicrerai tcciKii.

Eur. Med. : et si'in. alib. 255-6 viipl^oyiai \ npos dv8p6s,

Soph. El. 790 : Trpos Ti](Th' vjipiC]] firjTpos, et sim. alib.

p. v. '• AeSCHYL. 767 7 Trpoy Sa/xaproy e^aviaTarai dpovav ;

PiND. O. 2, : TT(v6os 8e nirvfl 25-6 (Sapii \ Kpfcrcr6vu)i> npos dyada>v.

II. '• croL I HOM. 6, rj Kara oIkov I, ; 56-7 apiara TrfiToirjTai \ npos Tpa>a>v. 831 TO. (re npoTi (^acnv A;^tXX^o? bf^iba^^Oai.

" 162. irapd, on the part of," chiefly with verbs of giving, taking, send- ing.

DeM. 21, I 70 : TovTOLS yap 8f] fieyiaTai Sedovrai Sojpeai Trap' vpav-

Xen. An. I, 9, I : napa ndvrcov o/ioXoyetrat, // is acktiowledged on all sides,

HOM. II. 121— 2 : f.v6a K en re Koi (iWos Aios 15, pei^wv dpyaXearepos | nap

dBavdroiai ;^oXos' Ka\ prjvis erv^dr].

163. 8id, through (of the mediator), a post-Homeric construction. Nev- er to be confounded with hid w. ace. 81' i^\ co-uBt);, Ctesias ap. Dem.

[ Phal.] 213; Thanks to me, it is owing to nie that, you were saved. Si' efiou

Ia-b>6i7s> Through me you were saved. A. J. P. xi (1890), 372.

~ '• ISOC. Ep. 4' e^ovXoprjv av avTov crva-Tadrjvai croi St' rjpcov, I should have preferred that he had been commended to you through us (ine). Ar. Ekj. 76: hid (Tov ravra ndvra nepvarai. Through you all these things are sold.

164. oTTiJ, Lat. ah, found chiefly in Thuc. ThUC. 1,17: enpd^dx] re dn avrmv oiSev epyov d^ioXoyov, A^O considerable deed was performed by them. (Some uniformitarians would write vno).

" 165. Wd with the dative revives the plastic under"-sense, and is poeti- cal.

HoM. II. 13, 668 : vno Tpaea-a-i haiirjvai, To be quelled beneath the might of the Trojans.

166. Interchange of Instrument and Agent.—When the instrument is considered as an agent or the agent as an in- strument the construction is reversed. The former construction,

which rests on is the latter in personification, very common ; prose is confined chiefly to miHtary phrases, for which sec Dative.

aXiaKETai, viro 6 is a trireme. rpnipovs, Dem. [53], ; He captured by TJvoYKa- (nrb twv toijtov been fiye.vi\Y.ivu>v KaTTj^opeiv, LyS. 12, 3 ; / have compelled by what has happened to undertake to prosecute this man. PERMISSIVE PASSIVE 73

DeM. 6, 8. 8, 71 : oiSe iTpor]y6r]v ov6' virh Kep8ovs ovd' vno (piXoTijiias. 20,

1 : 166 : viro TTjs . . . Kpavyrjs Koi /Si'as Koi dvaiaxwrias. 23, 43 t^fdidovr av vtto tov ti ttot olecrO' rco ifieripov yf^rjCpiapaTos. [43]- 72^ rj/xcis Trd(T)(eiv iv irap^kriKvQori

Xpovco VTTO Tovroiv Ka\ vtto ttjs vjBpeoos ttjs tovtchv. [53]>6 (see above). 55, 30 : 8i€(f)6appfvov (masc.) vtto vocrov.

AeSCHIN. I, 42.90. 3, 218 : ovK dvayKa^opfvos vtto ttjs iv rrj (pvcrei daTTavrjs.

LyS. 1,49: VTTO Twi/ i/d/io)!/ . . . fveSpevea-dai. 12, 3 (see above).

Plato, Rpb. 609 E : vttu ttjs tcov a-tri'coi/ irovqpias . . . OVK otopeda Setj/ (ra>pa aTToXXvcrdai.

Xen. Conv. 2, 26: ov ^la^opevoL VTTO TOV o'lvov pedveiv. Oec. 16, 14: oi8apS)S av . . . avaivoiro vtto tov 8i otttmto vtto tov pdWov rj pev vXrj KavpaTOS, r] yrj rjXiov.

2 : ThUC. I, 76, VTTO tS)v peyia-Twv viK-qdivres, Tiprjs Koi Beovs koi

I, 126, 10: VTTO TOV Xipov, but 3. 57' 3 Xipo). y, 69, 2: 6 8e Ni*ci'as VTTO Ta>v ira- povTonv eKTTeTTXrjypevos.

HdT. 8, 129 : 8i€(pddpr](rav vtto Trjs daXaaarjs.

18 : VTTO rcis bitten Ar. Ach. e8r]xdrjv Kovias d(jipvs, My eyebrows were by lye.

Soph. Tr. I 104 : TVCpXrjS vtt liT-qs eKireTTopdrjpm.

PiND. O. 2, 21 : eaXcov yap vtto xcppuTcov Trfjpa dvaaKei (ly^)-

• vtto HOM. Od. 5. 393 pfydXov KvpaTos dp6('is} — 167. Permissive Passive. The passive is sometimes used in a per- missive sense.

. . . ov • • • . . . Ti iroiovo-iv ; KaTaXiirovres tt]v x'^P**' "Xovto, aW € ir o \ i o p-

IV/iat did . . . theuiselves KovvTo, Lycurg. 85 ; they do? They suffered to be besieged.

Lycurg. 40 '• ywaiKas . . . dva^iws avratv kuX ttjs TToXetos opcoptvas. Ibid. 85 (see above). Xen. R. L. 1,5' e^J/ff y^Pi al8ei(rdai pev elaiovra ocpdrivai, alSeicrdai. S' e^iovTa.

Ar. Ach. 408-9 : dXX' (KKVKXridrjr. EYP. dXX' ddvvuTov. AIK. aXX' Spas.

• EYP. aXX' f 8' ov Nub. •' ri I kkvkXtj aopai KOTa^aiveiv ^p i8(o, TLS ere dpas, Tj'v tvtttjj ; rvTTTopat.

168. Future Middle in a Passive Sense.—The future middle and the future passive are coincident as to form in the earlier language,^ and even in prose the future middle is often used as a future passive.

As the subsequent future passive forms were developed on the basis

' See also A. J. P. vi (1885), 487-8. ' In fact, there is only one distinctly future passive form in Homer, piyijotaQai, II. 10, 365. 74 GREEK SYNTAX of the in passive aorists -r]v and -Qriv, they naturally incline to the aoristic sense, and this aoristic sense becomes more distinct when the future middle is used as a passive. Hence the contrasted groups.

DURATIVE. AORISTIC. I ^XaitTti), hurt. j3Xd\pofiai (iXajitjaofiai

rt/ida», / honor. Tinijcrofiai TinijOijaofiai

uxptkiu), I help. w(pi\t}(JOjiai b}(pt\r}di}aonat

StjXoiii, I matiifest. SjjXwatrai SijXioGijtJtTai

It is to be noted, however, that consistency in this distinction requires considerable alteration of texts, and that even in the most careful authors such distinctions may lie dormant, just as synonyms lie dormant. Of course, in poetry metre must be allowed to have a certain sway.'

6 SiKaios \i.a(rTiyo}6a\|xu, TiKevTuv iraOuv avacrxi'vSvXevdrja'eTai, PlaTO, Rpb. 36 1 E- 362 A.

DeM. 18, 144' /^fya^' u)(f)f\Tj(T€ade irpos laropiav riov Koivatv. 21, 30: roT? aSt/cjjo-o/xfj/oty (masc). 23, I lO : TToXf/^irya-erat. 1 1 5 : dSt/cijo-erat. [52], Ii:^?;- fiiaiaoiiai. 57' 37 '• '^°-'- Tavra jxaprvp-qa erai.

: avrov ottov Tret'^coj/ AndOC. I, 72 Toiavrrjp diroXoytav nepl TroiTja-o/jim, /itj fxev

Vfias avTos ^r]p,iai(Tnp.ni, TTct'cras Se KTt. Plato, Gorg. 521 E: Kpivovfiai yap ws iv TraiS/oty larpos av Kpivoiro Ka- rrjyopovvTos o\|f07rotov. Rpb. 361 E-362 A (sce above). Tim. 57 E : TO . . . Kt- vrjaofifvov . . . tov Kivqa op,ivov.

XeN. Conv. 7, 5 : eicfipavfla-df. Cyr. 1, ^, g: cos ... (v(j) pavov p.f vol. Ibid. T 8i 8,7,15* "^ S' aXXoj ipLTjaeTai, up8pa fJ-dya dwdfievov ovtcos ws d8eX(p6s ;

Hiero, 9, 9: Tiprja-erai.. ^

ThuC. I, 68, 3 : TToXefirjo-ovrai. 1,81,4: ISXa\fr6p.eSa. 2,87,9: Tifirjaovrai.

8 : : : 3, 40, 3: ^r]fii6)(rfTai. ^rjp.icoa-op.fvoi' (masc). 7, 48, 5 (pdepelcrdai. 67, 3 w

. . dvaaKoXoirte'iadat Hdt. 3, 132: Toiis AlyvTTTiovs IrjTpovs p.eXkovTas

. . eppiKraTo.

Ar. Ach. 409 : oXX' (KKvKXt)aopai (see 167). dno EUR. Andr. 708: el pi) (pdepfj Tr]a8' ws rdxi-a-T (TTeyrjs.

1 1 : Tovs kukcos fl Soph. Ai. 54-5 mvOpane, pr) 8pu Te6vr]K6ras \ yap Trouja-fis,

'iadi Trrjpavovpevos. O. R. 272 : (pdepela-dai.

PiND. P. lO-I : . . . d(TT€(ov 4,

HOM. Od. I, 123: nap' appi (jii\i]a-(ai.

' C. ; orav Cf. Soph. O. 581-2 ttoiV^ (sc. xp^^'v) 7«P V ^V ^poffipopd STjXoKTerai ; |

. . . is with Thuc. 2 : eKiiva Kal iv Odvw 'yio, where STjXdjairai clearly aoristic, i, 144, be the aXXtp Xoyif) iipa rolf tpyoii: Si]Xi>j9i)atTai, where SijXwaeTui might justified by plural tpyoic. PASSIVE OF MIDDLE VERBS 75

II. o6i 12,66: rpdiat adai oiw. 14,481: wSe KaraKreveedOe Ka\ vfi- 24, TroXty kot fifS. 728-9: nplv yap ijSe uKprjs \ Trepaerai.^

i6g. AoRiST Passive for Aorist Middle.—And on the other hand the passive aorist is often used to the exclusion of the aorist middle in love ; iQpd(r9tiv, //e-// {zvas enamored), ISwiieTiv, / could {was enabled'), ePovXijOtjv, / luould {was decided), eiropeveriv, / proceeded {ivas forwarded)?

The following is a list of the most important of these verbs :

al8fl(r6ai-, afxiWacrdai, apvelcrdai, ax&ecrdaL, ^ovXeadai, deiadai, diaXeyeadai, 8iai>oe7(Tdai, dvvaadai, ivavTiovaOai, evdvpeladai, evvoelcrdai, emueXtla-dai, ipav, ev-

Xa^flcrdai, rj^eadai, o'iecrdai, Tropeveadai, irpodvixelcrdai, tpiKoTifJie'icrdaL,

170. Passive of Middle Verbs.—The passive serves on occasion as the passive of the middle as well as the passive of the active. I violence I ^\.6Xfi^a.\., suffer (/ am forced) ; d4)aipov|Aai, am robbed zvas chosen. in \ TJpe'eTiv, I Not so, however, Homer.

: hk KCLi DeM. 28, 14 ovToi fieTa7rep.(j)6r]vai cjidcrKcov vivo tov narpos (cf. zd/d. :

etaeXdelv fiev ov (Ptjaiv cos tov fieTaTrt p'^dpevov).

LyS. • . . . rovTo to e 6 . . . 01 al- I3> 23 eVeiS)) \lr>](f>i(rpa yj/ rj (pier ij, Karep^ovTai s Tcbv pe devTe ^ovXfVTcov. Ibid. 29: f'yJArjcpicrdr].

E : . . . : Plato, Legg. 755 nplv ^ovXrjv rjprja-dai. 770 A rjp-qvTai de Tjp'iv vopo(f)vXaKfs.

26 : : Xen. Conv. 2, ov ^ia^6p.evot (166). Mem. 3, 2, 3 ^aa-iXevs alpeiTui ovx ifa eavTov KaXa>s empeXrjTai, dXX' 'iva ktc. (cf. zb/d. : oTpaTrjyovs alpov vrai).

ThUC. 7'77< 3" aTj-oxpoiVTCfOS tJSt] TeripaprjpfOa.

HdT. 8e av Kai 01 ... e f 1,70' Td^a dno86pevoi Xtyoiev as aTraip irj crav x/TTo ^ap[o)v [cf. zdz'd. : Xiyovai ws . . . '2dpioi dneXoiaTo avrov (SC. rov KprjTrjpa)].

Ar. Nub. f' ""O' . . . : elr avrovs 75^* y pd(poiTo diKT] (cf. 1481-2 ypa

Soph. Ant. 1073 : e/< aov ^id^ovTai rdSe.

171. Active serving as a Passive.—Intransitive verbs of passive signification are construed as passives. So diroevrjo-Kw is regularly used as the passive of aTroKTetvo), ev ird

virb 8c TOV avTov larpov (Jxictkcov aTroOavEiv, AnTIPHON, 4 y 5 ; Alleging

' See further Blass, Rh. Mus. 47 (1892), 269-90. ^ The form, though not distinctively passive at first, became distinctively passive, and hence a passive conception is often possible. 76 GREEK SYNTAX him to have been killed by his physician. lKir£irTovo-iv ol AaKwvKrrai, Xen.

oi . . . Hell. I, I, 32; The Laconizers are cast out. 'AeTjvaioi -irpdYfiaTa

• • • ''"' Athenians were ctx^*' ^o ^n<"'"''» Xen. Hell. 5, i, 5 ; The harassed €v ev Oec. by the pirates. irdaxovora (sc. yr]) iroiet, Xen. 20, 14; Landy when well treated, treats you well.

DeM. [49], I : (f)fvyfi vvv iin (fiov tovttjv ttjv 8iktjv.

AnTIPHON, 47 5: dnodavflv {see above) . 5,48: ovb' ovtoi aTrodvT^a-Kov- o'iv VTT avToi>v Twv TrpoarjKovtcov.

Plato, Apol. 35 D : da-e^tlas (Peiyovra vno MeXr^rov tovtovL Hipp. Mai.

: . . . aKovfiv Koi Ka- 304 E crvfij3€^7]K( 8r] fjioi KaKcos /xei/ v(f)' iifiav oueidl^eadai, Kws 8e vn' fKfivov.

Xen. Hell. I, I, 32 : iKn'nTTOva-iv (see above). Ibid. 5, I, 5 : Trpdyfiara eixov

(see above). Oec. 20, 14 : ev Trda-xovcra (see above).

2 : o'iovrai Koi ThUC. I, 20, "imrapxov Ic}}' 'Appoblov 'ApiaToyeiTovos Tvpavvov wra dnodavelv (cf. ibid.: 'inirdpxco irepiTvxopTes . . . dir (Kreivav). 3, 58,4: divoOavovTas vno Mi^Scui'.

HdT. 4i 125 ' opeovTes Koi tovs ojxovpovs (pevyovras imo ^Kvdeav koi Tera- paypivovs. 8, 16 : 6 yap Sep^eco orparo? . . . avros vn ecovrov fTrnrTe.

Ar. Ach. : ravrl ...... koi ravff in dv- 167-8 Treptet'Se^' irdaxovrd pe \

8pS)V j3ap^dpa>v ;

PiND. O. 2, 21 : eaXwv yap vtvo x^ppdroiv ivrjpa OvaaKti.

HOM. II. I, : fVT au noXXoi . . . s TrinToxTi. 242-3 vcj) "EKTopos \ dv^aKovre

1 3, 61 : OS T fieri i> 8ia 8ovp6s vn dvtpos. 3> 128 : (nacrxov. 6, 74 • dve^rjaap. 3,

796 : eurt. 16, 519: /Sapv^et. 17, 428: TreaovTos. 616 : aiXea-e dvpov. 21,22-3: a>s 8' vno • . . aWoi kts. 8f\(f)'ivos IxOves | (pfvyovTts ncpTrXdcri pvxovs

172. Note that the element of the disagreeable enters into most of these verbs, so that the intransitive construction is an evasion of respon- sibility, fv ndaxo> and fv aKova merely serve to match kokcos nda-xoi and

KuKois QKovco. Cf. A. J. P. vii (1886), 42, Note 2.

173. Passives of Intransitive Verbs. — Passives of intransitive rare, in the rain. verbs are ovos verai, Proverb ; A donkey

ISOC. 11,22: 8iaKfKi.v8vvfvpfvoi'i (j)appdicois (risky medicines) xP^l'-^vr)v.

Ant. 5,75 : Spas 8^ oZv KeKiv8vv(v(TiTai, periclitatuni erit.

ThUC. 3. 23. 5 • h ^^k • • • vnovi(f)opevT) ttoXv to v8a>p eu avrfj eVeTroiij/cft, The snowiness of the night had caused a rise in the water.

Hdt. 2, 22 : et e'xtoi-i^e, vfTO av ravTa ra xo>P^a, If there were any snow- fall, these parts would have raift ott them. 3, 10: va-Srja-av yap 0^/3ai al Al-

. . . to. avo) yvimaL ov yap 8r] verai r^y AlyvTTTov to napdnav.

PiND. O. 10, 76 : df'i8fTo 8e irdv Tepevos, The whole grovewasftill of song,

HOM. Od. 6, 131 : OS T (sc. \i

174. Passive of Verbs that take a Genitive or Da- tive.—An active verb may be turned into the passive, even if it takes a genitive or a dative. But there are Hmits.

oviKeTi Be direiXu aTTCiXovixai, dW tjSt) oXXois, Xen. Conv. 4, 31 ; I ant no lo7iger threatened, but am now threatening others, epuv ttjs Y^vaiKos dvre- Ibid. his lie is loved back pdrai, 8, 3 ; Lovi7ig wife, again,

: 2 : AnTIPHON, 4 /3 7 ov 8iKaia>s Karr^yopovfiai (but /3 lO a Rarrj-yopT)- rai fiov).

Plato, Euthyd. 273 C : elnav ovvravra KaTf(f)povri6r]v vn avro'iv. Lach.

: vtt' Triarevecrtiai. : . . . 181 B enaivfl dp8po)v d^icov Rpb. 55^ C—D orav p.r]- ol dafir/ Tavrrj KaTa(fipoi'0)VTai Trevrjres VTTO tcov 7TXov(ria>v. Xen. Conv. 4, 31 (see above). Ibid. 8, 3 (see above). Hiero, 11,11: ov

Koi vir' fjLovou (piXoio av, dWa epao dvdpaTTcou. Ibid. II, 15: iv8ai\iovu>v yap ov

(f)dovT]dr)(rfi.

Eur. I. A. 1093-4 • a 6' dpera KaT6'jncrd(v Gvarols dp-eXelrat..

Soph. O. R. I I I : eKfjifiyei. Se TdfxeXovfJi.evov.

175. The verb must take the dative without an intervening outer ob- ject. So in StSdi/at irXovTov roiy "EXXt/ctii', Ar. Pax, 1321, Toiy "EXX?;(rii/ cannot be turned into the subject of the passive. Rare is such a construction as dvaa-TTja-avTes 8e avrovs ol . . . €iTtTeTpap.pfvoL rrjv (f)v\aKrjp, ThuC. I, 1 26, II,

ois is where we should expect (TTfTerpanTo t] ^uXok?}. Trjv (fivXaKrjv a manner of inner object.

176. Impersonal Passive of Verbs governing an Oblique Case.—The impersonal construction which is the rule in Latin is rare in Greek.

Koi ANTIPHON, 1,31: e'/iol p.ev ovv 8f8iTiyTjTai ^f jBorjdrjrat rw T(dvea>TL

Kai rco vopcti. Ibid. 2/313: e^' ois KarrjyopfiTai pov (V. 1. KarTjyopflre).

Xen. Vect. I, I : vopl^Mv, d tovto yfvoiro, . . . Tjj . . . TTfvia avToiv eTTiKe- KovpfjcrOai av.

2 : ThUC. 5. 49- dvTfXfyov pr] 8iKaia)s (T(f)a)v KaraSe 8iK.d(rdai, They main- tained that they had not been justly condemned, but KaTa8i8. is probably mid- dle : they had not justly condemned them. See Classen.

177. Deponent Verbs.—The deponent is a middle form

which has no active. vivvojAai, / become, get, 0€do|j,oi, / behold. On the passive aorists of these verbs, see 169.

178. Passive of Deponents expressed by Periphrasis. —The passive of deponents is often expressed by periphrasis.

So especially outside of the passive form (i aor. pass.). Familiar is alriov €xeiv aS paSSive of alriao-Bai. 78 CREEK SYNTAX

vavs aiTiav Hyp. Eux. I exo^^e* irpoBovvai, pro ; Being accused of hav- ing betrayed sJiips.

Eux. i Ibid. : Hyp. pro (see above). 31 rwi/ yap KaTTjyopTjdf'vTuv t6 p^ Xa/36i/ aTToXoylav vtto tt] opyj] tcov SiKaaTcov KaraXeiVernt. Dem. 18, 200: irdvTas av Trpo8f8wKfpai eaxev (SC. r] TroXty) alriav.

LyS. II, 10: ft . . . alriav e'x^'- B: alriap Plato, Rpb. 565 8tj fcrxov vtj-6 tSjp irepav . . . wr (TrijBov-

Xfvovat TO) drjpa).

ThUC. 2,41, 3: povT} yap rcou vvv anorjs Kptiwav is nt'ipav fpxfrai. 7,

81, 5 : (f)fi8a> . . . Tis eyiyvero.

Se . , • TheOGN. 1265-6: e'ycb atbovs oidepirjs erv^ov.

HOM. Od. 2, 136-7 : 8e fo-a-erai. vepfcris fxoi i^ dvdpuincov \

II. . . . 7, 409-10: (j)(t.8(o yiyvfT{ai). 22, 243-4: prjdf Ti 8ovpa>v earto

\rj.

179. Reciprocal Expressions. — Reciprocal relations are expressed by forms of dWrjXcov, for which the reflexive is not infrequently substituted.

Ikcivovs irpos }J.€V Yap |A€t' dXXijXcov e|i.ax€VavTo, irtpl Bk Ta-un^s irpos (r(|>as

oviTovs eiroXe'iATio-av, Isoc. lo, 53 ; They fought against thejn in alliance with one another, but made warfor her against [themselves) one another.

aWrfKoiv :

Isoc. 10, 53 (see above).

LyS. 3, 40 : (I lipa TVfpl 7rai8cov ecpiXopiKfja-apep f]pf2s rrpos aWf)\ovs. Plato, Phaedr. 237 C' ovrt yap eavTols ovre dWrjXoLS opoXoyovaip. Protag. 322 B: fjbUovp dXXijXovs.

XeN. An. I, 2, 27 (TVVfyevovTO dXXr]Xois. Ibid. I, 10,4; 8le(TX0P dXXrjXap

. . . ws aTd8ia, Ibid. : Koi nicrTa TpiaKovra 3, 2, 5 eScoKa/xej/ eXdjSopfp fifj 7rpo8

180. Reciprocal Reflexh 'c :

Isoc. 10, 53 (see 179).

1 1 : Kal AnDOC. 3, dprjpT] yap anov8al noXv 8ia(f)epov(n (T(f)u)V avTcov.

181. Reciprocal and Reflexive in Contrast:

Plato, Phaedr. 237 C: oiVe yap iavrols ovTf dXXr]X ois opoXoyovaw.

Ibid. 263 A : dpcpia^rjrovpfv dXXrjXois re Ka\ rjp'ip airo7s.

182. Repetition of Cognates.—The Greek, like the Latin, delights in the repetition of cognates. Not so the English. washes hand. t6v \t\p xilpa vi^ei, Prov. ; (One) hand (the other) nXos TEJVSES 79

clavus claviim " star •^Xov, Prov. ; pclltt. Comp. One dififereth from an- other star in glory."

Plato, Conv. 195 B: ofioiop ofxoia del TreXd^et. Gorg. 510 B: 6 rto ofioios rep Ofj-oia, Lys. 214 B; t6 o/xoioj' ofioico dvdyKr] dei (piXov eivat.

. . 5oK(l o rdi . . . yap rjp.lv yf ttovtj pos novrj pa, oam av pdXXov 6pi\.Tj, Toaovra fxOioiv yiyvecrdai.^

Ar. Thesm. 955 • X^'-P'- o-^vanre x,fLpa. EpICHARM. fr. 118 (Ahr.): d fie ^ftp rdv Xf'pa "'T"-

Ai. : TLKTOva' dfi. Soph. 522 p^dpts ^(dpiv ydp icmv Tj

HeS. O. et D. 25 : koi Ke papcvs Kepapei Koreei Koi reKTOvi reKrcov.

HOM. Od. 17, 217-8 : vvv 677 KaKos naKov as pev pAXa ndyxv fjyrjXd^fi, \ at(\ Tov opolov ayei deos coy rov opoiov.

183. Mood.—The Greek language has four moods proper. A mood is a tone given to the predication by the speaker or writer. These moods are the indicative, the imperative, the subjunctive, and the optative. The verb has also a nominal form, the infinitive, which is often called a mood, and an adjec- tive form, which is called a participle. Of these moods the indicative alone expresses with uniform directness the relations of time, or tense, and as some of the modal uses cannot be understood without the use of the tenses, it is necessary to consider first the tenses. TENSES

184. The tenses express the relations of time, embracing: 1. The stage of the action, duration in time, kind of time. 2. The period of the action, position in time, sphere of time.

The first tells, for example, whether the action is going on or finished.

The second tells whether the action is past, present, or future.

185. Peculiar to the Greek language, as compared with Latin and English, is the specific form for the relation of attainment called the aorist, the tense of concentrated action, the absolute tense. The kind of time and the sphere of time are both ex- pressed by the tenses of the indicative mood or declarative form

' Aristot. Eth. N. 8,1,6: '69ev rov opoiov

i86. The absence of special forms for designating the kind of time in the future helps to account for many modal combinations. The subjunc- tive and optative often serve to express exact temporal relations in the future.

187. The tenses are further divided into principal and his- torical, or primary and secondary, according as they refer to the present and the future on the one hand (time not past) and to the past on the other.

188. TABLE OF TEMPORAL RELATIONS

Indicative Mood ACTIVE PRESENT TENSE 8 1

Present Tense

189. Specific Present. — Universal Present. — The present is used, as in English, of that which is going on now (specific present), and of statements that apply to all time (uni- versal present).

Specific Present :

Tov 26 /see avSpa opw, Xen. An. I, 8, ; my man.

I go. Universal Present :

irdvTa ... is in motion. pel, Plato, Cratyl. 440 C ; Everything

Plato, Crat. 402 A (97). 440 C (see above).

HdT. 7> 9. y) '• o-TTO Treiprjs navTa dvOpatTroiaL (piXeei yipeadai (97)-

Com. Philem. 4. 40 • ^X^P^^^ Troiova-t. rovs (piXovs al crvyKpiaeis, Compari- sons make enemies o/friettds.

Epicharm. fr. 117 Ahr. : i/dos 6pfi kul v6oi uKovei, (// is) mind {that) sees and niind (that) hears.

191. Present Participle combined with Copula. — The Greek has no special form for the progressive present of English, nor for the progressive tenses generally. In the periphrasis with the present parti- ciple, the participle is generally equivalent to a characteristic adjective or substantive, with which it is often coupled. Notice must also be taken of the position of the copula, which readily resumes its emphasis.'

8€d|JL6vd eo-Ti = ola cctti Seio-Gai, COmp. XeN. Oec. 7. 21. irpoerfJKov eoTi, // is becoming ; irpoo-iJKei, // becomes. alo-9av6fi.evos, Plato, Theaet. 160 A =

(iXfr^'(\Tr\%yIbid. 160 D.

LyCURG. 36 : opoKoyovpevov ecrriv.

DeM. 19. 3^- • ''"'^ y^9 ecTTiv . . . ovTO) (TKaios Koi . . . (r(p68pa picrwv Tr/v

I : ((ttl fie Koi TTciXti/ TTjv TjpfTepav ; 20, 52 p,dK' e^av vopos vplv KaXais. Ibid.

153 ' TTaXatos l(T& 6 vopos Koi KoXats €)(a)p. I 57 • al(TXP°^ • • • '^'^'- xaKOis extou 6 vopos. Ibid. Ka\ tovto ovk ISAE. 7. 14- irpocrriKov tjv. 19: dyvoovpevov ea-riv ov8e Trap' avrols tovtols.

LyS. 13,91 '• rjv virapx^ovra.

Plato, Euthyph. 10 B : ovk apa 8i6ti opap-evov icrn, hia tovto opaTai, aXKa TovvavTLov Stori Spdrai, 8ta tovto opwptvov. (Here the difference be-

is 811 : k!v8w6v tween predication and action insisted on.) Legg. B (prjpt, fnaintain that elvai (j)€pov(rav toIs Traio-i Trjv noXvpadiav, I multifarionsi

' iv See W. J. Alexander in A. J. P. (1883), 291-308, and B. L. G. in J. H. U. Circ. 1882-3, P- 67. 6 82 GREEK SYNTAX — learning is a dangerous thing for children is endangering to children.

. . . Tov Phileb. 1 1 A : opa Sij Trpo? nVa (SC. \6yov) nap' fjfjLLv dfj.(f)i(r(3r]Tf'iv (SC. fi€\- (av aoi Kara voiv Theaet. i6o A-D Xets), fiT] yj Xeyofievos. (see above).

e'crrt. Be delrai . . . XeN. Oec. 7, 21 : o twp a-Teyvuiv i'pya 8e6pevd a-Ttyvcov Ttov TfKvav = sioit := T] veoyvdv Trai8oTpo(f)la. Beofxeva quae egentia quae egeant. 8' iv elai noXeis vno tcov 8f'iTai=^eget. [R. A.] 2, 3: onoa-ai rfj rjnfipw 'Adrj- al vaicov dpxo p^evai (= vtvtjkooi), al pev peydXai 8t,a 8ios dpxovTai, 8e piKpal irdvv

8id ^(pfLav. ecrco ThUC. 4, 109, 2 : ecTTi Se citto tov jBcia-iXecos BLopvyparos Trpovxovaa.

HDT. I, 57 : rjaau ol IleXao-yot ^dp^apov yXacrcrav levTfS {=: j3ap^ap6(f)a>voi). s live olKeovrts 2,61 : Scroi 8e Kapibv etcri eV AlyviTTa> olKeovTf {olKiovcri, ; elai,

ea-ri 1 1 • ^'o'T'' 8e are resident^. 3, 133: ocra es alcrxvvrji' cf)e povra. 4' koI ciWos \6yos e\oiv a>8e ( = TOido"S€).

Ar. Thesm. yj : elV eaT €Ti C^v s'lt' aTToXcoX' EvprniSris. Ran. 35-37 1 Kai ol Kard^a, iravovpyt. yap eyyvs Tfjs Bvpas \ fj8r] j3a8[((>)v elp'i rrjcrB', npaiTa

eSet Well Kock : meinem Marsche bin ich pe \ TpaTTeadai. explained by Auf in die Ndhe Eccl. : gekotntnen. 1093-4 o'lpoi KOKoSaipav, (yyvs ^8t) Trjs dvpas | eXKopevos (ip{i).

: id. Soph. O. R. 1045 : (wv as adj. Phil. 412

I : 8' 'EvvaXioLO uvaKTOs, Koi Movcrecov Archil. elpl eyo) 6epdTva>v pev | f'pa- Tov 8aipov eTTKTTdpfvos.

192. CoNATivE Present. Present of Endeavor. — As continuance involves the notion of incompleteness, the present is used of attempted and intended action (present of endeavor, conative present). But on account of the double use of the present as a tense of continuance and as a tense of attainment, this signification is less prominent and less important than in the imperfect. Notice that this conative sense runs through the moods.

JjidicafiTC :

/ / to fc»vo\>(j.ai., am trying to buv, T am bidding. 8i8a)|Ai, am willing give,

ira . . . I oi I offer, oaKpoverai vfias, Dem. 29, ; He tries to swindle you.

'E-yto-Tatoi . . . T|p,as €K4)oPovcrt, ThuC. 6, 11,2; The Segestans are tryiftg to

us. tov vlov k t € i v e 1 1 to kill her son. DT. , //e wishes frighten i, H 09 ;

Dem. 29, I (see above). to Plato, Phaedr. 273 D : d . . . aXXo n mpl rex^V^ Xo-ywi/ Xe'yetf (have

to : say, want say), aKovoipev liv. Soph. 242 C Xiyf (Ta(j>i(TTfpov 6 Xiyeis.

XeN. An. 7,7,7 '. (^(XavveTf fjpds (k r^crSe r^r ;(a)paf. Thug. 6, 11,2 (see above).

Hdt. I, 109 (see above).

O. : are to Find. 2, 98 nVa ^dXXopep ,- Whom we trying hit? PRAESENS PROPHETICUM 83

193. Other Moods a?id Verbals :

: Tols oivelaOat. ISAE. 2, 28 dTTTjyopfve oii fiTj

ISOC. 4, 17 : Tov ^T] fiovov erridfi^iv noiov [xevov {:= 7roir](racrdai ^ovXofievov) dWa Koi biaTrpd^aaOai ti f^ovXafifvov.

Plato, Protag. 340 E : lu)^fvos fxelC^^v t6 voa-rjfia TToiw, Itt trying to heal the disease I make it worse.

Xen. Hiero, 11, 13: TrXourt^f . . . roi? (piKovs.

tt THUC. 3, 18, I : em MTjdvfivav ms po8i8ofj.evriv earpdrevaav. 3, 22, 4:

Kare^ake yap tls . . . dvTiXap.^avop.fuos . . . KepafMida. 3, 56, 2: TrdXii/ . . .

TTjv fififTepav KaTaXap-^dt'OVTas.

Eur. Phoen. 81 : epiv X i'/ o n a- (a).

Find. O. 13, 58-60: toI p.€u . . . 'E\fvav KOfii^ovrts, oi 8' diro Trdynrav with note. eipyovres. P. 4,106: ay KOfii^Mv,

II. • 8' tov HOM. 10,457 (pdeyyofifvov I'lpa ye Kapr) Kovirjcnv ep.i)(^6r].

194. Present anticipating the Future. — Praesens Propheticum.—The present tense is used more rarely than in Enghsh in anticipation of the future, chiefly in verbs in which ovk the will is equivalent to the deed: d\}.t.,I go, IS), I suffer not, as a yiyvo\t.ai, / a7n becoming. The present vision of the future is called praesens propheticum.

''"' Kal ev Se |Aia [laxTl 'n"^* '"poo'KTao-Oe {win=^shall win) Ik£ivt)v |j.d\\ov

^^ tovtcov tuv . . . eXevOepovre {free shall free), ThUC. 4, 95, 2. \|/T)4)i(r(xdTaiv

. . . oXovTwv . . . Ti irdXis T) fX€v6vTwv T) '^ t) KepSaivei tj pXairTCTai; DeM.

[58]. 37.

LYCURG. 126: 61 yap Trporja-ea-de tovtov tov Kaipov . . ., ovk ecTiv ip-lv p.eTd

• TavTU 8iKr}u Trap' avTojv ddiKOvvTcov Xa^elv Kpeirrovs yap rjbrf yiyvovTai ttjs irapa rwv dSiKovfxevcov Tip.u>pias.

Dem. [58], 37 (see above).

Xen. Cyr. 4, 6, 7 : el ovv a-v p.e 8exTl '''"^•

Thug. I, 121, 4 : p.ia re vIkj} vavfxaxias Kara to elKos dXiaKOvrai. 4, 95, 2

: el ttoXis Ka\ irdaa SiKeXt'a. (see above). 6, 91, 3 avTrj tj Xr](p6rj(reTai, e^erai fj

HdT. 1,207: eacroidels p-ev tt poa-arroXXv e is ndcrav ttjv dpxrjV . . . viKOiv

be ov viKas toctovtov octov el KTe. 3> ^55 • ^'^7 • • • alpeopLev Ba^vXcova. 6, 82 : ro av ecTTi Toi OVK alpeei "Apyos. 6, IO9: rjv yap yvap-j] tt/ ep.fi npoad^, TraTpis

ev 'EXXtiSi. I02 : ti re eXevdeprj Kol noXis nparq tuv ttj 8, Mapboviov 8e, rjv Trddrj, \6yos oii8e\s yiverai- oii8e Tt viKcivTes ol EXXrjves viKoxri, bovXov crop dnoXe- aavTes.

Ar. Eq. 127 : evTaiff' evecTTiv, avTos u)S aTToXXvTai.

Eur. Phoen. ' o-v t' St ToXaLva ttoXc, el 884-5 avyKaTaa-KdnTrf | ixtj Xoyoir

TLS Tols ep,ol(Ti neiveTai. 84 GREEK SYNTAX

Soph. Ph. 113: nipeT ra To^a ravra rrjv Tpoiav fiova (97)'

AeSCHYL. Cho. 550: KTeivu) viv, w? rovvfipov ivviirei rohe. P. V. 171 :

Ibid. : ; aiToa-vXarai.. 767 r] rrpos ddfiapros i^aviaraTai dp6v(oi>

PiND. O. 8,42: Ilfpyafios . . . aXia-Kfrai. P. 4, 48-9: rore . . . i^avi- aravrai.

is 195. etui.—In standard prose eJfic in the indicative future everywhere. In the optative, infinitive, and participle it is now future, now present. The subjunctive is future by virtue of its meaning.

Indicative as afjitiire:

. . . eiri T&jvSe Will to the ctp.1 Tov eiraivov, ThuC. 2, 36, 4 ; / proceed praise I ain of these 7nen. dW eljii, Ar. Pax, 232 ; IVell, going.

8 : 'laa' f'ni I06 : DeM. 16, TavTrjv av fXaxrw, Mf(T(Trjvriv. 20, 99: ei'/Lii. 23, ovK eV fKfivovs 'ipev Koi St' iKeivav acrdevrj noLt'iv avrop ^rjTTfcropev;

Plato, Protag. 335 C : vvv Se . . . fXdflv yap not fie id . . . flp.i.

: av Tis Thug. 2, 36, 4 (see above). 4, 85, 6 aXXa koL ois eVio), rjo-crov f/iiot

IT p6

Ar. Pax, 232 (see above). Eccl. 933 : rdxn ydp elcrtv cos epe.

Soph. Ph. 461 ". vvv 8' dpi irpos vavv. S' HOM. Od. 17, 277 : el 8' (ddXeis, iiripfivov, iyio dpi npondpoidfv. Kficre S' ovk II. 3, 410: e'-yo))/ fipi.

Optative as a future :

AnTIPHON, I, II : eneibrj rdxKTra avTols dnrjyyfXdi] oTi ene^loipi roii Tra-

Tpos TOV (povea. toIs XeN. Hell. 5, I, 34: aXX' 6 'Ayrja-iXaos Ka\ tovtois npoelne, piv, d pf) dnioifv (k on eKTTtp^lfoifv Toiis ^Apydovs, toIs 8e, d pfj ttjs Kopivdov, woXepov e^oicrei eV' avrovs.

Infinitive as a future :

: Ka\ Ka\ to)v LyS. 25, 22 TOT t]8r] KUTifvai irpoaeSoKarf irapa exdpo>v Xrjyfrf- crdai dLKrjv.

: av TOV avTa Plato, Phaed. 103 D Kal t6 nvp ye npoa-iovTos ylrvxpov rj 8oKel dnoXelcrdai. vne ^levai (SC. (tol) fj ovk levai tov XeN. An. I, 3, I : 01 ydp o-TpaTiaTai e(f)aaav Trpoaat.

: : dirievai. : THUC. 4, 98, 4 : dnievai. 5, 7, 3 ene^uvai. 5 6, 49, 4 TvpocrUvai.

Participle as a future :

Plato, Protag. 335 C : dviardpr^v an dmav. ' Tols ThUC. 3, 27, 2 : a)f eTTf^tcov AQriva'loiS.

Ar. Pax, 1 182 : ov ydp rjdeiv e^iav. HISTORICAL PRESENT 85

196. Optative, Infinitive, and Participle of t\Ki notfuture :

: Ibiiv fie eVi levai AndOC. I, 39 ravr f(f>r) Aavpiov (9^).

Plato, Cratyl. 401 D : axf^ov n av ovtol kuO' 'HpaAcXeirov av fjyolvro to. ovra lev at. re iravra Koi neveiv ov8ev.

I : Ituai. XeN. An. I, 3, viroiTTTevov yap ^8t] em l3a(riXea

ThUC. 5, 65, 2 : opMv irpos p^wpioi/ Koprepov louTas o'Cpas.

197. Indicative as a present :

of itself as is and late. The use ilp.i. present poetical

Plato, Conv. 174 B : ayaQijiV eVt Sairar \a(Tiv avToparoi ayadoi (PrOV.).

a- 1 HOM. Od. 4, 401 : TJ)/iOf ap e^ d\6s (I ytpotv a\ios vrjpfprrjs.

II. 2, 87 . TjvTe edvea eiai peXKTcrdav ddivdav.

198. Present in Passionate Questions.— In passionate questions, the present is used as a form of exhortation.

Ti oviv oil II do we not 8i,uK0[jL£v ws T6.\\.

Xen. Cyr. 4, I, 11 (see above). 12: rt oZv . . . ovk iXdav Kva$dpT) Xeyeis

Tavra ;

Eur. Hipp. 1060 : w deal, ri brJTa Tovpov ov \va> (TTOfxa ;

199. Historical Present.—The present tense is used far more frequently than in EngHsh as a lively representation of the past (historical present). Especially strange to us is the free use of the historical present in relative and dependent clauses generally, as these demand more reflection.'

Ti . . . did — iroiovo-iv; SieKaprcpovv, Lycurg. 85 ; What they do? They held out to the end. irws ovv xavr' liroiTjo-ev; ixicrOovrai tovtovi, Dem. 18, did he do this? He hires this 149 ; How, then, fellow.

Lycurg. 85 (see above).

Dem. 18, 149 (see above). [53], 17: rrip^a-as pe . . . iraUi re TTV^ kol dpird^ei pecrov Ka\ adel pe els rds XidoTopias, el prj Tives npocriovTes, ^oavros pov aKovaavres, rrapeyevovro Kal e^0T]6r)(Tav. {(o6ei is an hist. pres. equivalent to an impf. de conatu.)

Plato, Phaedo, 84 D : koI ts aKovaas eyeXaa-e re fjpepa Kal cftrjai.

An. I : evraiida drroTe Kal Xen. I, 10, 8rj Kvpov pverai fj KecfiaXr] rj ;^efp 17 fit^ia. ^aaikevs 8e Ka\ oi avv avrco 8i

Thug. I, 59' ^ • '^''- ^^ rpidKovra VTjes rutv 'Adrjvaiav d(f)iKPOvvTai es rd eVt

' On the conception of the ancients, see Ps.-Long. Trepl v^l/ovg, Rh. Gr. I, p. 275 (Sp.). Some statistics are given A. J. P. xiv, 106, and xvi. 259. 86 GREEK SYNTAX

Kai i OpaKrjs KaraXafi^avova rrjv IloTfiSaiav koi rdXXa affiecrTrjKOTa. 1,91.2:

KfXevd. I, 91. 3- aTro(rT€Xkov(Tiv . . . Trefxirei. 6, 57' 3- '^tvtttov koi divoKTfi- vov(Tiv aiiTuv. 7' 5'' 2 {tey). 8, lO, 3: KaTahiuyKovcriv . . . uTToXXnacri . . . Spfii-

Cova-i. 8, 25, 3 {d/s). 8, 25, 4. 8, 55, 3 (/cr).

Hdt. I, 43 • cLKovTi^av TOP vv, Tov fi€v afiapTuvf i, Tvy x^dvei Se tov Kpoiaov

Traibos. 45: KaroiKTipei . . . Xe'yet. I07: SiSoT (i/s). 3, 4: 6s alptei piv eV

AvKij], iXoiv 8e ovK avrj-yaye is A'tyviVTOv. 3, 53 '• ""^ M'? ^4"- ^fp'tavhpos eV T-qv

* Xwprjv dTTiKTjrat, KTeivova i rov verjvi(TKOv. 5* ' ' ^''''ff' • • • aipifTai . . . aireei.

Ar. pi. 676 : (TTfiT dva(iXf\lras 6pu> tov Upia.

Eur. H. F. 252: o) y^s \o)(evpad' ovs"Apr]s cnreipei, nore. I. T. 16 : ds fp.Trvp' rjkde (SC. 'Ayafj.epvci>u), Kai Xe'yet KaX;^"^' Tate. Soph. El. roiavrd TOV 'HXi'to de LKvvcri 424-5: irapovTos, r]vij(' | Tovvap, e/cXuoi/ f^rjyovpfvov. Ibid. 679- TaKr)6i% (Im, rw rpoTrco SioXXvrat; O. T.

: iv SeiTri'Ots xaXet otiia), irXacrTos a>S 779-80 dvrjp yap /x' inrepTrXria'dels pedrj | Trap'

Ibid. Ibid. : Traia . . . f'irfv TTaTpi. Ibid. 787: -aop^vop-ai. 798: LKvovp.ai. 807 ws opa. Ibid. 812: eKKvXivbeTai. Ibid. 8l^: KTf'ivo).

AeSCHVL. p. V. : ottcos toi/ f'j 228-31 Ta;(i(rra Trnrpwoi' dpovov \ Kade^fT, fvdiis xai 8a[po(riv vepa. yepa \ Siecrroi;^i'ffTO | dp)(Tjv.

200. This use of the present belongs to the original stock of our fam- into and aorist. ily of languages. It antedates the differentiation imperf. Being a familiar form, it is set down as a mark of simplicity (d(/)Aeta) of of its liveliness and its familiar tone it is style. By reason, therefore, both foreign to the leisurely and dignified unfolding of the fepos, and is not found in Homer, whereas it is very common in the rhetorical Vergil, as it is very common in the Attic orators. Nor is it used to any extent, if at it is in the Attic all, in the statuesque Pindaric ode, whereas frequent drama, which seems to have introduced it to higher literature.

201. Annalistic or Note-book Present.—Akin to the Historical

is Annalistic Present, and not always to be distinguished from it, the Pres- ent, Note -book Present, or Present of Registration, which transfers a in of record or register to the historical page. So especially dates births, deaths, and accessions.

An. I, I To Aapeiov Kai IlapTja-aTiSos -yiYvovTai iraiSes 8vo, XeN. I, ; {of)

. . . ekSckc- Darius and Parysatis arc born two sons. Kva|dpT]s |i£v xeXevra,

1 dies and As- Tttt Be 'AoTvoYTis . . . TTjv Pacri\ir]iT)v, Hdi. I, 06; Cyaxares tovtov Be Ar. Ach. tyages succeeds to the throne, kcXeos Yi-yverai, 48.

202. Present of Unity of Time, —The present is used in Greek of actions that are continued from the past into the of time. The present, especially with designations EngHsh translation is often the progressive perfect. PRESENT FOR PERFECT 87

oiKw £VTav9* £K ixcipaKiov, Dem. [47], 53; / have been living there frottt a Kcivov ovSeV Ai. 20 it boy. Yap, aXXov, ixvcvw irdXai, SoPH. ; For he is, none other, I've been tracking long.

Toira rov i Dem. 21,59* \x.(raTavTa ^povov 8t8acr Ke tovs x^P^'^^- [33]> 4 • ovTTti) S' (crrlv ov fTT] fnrd, a(p' to fiev TrXtti/ KaraXeXvKa, fxerpia S' i'vav Tovrois ireipafiai vavrmois epyd^eaQai. [47], 53 (see above).

0^''"^ vfaxTTi LyS. 17. 9 ravra ra ^P^P-nra d^iovfiev rjiiirfpa eivai.

Conv. C: ov S' . . . Plato, 172 dcf)' eyco ^cDKpdrfi trvvdiaTpi^co ovSeVo)

Tpia fTT) icrriv. Phaedo, 84 D : TrdXat . . . Trpoatdel Kol KeXevei.

: vvv bi aU\ enelre iKTLcrav tlcri Hdt. 3, 49 Trjv vijcrov, dWrjXoiai 8id(f)opoi.. 7,

102 : 'EXXaSt . . . atei Kore 62 : rfj ireviT] (TvvTpo(f)6s icm. 8, KOfiKvixtda is "Slpiv iv re earc fK Koi Kze. TTjv 'iTaXlrj, rj irep TjneTtpr] rraXaiov en

AR. Ach. 17: (^ OTOV yo) pvTTToixai (146). Vesp. 317 : TTiKOfiai pev ird- Xat. Ibid. 320: ^ovXopai ye jraXai. Eur. H. F. Srov neTrXois 702-3: xP'^^'^^ y^P V^*? bapos €$ | Koapelade awpa. Soph. Ai. 20 (see above).

• 'o' HOM. Od. 13, 377 o' ^"7 rpieres piyapov icdra Koipaveova-iv.

II. I, 553 • ''"'' Xirjv ere itupos y' ovt e'ipopai ovre peraXXu).

So in the other moods of continuance :

LyS. 17, 8: 'iaaaiv Tjpds tjdr} Tpia err] dpcjiia ^rjrovPTas.

• 8' ev tS ale\ Hdt. 8, 41 avTrj fj peXiToecra-a npoaOe xpdva dvaimpovpivrj

TOTe rjv {[^avaros.

Ar. Vesp. 1074 : pa8ia>s eyco 8i8d^co, Kav apovcros § to nplv. Readily will I teach him e'en if he have been ufttrained before.

203. Perfect of Unity of Time.—This does not exclude the use of the perfect.

TO . . . Lys. / have let the 2<|>t]TToi TJSri TpCa Itt] iJicp.i(r6(i>Ka, 17, 5 ; Sphet- tian property now three years.

Lys. 9, 4- d(f>iK6pevos Trponepvaiv ets tj]v ttoXiv, oCnm 8110 piji/as e'niSfbrjpi]-

KciS KUTeXeyrjv (TTpaTiaiTrjs. 1 7, 5 (see above).

204. Present for Perfect. —The present tense of a num- ber of verbs that involve unity of character or persistence of re- sult, is often translated by the English perfect. viKSt, / am vic- torious, I have conquered ; tjkw, / am here, I have arrived; oixojioi, or / am off, I am gone ; dKoww, I hear have heard ; irvv0dvo(iai, I learn or have learned.

vw 8' Irepov iroXepiev Kaipos tJkei tis, Dem. 3, 6. viKw)i.cv... PacriXea, 88 GREEK SYNTAX

Xen. An. 2, 1,4; We are victorious 07>er {have conquered^ the king. eKcivo

• . • Ktti TOVTi} dKi]Koa3; 7', e<|>Tj, aKovw, Mem. 3, 5, 26. trT€po(jLtOa €Tri(n-tip.T)s,

Theaet. E ; U^e arc Plato, 196 deprived of, have to go without, science.

6 : Dem. 3, (see above). 4. 24 npoTepov ttot aKOixo ^(vikov Tpecjifiv (V Ko-

1 221 \ piv6co TTjv TToKiv, but 9. KOI yap raxiT aKTjKo' avTov \iyeiv.

AnTIPHON. Cf. 3^9- f' ^e avdfVTTjs (k tcov \eyop.iva>v fTTiSe iKwrac, oiiv

avTco o'l airioi dXX twv rffiels Xeyovres ecrp.(v, r; wpa^is (pywv. C: ovK Plato, Gorg. 503 Qepia-roKXea iiKoveis I'lvbpa aya6bv yfyovora ;

Theaet. : xal VTTO 142 B ^(akfKws p.tv yap ('xei Tpavparuiv riviov, p.ak\ov p.rjv alrov alp el TO yeyovos voirrjfjia iv tm (TTpaTevpaTi. Ibid. 196 E (see above).

Xen. An. 2, i, 4 (see above). Mem. 3, 5, 26 (see above).

ThUC. I, 70. 7 • o. fiev av eTrtvoT](ravrfs prj i^fKQaxriv, oLKela (TTepfcrdai " " Tjyovvrai, /n failing to attain an object, they consider that they have lost (are suffering the loss of) "what was really their own."— Morris.

Hdt. 7> 53 • <^^ y^P ^y^ 7rvvddvop,ai, eV apdpas aTparevofitda dya6ovs.

Eur. Hel. 134: ol';^fTai davova-a 8t].

Soph. El. 1326: S) TrXeto-Ta jxapoi, Ka\ (f)p(vci)V Trjratfievoi. Ph. 414 • aXX'

^ ^ovTos ot;^6rai 6ava>i' ; PiND. P. 6, 22-3: opc^ai/i^o/itro) | TirjXfiSq. Od. OVK oiov KXe'os 8ios I18: HOM. I, 298; rj diets, e\Xaj3e 'Opecrrrjs ; 2, oi ov 77CO Tiv' oKovopev. 3, 86-8 : aXXovs pev yap Trdmas, ocroi Tpaxrlv iroXepi- eKaa-Tos dncuXero Kelvov d' av Ka\ ^ov, I Trevdoped', i}\i Xvypco oXedpa- | oXedpov dnevBea drjKe Kpoviav.

Imperfect Tense'

205. The imperfect tense denotes continuance in the past. It is the tense of evolution, of vision.

TO iraiSiov II i^oa, Lys. I, ; The baby was squalling, begafi to squall, squalled.

206. Imperfect with Adverb of Rapidity.—The continuance is in the of it to the absolute mind the narrator ; has nothing do with dura- tion of the action. The aorist is the rule with the expression of definite numbers (see 208), and it is not at all inconsistent with the nature of the imperfect tense that it should be accompanied by an adverb expressing the notion of rapidity.

liri ev6vs exupci ttjv 'ApKaSiav, Xen. Hell. 6, 5, 12; Forthwith he pro- ceeded on his way to Arcadia.

LVS. I, 17 : evdecos eTaparrop-qv. 8, I 5 : evdvs . . . e^ddi^e. 9' 4 • vTrerowov-

' See B. L. A. P. iv C. E. A. P. xvi G., J. (1883), 158-65 ; W. Miller, J. (1895), 139-185. DESCRIPTIVE IMPERFECT 89

fvdeoii. \a)v 13. 35 fi'^ewr apicriv toIs dvdpdai tovtois firoiovv iv ttj /3ovXg.

21,3: evdvs fyvfJ.i'a(Tiap)(ovv.

Xen. An. 3, 4, 27: 01 Se TToAf/iioi Taxii dneTTTjBayv. Hell. 6, 5, 12 (see above).

2 : Thuc. 3, 49, TpiT]pT) (vdvs (iWrjv dTTfo-TeWop, They despatched {were

for despatching) another trirejue at 07ice. 3, 106, i : (jBorjdovv Kara rd^^os. 3,

dia i: ' • . 109, 3: rd^ovs fdmrrov. 3, III, ddaaov dntx^povv. 5' -^' f^^i>s . .

acjiUaav. 5> 21, 3- Kara rd^os fTropfvero. 6, 69, I : f7rJ/ye to crrparoTrfSoi/

evdvs . . . dva\a(B6vT(s rd onXa fii^v? dvTfnjj(rav. 7. 29, I : (v6vs diveiTfpiTov.

7,69,1: dvTfTT'Kr]povvTdsvavsfv6vs. 7> ^4- 3 • fvdvs die(f)6fipovTo. 8,12,3: Sta rd^ovs tov ttKovv enoiovvTo.

HdT. I, 79- fTToiff Kara ra;^os'.

Ar. Nub. 1357 o S' fvdeas . . . i'

TOV Teixovs Ta;^e

HOM. Od. 9, 179 01 8' alyj/ e'icr^aivov Kal eni kXtjIcti Kad'i^ov.

II. 2, 52 : rot 5' T/yt ipovTO p.d\' 2>Ka.

207. Descriptive Imperfect.— The imperfect is employed to represent manners, customs, situations, to describe and to particularize.

^S (sc. TTJs Pov\tJ9) lirierTaTovo-ris ov Sikwv oti8' c^KXi^fidTwy ovS' £la({>opwv ovSe Kai irevias ovik iroXe'iAwv y] •ttoXis €ye\i.ev, dXXa irpos dXXi]Xovs T\(Tv\iav elxov Kal

irpos TOiis aXXovs airavras €lpi]vif)v tJyo^. irapeixov . . . Sitjyov . . . eiroiovv

. . . Isoc. a of 8^ €8oKi|xa^ov, 7, 51-3, description the good old times, i] TOV to, |Ji6va, oi Iyiyvoxtkov t)8tj, rj-yy *XXov, c^duv, eXvov i-irirovs, and SO on to the number of 16 imperfects, Xen. Cyr. 4, 2, 28. 8e aviTwv Hell. 22 Therameftes their Trpo-qYopei. ©rjpane'vTjs, 2, 2, ; was spokes- man.

Isoc. 7, 51-3 (see above).

LyS. Se el (rci)aai 12,8-9: e'yo) neiVwi/a pev rjpurav /SouXotro /i€ )(pr]paTa • 8' ei Xa/3a)i/ 6 e

Plato, Theaet. 143 A: Kal SaaKis 'Adrjva^e d

^aKpaTTj o pr] epepvT)pT]v, Ka\ 8evpo eX6a>v eTrrjviopdov prjv.

Xen. Cyr. 4, 2, 28 (see above). Hell. 2, 2, 22 (see above), /did. 2, 4, 33 :

TjKovTi^ov, e/SaXXoi/, eTo^evov, €

Ibid. • "^^^ eais 6 diveKTeLvov, dnedvijaKov. 6, 4. 3^ f'^X^'^'^ poTTTpov, dneOavev dvrjp.

Ibid. 7, 2, 6-8. (In the spirited account of the fight the imperfect outnum-

bers the aorist 5 to i.) Thug. ws to avTov iv tw 3, 81, 3: edipa>v yiyvopeva, 8i€(f)de ipov lepdii 90 GREEK SYNTAX aKKr]kovi K(u Ik rmv bev^pcuv riues dnrjy^^ovTo, oi d' i>s (Kaarroi eBvvavro avr]- XovvTo.

HDT.7, 173 : e(TTpaTT]yee Se AaKeSai/ioi/twi/ . . . EvaivcTos. 8, 137 (see above).

• : 8' Ar. Ach. 185 fyw 8' e'cfifvyoi/ 01 (8i(OKou Kd/3oo)i/. Eq. 46—8 : ovTos

tov rovs . . . Karayvovs yipovros Tponovs, | | ^KaW, edoimv', fKo^ciKtv', €^7}- irara. Av. 1282: eKopLcav, fTrt iva>v, e ppvTrav, ea-coKparav.

Eur. Hipp. 1 194-8 : eTrrjyt . . . (lTr6p(a6a . . . dae^dWofifv.

Soph. Ai. 298-300 : ijvxfvi^e . . . ea-cfiaCe Kappdxi-ie . . fiK.i(e6\

AeSCHYL. Pers. 416-26: eOpavov . . . fdeivou . . . vtttiovto . . . enXr]-

...... f 6vov rj p( aaero eTvaiov, ppd^tCov.

PiND. P. 4. 240-1 : aptyov x^^P^^S • • • fpfTfTOv . . . dya7rd^ovT(o).

1 10—2 : 01 . . . ol . . . HOM. Od. I, p.€v (ip' oivov efiicryov 6(e) rpmre^as vi^ov Koi n poTidev, tq\ 8e Kpea TToXXa Bare iiVTO.

II. : Kol I, 249 Toil dno y\a)(r(rr)s fjieXiTos yXvKicou piev avSrj.

208. Imperfect with Definite Numbers.—With definite numbers, the aorist is employed (see 243), but when there is a notion of interruption or of continuance into another stage (overlapping), the imperfect is used.

TavTaS'eirotei TCTTapas T|X€pas, XeN. Hell. 2, I, 24; He kept this Up fou?' days (but on the fifth, eirtl qv Tifxcpa irffXTTTT], ^ 27). KaraPas Be kcItu Is to Kard-

'yaiov oiKT]fj.a SiaiTaro eir' «t£o xpia* . . . TtTopTti) 8e cTc'i ccjxlvT) Toiai @pi]i^i, Hdt. went down into the and lived there three 4, 95 ; He underground .room for years, but in the fourth he appeared to the Thracians.

DeM. oXovs 01 ^coKels rovs Se 19, 78: TfTTupas iJiTJvas ecrco^ovd' varepov, 17 TovTOv yj/evdoXoyia ptrd ravd varepov aiirovs aTTcbXefrei/.

Xen. Hell. 2, I, 24 (see above). Hid. 2, 2, 16-7 : 8ieTpi^e Trapd Avadv-

Koi . . . t be Spoi Tpfis p,fjvas TvXiov eVe rjKf TfTapra prjvl, aTrrjyyfiXfv KTf.

'^"' ti 8' Thug. 4. 69. 3 ravTqv pev ttjv rjpepav oXrjv pyd^ovro- ttj vcTTepaia

ocrov Koi ol . . . TTtpl 8eiXr]v TO rdxos ovk dTTfTereXfcrro, eV rrj Nicra/a 8ei(TavT€S ^vvi^rjcrav ro'is ^Adrjvaiois.

Hdt. I, 18—9; (TToXe pee erea €v8(Ka . . . T(S 8e SucoSf/caTO) eTe'i . . . trvvrj- ve'ixdri TL T0i6v8€ yevfadm Trprjypa. 4, 95 (see above). 4, 158: tovtov oi/ceoi/

TOV ^wpov 1^ eTfa- e^86pa> fie crcpeas eTe'i . . . ol Aleves . . . dviyvuxrav fKXnrelv.

• 8e 7, 191 ^pepas yap S77 6;^ei/i.afe rpety TeXos evTopd re TTOieiiVTes Ka\ kutu-

ol . . . tidovres yoTjcri Mdyoi rw dvepat enavcrav reTdpTt] fjpepr}. ' Ar. Thesm. 8' Kev dtibiveiv 502-3: eTepav e-ywS' fj

HoM. Od. 2, 106 sqq. 3, 118 sq. 304 sqq. 4, 360 sqq. 5, 278 sq. 388 sqq. 7, 253 sq. 259 sqq. 267 sqq. 9, 74 sqq. 9, 82 sqq. 10, 80 sq. 142 sqq. 14, 240 sqq. 250 sqq. 285 sqq.

II. 9, 470 sqq. 21, 45 sqq. IMPERFECT AND AORIST 91

209. The above succession of imperfect and aorist is the type, but there are variations.

irevTC 8' '^{Jiepas [A«v r\fTvy(_a.%QV, t^ cktt) iTdccrovTo a|Ji.({>6T£poi us k% (jidx'nv, Five but Thuc. 3, 107, 3 ; days they kept qttiet, on the sixth both parties be- gan to draw up as for battle.

Thuc. 3, 107, 3 (see above).

HdT. 20 : 67rl i'rfa 7. [ikv riaaepa TrXijpea irapaprefTo crTpaTirjv re Koi . . ., 8e (Tf'i TrffiTTTO) avofxiva iuTpaT-qXarf e x^'P' H-^yo-^U nXrjdeos.

HOM. Od. 10, 28 sqq.: iwr^jiap fitv onas vvKras re Koi nXeojjLfv TJfxap, \ rfj 8' Ka\ e\f SfKarr] Tjdi] di>f(j)aivfTo naTp'is cipovpa, \ 8rj TrvpnoXeovras va-arofiev eovras- evd^ vnvos an iyyvs | e'/xe [xev yXvKvs (TTTjXvde KeKfirjura. (Only appar- ent exception. The action is interrupted by the fnrjXvdf.)

II. 6, 174-6: (vvi^jxap ^fLvi(T(Te Kai f'vvea /Sovff dXX' ore lepevcrei/. | S)) koi roTe Koi ISeadai. teKarq e(f)dvr] pododaKTvXos tjojs, | fiiv epeeive ijTee (Tr]p.a (Aorist followed by imperfect.)

210. When the imperfect alone is used, the definite statement is an at all afterthought, or, events, the matter is not fully disposed of by the narrator.

Kai uKe I £v wXeiw irevTc LyC. 21 //e lived at Mtydpoiq tj Ittj, ; Megara more than five years.

Lyc. 21 (see above).

ISAE. : 5, 7 eKeKTT]To (plpf.= ipf.) eKaaros SwSexa err; a 6Xa;(e.

LyS. 2 : Tov be 21, fieTu^v xpovov erpirj pdp)(ov u enra err).

211. Imperfect and Aorist Interwoven. — The two tenses are often so combined that the general statement is given by the aorist and the details of the action by the imperfect, or the situation is described by the imperfect and isolated points presented by the aorist.'

[SwKpdTT)?] TO dpp.aKov iiriev . . . irais ereXeiJTo; PlaTO, Phaedo, 57 A; Socrates drank the poison. How did he die? (Describe the closing scenes.) o-iiK 8' avPTots TaOx' e|iipK€'*'^ eircJpGoDV

8£ Se ...... |Ji£V TTjv Tjireipov, vPpi^ov rds vii 84 eXvp.aivovTO tt)v IleXoTrovvTicrov Kai [AecrTTjv trrdcrecov Kai iroXe'p.wv eiroL'r)(rav. Iiri TToiav twv iroXcoiv ovk ^yap tcrTpaTcaxrav; x\ ircpi Tivas avTwv ovk e|T]p.ap- oviK Tov; 'HXeiuv p.ev p.€pos ti ttjs x<6pa9 d4>£ iXo vto, ttjv Be yfjv ttjv KopivOitov

£T€fiov, . . . 8ia)KiCTav, . . . €^€TroXidpKTj

' See also B. L. G., A. J. P. xiv (1893), 104-6. 92 GREEK SYNTAX

ISOC. • 5, 53~4 ov yap €(f>da(rav roiv exdpcoi/ KpaTTja-apre s Kal navTuv

...... ap.fXT]aavT€s rjva>)(\ovv p.€V eroXficov tjTre iXovv . . . dnecrTe povv . . .

...... be fTTopdovv i^fiTf pTTOv TeKfVTuivTfs Trpos ^coKf'ar noXepov i^rjveyKav. 5, 87: fcrxf yap dirras enidvplas . . . nporjpfiTo yap /Sao-tXet re noXtpdv Ka\

Tovs iraipovs . . . Karayayf^v. 8, 99-IOO (see above). Plato, Phaedo, 57 A (see above).

XeN. Hell. : a>s 8e raira 2, 3, 55-6 fitrev, eiX»cf pev aivb tov ^a>pov 6 2drvpos, fiXKOv Se ol 6 Se . . . (Tre KaXelro .... be vTTTjpiTai. Qtjpapivrjs tj ^ovXfj

T](TV)(iav e i)(fv . . . . o'l h dirr^yayov tov livbpa ktL 22 of of Thuc. 3, (a number examples shifting tenses). 4, 119, 1-3: koI ravra ^vve de vro aipocrav AaKeSaipovioi Kai 01 ^vppa)(^oi 'Adrjvaiois Koi rois

. . . 8e Kai f veridf VTO (nrivhovTo oi8f . . . ^vp^a^ois ^v AaKedaipoviaiv pev 1) Ka\ pev 8j] (Kix^ipla avTT) iyivfTO, ^vvrja-av eV avrji nepl rav pei^ovav (Tirovbuiv bLo. iravTos is Xoyovs. 162; Twv TLS oTriaSe HdT. 2, Alyvirrioiv ards nf piedrjKe 01 Kvver}v, Ka\

IT f IT id els eVl I p e(}>r] ^aaiXTjirj irepiTidevai. 3, 23: ravra aKoixras UoXvKpdrrjs ^a-drj re /cm f^ovXero. HoM. Od. ID, 352-67: A String of imperfects followed by a string of aorists.

212. Interchange of Imperfect and Aorist.—An actual inter- change of tenses is not to be admitted except in the case of a few old pret- In earliest erites, such as Tjv and €(pT]v. the period the typical difference is held fast. The apparent exceptions, then, may be accounted for by un- differentiated forms, by mistaken meanings, by the distributive or intensive use of the imperfect. So e<|rtiv=€

6 € ire ire €S . . . 01 Se Kpoio-os p. SirdpTriv ayyiXov^ eXOovTCS eXeyov "€ir€fi.\|»€

'^|ji6as Kpoicros kt€.", Hdt. I, 69.

: et rovraiv AnTIPH. 6, 27 peu fya> TrpoKaXovpevcov prj TfdiXrjcr a rovs napa-

enbibovai . . . yevopivovs aTTOCJiiivai, fj depdnovTas f^airovai pi] rjOeXov avra av kot iiroiovvro ori alria. ravra peyiara reKpjjpia epov dXrjdfjs rjv fj

Thuc. 2, yi, 2-3: Ylavcravias yap . . . direbihov YlXarauvcn yrjv Kal ttoXiv oiKeiv rr)v (r(f)fre'pav e^ovras avroi/opovs ktL rdbe pev fjplv Trarepes ol vperepoi

Kre. • Ylavaavias ev ebocrav 3, 58, 5 pev yap edairrev avrovs vopl^cov yrj re (f)iXia

Tidevai Kal nap dvbpdai roiovrois Kre. y, 20, 1-2 : nepi re YleXoTTOvvrjaov vavs rpiaKOvra ecrreiXav Kal \apiKXea rbv 'ATToXXoSobpou ap)(ovra, . . . Kal rbv Arjpo- adevrj es ttjv liKeXiav, (oanep e'peXXov, dne areXXov.

Hdt. I, 69 (see above). 3, 41 : bi^^ipevos Se evpiaKe robe. 8, 136: Map- bovios be . . . perd ravra enepyfre ayyeXov es Adrjvas 'AXe^avbpov rbv 'Apvvreo)

1 See B. L. G. on Tind. P. 4, 114. IMPERFECT OF ENDEAVOR 93

. . ., oTi . . . re 6 on koI cuia fi€v Sfia Map86vios Trvdofxevos npo^eivosTf ('itj evepyerrjs

6 AXe^av8pos fVe/MTre. . . . rolcri 8r] irfidop.evos eTre/xTTf.

Eur. Or. '• p S' 552 TvaTi-jp p(v ecpvTevcTf p.e,

PiND. See B. L. G. on P. 1 P. : 4, 14 and 247, and on 5, 76 po'ipd ns (iyev as compared with ibid. 87 : roiis ^Apia-TOTfXrjs uyaye. O. 6, 41, on i'TiKTe.

Od. • vlei : HOM. 4' 5 '"')'' M*'' 'A;^tXX^os pT]^rjvopos TTepnev. Ibid. 8 Tr\v ap' o y ev6 nrnoKxi Kai app-acn, ire p-ire vlecrQai.

II. 2, 42 : ^^ero b S' ev8vv€ koXov sqq. opdcodds, p.a.\aK6v pftrwi/a, | 8e ro ' Troaai S' vno e KaXd VTfydreov, TTepl fiiya fidWe (pdpos \ Xnrapoiaiv SrjcraTO

ireSiXa S' Kzi. 6, 1 airov \ dpcpl tip' u)p.oi(Ttv /3uXero ^l.(f}os dpyvporjXov, 92-3:

Si Sow 8 o 8 ai k e 8f ol p.iv KUTepvKe, yf dvyartpa ijv, \ Tip.fjs j3acnXr]i8os ^p-Lcrv Trdarjs.

7, 303-5 : &s apa ({)ci)vi](Tas SwKe ^i(l>os dpyvporjXop . . . A'ias 8e ^(oar^pa 8i8ov

(polvmi. (fiufivov.

213. Imperfect of Endeavor.—The imperfect is used of attempted and interrupted, of intended and expected actions.*

o TO iravT* (sc. irarpuia) Ifia €yiyv€to, Dem. 39, 6; A// of which (i.e. 7ny to father's estate) was goitig to be mine, x^piov t-irwXei, ISAE. 2, 28; He wasfor selling the piece ofground, oi TraiSwv ewcKa c-yd|xci, ISAE. 6, 24; It not the sake childreti that he wanted to = was for of marry. airwWvfiTjv ( 2 tjBti oTToXovixevos), Antiphon, j3 3 ; / knew {expected) that I was going to be ruined.

Dem. 19,46: KCLi vpels iyeXdre, And you started to laugh. 39,6 (see

2 : tovtov diroiXXvTo Ka\ above). [49]- afpaXevros p.ev rw narpl rw e/^taj to crvp,- 'rotiro) 8e ^oXaiov. 54' 33- pr] TTapa

ISAE. 2, 28 (see above). 5, 44 : fylyvero. 6, 24 (see above).

ISOC. 5. 4S • p^ KaTop6

LyS. 7. 32 : ravra 8e npd^as . . . eKe p8aivov pep ov8ep, tpavTop S' els Kipbv- pov KaOiar-qp.

Antiphon, 2/33 (see above). 2^9: dXovs pep yap . . . rrjs pep ola-Las Koi ^8rj eKcrrrjcropevos, tov 8e crwpaTos t^s noXecos oiiK drre are povprjp.

Phaedr. A : o) . . . ov T68e TO Plato, 230 drdp, eraipe, ap TJp 8ep8pov, e(f)'

; isn't this the tree to oTvep rjyei rjpds But, 7ny friend, which you were going to, wanted to, started out to, take us ?

" ' " Pliny, H. N., Praef. 26, explains the artistic sTroi'et as a manner of conative imperfect (" Apclles faciebat aut Polyclitus, tamquam inchoata semper arte et imper- that fecta "), but Urlichs showed long ago (1857) the aorist outnumbered the imper- fect in the olden time, and Lowy (Inschriften gr. Bildhauer xiii) has counted 260 aorists against 87 imperfects. The imperfect does not appear in the ISS of the IV. century, and becomes more common only in the imperial time (47 imperfects to 18 " aorists). t7ro»;

XeN. -- • ovkow tovtov ov^ev Cyr. 5. 5- tv)(o}1' Trapa aov rjvvrov, d fxfj tuv-

Tovs Hell. TOLavra . . . TTeicraifxi. I, 7. 7- XeyovTfs (Treidov top dijfiot/ edo^t 8e ava^aklcrdaL els irtpav tKKkricrlav.

THUC. • de 4. 60. 5 (i(T(f)d\eia avrols fiuWov iy iyvtro rrjs dvoi^fas. HdT. e 1,68: piaOovTo nap ovk €k8i86vtos ttjv avXfjv. 3, 139: firedyfirjae Kal " TTJs ;(Xa»'iSoy avrfjv Kpoa-eXdiov wveero. 6 8e ^vXaarav . . . Xeyei eyo) ravTijv

TrcoXe'to ovSevos : pep xphl^o.Tos, SiSco/ii be aXXois." 8, 60 napeovTcov yap twv avppd- OVK 01 X03V e^epe Kacrpov ovheva KaTrjyopeeiv. 8, 63 : diroXiiTovTaiv yap 'Adrjvaicov ovKeTL ey ivovTO d^iopa^oL 01 Xonroi. AR. Vesp. 1 16-7: dveireiOev axirov 6v- pfj (pope'iu rpi^aiviop | /xijS' e^Uvai pa^'- 6 S' OVK eneldero. Eur. H. F. 465: dp(f)el3a\X€ (=epeXXfv dp({>i0aXe:v). I. T. 26-9 : eXeoiaa S AvXib TaXaiv' e dXX' fj | virep irvpds perapcria XrjcfiOe'ia Kaivopr/v ^itpei- | e^e-

• KXeylrev \ Aprepis.

HOM. II. 3. • ^' loicriv re 79~°^ "''^ f'^'eTo^d^ovTO Kdprj Kopdovres 'Amatol | Xdecrai r ^^^ v'lov TiTvtTKopevoi e^aXXov. 5' 3'^- "7 M^*" 'Xoi' vne^efbe pev

TToXepoio. 5' 377 • VTre^e(f)epov. 9, 465 : KarepTjTvov. See also the imperfects of 214.

214. Imperfect of Endeavor combined with Aorist of Attainment. — Here the aorist often presents a sharp contrast.

cTTCiOov aviTovs Kai ovs eirciao tovtovs €xa)v e7rop€vo)XT]v, XeN. Cyr. 5, 5, 22 / tried to those who}}! succeeded ; persuade them, and I in persuading I Kal marched on with. OTiverd^avTo tois oirXirais ...eirTJo-ov... tois fiev ovv oirXirais ovk €8wvii0Ti

DeM. • avTov 6 . . . ovToari S' ovk ouS' 32, 17 ^I'^yf TlpaTos e^rjyero, av e

Plato, Theaet. 143 A : iypa-^dp-qv pev t6t evdvs oi/caS' iXdwp vnopvTj- para, vcTepop 8e Kara ctxoXtjp dpapipprjtrKopepos e'ypa(f>op.

Xen. Cyr. 5, 5, 22 (see above).

ThUC. 2, 1—2 : rds Koi 4. npocr^oXas f) TrpocmLTrToiev dne oidovvro. 8\s pev ^ Tp\s dneKpovaapTo. 4, 33, 1-2 (see above). 01 Hdt. 1,69' Tvep'^apres yap AaKe8aip6pioi es ^dp8is xpvcrov lapeopTO . . . 8e edcoKe Kpolcros (T(f)t wpeopevoicri Scoripr/p.

HOM. II. 6, • TW 5' ep\ eireiOev, Koi $1-4 apa 6vp6v s elirtop ^X6e opoKXrjcras Tjvda' | erpe'^ev aSeX0e6o (ppivas fjpcas.

215. eneXXov WITH INFINITIVE, — Expected actioHs are more commonly expressed by efieWov and the infinitive. NEGATIVE IMPERFECT 95

ovrwv ^K t(vos Tpriwov 6p.cX\E Tis o-wGrjoTto-Oai ; Lys. 13, 37; Ho'ii was any of them to escape?

. . . eVt Lys. 3, 32 : rw v^iw Tnarov cos ^yov avrov Tr}v olKiav ttjv ^ifiwvos,

Ibtd. ou avros . . . ov TrXftora efieXXov irpdyfiara e^fiv; 34- e'fieWov 6(j)df]- aecrdai. 1 3, 37 (see above).

Plato, Crat. 418 B: 6 efxeWop a-ot tpelv. Phaedr. 228 C: reXevrap 8e e A \ e . . . /I e ^ia epeiv.

XeN. An. I, 8, I : Trkrjaiov ^v 6 crradfios epda efieXXe KaraXvfiv. Cyr. 3, € I, i: 6(f)6r](Tf(Tdai pe XXe.

I ' . . . a . . . 1 1 THUC. I, 130, dXX' epyois TrpovSrjXov fptXXe irpd^av. 3, 5.

. e 5: ^ocfioKXea Se . . airoTTfp'^ei.v peXXov.

HDT. 2, 43: TOVTODV . . . i'peXXov pvr]pT]v e^eiv. Eccl. AR. Eq. 267: Xeyeiv yva>pT]v ep.eXXov. 597- tovto yap fjptXXov iyu) Xt^eiv. Soph. Ai. 925-6. O. R. 967: Krevelv epeXXov Trarepa top ipop.

PlND. O. 7, 61 : ppaa-dfVTi Se Ztvs apnaXov fieXXev Befiev.

ore Ai' . . . ra Koi HeS. Theogon. 468-9: Si) epeXXe | re^ecrdai. 552: TfXeta-Oat. epeXXe. HOM. Od. 7, 270: epeXXov en $vp€(re(rdai. oiCvl. 9, 475-6: ovk ap tptXXes . . . eSpepai.

II. 6, 52-3: i'peXXe . . . daattp (parallel with imperfect. See 214).

216. Negative Imperfect.—The negative imperfect com- monly denotes resistance to pressure or disappointment. Sim- ple negation is aoristic.

01 otiK 01 8' oviSev 1 [tev riXOov, cX66vTcs Eiroiovv, Dem. 8, 151 ; Some did not come, and those who did come would not do anything, oxik tiraveO' q avOpw- not iros, 25, 57 ; The wench would stop.

Dem. 18, 151 (see above). 18, 250: ov peTfdi8oTe (as was expected by

: iiri not on board my enemies). 21, 163 ovk dpi^aLp" ttjp pavp. He would go the ship (as was expected). 25, 57 (see above). 32, 17: ovk e^r^yero (see

214). 39, 18: OVK inoield'. [44], IJ '• o M^" 'Ap;^idS»7f ovk eydpfi, 6 8e Met-

8vXi8r]s • . . eyrjpep. Koi Plato, Theaet. 142 C: rj-rreiyfro o'UaBe- eVet eyay ebeoprjp crvpf^ov-

Xfvop (SC. avTov KaraXveiv), dXX' ovk rjOeXep.

XeN. Cyr. I, 4, 21 : ovk dplea-ap, dXX' jjpovp npas avTS>v. 4,2,28: epdxero ov8fis, dXX' dpaxrjTi drraXXvpTo. Hell. 2, 2, li: ov SieXeyopTO nepl diaXXayris.

: ovk Ibid. 7, 5, 21 Tr]p pep (TVPTopwTdTrjp irpos rovs TroXepiovs rjye.

^ • °'"' Thug. 2, 23, I : ovk eTre ^fjaap avrols ol 'AdrjvaloL es pax^jv. 3' 3» 2: ovk anebexoPTo . . . rds Karrjyopias. 3, 64, 3: ovk ebex^^^^- 4' 33' to meet but dpr'eirfiarap, dXX' r](TvxaCop, They would not go out them kept

: . . . dXX' quiet. 4, no, l : ws S' ovk ea-TjKovop. 7, 3, 3 ovk en^ye f](rvxa{,e. 96 GREEK SYNTAX

. . re 01; Ti HdT. I, 76: "imi/ef . . ovK erre 10OVTO. 3, $0 8ia\fyofifV(p

ov8(va (8i8ov. • ^^ TrpotrStf Xe'yero, tVropeoj/ri re \6yov 5> 4^ ^ KXeofAf"fa

TfKovcra . . . yvvf] . . . ovKtri e'riKTe to 8fvTepov.

1 1 avfneidfv avrbv AR. Vesp. 6-7: fifj (popf'iv Tpi^aviov \ fj.i]8' i^Uvai dvpa^'- 6 8' OVK enddfTO (213).

Com. Pherecr. 2, 289: ou'Sfl? yap edex^''"' °^^' o-ve(oye p.01 Ovpav.

Eur. Phoen. 405 : to yevos OVK e ^o

AeSCHYL. Ag. I2I2 : eneidov ouSeV ov'SeV, coy Tab' ^p.n\aKov^

PiND. P. 4> 86 : Tou p.€V oil ylvaxT Kov.

HOM. Od. : 8e deol oiiKiT eVet to 4, 12-3 'EXivrj yovov f(f)aivov, \ S17 npoiTOv tyeiparo irald' epaTtiv^v. ov8' f 6, 161-2: Tov ov Ti TT fl 6' 11.2,779: p.d)(0VT0. | dyado. (f)poveovTa.

—Schol. I02 : ("6 TTapaTaTiKos ttju ttoXKukis tovto Xeyovcrav e8r)\(0(Tf." BL.) l6, ovK€t' ep.ip.v€.

217. The imperfect as the tense of past impressions is used : I. Imperfect in Description of Scenery.— In descrip- tions of scenery as well as of events.

TO 8' 'EW'nviKov «U A€VKO(j)pv»' (sc. dTTTiXGev), ev6a tjv 'ApreyiSos . . . itphv jJidXa ttYiov, Xen. Hell. 3, 2, 19.

218. 2. Imperfect of Points Assumed.—Of points pre- viously assumed in argument.

aviTwv 6 ev (Lco-bi 7ap 8t)(j.otikos tjv, Plato, Rpb. 587 C; T/te democrat was {as we said) in the middle.

Plato, De lusto, 373 C-D : piTpov ((TTadpos, dpi6p.6s, Xoyos) yap rjv w

TavT e KpivfTO. Legg. 867 D : arepos €(f>evye Ta 8vo (sc. fTTj), The other was to be in exile {as ive have seen) the two years. Rpb. 522 A : dXX' r)v fKfivi]

(sc. fiovaiKT]) . . . dvTivTpo^os Trjs yvuvaa-TiKrjs, et pfpvrjaai. 587 C (see above). — 2ig. 3. Imperfect of Former Views. Of views that were once fondly entertained.

TOVTO ... oil SiSaKTov Oec. lo uiiT)v ctvai, Xen. 12, ; / thought that this was ftot to be taught.

: CO ISAE. 7. I~2 prjv pev, S) civ8pes, TTpoarjKfiv ov Tas TOiavTas dp(f)i(r^T]Tfl(Tdai

Ttoirjcreis KTf. foiKf 8 ov8fv npovpyov tovto eivai. Xen. Oec. 12, 10 (see above).

220. 4. Imperfect of Sudden Appreciation of Real

' Cited by E. Abbott on p. 210 of his translation of Curtius' Erlaut., in oppo- sition to the distinction made by Curtius between t-:Tei9ov and tTruaa. IMPERFECT FOR PRESENT 97

State of Affairs.—Imperfect for Present.—Of sudden of with appreciation of a real state things, regularly apa {cipa).

ov TOVT* V KaKov Pl Yap T) 6v8aifi.ovCa, is coiK€, diraXXaYtj, ATO, Gorg. 478 C. totjtI Ti to MEF. vai Ak. IV/ial's AIK. TJv irpaviia; xoipos Aio, Ach. 767 ; all this ? A pig, by Jove.

B: w tovtX tl Plato, Conv. 213 'Hpa/cXet?, rjv; ScoKpar?/? ovros ; Gorg.

478 C (see above). Phaedr. 227 B : drap Avalas rjv, cos toiKev, fV liarei. Ibid. to Isn't 230 A: ap' oil rdSe rjv 8ev8pov, f(f)' onep rjyfs rjpds ; this the tree, etc..'' (213).

10: tovt Ibid. : . . . XeN. Cyr. I, 3, up' rjv rj larj-yopia. I, 4, 27 ratV (ipa

Oec. 20 : XvTrai Kol evfoipas fioi. I, upa rjcrav tjSovols TTfpinfTTfppivai, So they turn out to be {are after all) pains sugar-coated with pleasure.

: ovk to HdT. 3, 65 eV TT] yap avdpwTrrjir] cjivai ivr)v (ipa piWov y'lveaOai. drro-

: 8e Ka\ Acat v Tpdneiv. 4, 64 deppa dvOpdyirov 7ra)(v \apirpov rj lipa. 11 cos Ar. Ach. 767 (see above). Eq. 70: piyav lip' f^X^S', S iroTvia, top

baKTvkov. TovTi Tl tIs e'l ttot, tTeov ; Ibid. : Vesp. 183-4: rjv; \ avOpcon', 451 (TV S' dyapiCTTOS rjcro apa.

Eur. H. F. : S> Zev, (J 8e 339-41 pdrrfv lip' opoyapov iKTq(rdpr]v, \ pdrrjv TratSof a' e v • crv 8' 'SoAceiy etVat yovf' tpov kXj'j ^ope \ fjcrd' lip irjaaov rj (})[Xos.

I. A. 404 : alal, (fjiXovs lip' ovx^

S' : ThEOGN. 700: TU)V aKk

(piXTepov (iXXo naTptjs.

HOM. ' w nonoi, Sjj eV Od.4, 333-4 ^ paka KpaT(p6(f>povos dv8p6s fivjj | ^'de-

• °^^' Xov (vvr]6rjvai dvd\Ki8es avTol iovres. 9' -3° "P e/xfXX' iTapoicn (pavels ovk epoTdvos ea-ea-dai. 475-6 (215). II, 553: lip' epeXXts. 13,209-10: w OVK TTuvTa ov8e SUaioi TTOTTOt, lipa vor]poves \ rjaau '^aajKoiv rjyrjTopes.

: Toi • '''^ ^^ ^^'^ 11.4, 155 ddvaTov vv opKi fTapvov. 5- -'-*5 y- "P i'peX-

: croi linroTa Xov ovTjaeiv. 1 6, 33 ovk lipa ye TraTrjp fjv UrjXevs.

221. Origin of Modal eSci, exp^v, etc. —From this use of the imper-

fect comes, perhaps, the use of e8ei, exprjv, and the like, with the infinitive, in opposition to the infinitive. eSei

222. Imperfect of Unity of Time.— As the present is used of ac- tions that are continued from the past into the present (see 202), so the imperfect is used of actions that are continued into the past from a re- moter past.

/ had been astonished at it e. be- e9avfi.a£ov irdXai, Ar. Av. 1670 ; long (i. fore you asked me the question).

Plato, Conv. 209 C : d TraXat eKvei TiKrei. 7 98 GREEK SYNTAX

HdT. 4, I : al yap raiv '2Kv6iu)V yvvaiKfi, as (T(pi o'l ap8p€i aTT^crai' -x^povov

TToXXoj/, ecfioiTfov irapa rovs BovXovs.

Ar. Nub. 131 1-2: oinai yap avrov avTi)( (vprjativ ovep ndXai nor fTrrjTfi.

: Al' irukai Av. 1670 (see above). LyS. 1033 vi) uprjads yi p, cos ye p' ((f)pf(0- pvXei-

: Sf . . . v . . . PiND. P. 4, 25-7 ScoSeKO Tvporepov apepas (})f popt (IvaXioy 86pv. ev8op iovra HOM. Od. 23, 29 : TrjXtpaxos 8' apa piv TrdXai jjBeev (= Inipf.) {dudutn noverat). iani tenebat dudum. II. 23, 871 : arap 8rf olcttov ^x^^ troKai, sagtttam

223. This overlapping use of the imperfect (comp. 208) is especially important in correlated temporal sentences. See Temporal Sentences. avTui airiwK 8c eirtiST) St KaXws elxev, tKcivos (i».v wxtTo, €70) cKaOcvSov, LVS. I, he had he had, had had) he took and 23 ; After {thought enough, himself off to I slept {proceeded to go sleep),

224. Imperfect apparently used as a PLUPERFECT.-^Of course in those verbs in which the present is used as a perfect (204), the imper- fect is used as a pluperfect.

6 was in had been €<|>«vY€v W£vo<|)«v, Xen. An. 5, 3, 7 ; Xetiophon exile, banished.

Plato, Menex. 242 E : pi6' hv tots tovs ^ap^dpovs iviKcav, tovtovs vikwv- T€s I8ia.

225. Imperfect of •^kciv and otxeo-Oai used Aoristically. — ^kov

and (oxoprjv are often used aoristically.

t-irtt 8e 1 T) K6 TerapTo) \>.r]vi, dirTJYYeiXev ktI., Xen. Hell. 2, 2, 7 (208). ^xtro

Se irpos 9f6v, PiND. N. 7, 40.

Perfect Tense

226. The perfect tense expresses completion in the present, and hence is sometimes called the present perfect.

TTfird lOO have dKT]KdaTC, cwpdiKaTC, vOare, LyS. 12, ; Vou heard, you

have seen, you have felt. einrcirX-qKao-iv vjiolv to. ira, Plato, Apol. 23 E; They have filled your ears. TeGairrai . . . Kifiwv Trpb tov otrreoSj HdT. 6, lies buried the 103 ; Kimon {has been, is) before city.

DeM. 3, 22: TrpoTreTTorai . . . ra rrjs TroXecos irpdypara. 4> 4^ ^ Trpea^ets 7reTrop(f)ep a)S ^aa-iXea. 6,37: LKavws f'iprjrai. Ka\ 186: AeSCHIN. 2, 147: eTTj yap fjhrj ^f^iaKev evevrjuovra Terrapa. 3, iv ivravOa rj Mapadavi pdx^) yeypaiTTai. Lvs. 12, 100 (see above). PERFECT OF RESULT 99

Plato, Apol. 23 E (see above). Gorg. 448 A: ovhds fie na rjpwrriKe

Kaivov ovbkv ttoXXwj/ irciiv. Meno, 93 A : ffioiye . . . Koi eiVat Bokovciv evBabe

to. koi f'ri elvai. Prot. aya6o\ ttoXitiko, yeyovivai ovx rjirov rj 314 D: ovk aKTj Koare, on ov a-xoXrj (ilrw ;

XeN. Hell. 6, 5. 37- 8fv8pa €KKeK6cf)acri Koi oIklus KaraKe KavKaan koi

^prjfMTa Koi irpo^ara 8it] pnaKacr i.

HdT. 6, 103 (see above). 7, 162 : ex toO iviavrov to eap . . . f$apaipT]Tai.

Soph. Ai. 480 : navr dKTjKoas \6yov.

PiND. O. 10, I— : TOP . . . nodi ) 3 'OXvfiTTioviKav dvdyv(OT€ fioi (f>pev6s \ e'/iof yfypmrrai {stands written). Od. ov er HOM. 2,63-4- yap dvcrxfra epya TfTev)(aTai., ov8' tn koKoos I o'lKos epos StdXcoXe.

II. I, 125 : aXXa TO. p.ev iroXicov e^ eirpdOopev, to. 8e8a(rTai.

227. The perfect looks at both ends of an action. The time between these ends is considered as a present. When one end is considered, the is aorist. present used ; when the other, the Hence present and perfect are often used side by side, arid the translation into English is often pres- ent (228); the aorist is the shorthand of the perfect (248-51); and the per- fect is sometimes used even of a past action that is dated (233).

228. Perfect of Maintenance of Result.—The perfect is largely used in Greek for the maintenance of the result, and the translation into English is often present : KCKXufiai, j^f name IS ; |A€'|xvTi|Aai, / Jiave recalled, I remember ; KCKTrjiiai, / Jiave got, I own ; €teio-nai, / Jiave made it my rule, I am accustomed.

KaXbv . . . Prot. T€xviina apa KeKxtiirai, €i-n-£p KeKTTi

AeSCHIN. 3, 144- (TVveldLa-de ^8tj rddtKTjpaTa rd tovtov dKoveiv.

AnTIPHON, 5, 54: TedvijKev 6 dv^p. Prot. Plato, 319 A (see above). Tim. 23 B: eva yrjs KaraKXva-fiov p,e- p.vrjo'de TToXXwi' epirpoadev yeyovormv.

XeN. Oec. : 9, 4 irpos pea-qp^plav dvairiiTTaTai (SC. ff oIkio).

LHUC. 82, '• S' 01 TToXXoi ovres Ke 3, 7 paov KUKovpyoi Be^iol KXrjvrai rj dpa- 6eis dyadoL

HdT. vi/ 8e 2, 47: AiyvTmoi piapov rjyrjvTai Q-qpiov eivai. 4> 28: repas vevopiarai. 6, 103 (226).

Ar. Ach. : ndvv 'icruis 993 T) yepovTtov vepopiKas pe crv ;

Soph. El. IIOI : A'tyicrOov evO' wKTjKep l TraXai.

PiND. P. ; 4. 248 TToXXotcrt S' dyrjpai (To(f>ias erepois. Sappho, 2, 9—10: aXXa XeiVTOV b' avTiKa Kap, pev yXaaaa eaye, | XP^ '^^P xnra8e8p6puK€V. lOO GREEK SYNTAX

HeS. Theog. 726 : eXrjXarai. 1-1'- Kcxvrai. 728: nf(f)va(ri. 730 : KtKpv-

(f)aTai. dXka HOM. Od. 5,412: Xto-O")) 8' di/aSfSpo/xe irtTpr]. 6,44-5: fidX' aWprj 8' (Tri8( TreTTTarat dvv((f)(Xos, XfVKrj 8pop.(v a'iyXr]. I

— with 229. Intensive Perfect. Not to be confounded this use, which has many English analogies, is the survival of the old intensive perfects, and verbs of emotion. chiefly in verbs of sound

Verlfs of Soujid (Onomatopoetic Verbs) :

Most of these are poetic or popular. KCKpaya, / am bawling, bawling ; o-eo-t-yriKa, / am nimn.

avaXwcros Sc AeSCHIN. Xapidv (A€v o-eo->7iiKas, KCKpavas, 3, 2l8; When have it are in you get money joii are mum, luhen you spent you full cry.

Aeschin. 3, 218 (see above).

: Kara al HdT. 4, 183 TfTpiyaai Trep vvKTepiSes.

Ar. Vesp. 944 : Ti a-ea-LcoTrrjKas ; Soph. Tr. 1072: /3e'/3pi;x« K\da>u. Ti HeS. O. et D. 207 : 8aipovirj, XeXijKas ;

1-2 : 8( HOM. Od. 5, 41 dpcfil Kvp-a I jSelipvxef podiov.

. II. 4, 433-5 : otes . . . ecTTrjKaa-Lv . . d^rj^fS pe fJ.aKviai. lO, 362 : pfprj- Kcoy. 17, 264: ^i^pvxfv peya Kvp.a.

230. Emotional Perfects: 8e8i' w SeSia, / am in a perfect tremble, I quiver and quake. avSpcs

Ikcivov DeM. 1 'AOT]vaiot (IT) TovTOis ja«t' TToXeiieiv dva7KaaO

/cm . . . kcu . . . DeM. 4, 8 : piafi Tis fKdvov 8e'Si(e) (f)dovfl KaTenTTjxe p-ev- 8€ TOi udvTa vvv. 14, 4 (see above). 25.1: ev rtdavpaKa.

Plato, Phaedo, 64 D: (^atVera/ trot (f)iXoa6(f)ov dv8p6s flvai {(TTTOvSaKf-

Theaet. l6l B-C : olaO' ovi> . . . o vai irepl ras T]8ovds KoXovpevas ; davpd((o

. . . ; ... TT]v 8' dpxTjv Tov \6yov rtdavpaKa.

Soph. Ai. 139: peyav oKvov e'x'^ '^«'' TTf^o^rjpai. re Kai Simon. Am. 7, 28 : t^v pev yeXd yiyrjOev rjpeprjv. TyRT. 12, 28: apyoXew re tto^o) Trdaa KfKr]8f noXis.

HOM. Od. 6, 106 : yeyr]6e 84 re (fipeva AijTd).

II. : ov8e dXX' lO, 93-4 poi ^Top I epiT€8ov, dXaXvKTrjpat.

231. Verbs of Sight : exact. SeSopKa, / look. The classification cannot always be T£eav(iaKfl, I am astonished, is also TeOavfiaKa, / atn agaze. rdv : TO 8k KXfos (intr.) '0XvpTnd8<>)v. PiND. O. I, 96-7 I TTJXddfv 8i8opK€ Kai HeS. O. et D. 508 : pipvKe 8k yaia vXt). PERFECT FOR FUTURE PERFECT lOI

HOM. Od. 19,446: TrCp 5' ofpdaXfjLo'iai dedopKots.

So also the solitary Verb of Smell, for which see HoM. Od. 9, 210.

232. Ver^s of Gesture, Expression, atui the like : are co-KvdpcoiraKao-i, Dem. 54, 34 ; T/iej grim and gruni. 8e8po7|xevos, grimly gripping. Kc'xrjva, / a7n all agape.

Dem. 54, 34 (see above).

Ar. • ' ^ : t6v re del Ke Eq. 755 k^X^^^''- 18-9 np6i XeyovT | )(T]vas.

HeS. Theotj. 826 : yXaxrcrTja-ii/ 8vo

HOM. Od. II, 222 : ^vxr] . . . ireiTOTrjTai.

II. 2,90: TTfTTOTTjaTai, They are all a-flutter. 13, 393: Koi/tor hihpa- his dust. yfiivos al[jiaTO€(T(rT}s, With fists full of bloody For the use of the Aorist as a Perfect, see 248-51.

233. Perfect of an Action that is Dated.—The Greek perfect may be used of a past action even when it is dated. eiriSeSciKTai // has been shown then. t^tc, Isae. 3, 7 ; {nay, was shown)

LyCURG. 103 : "EKTcop yap rols Tpaxrl rrapaKeXevofievos vnep ttjs Trarpidos raSe

6 'ip TjKev.

• icai to Dem. 21, 7 v^pio-pai pev e'-yo) TrpoireTrr)\dKt(rTai a-mpa rovpiou vvvl. i^dvTa Tore, dyavielrai. 8e Koi KpidrjareTai to Trpdypa 3^'^' [raOr'] dcfielrai Tore.

ISAE. 3, 7 (see above).

234. Perfect for Future Perfect. —As the present may be used rhetorically for the future, so the perfect may be used for the future per- fect.

el 7ap irpoX€it|/cis \k{f) . . ., olxoK'^°'^°' {olxopffrBa is a practical perfect), thou shall abaftdon I am Eur. Or. 304-5 ; If me, gotte {lost).

ei ((ttui . . 6 Se . . . eiSo)? . . . evo- AeSCHIN. I, 90: yap tj pev npd^is avTrj .,

. . 6 Se . . . . . 6 koi Yoy earat ., Kpivopevos d^iaxTfi ., dvjj prjrai vopos tj dXrjdeia, St' Kal 8f8eiKTat (f)av{pa 686s, tjs ktL

An doc. I, 146 : idv pe vvvl 8ia(f)dfiprjTf, ovk eariv iiplv en Xonros tov yivovs

Tov fjpeTepov ov8eis, dXX' ot';^erat irdv irpoppi^ov.

: idv Plato, Hipparch. 231 C-D

Eur. Or. : ei voaov Tiv , 304-5 yap 7rpoXei>|/'etf p' r) Trpo(T(8pla \ KTrjo-rj otxo- pea-da (see above).

• Soph. O. R. I166 oXioXas, el' o-e TavT ipr](Topai TrdXti/. Ph. 75~^- wot' el' oXaXa Kal (re ^vvdiv. pe t6^u)V eyKpaTTjS al(rdr](TfTai, \ npodfp(o On the Periphrastic Perfect, see 286-8.

On the Gnomic Perfect, see 257. I02 GREEK SYNTAX

Pluperfect Tense

235- The Pluperfect denotes completion in the past. It may be defined as the perfect of the past, and hence is naturally associated with the imperfect. It is more distinctly than in Latin and in English the tense of fixed condition.

(TiraviuTcpa to. liriTijSeia ^v to ykv 7op dvijXwro, to Be Sii] p"7ro

20: 8e . . . Koi '• LyS. 13, T) /SonXiy 8i((j>dapT0 oXiyapxias eVe^v/xei. 13, 5-

TrXota TTapea-KevacTTO Koi 01 iyyvrjrai (Toipoi rjaav.

11 : . . . XeN; Cyr. 3,. 2, tVei de rjpia-TTjKfaav, tvdvs eTfi)(i^€ (f)povpiov.

Hell. I, I, 32 : eVt Se t6 j'axjriKou, o cKtii/os rjOpoiKet. . . ., e^€Tr(p(p6rj Kparrjcriir- irl8as. Ibid. I,3>20: eVfi he aiirols TTape (t Kevacrro, vvktos civoi^avrts ras ttv-

\as . . . (lariyayov to (TTpcLTevpa, When they had all their preparations made,

Ibid. 21 : €k they opened the gates by night and introduced the army. 6, 5, Koi yap TTjS TTpoadfp ddvpias eSd/cet tl dve iXT](f)evai ttjv ttoXiv, on evf^fjiXrjKei Ibid. fts TTjv 'ApKabiav koi hjjovvTi ttjv xapav oiiSel? rjdeXtjKet paxfcydai. 6, 5. f 23: 01 . . . Qr)(iaioi icaXa>s crcpiaiv (Sovto f'xeiv, eVfl ^e^orjdr] Kecrav p4v, iroXe-

Ibid. 21 : piov 8e ov8fva eVt eapcov eV ttj x^P9- Ibid. 6, 5, 50 (see above). 7, 5, eVet ye pr]v ereTaKTO ovtS to crrparevpa . . ., ttjv . . . crvvTopaTOTrjv npos toiis

TToXepiovs ovK fjyi.

ThuC. 2, 59. I • rjXXoldiVTo Tcis yva>pas. 4' -9- - (opfjiTjvTo 8iaKiv8vvfV(rai.

: . . . Koi HdT. I, 85 6 KpoiiTos TO TTciv fS avTov eTreTTOLt'jKee Koi hr/ e's AeX-

: Se (fiovs TTfpl ai/Tov eTre7r6p(f)ee. 8, 72 OXvpTria Koi Kdpveia Trapotp^wxee ^'87.

PiND. O. 6, : dXX' eV Kf 53-4 I KpvTTTO yap (Txolva.

HES. Sc. 143: T]Xt]XaVTO. 154: reTVKTO. 208 : fTtrVKTO. 2l8: ((TTrjplKTO.

288 : f(TTdXaT(o).

Hymn. HoM. I, : 8' re Ka\ (vvea viiKTas diXnTOis toSi- 91-102 Atjtw iwfjpdp \ v€(T(Ti TviirapTo ... at S' '\piv Trpovirepyjrav KTe. (cf. 208).

HoM. Od. 4, 132 : xP^^'f ^' ^^' x^'^^^ KfKpdavTO. 4, 135 : TeTawa-TO.

II. ' ^' ^^ 8(8(TO Kal 8(Ka . . . 6 S' 5. 387^90 X^^'^^^ Kepdpoi Tpds prjvas. | f^eKXf^{v"Apr]a (cf. 2o8). lO, I55~6: ev8', vtto 8' iCTTpatTo pivov j3o6s dypav- Xoio, VTTO rerafvcrTo lo, ov nco ndv I aiiTcip KpdTeacf)!, Tdnrji cf)afiv6s. 54°- ot' avTol. fiprjTO eiTos, tip' rjXvBov For the Greek use of the Aorist, where English and Latin would use the Pluperfect, see 253.

236. Pluperfect of Rapid Relative Completion.—The pluper- fect is sometimes used to denote rapid relative completion. The later Greek writers often abuse it.'

' Rutherford, Babrius Ixiii, but compare A. J. P. xvii (1896), 518 and 519. A ORIST TENSE 103

TOVTWv YVOXrOc'vTwv oiiScfJiiav StaTpiPrjv li{ov(\fTa.\i.r\v, aW €v6vs iroptKCKXTivTO 8* (A€v ovs elirov, irpocipijKus y\v aviTois, €4>' a crvv£\T)\v66T€S tjaav, avcYVOxTTO 8' 6 \67OS, €TriHVTl|l€VOS 8' tJv Kttl TcOop-uPrilXCVOS KOI T«TVX'nKU)S WVTTCp oi KaTopdoOvTCS €v Tais c'Tri8ci|e(riv, ISOC. 12, 233.

Isoc. 12, 233 (see above).

XeN. : . . . . . 8e . . Cyr. 1,4, 5 Ta^v i^ev d(f)LKfTo ., raxv Trapiijei ., raxv 8e ra

' fv TO) Trapa8ei(r(o Brjpia dvijXwKei . . . atcTTf 6 Acrrvayqs ovKer flx^v clvtoi (tvK-

\iyeiv drjpia.

ThUC. 4, 47, I : cbf Se . . . fKTTkeovT€s (\r](^6ri(Tav, (\4\vvt6 re ai (nrovdai. Kai Tols KfpKvpalois napededovro 01 Trdpres. HdT. I, 79- ^^ ^^ 01 Taiira (8o^f, Kal iiroUe Kara Ta^os • fXdcras yap tov CTparov ii ttjv Av8ir]v avTos ayyeXos Kpoicro) fXrjXvdee.

HOM. Od. I, 360 : ^ pev 6apl3i](racra ndXiv oiKovSf ^f^rjKei. II. 4> ''34~6: €v 8' eVeo-e oicrros' 8ia ^axTTi-jpL dprjpori niKpos \ pep ap

8ai8aXeoio Koi 8id 7ToXv8ai8dXov 1 ^coarfipos eXrjXaro | doiprjKos f]prjpfiaTO. 3,

• • • • • Mei/eXaos iv 8' 593~5 X^'P'* | ttjv ^dXtv, § pi" f'^f to^ov iv^oov apa ro^w | 8ia dvTiKpv ;(etp6ff eXr/XaTO xdXKeov eyxos.

237. Pluperfect used as an Imperfect. — When the perfect is used as a present (228), the pluperfect is used as an imperfect.

KaKfciv 'IXiois Dem. Iliad zvoes Trepi€KrTTJK€i 0T]Paiovs, 19, 148 ; An of was encompassz'ng Thebes {ilie Thebatts). EKCKpd-yco-av . . . tovs TrpvTdveis Ar. " a(f>iEvai, Eq. 674 ; They kept on bawling The prytanes must dismiss."

Dem. 19, 148 (see above). Phaedr. Plato, 233 D: qvt av ma-rovs cfyiXovs eKfKTTjpeda. Theaet.

198 D : d TToXai € K€KT7]rO.

Thug. • • 3»70, 3- V" y^P fdeXonpo^fvos re Toov 'A6rjvai(ov Kai tov 8Tjpov Trpoe laTrjKet, Ar. Ach. 10: ore 8f) 'KexV*"! (^'^^ with mouth open) npocrSoKoiv tov Ataxv- Xov. Eq. 674 (see above).

Hes. Sc. : 148 8fLPT] epis TrenoTTjTo (was afly, "flying all abroad") Kopva-

(Tova-a kXovov : dv8pa>v. 155- ^fSi^et. 191 fCTTaaav. 269: (ia-TTjKfi. 274: opwpei.

HOM. Od. 9, 210 : oapf) . . . oScoSei.

II. 8, 68 : fjiXws pia-ov ovpavov dp

Aorist Tense

238. The Aorist states a past action without reference to its duration simply as a thing attained. It is one of the two great narrative tenses of the Greek language, and is best studied in I04 GREEK SYNTAX

connection with the other, the imperfect. Examples are found everywhere.' (Upshot Aorist.)

Kovwv . . . eviKT)(rc tt)v ev KviSu vavp.axiav . . . 'I^UKpaTT]? dv€ iXe tt)v AaKC- tJie Saijioviwv (j.6pav, DlN. I, 75 ; Conon gained {great) naval victory 0/ {at) Cnidus, Iphicrates annihilated the Lacedaetnonian mora.

239. Ingressive Aorist.—The aorist often appears as the point of origin. This is due to the character of the verbs, which are chiefly denominative. Hence this aorist, which is called the ingressive aorist, is usually the first aorist. (Outset Aorist.)

. . . ipao-CXcvo-c FvYHSj Hdt. I, 13 ; Gyges became king.

Plato, Euthyd. 276 D: eyeXaaov re Kal idopv^rja-av. They set Up a laugh and broke out into applause.^

XeN. Hell. 2, 2, [24] : Aiovva-ios . . . frvpavPTja-f (=Tvpavvos eyevfro), D. becatne tyrant.

Thug, i, 4: ^P^« ''f <<<" olmarris . . . iyivero. He acquired the rule and becamefounder. Hdt. I, 13 (see above), i, 19: tvoa-rjae 6 'AXvam??, Alyattes fell sick.

7, 45 : 6 Sep^rjs . . . ibaKpva-e, Xerxes burst into tears.

Ar. Eccl. 43' • f*''"' fdopv^T](rav KaveKpayov ms fv Xeyoi.

AESCHYL. p. V. 235 : eyo) S' eT6\pT)(T{a).

PiND. O. 7, 37 : dvopoi/a-aia-' dXdXa^ev vneppaKei ^oa {gave a wild hal-

loa).

HOM. II. 3, 259 : plyr)(Tfv {gave a shudder) 8' 6 ytpav. 11, 546 : rpiaa-t. He took to flight.

240, So with the jnoods and verbals :

eav sick vooTio-r), if hefalls ; p-Tj vo(n]o-ai|jii, 7nay I not fall sick ; votrfjo-ai, to fall sick ; vocni

AnTIPHON, 2 /3 I : oTav . . . vo(Tri(T

Plato, Critias, 1 1 1 B : voa-rja-avTos paTos ouTo.. Timae. 84 A : to Se

br} crdpKas octtois ^w8ovv ottot' av voarj(rj) {becomes diseased) . . . KarayJArj^eTai.

Thug. 2, 58, 2 : axrve koI tovs TrpoTf'povs crrpaTiuiTas vocrfjaai.

Ar. PI. ; : ovs re'cos 569 7r\ovTr)(ravTfs (257)- 834-6 (cayo) p-ev (Sprjv | evr}pyi- ovras (I ttotc. TTjira bfopevovs e^fiv (pikovs \ ^efSaiovs, dfqdeirjv

AeSCHYL. p. v. 203: (TTTevBovTfs, COS Zevs prjTroT ap^eiev {become lord) 6eS>v.

' in On the proportion of aorist and imperfect, see B. L. G. A. J. P. iv (1883), xiv xvi and C. W. E. M. in A. P. xvi 163 ; (1893), 104 ; (1895), 259 ; J. (1895), 142. ' It should be noted that the ingressive rendering is not a proof, but only an illus- tration. See C. W. E. M. in A. J. P. xvi (1895), 150-1. INGRESSIVE A ORIST 1 05

241. Ingressive Translation of Second Aorist. — Ingressive translations are, of course, possible with a number of second aorists, as

6aTT]v, / took a stand, «Pt]v, / took a step ; but there is not the same contrast between state and entrance upon a state as in the first aorist, not the same n6pfv(Tis els TO flvai, as it is called by a late writer, [Plato], Defif. 411 A. Especially common is the ingressive translation of ecrxov. €xw, / /wM, €(r\ov, I took hold ; «x"» I possess, I ain possessor, have, eoTCov, / took posses- is all the natural sion, I got. This more as e;^cij connotes a state and is often in aiTiov used periphrases with verbal nouns. e

6 Se Kva|dpT]s . . . ttjv PaciXeiav €crx« = £Pa(ri\ev

Xen. Cyr. I, 5, 2 (see above).

ThUC. I, 12, 3: Aapifjs . . . 6y8oT)Ko

BoicoTiav TTore : i'crxov. 8, 23, 3 tovs dvTKTTavTas p^aXD fi'KfjcavTfS ttjv ttoKiv

I : . fcrxov. 8, 106, rrji/ . . viKrjv tovttjv . . . ecrxop. They gained this victory.

Ar. Ran. 1035 : Tiprjv kuI Kkeos ea-x^v. PiND. O. 10: 2, lepov f'axov oikt^/xo troTapov. P. I, 65: ecrxov 8' 'A/iv- K\as oXjSiot. 3, 24: ((Txe Toiavrav peyaXav afdrav (cf. HOM. II. 16, 685 : p4y ddaOrj).

242. So with the moods and verbals :

eI •^70vjJ.evoi, TavTTjv (sc. tt|v -qpieTcpav iroXiv) paBicos Kai raXXa c|civ,

ThUC. 6, 33, 2. T-qv lirwvvfiiav . . . crx«'''> I^id. 1, 9, 2. tw . . . axdvTi YvvaiKa = Ibid. took to yqfjiavTi, 2, 29, 3 ; Who wife.

243. Aorist of Actions of Long Duration.—The aorist is often used for rapid, individual action. But it is rather the tense of momentum than the tense of momentary action. No matter how long the action, it may be represented by the aorist, and it must be represented by the aorist when it is summed up. With definite numbers the aorist is the rule except as set forth in sections 208-10. (Complexive Aorist.)

EvKTTJiAwv ...ePiu €ttj t% Ktti evcvi^KovTa, IsAE. 6, 18; Euctemon lived ninety-six years.

LyCURG. 72 I iVivr]K0VTa . . . eTX] twv 'EXXtji/coi' fjyepoves Kare aTrja-av.

DeM. 12 : TovTcav ...... eKKaibeK 38, eniTponos iyiveO' frr), Of these he was (not became) guardian sixteen years. ISAE. 6, 18 (see above). LyS. 8e 12, 4: '

ANDOC. . . . 3, 4: r]\iiv (lpT]vr] ('ytvero i'TTj iTfVTTjKovTa, Kai ivt fit iva^itv

dfj.(f)6T(poi ravrais rais cnrov8ais err) rpiaKaideKa.

ThUC. 2, 2: Kcii 8(Ka al Tf(T

anovdai. 6, 2 : . . . TTfVTfKai^eKa ev 4, rjpepas i'peivav tj] 'ATTiKrj, They re- mainedfifteen days in Attica.

Hdt. . . . 2, 157- ^apprjTix^os e/Sao-i'Xeuere AlyvTrrov Teaaepa Ka\ irevTT]- Kovra eTfa.

Ar. pi. : 846 ovK, dXX' (vfppiycoa-* (ttj rpiaKalSfKa. HOM. II. 6, 174: ivvr)pap ^flvicra-f (ZOg).

244. So of the Moods : LycurG. 58. 1^ 'irq (Tvve)(£)s dnoBijprjtTas, Havittg been abroadfor six years continuously.

LYS. • Se/caACty iiv i\oiTO avTiSoiivai 24, 9 x^priyrjcrai paWov rj ana^.

Plato, Legg. 95 5 A: dfOrjvat.... iviavrov, To be put in jail a year.

Hdt. I, 7 '• ap^avTe s . . . f'rea Ttevre re koL nevraKocna. I, 16. 25.

AnACR. 8: erea TVfvrrjKovTa re Koi tKarbv . . . jSaaiXevcrai.

HOM. II. 6, 217 : ie'iKocriv fjpaT epv^as.

245. AoRiST OF Total Negation.—As the aorist is used of one, so it is used of none. Total negation is expressed by the aorist, as resistance to pressure is expressed by the imper- fect (216).

ovx €l\ov. They did not take ; ovix 'npovv. They could not take, ovk eSe'lavTo, ol TJiey did not receive ; ovk cSs'xovto, They would not receive, (X€v ovk y\\%ovi oi 8' ovSev So7ne did not come when eX96vT£s eiroiovv, Dem. i8, 151 ; ; some, they did come, would not do anything.

LyS. 3, 14: oiSeiy oi'rf KaT^dyr) ttjv Kf(f}a.\T]v ovTe aWo kqkov ovdiv ("Ka^ev. Plato, Gorg. 471 B: ov perepeXijafv avria. XEN. Conv. I, 14- OVK i Kivrjcre yikara.

Ar. Ach. : ovbeiroiiTOT eiTrev 6 • • • aXX' 34-6 (SC. bfjpos), uvdpaKas 7rpl(o, | 1 avTos €cf)fp€ TTavra. AeSCHYL. Pers. 179: ovTt TTO) tol6v8' evapyes ftboprjv.

PiND. O. I, 47 : ouSe parpl ttoXXo paiopevoi, (fytoTts ayayov.

II. HOM. 3, 239-40: 7} ovx e(nrea-6r)v AaKebaipovos e^ fpareivrjs, \ fj d(vp(o

fiev eirovTo Kve.

246. The same principle applies to the moods. The change of tense from present to aorist is often to be accounted for by a change from posi- tive to negative, and vice versa.

eoTi Oeuv Kai irdvTa DeM. i8, |i,T]8£V ofiapTeiv KaropOovv, Epigr. ap. 289; AORIST FOR PERFECT 107

To make no blunder and do all things right, {that) is {the province) of the gods {alone).

Dem. (Epigr. ap.), 18, 289 (see above).

ISOC. 4, 1 1 : wa-nep . . . rbv . . . dKpijSas emtTTafifvov Xeyfiv aTrXws ovk av SvvdfMfvov eiTreii/.

AntIPHON, I, 6: e'^ova-ia rju (racfycos etSe'j/ai . . . ovk ^v irvOia-dai.

Plato, Ale. II, 143 B : oTrep oZv ovbfis av olrjOfiij, dXKa TovTo ye nas av o'iotTo iKavos elvai. tt di aii Ion, 53^ B: rjada fxavris, ovk, eiTrep Trepl rmv t Ofioias Xfyofxevcop oios rjirOa i ^qyT]

XeN. An. 2, 4, 6 : dSvvarov tia^rjvai.

ThUC. 2 : ra T€ Koi I, 70. vnapxavrd crco^av fmyvavai firjdfv. Ar. Lys. 129: OVK av TroiT)(raLp{i) (no metrical necessity).

Aeschyl. p. V. 63: ttXtiv tov8' av oi/Sets eVSiKcos pt fiyj/^aiTo poi (no met- rical necessity).

PiND. N. 8, • ''o ^' avTLS Tfav ov bwarov met- 44~5 yJAvxav Kopl^ai \ poi (no rical necessity).

247. When the negative is the equivalent of the positive present, the present is more frequently used in both members.

Kal Qapa-ee, Tvyj], fiT| ^o^tv, Hdt. 1,9; Be ofgood courage, Gyges,and be ttot Kal afraid. onroo-Tepeiv |ji.t) diroSiSovai, Dem. [35], 42.

Dem. [35], 42 (see above).

AeSCHIN. 2, 59: napflvai Kal prj anohr}pe'iv. Hdt. I, 9 (see above).

: 6 a- e rt f HOM. Od. 4, 825 dp I, prjSe irdyxv pera (f)p{(Tl 8 18161 Xirjv.

248. The Aorist for the Perfect.—The aorist is very often used where we should expect the perfect. I. Many verbs form no perfect. So many of the Hquid verbs. The aorist is next of kin. In later Greek many me- chanical perfects have been formed from the desire of analogy. See Curtius, Verbum II, 21 1.

dWa 0£TTaX.ia irus exei ; ouxi' tois iroXiTEia; Kal rds iroXcis avTuv irapi]pT)Tai, Kal iva Kara Kal Kar' 8ov- rerpapxias KaT€

Xcvwo-iv; Dem. 9, 26.

Dem. 9, 26 (see above).

ISOC. 5. I9~2I : oiiK eXarrci) rfjv ^aaiXeiav TTfTTOirjKev dXX' evxfjs a^ia fitOTre-

ri ov . , ...... npaKTai. yap eWeXomev ; TTfTroLTjKev TTpoafjKTai TreiroirjKev

' DiONYS. Hal., De admir. vi, 54 (R. vi, p. 1120), in quoting this passage, gives KaOearaicev, a characteristic variant. Io8 GREEK SYNTAX

. . . . . 8e KaTea-Tpmrrai . f'i\r](j)ev yeyovev ; dirdcrijs t^s QpaKr]s ovs rj^ovKrjOr] SftTTrd- ras KaTea-Trja-fv; (A solitary aorist after a long string of perfects.)

: TL Tis classic Ar. Av. 301 (})^s ; yXavK 'A6f]i>a(' rjyaye ; (No perfect.)

AeSCHYL. p. v. 28 : toiuvt (TTTjvpov (no perfect) rov (f)i\avdp6i7rov rpoirov. PiND. O. 6 10, 7-8: ptWau ;(povoj | ep-ov KaTai(T\vv€ jSadii XP*°^ (see note ad loc).

: S' av rot dir' HOM. II. eXov, fj 5. 127—8 d)(Kvv o(jidaKpatv irplv iirrjfv, | o0p* Koi is in (V yiyvaxTKTjs r)pev dfov fjbe av8pa (^prjKa not found Homer).

249. 2. When the perfect is used as a present, the aorist may- take a perfect translation.'

I I have wondered. iroWdKis €0av(i,ao-o, Xen. Mem. I, I, ; often cK-njo-o

. . . rd avTos hast avTos ir€p eKTi7

LyS. 12, 3 : TToXXaKif ftr TrohXriv ddvpiav Karia-r-qv, pfj . . . iroirja-apai.

Xen. Mem. i, i, i (see above).

Hdt. 4, 97 : ov ydp efieto-d kco pf) ecra-adeapev vno ^Kvdeav pdxjj. 7. -9 (see above).

• Eur. Ale. 541 : redvaa-ip oi davovres aXX' W els 86povs, Once dead, the dead stay dead. Get thee within, fr. 507: rt rows Oavovras ovk eas reOvq-

Kfvai ;

AeSCHYL. Cho. 504; ovTco ydp ov redvrjKas ov8e irep Bavav, Thus (shall thou show) thou art not dead though thou hast died.

HOM. Od. I, 166—8: vvv 8' 6 pkv &s aTToXcoXf . . . tov S wXero voaripov ripap.

II. 13, 623-4: ovbi Ti . . . ibheiaaTf. 772—3 • vvv wXero irdaa kot' aKprjs iXio? anrfivT].

250. 3. The aorist is used from aflfinity to the negative.

Twv oiKeTwv oiSe'va KareXixev, dXX' airavras Tre'-irpaKe, AeSCHIN. I, 99; Not a servant has he left (did he leave), but he has sold them all {they are all sold).

iv rw , . . Hyper. Eux. 28: ovh' airos IBtaTTfv ovBeva namoTe /Step eKpLva

Tivas ovv KfKpiKa ; Aeschin. I, 99 (see above),

: ttcbttot' nXelovs be . . . tS>v ISOC. 3, 35 (pavrjcropai. ydp ovSeva piv d8iKr](ras,

. . . fv . . . oi TToXiTav iTfiToirjKcbs rj avpiravTiS irpo ipov ^aaiXeva-avTes.

251. 4. Other examples :

• ISOC. 8, 19: 6 piv Toivvv TToXepos dndvTav rjpds Ta>v elprjpivav dire

' A. J. P. iv (1883), 439, note. GNOMIC A ORIST 109

r' . . . II. : ovTas ; al HOM. 4, 243-6 ri(l>6' f(TTT]Te TeBrjTroTfs Tjiire ve^poi \ \ ov8f is here USed in- fO-Taa-', . . . as TedrjiroTts fidxfo-de {^(TTrfTe \ Vfieis ea-TTjre stead of a perfect in a present sense).

of 252. This is especially important in the matter sequence. See Lvs. II. where the aorist 12, 3 (249), Hdt. 4, 97 (249), and Hom. 5, 127-8 (248), of the equals the perfect and naturally takes the sequence principal tenses.'

253. Aorist translated by the Pluperfect.—We often translate the aorist by a pluperfect for the sake of clearness.

° aviTW Hell. I. Tois ISiois xP'io'^o'^*'^'' ^•1'^' * waTTip e8<0Kev, XeN. 5' 31 ^^ said that he would use his own means, which his father hadgiven him. he vvKza XeN. Hell. I, 5, 3 (see above). 7, 2, 19: ws rr]v rjypvTTvrja-av, had been awake all eKad(v8ov fJifXP'- '"^oppm ttjs rj/jiepas. As they night, they slept untilfar i/tto the day. fv The had Thug. 7, i. 3: rks yap vavs avei\KV(Tav 'Ifitpa, ships they beached in Himera.

roidde. : 8eiv6v Hdt. 4, 146 : al Se erreiTe fa-^\6ov, noUovai 147 noievfievos ap)(f(Tdai vtt' (iWoav eireiTe eyevaaTO ap^fji. For other examples, see Temporal Sentences.

254. For the diflference of the aorist and the pluperfect, compare Hdt. avTLKa : 680V TO 3, 25 Ttpiv 8e TTJs irffiTTTOv pepos 8if\i]\vdfpai ttjv (TTpaTLrjv, 8e to criria Ka\ to vtto- Trdvra airovs rd ei^ov (TitIcov f)(6pfva eTreXeXoiTTfe, perd HAD the the (vyia (ireXnre Karecrdiopeva, Before they completed fifth part of and their jourfiey, the provisions HAD entirely failed them, after provisions their beasts of burde^i failed them.

255. Gnomic Aorist.—The universal present may be repre- sented by the aorist. The principle is that of the generic article. A model individual is made to represent a class. This is called the gnomic aorist, because it is used in maxims, sentences, prov- in concrete illustrations. The erbs {ryvoiiiat), which delight gno- mic aorist interchanges freely with the present, but does not thereby lose its peculiar effect.^

ov£v 8e irXeiu tovis pufiT] . . . 1X6X0. |i€V «})povY]

...... Dem. 2, 9 : oTav pkv yap vtt' evvoias rd irpdypara a-varfj, (rvpirovelv

" ' See note on Pind. P. A. J. P. iv (1883), 429, note. 8, 15. no GREEK SYNTAX

edtkovcnv • orav 8' (k Ka\ av6pu>iToi TrXtove^ias nnuTjpias ris S)(nrep ovroi Icrxycrrj, kui ttuvt' r] irpoiTT] np6

: 6 Plato, Legg. 720 D Se fXevdtpos (sc. larpos) . . . diBda-Kei rbv aaOevovvra

Ka\ ov iiv is avTov, irpoTfpov cTrera^e rrplv irr) ^vpneia-r). The physician who free {and not a slave) itistriicts the patient himself and does not give a prescrip- tion until he in some way succeeds in convincing hint. Phaedo, 73 D : ot

orav tScocri . . . aXXo ti o'ls to. nai8iKa e'lcodf epacrrai, Xvpai/ i) avrwv )(^pr)(Tdai,

tovto • re kcll Trdaxovcri eyvaxrav ttjv Xvpav iv rrj Biavoia eXa^ov to fidos tov ov TratSdr, rfv r/ Xvpa.

HdT. 7. 10. f ) • ovTO) Se Koi arparos ttoXXos vtto oXlyov SiaipdelpeTai Kara ToiQv8e. iirfdv 6 ^eos 81 oiv cr0t (pdovrjaas (f>6l3ov €p(3dXr} 7) (Bpoprrjv, e'cfyddprjaav dva^i

Com. Men. 4, 354> 495 • '''^XV '''^X^'V atpdaxrev, ol T()(vr] TV)(riv. 8' ev PiND. 0.4.4'- ^f'>-V(>>v wpafra-ovTOiv, i'aavav avTiK dyyeXiav noA yXv-

Kf2av fcrXoi. O. 7. 3*^"^ '. a'l 8e (ppevoiv rapa^ai TrapinXay^av Koi aocpov. fr.

225 : OTTorav 6(6s di'8p\ )(^dppa irep'^rj, Trdpos piXaivav Kpa8iav e (rTv(f)fXi^€P . . .

Simon. C. 65 : 6 8' av ddvaros Kt'x^ '^"'' ''"o" 4'yyop-a-)(ov.

• ThEOGN. 661-6 : Kai €K KOKOv €(t6X6v Koi kokov Kal re eyfVTo, \ e^ dyadov • Kai os TroXXd nfTrarai, TTevixpos dvTjp I alyj/a pdX fTrXovrrjae pdXa \ e^aTrivrjs Trdvr' ovv aXecre vvktI koi Kal rroXXdKi [xitJ. \ abXppcov rjpaprf, u(f)povi 86^a | oiv fo-TTfTO, Kal Tifirjs Kal KaKos eXa^ev.

Solon, 13, 8. 28. 29. 31. 38. 54. 68.

TyRT. 12, 20—2 : ovTos ev 8e dvfjp dyadbs ylyverai TToXfpco \ at\|/'a 8va-fi(via)v r dv8pa>v fTpe^e (f>dXayyas \ Tpri^elas, (nrov8fi ecrxede Kvpa p.dxr)s.

HeS. Theog. 436 "• TTapayiyverai. t]8' ovlvrjai, but 442-3 : pT]i8ia>s liyprjv Kv8prf 6f6s coTvacrf 8' iXero edeXovad iroXXrjv, \ pela d(f)e (paipopevrjv, ye dvptS. 447- e^ oXiyav ^pidei, kuk iroXXoov [xeiova dfjKev. (The end of the verse is more shift it is a than a metrical ; swoop.)

II. • t' ejreiTa HOM. 4. 442-3 '; oXiyrj pev Trpwra KopixriTfTaL, avTap \ ovpavci fcrrripi^e Kaprj Kal eVi xOovl ^aivfi.

256. AORIST OF Comparison.— Ultimately akin to the gnomic aorist is the aorist of comparison which is often used in poetry, the concrete ex- ample being more vivid and striking.

Set 8t) irovTas, S

: coot' 8ie (TKe8aafv bs . . . Solon, 13, 18-25 avfpos vtcpdXas ul'^a \ rjpivos, GNOMIC TENSES ill

Kara KaKa dtuiv eSos amvv 'cKcivfi \ 8i]d>(Tas y^i/ irvpo^opov epya, \ ovpavou, aWpiTjv

8' avTis Idelv . . . TreXerai rlais. edrjKep | | ToiavTtj Zrjvos

HOM. Od. 4, 335-40: COS 8' Sttot' iv ^vX6)((0 f\a(f)os Xeovros v(- Kparepoio \ Koi Koiprjcracra | Kvrjfiovs i^fpir](TL ^povs vfqyfveas yaXadrjvovs ciyKfii Troirjevra | /3o- 6 8' fireira 8e Toicriv deiKea a-KOfifvij, efju ela-rjXvdev evvrjv, \ dp(poTfpoi(ri. iroTfiov • my 'OSucrev? Keivoicriv deiKta €(f)TJK(v I iroTfiov ecprjafi.

II. 3. as Tf Xtcov fni . . . a>s 23-28: e^dpT] peyuXco trw/xart Kvpaas, \ ^X'^PV MeveXaos ISaiv. 'AXe^av8pov deoeiStj | ocpOaXpo'icriv

m 257. Gnomic Perfect and Future.—The so-called gnomic perfect and gnomic future correspond to English uses. The gnomic future is based on expectation, the gnomic perfect on experience.

J^er/ea.-

iroXXoi • . . SovXoi . . .

• oaris 8e ANDOC. [4]. 19 vnepopa ravTa, rffv fieyia-Trjv (f>vXaKfji/ dv^prjice Trjs iroXeas, Whoso overlooks this, has taken away the greatest safeguard of the state.

Plato, Legg. 776 D-E (see above).

HdT. 2,6: 'dcroi fxeu yap yeatTTflvai elai dvdpaTToov, opyvirjcri fie peTprj Kaa-c

Tqv xo>pTjv, oaroi 8e fjaaov yecoTvelvat, (rraSioKri, Kre.

Ar. • Tis 8e evdi(os Vesp. 493~5 ^^ M^" dyvrjTai opcpats, pfp.j3pd8as ixfj deXr), | o TrwXoii/ ras • ovtos eni eipTjx nXTjaiov pep^piibas \ o'^avelv eoix dvQpatTvos rvpav- vi8i. Pl. • . . . Tovs us onorav Sxri rov 567~9 o'Ki-^ai prjTopas, pev \ irivqres, irepl

8rjpov . . . fltri 8iKaioi, trXovrrjcravTfs 8' diro rav Koivo>v irapaxprjp' lidiKoi yeyevrjvTai. EuR.fr. 1028: ocTTis vios u>v t6v re dnoXoiXe p,ov(rci)v dfieXei, \ TrapfXdovr' Koi Tov \p6vov I peXXovTa redvrjKev.

PiND. O. I, 54- dKepSeia XeXoy^ev OapLva KUKayopovs. P. 3, 54- Kep8ei.

Kai ao(f)ia 84 Serai. ThEOGN. KaKo\ voov • 8' ev rS)V 109—10: linX'qa'Tov yap €)(Ov

TTpoaBev TrdvT(i)v ( kk€ xv'ai (piXorrjs. Solon, 13, 27-8: alel 8' oC e oaris XeXrjde Siaprrepes, dXirpov \ dvpov e'xUy wdvTcos 8 es TeXos i^e(^dvq.

Tyrt. II, 14: rpeccravTOiv 8' dvdpwv ndcr' diroXoiX' dperrj.

• HOM..II. • 8' nXtoves (root 5. 53'~- o.l8op4va)v dv8pSyv rje irecfiavTai \ (jitv-

8 ovT 1 yovTcov ap kXcos opwrai ovre tis uXkij. 5, I39~40' 7^7 y^P ''"'S' tov ye K.a\ ar' Ka\ eneiTa ^irfv xe^pas dpelvcov \ fj 7re'(^ rj Trecprjaerat,.

258. Future:

oiSe aWov ovSevos l(n|;vxo-u K6(|>a\T)s Y€v

8e top t'is ecovTov HdT. I, 173' flpofifvov erepov ifK'qa'iov f'lrj, KaraXe^fi

p,r)Tp6dtv. 2, 5 • KOTfts KaTaTrfipTjTrjpirjv TrrjKov re dvoicreis Kol ev (v8(ica opyvirjiri

ea-eai (Traveller's Future). 2, 39 (see above). 41 : twv elvfKa ovre dvfjp rat AiyvTjTios ovT( yvvT] avhpa "'EW-qva ((>iXri(reie av oro/iari, oiSe fiaxaipD dv8p6s

"FXXtjvos ;^pr;crf rai . . . ov8e Kpeas Kadapov /3o6y 8iaTeTp.rjfj.fvov 'EWrjuiKfj fia)(aipr} yeva-eTat (fut. parallel with opt. and uv).

• '''^ ^^ ivavTas oijTe Tis olmvos ovd' Solon, 13, 55~^ popaifia 1 pva-erai Upd.

259. Empirical Aorist.—But wh'en the aorist has a tempo-

ral adverb or a negative or a numeral with it, it is best referred to the same class with the English perfect of experience (empiri- cal aorist).

. . e-n-aGov -ttoXXcLkis . Seo-jroTai opYi^ojxcvoi jiei^u) KaKa tj £iroiT)o-av, XEN. evils than Hell. 5, 3, 7 ; 0/^en have masters sufferedfrom anger greater they have inflicted.

: TroXXot Ka\ 8ia\a- LyCURG. 79 Tovi piv yap dvdpwTTOvs rfbi] e^airaTTja-avTfs 66vTfs ov povov Tav TTapovTcov Kiv8vva)v dneXvdrjaav dXXa ktL

Plato, Phaedr. 234 B : tovs piv tpcovTas ol (})iXoi vovdeTovaiv . . . tois 8e TranoTe Ta>v olKfiwv p.T] fpaxTiv ovSels ipipy^aTO.

: 8' ivloTf KokXia-ra Xen. Hell. 5, 3, 7 (see above). Oec. 5, 18 Km npo^ara

20 ". 8^ Tfdpappeva vocros eXdoiia-a KUKiCTTa aTTCoXecrej'. Cf. [R. A.] 2, oottis pf) TrdXet oiKelv iv wv Tov 8rjpov fiXfTO fv 8-qpoKpaTovpivri paXXov 17 6Xiyap)(ovp€VT], dStKeli' TrapfCTKfvdcraTO Ka\ eyvco otl kt€. ttoXXoi 8e HdT. 2,68: yXco

: TToXXovs fls Com. Men. 4, 346, 205 fj yXaaa-a oXedpov rjyayev.

fr. : tu 8e oTav ttoXXovs Eur. 360, 28-9 p-rfTepcov 8dKpv' nepTTrj TtKva, \ f6^-

Xvv fls pd)(r]v oppapivovs.

O. : a-rravTa Ta 6vaTo'is, . . . Kal PiND. I, 31-3 X°P'-^ ^'' o'J'fP Tev;^ft /ietXip^a |

awKTTOV tvkttov to troXXaKis. N. II, • f" ^' °^'^' €pr)(TaTO \ tppevai 39~4I (^X^PV &V e8(i>Kav t ovk edfXfi irda-ais eTeav p.4Xaivat. Kapnbv upovpai, \ 8iv8ped nepoSots avdos (va)8(s I epeiv. TToXXaKt 8oKeQ}v KaKov, fa-6X6v Kal re THEOGN. 137-8: yap 6T](reiv edrjKfV \

: toi TrXfWay coXecrtv 8okS)v 6i]v, QovXals 8' OVK iiriyevTo TeXos.

. . HeS. O. et D. 240-247 : ttoXXuki . . . dir-qvpa, . . . iirrjyaye . dnocfidivi)-

...... anoaivvTai. . . d7ra>Xe aev 6ovcri . TiKTovaiv, pivvdovai

II. OS TToXXdcov iroXiav KaTeXvcre eVt Kal HOM. 2, II7-8: 8r] Kciprjva | t)8' Xva-d. (This example is very instructive as to the conception of the em-

pirical aorist.) AORIST IN QUESTIONS 113

260. AoRiST IN General Descriptions.— From this gnomic use of the aorist arises its use in general descriptions, in which the aorist is de- signedly employed to express concentrated action.

av . . , al (X^v Y^P aGdvaroi KaX.ov|ji6Vai (SC. •^vxa'C), '^vik' Trpo; aKpw "^ivinvTox, lo-TTjo-av, Plato, Phaedr. 247 B-C; T/ie souls called immortal, when they get in front of the top, stop {short).

DeM. 1-2 : ovToi deivoraTOi elcri bavfia-aadai f" [35]. yap ^iv xp^f^^'''' '"'j*

epnopidi, iivfibav he Xa/3a)0"t . . ., tidvs fireXddovTO . . . dW dvrl tov dwoSovvai

ao(f)L(rp.aTa evpLCTKOvcn . . . Koi elcrl TvovrjpoTaToi dvOpatirutv. Plato, Phaedr. 245-56. Often in this celebrated description, e.g. 247 B-C (see above).

HdT. 2, 47 : fjv Tis t^ravaj] aircov (sc. AtyvTrrtcoi') napioyv v6s, avTolai rolcn

IfiaTioicrt an S)V e^a\l^€ emvTov /3a? eVl tov norapov. 87 : fireav tovs KXvcTTfjpas

TrXrjacovTai tov dno Ke8pov dXelcpaTos yivopivov, iv av fTrXrjaav^ tov vfKpov ttjv

KoiKiTjv. 3' ^2 : es f'xdea peydXa dXXrjXoiai dniKveovTai, e| &)j/ a-Tdcries iyyivovTai,

• eK 8e tS)v (TTacritov (j)6vos eV Se tov (povov dirf^T} ts povvapx^^v.

Com. • ft? oIkiqv otov tis eariv Apollodor. 4, 455 elalj] (f)LXov, | deatpdv, TOV evvoiav evOvs flcriovTa Tas 6 NtKo0a)i/, TTjv <^tXou I dvpas. \ dvpcopos iXapos eaTiv, Kva>v Kal 8e tis evdecos TTpoiTov rj \ earjve npocriiXd', inravTrjcras \ 8i

PiND. O. 2, : dav6vTQ)v evddh' avTiK TTOivds 63-4 pev aTrdXapvoi (f>p€VfS \ fTicrav.

Solon, 13, 53 : aXXov pdvTiv tOrjKev ava^ eKdepyos 'AttoXXcov.

261. Aorist in Passionate Questions.— In passionate and impa- tient questions the aorist is used of things to be despatched at once.

Ti ovK avTo totJto don't Y€ p.01 dircKpivw; Plato, Gorg. 509 E ; Why you answer me this very point?

Plato, Charm. 155 A: aXXa ti ovk eneBe i^ds pni TOV peaviav KaXfaas

Sevpo ; Gorg. 509 E (see above). So elsewhere.

Xen. Cyr. 2, I, 4 : tI ovv . . . ov kuI ttjv Svvapiv eXe ^ds poi ; Hiero, I, 3 •

TI ovv . . . Koi ai) . . . oiixi vne pvrjads pe ;

: TI ov . . . e Hdt. 9, 48 df] pax^crdpeda ;

: tI don't Ar. Vesp. 213 ovk dn(Koipr)drjpev ocrov oaov (TTiXr]v ; Why we snatch a little nap, a wee wee nap ?

262. Aorist where English uses Present. — In questions, the English language may also use the past tense, not so readily in such ex-

pressions as €'7rTJv€

' Notice the tmesis which heightens the effect and helps to prove the purpose- fulness of the aorist. 8 114 GREEK SYNTAX

^o-Grjv airEiXais, lYtXaaa \)roXoKO|j.iriais, Ar. Eq. 696; I like your threats, I laugh at your fire-eatt7Jg brags.

Ar. Eq. 696 (see above).

Eur. Cycl. 266 : aTrw/xoo-', w koKKio-tov S> KvKKtiTTiov. H. F. 1235: fTTJ/- pf(r'- €v Bpdcras 8e cr' ovk avaivofiat. Or. 1672 : koi XeKrp' etTTjvetr, fjviK av

e fiiSw Trarrjp. fr. 282, 13; pe ix\j/afirjv Se Koi tov EXXj/i/coi/ vopov.

Trdy^v (ppiuas, oiop eeLnes.

263. AORIST OF THE FUTURE.—The aorist may be used as a vision of the future.

EuR. Alc. / thou a'iro>X6(j.T]v ap',ci [i.6 8t) X«ir)/6is, 7vvai, 386 ; am undone, if shalt leave me, wife.

: o-^' el Eur. Alc. 386 (see above). Med. 78 aTrwXd^iif up , kokov Tvpoa-oi- vfov (Topfv I TraXaicp.

HOM. II. : (I K avdi noXiv wXfTO 9, 412—5 p.iv pivcov Tpaxov dp(f)ipd)(a>pai, \ KXeos e(rTai • el 8f Kfv oiKad' es p(v poi voaros, drap acfidirov \ tuoipai fprjv irarpiba kXcos fa6\6v. ydiav, I wXero poL

264. Imperfect, Aorist, and Pluperfect side by side. —How keenly the differences of the imperfect, aorist, and pki- perfect might be felt, is best shown in those passages in which all three are used side by side.

. . . 8' 6 ore oOtos iyu (X€v direSi^fjLOiJV lT£TeXevTTJK6w iraTTip irdXai, eyr\\xe, 21 / was abroad and had been dead when this Dem. [46], ; my father long man got married.

Dem. [46], 21 (see above). [56], 9: imihi] 6 SiKeXiKor Kordiikov^ iyivero

a'l (titov in eXaTTOV koi vaiis tovtwp ets KCLi Tipai TOV e^dSi^ov tj f] avfJKTO Kre. A'iyvTTTOv, (ideas ovros aTrotrre'XXet

LYS. 12, 53 : eVetSij Se els tov Heipaid rjXOopev Kai al Tupaxdi yeyevr]pevai ol eX7ri8as Tjcrav Kcd irepX tSiv SiaXXaycov Xoyoc eyiyvovTO, iroXXas eKdrepoi et)(^o-

pev KT€. I 3. 5 • ^LsCpddpTjcrav . . . eyeyevrjro . . . e'yiyvovro.

01 "lttttoi koI eiSov HdT. I, 80: cos a>(T

re tw eXnis. : oma-Q) dv€(TTpe(})ov, bieCJiBapTo {lay shattered) Kpola-co 17 4> 125

...... 108 : eBedcoKecrav eoo- Tapax^OevTcov . . Tapaaaopevcov Terapaypevovs. 6, were a-av . . . f'8i8oaav. They had given, they gave, they for giving, offered.

Te 6 Kin to . . . 7, 193: OL 8e ^dp^apoi, ws eirava-aTO avepos Kvpa eaTpcoTo, as the wind ceased and the waves e'nXeov Trapa ttjv rjnfipov. The barbarians, had beco7ne calm, went sailing along the mainland.

: 8v(TeTo 8' HOM. II. 7, 464-5 ws o\ pev ToiavTa npos dXXrjXovs dyopevov. \ 8e rjeXios, TereXeoTo epyov 'A)^aiaiv. MODAL FUTURE 115

Future Tense

265. The future denotes either continuance or attainment in the future, and is either sliall or tvill.

e|w, / will or shall have, I will or shall get. op|w, / will or shall be ruler, I will or shall become ruler.

81 : ov 7rXfio»/of LyCURG. (lusiur. ap.) iroirjo-ofiai nepl to C']'' i'Vs eXfvde- pias, I will not value life more highly thaft freedom.

LyS. I, 36 : ovhw avrav a-^erai. No one will touch them. airov Plato, Apol. 29 E: ovk ivQv^ dr](T(o ov8' I'lTTetfii (will). Thug. I, 22. 4: apKovvrms e^ei, // will (shall) suffice.

Ar. Ach. 203 : e'-yw fie cjiev ^ojjiai (zvill) ye tovs 'AxapPfas.

Eur. Bacch. 63 : (rvfip.€Ta(TX']o-(o (2uill) ^opav. fr. 176: tIs yap Trerpalov

crei (will succeed iti, etc.); ovTii^cov bopl \

PiND. O. I, 37 : (re S' avTia TrpoTtpcov (fidfy^ofiai. (will).

: e HOM. Od. I, 88 airap e'ywi/ 'iddKrjvd' creXeiKropai.

II. : S' ov Xvcro). I, 29 TTjv e'-yo)

266. Owing to this indefiniteness of the future in regard to continu- ance and attainment, the Greek language has a tendency to use other forms of greater temporal exactness, such as the optative with aV and uv with the subjunctive. The Greek is very rich in expressions for the future.

267. Modal Nature of the Future.—The future was originally a mood, and this original modal force is regularly retained in dependent clauses, with the exception of the identifying relative, where it serves to describe a definite person or thing. In the principal clauses, this modal force is more or less efTaced, just as the force of the English auxiliaries will and shall is more or less effaced according to the person employed. At the same time, it must be remembered that whenever we translate the Greek future hy shall or will, we make an analysis for which the Greek language is not responsible. The periphrasis that comes nearest to the

modal future is /xe'XAco with the infinitive. As the modal use of the future in dependent clauses is not treated in the following sections, a few illustrative examples are here given.

Be' oviro) elcriv 01 iraiSes [xoi fie OepaTrcvo-ovai, LyS. 24, 6; And I have as to ovSe yet 710 children wlio shall nurse me (= tiurse me). (sc. TrpeVet) roiavxa

Xe-yeiv e| wv 6 Pios (AT)8ev eiriSuo-ci, ISOC. 4, 189. Seijerei 8e Kai Tciv aWcov ^o

Ibid. A. . . . is edv . . . fighter). 375 (Here eiirep |xaxe^Tai parallel with Ss't) 8ia(idxeo-8oi just preceding.) ii6 GREEK SYNTAX

On the Gnomic Future, see 257-8. For examples of the Future in the Apodosis of an Ideal Condition, see Ideal Conditional Sentences.

268. Future in Deliberative Questions.—The future indicative, like the subjunctive, may be used in questions which expect an imperative answer.

; ti EUR. Shall out eiirwfiev ^

DeM. • ""O' rt ri 4> 44 ^h 'n'po(Topniovnf6{a); 8, 37: fpovfxev rj (f)r](TO-

Si fiev, av8p(S 'Adrjvaioi ; e'ycb fiev yap ovx opai. ri w aTTo aurco Plato, Protag. 331 A: oiv, Upoirayopa, Kpivovfifda ;

Ibid. B: ti airS diroKpivovfieda ;

: (Tov Ar. Ach. 312 fiV e'yo) (f)f i(Top.ai; Eur. Ion, 758 (see above).

2 : Tiva t'iv' riva b' PiND. O. 2, dfov, rjpaa, avdpa KfXaSr] aopev ; (See B.

L. G. ad loc.)

II. : tol HOM. I, 123 TTas yap daxrovcri yepas p.eyadvp.01 'A;^aiot ;

269. Imperative Use of the Future. — The future is sometimes used where an imperative might be expected. It is not a milder or gentler imperative." A prediction may imply resistless power or cold indifference, compulsion or concession.

avTos is a to deter- Yvcio-ei, Plato, Gorg. 505 C ; That matter for you mine. 6 . . • . . . «X6u)v cKeio-c iSt Xen. 77^1? meS' a^YcXos \e|ei, Cyr. 3, 2, 29 ; senger willgo thither and hold thefollowing discourse.

ISAE. 2, 37 : avayvuxrerai. (The speaker before court uses of the clerk avayv(x)6i, avaylyvuxTKe, dvayvaxTtrai, rarely dvayvbiTO).^) 4, 30 : tovtov . . . aWos, edv Tis 0ov^r]Tai, Tificoprja-erai, Him another shall punish if he "will.

Plato, Gorg. 505 C: avros yvaxrei (Schol. : dvTi TOV €1 TL 6e\fis, troiei-

12 : (fioi yap ov /ie'Xei). Phileb. A trv 8e, Upa)Tap)((, avTos yvaxrei. Rpb. 432

C : Kal e/iol (fypdaeis (so the best MS), And you will report to me. Theaet. 143 B: 6 Tral? dvayvtiXTiTai (of a servant), but Phaedr. 262 D: dvayvfuQi. (to a friend).

Xen. An. i, 3, 5 : Kai oviroTe epel ov8fis. And no one shall ever say. Cyr.

3,2,29 (see above). 3' 3' 3 • vpf'^s e/xe ov noiTjireTe fJiKrdov nepuovTa evtpye-

' So Aken : "Die ruhige Behauptiing kann weit starker sein." See Hopkins, " A. J. P. xiii (1892), 37. The N. T. av Se oipei, See tliou to that" seems to be an idiomatic colloquial expression rather than a Hebraism. The Latin use of the future as a familiar imperative, A. J. P. xviii (1897), 121, in the same class of words, lends strength to the imperative conception, which is denied by some scholars. ^ C. W. E. Miller, A. J. P. xiii (1892), 408. FUTURE AS IMPERATIVE 117

Teij/, oKKo. (TV, & yvvai, e^ovcra ravra to. ;^p)7/xara a (pepeis uTridi, Kri., You are not to make of me a paid travelling philanthropist, etc.

Ar. Nub. 1352 ' navTois Se tovto Spdaeis.

Eur. Med. 1320 : Xe'y' el' rt ^ovXet, x^'P' ^' oi "^avatLs TTore.

Ion, Eleg. 2, 7-10 (Bgk.*) : n'lvaiiKv, Tral^anev irw . . . 6p)(fi . . . apx^e

. . . Kflvos . . . TTifTai (Meineke Trie'ro)).

Soph. Ph. 843 : raSe pev 6f6s o^erai.

HOM. Od. I, eneira beiivvov orred ae 123-4: avrap \ Tratra-dpfvos pvdr)(reai, XPV- This "jussive" use of the future is denied for Homer by Paech.' In many of the passages once cited, the so-called future has been shown to be an aorist imperative and others have been explained away. — 270. |xii AND THE Future Indicative in Prohibitions. The use of the future as an imperative with pr] is rare and hardly sure. In Attic prose it rests on just two passages, both suspicious, both open to emenda- tion, Lys. 29, 13 and Dem. 23, 117, on which see A.J. P. xv(i894), 117 f. In

XeN. Hell. 2, I, 22 : npodTrev ais prjbels Kivrjaoiro, a)s = o7rcoy, and the Oratio recta was ottco? /xr;Seis KivrjaeTai. In Ar. PI. ^88, paXaKov r evdaxrerf pijSev belongs to the relative complex w viKijo-ere tt]v8L In Soph. Ai. 572-3, Sttcos precedes. In HoM. II. 10, 238, oTrao-o-eai is subjunctive, and in 11.13,47, o-acoo-ere is imperative. The jussive future has ov.

On ov prj with the Future, see Negatives.

271. ov WITH Future Indicative in Questions as Im- perative.—In questions, the future indicative with ov is often used as an imperative.

ovK airoKTeve . . . tov toOtov it(€) |xiap6v av6pwirov ; DiN. I, 18; Will you not kill this foul creature ?

Din. 1, 18 (see above). " Dem. 4, 44 : ovk €pj3r]cr6pfd(a) ; 21, 116: OVK drroKTevflTe ; ovk enl rffv oIkIov ^aBiflade ; ovxi- o-uXXjj>|re(r^e ;"

Plato, Conv. 212 D: TraiSes, . . . ov a-Ki-^ea-Oe ; Boys, will you not see who it is ?

Ar. : ov ovk ; ov ovk Lys. 459-60 ov\ eX^er', nair](Tir\ dprj^ere \ Xoi8op^(rer', dvaiaxwTTjCTfTe ;

Eur. Ion, OVK aX\a n68a ; 162-3; | (poiviKocpaTJ Kivrjcreis

AeSCHYL. p. V. 52 : ovkow eTrei^rj rc5Se Sfapd nepi^aXelv ;

On ov pr] with the Future Indicative in questions, see Negatives.

' Joh. Paech, Ueber den Gebrauch des Indicativus Futuri als Modus iussivus bei Homer, Breslau, 1865. Ii8 GREEK SYNTAX

272. Periphrastic Future with iie'xxw.— In very common use is the periphrastic future with /xiWo), I am thinking (com- pare the use o{ peiiser in Fr.), / expect, I am about, I am {destined^ to. As a verb of thinking, fieXXo) takes the typical future, but also the present, seldom the aorist and then to make a special point. Whatever difference there may have originally been be- tween the present and the future, has been abraded. Some- times there seems to be a conscious interval with the future, but the distinction vanishes and authors vary. The imperfect of the /ieXXcy-periphrastic may be called the future of the past, and it plays an important part in a large class of sentences.

273. /if'AAw 7ciit^ the Future Infinitive:

pteXXcTc TTjv \|r»i<|>ov oio-eiv, Andoc. I, 2; Yolc are about to cast your vote.

• 01 ISAE. 7i S*-* TrdvTes yap reXevTrjaeiv fieXXourt s irpovoiav Troioivrai a(pu>v avTav.

LyS. : a ti 3, 32 (215). 34 (215). 13, 37 (215). 19, 38 /xij yevoiTo, /Lt^ "

/ieXXet fxeya dyadov 'icreadai rfj TToAfi.

An DOC. I, 2 (see above), /tn'd. 21 : Snov [av] e/ieXXfi/ airos aodfjo-f-

(rdai e/ie re ovk dnoXelv.

AntIPHON, 6, 36 : paBims i'fieXXov d7ro(f)fv^e(r6ai Koi biK-qv ov Saxreiv.

Plato, Apol. 21 B: /ieXXco . . . u/xas 8tdd$eii>. Crat. 418 B (215). Phaedr. 228 C (215).

Xen. Cyr. 3, i, i (215).

Thug. i. 130, i (215). 3, 1 1 5, 5 (215).

HdT. 2, 43 (2I5)' 7' ^> ^) • p-fXXd) ^ev^as tov 'EXXtjctttovtov eXdv crrpaTov

. . . eVi TTjv 'EXXdSa.

181 : al Ar. Thesm. peXXovcrl p.' yvvaiKts dnoXtlv rrjpfpov. Eccl. 597 ^15)-

Soph. El. a', el rcovde ivravOa 379^80: piXXovai yap pt) Xrj^eis yoav, \

Trep\j/eLv ivda ktL O. R. 967 (215).

HeS. Theog. 468-9: e'peXXe . . . re^eadai (215).

HOM. Od. 6, 'Odvaevs . . . 135-6: Koiprjcnv epeXXfv \ pi^taOai yv/xj/of

TTfp €d)V. 7. 270 (215). (K 11.6,52-3 (215). 5^5~6- f'pfXXfv I (TTpii\rf(Td' x^p^s.

274. /.tfAXw zaith the Present Infi,nitive :

Ti tw irTiXw Ach. ! ! ouTos, 8pd

88 : 1 : Lys. 13, fifWeiv Xeyeiv. 9, 23 fifXKovra irXflv, On the point of sail-

ing. 24, 15 : \x.iWv aKr)Qr) Xe'-yf ii/.

ANTIPHON, I, 15: dBiKfla-dai e>eXXej/. /diil. 16 : ds Na^ov irXflv i'lxtX- Xev.

Plato, Phaedo, 59 A: avrUa . . . e/ieXXe rfXtwdv. Phaedr. 242 B:

(fifWov . . . Tov noTOfiov 8ia^aiv€iv.

Xen. An. I, 8, I (215).

Ar. Ach. 493 : anaa-i fieXXeis els Xeytiv rdvavTia (the future is not favored by the iambic metre). Eq. 267 (215).

Eur. fr. Toiaiira '"'•'" ufaadai oiai 459- f«p5'? xph ^porav, \ ((pi" /if'XXei (jltj- TToO varepov areveiv.

Soph. Tr. 8' aira . . . . . , 7S^~7'- fifXXovTi Tev)(^fiv (T(f)ayas | Krjpv^ lKfT{o).

PiND. O. 8, 63-4: av8pa . . . /xeXXoira irodfivoTaTav 86^av (pepecv (in

prose TOV . . . o'laovTa).

HoM. Od. 9, 475-6 (215).

II. 10, 454~5 o M^" M'" f'peXXe . . . Xia-aecrBai.

275. fxiXXw 7£'//// ///.? Present and the Future Infinitive:

DeM. : o re 21, 55 ea-T((pava>fji€Oa, ojjioiois fiiXXav vlkclv koi 6 TrdvTwv vara' Tos yevr]

Plato, Conv. 198 B: irais . . . ov /^eXXo) dnopflv . . . p,eXXa}v Xe^fiv;

Politic. 295 C: larpbv p-iXXovra . . . dnoSi] pelv (on the point of going

abroad) kcll aTreata-dai rSav depaTvevop-lvav a-vxvov . . . ^povov {and expecting to be absent from his patients a long time).

276. fiiXXu) with the Aorist Infinitive:

TovTO Toivvv . . . el liri tcXci iq[iiv iroirjTt'ov, [xt| pteXXofiev tw KaTaicrx^vai. TOV Politic. 268 This is XoYov, Plato. D ; what we must do, if we are not to bring dishonor on our discussion at the {very) last.

AntIPHON, I, 14: eVi TTopveiov k'peXXe KaraaTTJaai (once out of 20 times). Plato, Politic. 268 D (see above), /bid. igi C: ft p4XXoixfv Idelv evapyci)s to ^rjTovpfpov.

Eur. Ion, 760: flprja-erai toi kcI dave'iv peXXto ^nrXfj (282). Or. 292-3: €1 prjT fKf'ipos 6' 6 TotdS' dvaXa(3(lv epeXXe (pas, \ iya TXrjficov e'/itTrXr^o-ed/ KUKa (aorist and future side by side).

AeSCHYL. P. V. 625 : oTTfp /LieXXo) iradelv.

O. 61 : : . . . PiND. 7, ptXXfp 64pev (215). 8, 32 p4XXovTfs rev^at. P. 9,

52-3 : piXXeis . . . eveiKai.

HeS. Theog. 478 : fjpeXXe TeKeadai, but ibid. 468-9 : i'peXXe . . . Te^ecrdai. HoM. II. 23, 773: epeXXov (irai^uddaL. (So La Roche with the better MSS. Cauer reads firai^eadai.) 120 GREEK SYNTAX — I'JI. (jieUu), I POSTPONE. fxkXKuy, I postpone, takes regularly the present infinitive (resistance to pressure), rarely the aorist infinitive.

Present Infinitive:

€Ti p.€XXo|iev afjLvvco-Oai, ThuC. 6, lo, 5; We are still delaying to punish.

2 : . . . ThUC. I, 86, Tovi ^vfiixd)(ovs oil Trepio'^oneda dSiKOVfifvovs ov8e fifX~

'KT](rofi(v Tifiapelv. I, 124, I (278). 6, lo, 5 (see above). Eur. Phoen. 299 (see 278).

Soph. O. C. : tI we to 1627-8 fitWofifv \ ^wpeli', Why delay go?

278. Aorist Infinitive:

tc . . . Kai twv (XT) p.e\XcTe IIoT€i8aidTais iroicicOai Ti.|ji(i>piav aXXuv p,e>

TcXGeiv TT)v eXevOEpiav (present and aorist), Thuc. i, 124, i.

Thuc. I. 124, I (see above). Eur. Phoen. r/ r 299-300: /XfAXfi? UTrcopot^a pCkaQpa irepdv, \ ^fyeij/ oi^fvais TiKvov and W (present aorist); [Rhes.] 673-4: /xeXXere | a-K-qwrov (Toxrai 'iTLovTos no\efjLio)i> ^iov ; (So the MSS, but Nauck follows Elmsley in reading a-M^eiv.)

Future Perfect Tense

279. The future perfect is the perfect transferred to the future.

280. Future Perfect Active.—The future perfect active is found chiefly in the periphrastic form, where it has the full perfect force. The simple form is found only in a few verbs in which the perfect is used as a present : reevijlw, / s/ia// be dead;

«, / sJiall stand.

av TavT' cl8a>|J.cv, Kai to. Sc'ovt' £«r(5[j.e6' eYvwK<5Tes Kai Xoyuv piaTaiiov dirnX-

XaYlxcvoi, DeM. 4, 50. ifu>% oxiv £vopKa dvTop.(o |xo kus laxai (^daKuv ev elSc'vai; eo-rat aiirov AnTIPHON, I, 8. op' ovv Tov del xpdvov p.efJ.a0T)Kvia t| \|/vxt) ; PlaTO, Ar. will be Meno, 86 A (future ascertainment). TcOvTi^eis, Vesp. 654 ; You a Ibid. his side. dead man. lcrTi]|w irap' ovtov. Lys. 634 ; / will stand by

281. Future Perfect Middle used Passively. — Of more frequent use is the future perfect middle, which is chiefly used passively. The dramatists incline to the tense on account of its impatience of anything except entire fulfilment. Neither suddenness nor certainty lies in the form. FUTURE PERFECT I2i

jxao-TiYcio-eTai, o-TpepXtio-trai, 8e8tjo-€Tai, PlatO, Rpb. 361 E; He shall be shall scourged, tortured, kepi in prison {dedria-fTat, be put in prison).

DeM. 14, 2: Traf 6 Trapuv (p6[3os \e\v(Terai, All the present fear will be

: rama dvolv finally dispelled. 19, 74 TTfTrpd^ecrdai (SC. f(pr]) rj rpicov rjfiepaiv.

: S' Ke KivBvpfvcTfTai. AnTIPHON, 5, 75 o/^cos ovp

180 : Plato, Rpb. 361 E (see above). Theaet. A k&v tovtov Cvttjs \6yov kolvcos Xa^elv, r'l e'lprjKev, eripw TTfTrXrj^ei fxeT(>)vofjia(Tp.iva.

Se . . . diroKf K.ivbvvfvafTai rd re Koi al ThUC. 3, 39, 8: r]iiiv ^prjfj.aTa

oiibe ovTf ra ovre to. ISia e HdT. 6, 9: crcfii Ipa fXTtfivprjcTfTai.

1 1 : ovSeiy Kara (movdas dXX to Ar. Eq. 370- p.(T(yypa(fi7]a-(Tai, \ axrnfp rjv ats iTp(orov iyyeypd-^fTai, {will stay enrolled). Pax, 246: (TTi-TeTpi^ea-d^ avTiKa.

Eur. Bacch. I313 : vvv S' (k Bofiav arifios fK^e^Xrja-oixai. Hippol. 894 : ris 6((ov Svoij/ 8e fioipaiv darepa 77e7rX7j^erai. Or. 271-2: j3f ^Xrja-eTai 0po-

: iiXXa Koiv' Ibid. : ME. Soph. Ai. 577 ra 8' revxr) e'fxol Teddylrerat. II40-I iv croL Toj/S' earlv QaiTTeov. TEY. dXX' tovtov ojs Tfdd- cf)pd(T(o ovxt \ avraKovcrrf

\|/'eTat.'

AnACR. 77 ' evTe fioi Xevical fifXaivais dvafiefii^ovrai Tp'ixfS.

HOM. 11. I, 139: o Se Kev KexoXuxrerai, ov Kev iKcop-ai, and similarly 5,

21, ' '''' ^'''' TroXXa eV 421 ; 762 ; and 23, 543. 585 V Terev^erai aXye avTJj.

282. Future Perfect in an Imperative Sense.—The future per- fect, like the future, may be used in a quasi-imperative sense.

'«°^*'' Ai. TO. 8* aWa revxT *K'°'' TeOaxj/eTai, SoPH. 577; Afy other arms shall in a common tomb with ine lie buried (281). think. Din. I, 10: elprjO-eTai yap a yiyvaxrica), I must say what I

Dem. [44], 4 : elprja-eTai. yap, It shall be said (the truth must out).

ISOC. 7, 76: flpTfaeTai yap TaXrjdes, and similarly 12, 225; 15, 177 and ibid. 243. AnDOC. I, 72: dXXd yap TdXrjdrj elprjafrai.

: tovto kuI Ka\ ort Plato, Rpb. 457 B KdXXicrTa yap 8f] Xeyerai XeXf^erai to 8e TO fiev o)(p(Xiixov KaXoi/, jSXa/Sfpof aiaxpov. Eur. I. T. 1464: ol Ka\ Tedd-^r] KaT6avov(Ta. lon, 760 : elprjafTai toi

Kfl davelv fX(XXa> SnrXfj. Soph. Ai. 577 (see above). 1140-1 (see 281).

283. Future Perfect used as a Future. — Of course, when the perfect is predominantly present, the future perfect is a simple future and the middle may have an active meaning.

' Metri causa cannot be invoked in any of the above examples from tragedy.

See A. J. P. xvii (1896), 518. 122 GREEK SYNTAX

o-e 8' aXXi] tls yvvt) KeKTi^o-tTai, EUR. Alc. i8l ; But thee some other will Ar. / will stand woman possess. e

Eur. Alc. 181 (see above). Ar. Lys. 634 (see above).

S' : HOM. II. 5t 238: rdi/Se f'ywj/ ('movra 8(8f ^ofiai o^e'i 8ovpi. 22, 390

icai Keldi t v a o avrap fya> (jiiXov fj, fx rj fi' fraipov.

284. Periphrastic Future Perfect Middle. — The periphrastic future perfect may be middle.

Iv (S (icWci cKCivos "OXwOov KaracTTpE^ito-Oai,

ANDOC. I, 72: TTfia-as 5e' (SC. vpas), vnep twv fx^P^" dvroXfXoyrjpfvos (cropai.

Xen. Hell. 5, 2, 27 (see above).

Periphrastic Tenses

285. The Greek language has ample facilities for a large number of periphrastic tenses. With its many participles and its various auxiliaries, the possible combinations are almost in- exhaustible, while the existing combinations show at once the resources and the moderation of the language. Few languages capable of ep-eWe ovi TO 8€ijT€pov 8i.a4>vYuv eata-Bai (HDT. y, I94)> a'^d of

€|X€XX€ . . . €

286. Periphrases with the Perfect Participle.—

Most common are the periphrases with the perfect participle, which has more of an adjectival character than the others. Theoretically these periphrases ought to emphasize the main- tenance of the result.' But it must be remembered that many middle and passive verbs regularly use the periphrasis in the third person plural, and that the periphrastic form is almost the only form employed in the subjunctive and optative,* so that a certain indifference is bred thereby. i(f)6apfievoi elai is the regular form, and not €(f>9dparat, which is old-fashioned (Thuc.

' W. J. Alexander, A. J. P. iv (1883), 307-8. * M. Beyer, de perfect! apud Herodotum usu syntactico, Vratislaviae, 1868. PERIPHRASTIC PERFECT 123

is the not 3, 13, 3). cKTrecfievya}^ ecrjv rule, iKTrecj^evyoirfv (SOPH. in oratio O. R. 840). XeXoiire becomes obliqiia XeXoiirw'^ eii) on the of the (Xen. An. I, 2, 21). Still, much depends position copula, much on the context and on the character of the verbs.

evravd' (cat DeM. 19, 336: Tr]v aWas inapti Tt)v (fxovrjv Trffpoivaa-KriKas 16: dvai oaov ea-rai. [48], €(f)r] Trap' eavT<^ fXTj rjv dvTjXco ^evov.

. . . . . avTols a s ISOC. 12, 233 : fvdvs . TrpoftprjKcbs rjv e(ji' (rvu(\t]Xv66Te h' icre. Tjcrav, aviyvuxTTO 8' 6 Xoyos-, iTTj]vrjp.ivos rjv (236). Plato, Con v. 191 E; piaXXov npos ras ywaiKas Terpapniivai, fieri.

. . . TfKTaivoiro Euthyd. 280 C: reKTcov el Trapea K€vaarp.fVOS e'ir] ^vKa iKavd,

ead' 6 Tc av dno ; B : ovtcos ras M pLTj, (o

: edu avrols . . . nai (Compare Gorg. 502 B n ijSv fi /cexap'0'M«'''o»'-)

Xen. Hell. I, I, 11 ; irvBop-evo^ Se on al Tcbv HeXonowTjo-icov vrja (^ 'A/SuSou dvTjyfievai elev els Kv^iKov . . fjXffev els ^tjcttov.

pi. : TToXv epiovs earlv e Kois. KAP. Koi riva 84- Ar. 867-8 paKXov ^oXaiXf \ is Av. : ecreadov enTe al- dpUKe 8riTn tovt{o) ; But 655 pa p.evu>, eTj-TepwfjLeva most an adjective and Ran. 433: $evo) yap ea-fiev apTiws d(j)iypeva>, eafiev belongs to ^eva.

e'XXiires) ; Soph. Ai. 740: rl S' e'o-ri xpfof TTjcrS' viTe(nravia-p,evov {=^ HOM. Od. 2, 187: ro Se Ka\ rereXe

elp-iv.

revives under 287. The force of the copula elpi, however, slight press- ure. So under emphatic position or correlation. had Tjo-av £K T£ Aivov p £ p oT) Oti K o TC s, Thuc. 4, 28, 4; T/uy actually

. . . An. 6. come to their help from Aenos. ^v oiSev ireirovOois, Xen. 6, i,

288. Perfect Participle with eV av. — Especially worthy the of note is the periphrasis of the perfect participle with opta- the of the tive €ir}v and av. This periphrasis gives opinion speak- er as to the future ascertainment of a completed action, which action may lie either in the past or in the future of the .speaker. el ... toBtov ovK aroirov ... av ireiroiii Kores ti|i€is etTjTe, aavi

DeM. 19, 71 (see above). 30, 10 : ovk av 8ia tovto y elev ovK (vdvs Sf So)-

' avTov k6t€S. 39, 15 ft Tis diiirjv (^ovXtjs avTO) Xa;^a)i/ fiT/Bev efjiol (ftairj Trpos eivai,

t'i av tovtov ; Kvplav 8f 7ron](Tdfi(i>os iy-ypdi^ai, pdWov e\rf r] ep. eyytypacfxiis av ISOC. 12, 130: OVK e^a> rivas enaivovs flnoiv d^iovs t'lrjv etprjKas rij: eKeivciiv 8iavoias. aX\ ev LyS. I, 2: Ka\ Tavra ovk av f'lrj fiovov nap vp'iv ovras (yvaxr peva, that I should to have anda-T] tjj 'EXXuSt. 31,4: elprjKws av e'lrjv, (/// ease) prove spokett.

: . . ovos av dadevfia Plato, Charm. 157 C eppaiov yey f'lrj 17 TTJs Ke(f)aXrjs 8id T(3 vfavicTKCo, et dvayKafrOrjaeTai Koi ttjv ^Ldvoiav rfjv K€(pa\f)v /SfXri'wi' yfvetrdai. Legg. 670' E. 678 E. 696 D. 753 E. 782 A. 800 A. 880 E. 892 A.

: av to Our in- 896 C. /Sid. D. 907 C KoXws fjpiv flprjpfvov t'lrj npooipiov. troduction must have been a good thing. Meno, 85 D. Phaedr. 262 D. 263 C. e XEN. Cyr. I, 2, 13 ; eVeiSai/ . . .TCI TTfvre Ka\ ("Koaiv (Tq SiaTeXe'trcocru', irjcrav

. . . av ovToi TrXftdi/ ti, to otto ytyovores fj TrevrrjKovTa err] •yfi'ta?.

Eur. Hipp. 349: 17/xet? av elpev daTepco KfXPVH-^""^ (30^). — 289. Perfect Participle parallel with an Adjective. The is shown adjectival character of the perfect participle not infrequently by parallelism with the adjective.

ovTWS ecrrlv ovotjtos Kai TravrdiTacnv vjjiuv KaTa'Tr£<})po vi] Kcis» LYCURG. 68.

Lycurg. 68 (see above).

. . . aXX' ovTa> ireTr va Ka\ LYS. 14, 2: ov yap piKpd to. apapTr]paTa pay pe fts ToaoiiTO KOKias d(f>iyp€va.

290. Perfect Participle as predicate of the Participle of is seldom so €i[ii Even the perfect participle, however, purely adjectival as to suffer combination with the participle of elpi.

OVK tlwGos ov, Eur. Hec. 358. Meineke reads tovtolo-l ov Ar. Ran. 721 : tovtoktiv ovaiv (where toIctiv) KfKij38r]Xfvpfvois. Eur. Hec. 358 (see above).

— the 291. Periphrasis with the Present Participle. On peri- To the with the phrasis with the present participle see 191. examples other tenses. present auxiliary, add the following with fKfiva k ot aXe /did. et ISAE. 3,65: ft rjv yvridia dvydrrjp nrope vt]. 72:

^v yvrjaia dvydrrjp rw fjptTfpco Oeia KaraXeiTro pevrj. PERIPHRASES WITH PARTICIPLE 125

1 : ...... Koi ISOC. 5. 10 \iiav npa^iv ijirep rjv npocrr] Kova a fiiv wpeTTOv-

(T a . . Tov be One action, which was suit- ., naipbv i')(ov(Ta p.aXi(rTa (Tvfip.eTpov, able and becoming and admirably opportune. 6 Se 6 LyS. 13, 39 : peTOTrepnovrai ets to Sea-pcorrjpiov 6 ixep dSfX^jji/, fiTjTtpa, 8e 6 S' tls eKdaTco avTwv tt Kovaa. ywaiKa, rj ^v poarj

2 : 18 : tovto AnTIPHON, y 3 dpKovaa tjv. 5, rjv orvp(f>f pov.

ThUC. 2, 67, I : ov TJV {there lay) arpdrfviia twv '\6i)vala>v Tro\iopKovi> (not periphrastic). 3, 2, 2 : a p-eranf p7r6p.€V0L rjaav (Cobet : p.fTaTvtiTfp.p.evoi). P. Kai tovto PiND. 6, 28-9: eyev'To nporepov 'AvtIXoxos ^lards \ votjfjia this ep(t3v (an upholder of spirit).

1<^1. Present Participleparallel with an Adjective:

pa6v|x6TaToi €cr£(r£€ Kai TjKicrTa eirl rots Stivois op-y i^ofxt voi, LYCURG. You will be most and least 27 ; easy-going resentful of outrages.

Lycurg. 27 (see above).

DeM. 3, 25 : (Ta>(f)povf s TJa-av koi cr(f)68p' iv ra r^? TroXireiaf rjQfi fxtvovTes.

[35], 46: /SSfXupos Tis ecTTi Kai vne p^dXXcov diravTas dvdpanrovs tu) novrjpbi eiuac.

0118 LyS. 14, 2 : ov yap fiiKpd rci afiapTr]p,aTa ov8e (Tvyyva}p.i]s ci^ia, eXnida 7rape;(oi'ra as kt€.

. . . Ka\ Kai a i- Plato, Ale. 11, 138 D: dai Tives cicjipoves re (f)p6vi.poi, p.

V ope vol erepoi. — 293. Periphrases with the Aorist Participle. Periphrases with the aorist participle are rare. In most instances the aorist may be regarded as the short-hand of the perfect, or as a manner of characterizing adjective or quasi-substantive. Here and there, however, there seems to be an efifort to evolve a more exact aoristic future.

Jjcrav 8e Ttves Kai Yev6[Ji€voi roi Nikio. \d701 irpdrepov, ThuC. 4, 54- 31 been held with Ni/cias even us Conferences had actually before. €(|>pa£ov av€is, Hdt. 3, 27 ; 77^1?/ forth god actually ap- peared to them. DeM. [52], 9: 6 \.vK(i>v Tvyydvn wv Ka\ uTTais Kai KXrjpovopov oi8eva o'lKoi

(caraX tTTcoi/.'

LyS. [2], 13: ovK (IboTes onoioL rives av8p(S eaovrai yevopevoi (=eVetS7 a.v8p(s yivoivTo). [20], I : 01 pev (some) yap fiTil3ov\fva-avTes rjaav avrav

(rja-av avTuiv is probably belonged to their nuniber).

2 8 : Ka\ avTov This AnTIPHON, y ovros dv oiSei? eTepos dnoKTe ivas e'lrj, man and no otJier must have bee?i his murderer. (6 divoKTfivas would be

more natural.) Similarly 3 S 4 and 5.

Plato, Legg. 961 B-C : toiovtov tI wov Xfx^^^ W'" ^^ ^^ ''""'^ f'pTrpoadfv

1 See A. J. P. xii (1891), 79. 126 GREEK SYNTAX

; B : m ovk av Xoyois (Phileb. 64 /iij fii^a)fj.fv aXijddav nore tovto aXr/^cof yiyvoi- TO ov8' &v is not to be counted. ov8' tiv f =: ouS* yfvojxevov e'lr) yfvo^tvov it; av ft In like manner f'irj yivoLTo. analyze Legg. 739 E.) Politic. 265 D:

Taiir' earuy C: . . . Tavrrj XtxOfvra. Soph. 217 fiij aivapvr}6(\s yevij.^

XeN. An. 7, 6, 36: rjv 8e noiT]cr7]Te . . . KaraKavovres (Dindorf KaraKfKO- poTfs) eaea-de. The reading KaraKavovres is f-avored by the coincidence of action.)

Thuc. 4, 54, 3 (see above). 10: HdT. 2, i'pya dno8f ^dfjLfvoi fieyaXa etai. 3, 27 (see above). 5,

69: Tjv . . . Tov 8r}fxov 7rpo(r6e [levos ttoXXw Karvnepde rav di/rtorao-tcoreajj/, // true that he had over the was gained commons fiar beyond his rival. 7, 206 : Kara Toivro tovtokti rolai r)v yap OXvp-nias nprjyfiaai avpnecroiKra ( = trvy- Xpovos).

Eur. Suppl. 511 ' e^apKeaas rjv Zevs 6 TLp.povp.evos. Ai. Soph. 588: /x?) npo8ovs f)p.ds yivr] {prove traitor). Ant. 1067: veKvv veKpav dfioi^ov dvTt8ovs eaei. O. C. 816: 7 prjv crii Kcivev Toi8e XvTrt)- 6f\s e 89-90: yap Opacrvs \ TTpo8f etpl ye vvv Xoyo). 970: ovro) S' uv Oavav fir) '| fp.ov (parallel with the periphrastic with 6avcov perfect optative civ, being practically the perfect of 6vt)).

Ph. cavTov ff . . . KTfivas Com. 77'2-3'' M dpa | Kafi yevj] [parodied by

Gr. Fr. : S) Phryn. 2, 605 (=fr. 20, Trag. N.*) (^tXrar dp8p(ov, fir] p.' dTifidaas yevrj].

PiND. P. 2, 72 : yevot olos fo-al p.a6u>v (but See B. L. G. ad loc).

HOM. II. 4, 2IO-I : aXX ore iKavov, 661 Mfve'Xaoy 8rj p ^avdos | ^XrjjXfvos is rjv not an example. (HXr^pevos does not go with ^v.

294. AoRiST Participle with forms of <()aivo(Aai —The aorist par- ticiple with forms of (f)alvop.ai is especially worthy of note as a valuable periphrasis.

a-iiTos (xev ovxe Xa^uv oviSev ovt' ETTixci-P'no'ci'S XaPciv (j>avi]0'0|j,ai, DeM. 21, 40. of of Dem. Often the future ascertainment a past action. So 5, 10: ov8€v TovT(ov ovt' f an ut O" a s ovt( ^ r] aiyrjaas eyco (pavrjcropai, dWa Trpoei- TTiov vpiv Kri. 20, 80. 21, 39. 40 (see above). 22, 47, and elsewhere.

ISOC. 12, 78 : TovTov 8e KaWiov arpaTrjyrjpa . . . ov8f\s (pavrj afTai. rrpd^as.

83 : (pavrjiTfTai Troirj crdpevos. (Cf. 41 • (pavrjaopeda . . . drroXeXonroTes.

138: (jiavetrjv av . . . elprjKais. 172. 209.)

Lys. 25, 16 : ft? TOV KOTaXoyov . . . KaTaXf ^as ov8fva (f)avr)(rop,ai, It will appear that I have put no one in the catalogue.

295. Periphrastic Aorist Participle with €xw—The periphras- tic aorist participle with f;(a) emphasizes the maintenance of the result

» A. J. P. iv (1883), 306. EPISTOLARY TENSES 12^ and is therefore an equivalent of the perfect, the double nature of which is thus analyzed, €x be intransitive and nearly equal to It ft/ut. is not always possible to feel the original force, and in Herodotus and the tragic poets %x

Tov Xdyov Se

12 : Kai Kai . . . DeM. 9, fifiv ^fpas e^fi KaraXajBoiv.

AeSCHIN. 1,15: evi K.ecf)aXaL

Plato, Gorg. 456 A: a-vXXa^ova-a . . . exei. Legg. 793 B. Phaedr. 257 C (see above). Tim. 30 C.

ThUC. I, I : de . 30, Kopivdiovs drjaavres el^ov. I, 38, 6: 'Enibafivov . . eXovTes ^ia e'xovcri.

9' ") • f'x^H'^'' ^^ avrcoi/ 7rai8as Karaa-T p(y\rdp.evoi (cf. DeM. 4,

6: TrdvTa KaTicrr paivTcii, koi f'xfi)-

Eur. Ion, • ^ kov 735~7 dvyarep, li^L d^iayv yfvvrjTopaiv \ tj6i] (pyXdaaeis rovs (tovs iraXatovs Phoen. Karaiaxwacr' e;^6tf | eKyovovs avroxOovas. 856-7. Soph. Ai. 21—2: wktos (icTKonov TTf ydp fjp.as Trjcr8e TTpdyos \ e;^ei pdvas, f'inep e'ipyaa-Tai raSe (parallel with the perfect). 676. Ant. 22. 31-2. 180. 192-3. O. R. 577. Ph. 942-3.

PiND. N. I, 31 ' ovK epapai TToXvv iv p-eydpay ttXovtov KaraKpv'^ais €;^eii/. HeS. O. et D. 42; Kpv'^avTe s yap ('xovctl deol fiiov dv6pa>noi(Ti. HOM. II. I, 35^' ^Xa>v yap e;^et yepas {^= eTXe Kai fX")-

296. Periphrastic Perfect Participle with ex«' — The peri- is also phrastic perfect participle with i'xco found.

Plato, Theaet. 200 A : einaTrjprjv lipa olrja-erai redripevKtos e;^€ii'.

XeN. An. I, 3, 14: a)v . . . noXXd xp^f^d^a exop^ev dvqpnaKOTes.

600: € s. Soph. Ph. 6vy' elxov rjSr) xpovtov K^e^Xr] k6t€

Epistolary Tenses

297. In letters the aorist is sometimes used from the point of view of the receiver.

«S eScDKa eerri . . . Kai aoi 1 Xpi]vir]S) tt|v eiri(rTo\T]v, <|>i\oSi Plato, [Ep.] 5 ', Crenes, to whom I gave {give) this letter, is a true friend to you also.

' See also Ph. Thielmann in Abhandlungen Wilhelm von Christ dargebracht von seinen Schiilern, Miinchen, 1891, pp. 294-306. 128 GREEK SYNTAX

ISOC. I • = Ibid. I : Ep. 3> T)^ovXr]drjv ^oiiXofiai. 4. irpodXofjirjv = TrpoT]pr)fxau Plato, [Ep.] 15 (see above).

298. As there are few genuine Greek letters of the classical period, we have not the material to determine whether there was ever such an exten- sive permutation of tenses as we find in Cicero's letters. The aorist in the N. T. is clearly due to Roman influence, and is not to be cited.

Tenses of the Moods 299. In the language of classic prose the indicative alone ex- presses the sphere of time directly (183), the other moods ex- press the sphere of time indirectly.

300. It must be noticed, however, that in the earlier language the op- as its tative appears to have been used a potential of the past ; hence affinity with the past tenses in oratio obliqua, hence, perhaps, the occa- sional use of the present optative as a real imperfect. Nor, on the other hand, are we to overlook the fact that the indicative loses its sphere of time in unreal conditional sentences.

301. Subjunctive and imperative are both future by their nature. So also is the optative outside of oratio obliqua. Under the head of future are included immediate and indefinite pres- ent. When we use, then, "present," "perfect," and "aorist" " of the non-indicative moods, we mean by present continuance," " " by perfect completion," and by aorist attainment."

302. In not a few verbs, owing to their sense, some of the modal tenses are not used, some are rare. We should not expect to find aTroXXuotro, and

II. 1 is scarce. ;!^apet'j7 (HoM. 6, 48 )

Tenses of the Imperative

303. Present (durative) : P. to yiYvwo-Ke aavTov, AesCHYL. V. 309 ; Learn, strive, knotu thyself.

Aorist (attainment) : " to a yvwei o-avTov, Plato, Protag. 343 B ; Come knowledge of thyself!' Perfect (completion): be cast cast. dv€ppi4>9a) ktjPos, Com. Men. 4, 88 ; Let the die and stay For additional examples see under Imperative Mood.

Tenses of the Subjunctive 304. Present:

(rKoirw|ieOa, Plato, Protag. 314 B; Let us consider (a course of study).

Hdt. 8, Let us the jATj 8i.cSku(1€v, 109; give up pursuit. TENSES OF THE MOODS 129

Aorist: Let us consider o-K6v|/iu|j.£6a, Plato, Protag. 330 B ; (each part by itselO- «iir

Tenses of the Pure Optative

305. Present :

8' o Ti Traoriv viKcoT] pLeXXei crvvoio-civ, Dem. 4, 51 ; May that prevail which shall adva7itage all ! epSot tis V cKao-xos elSeit] t€'xvi]v, Ar. Vesp. 1431. Aorist:

8' £\oio-6' o Tt Kal iroXci Kai airao-i (n;voi(r6iv vfiEis rg vjjiiv (xcXXei, DeM. 3, 36; May you choose that which shall advantage both the state atid all ofyou !

Perfect : Chiefly with such perfects as are equivalent to presents.

avTiKa II. be at T€9vaiT)v, HOM. 18, 98 ; May I deadforthwith ! yap l(j.ot Toioo-Se iroo-is K£K\tin«vos etrj, Od. 6, 244 (periphrastic perfect).' For further examples see under the Optative Mood.

Tenses of the Optative with av

306, Present (Future ascertainment of a present, future, or past imperfect action):

. . . ov . . . 28 be <{>avXoL elev, Plato, Apol. B-C ; They must sorry fel- lows. ToLxa 8e av Kai 01 diroodiievoi. Xeyoiev [might harie told the tale) diriKo- virb (levoi es Sirdpnuv is onraipcGfiTjaav Zapiwv, HdT. I, 70.

Aorist (Future ascertainment of an aoristic action, rarely of the past) :

ovK av / can't it. 8' dv ti Kal tov dpvT)6eiT]v, Dem. 21, 191 ; deny rdxa dvofiaro? cTravpoiTo, Hdt. 7, 180; Perhaps he may to some extent have had his name also to thatik for that (as if eTravpofievos av yivoiro).

Perfect (Future ascertainment of a completed action) :

o-e . . ... irws dv . . . it es- XeXTjOe .; X«Xi76oi ((Ae); Xen. Conv. 3, 6 ; Has capedyour observation ? How can it have escaped my observation ? r[^tl% dv elfjiev Oarcpu kexp^i (Ji-e'voi, EuR. Hipp. 349; We must have felt the worser half.

See further the chapter on the Optative with av.

' The analysis which involves the future ascertainment of a past action, while not infrequent in sentences of opinion (optative and dv), is naturally rare in sentences of wish, which are not analytical, so that for an example of this form of wish, we must have recourse to the manufactured sentences of a grammarian. dQe viviKijKoi 6 Apollonius Dysc. fiov Tra'tc,ei9e SiSo^aa fxkvoQ e'tt], p. 251, 25-6 (Bekk.) ; 3/a}- son have ascertainment still in he have 7)1}' conquered [SiCiiow decided, suspense) ; >nay covered himself ivith glory. 9 I30 GREEK SYNTAX

Tenses of the Optative as Representative of the Indicative 307. The optative as the representative of the indicative in oratio obliqua after a past tense ordinarily represents the corre- sponding tenses of the indicative from the point of view of the speaker. Present Optative (= Present Indicative):

€Xe7€v OTi el . . . pXa^epa ttJ AaKtSaip-ovi irt-irpaxus €it| (=ir£irpax€\ SiKaios eiTj (=8iKai6s €o-ti) £T)|iiov(r9ai, Xen. Hell. 5, 2, 32; He said that if lie Iiad (Jias) done what was damaging to Lacedaemon, he deserved (deserves) to be punished.

LyS. 12, 6: t\eyov ... is fiiv rives ttj TroXireta d)(d6fievoi.. Plato, Euthyd. 276 E: cnveKplvaTo OTi fiavBdvoifv 01 fiavddvovTfs a ovK iiricTTaivTo.

Xen. Hell. 5, 2, 32 (see above).

HDT. I, 83 : TjkOf liXkrj dyyekiT], ass TjXamoi to Tfi)(OS . . . Koi «;^otTo Kpolcros

^aypTjdeis.

Soph. Tr. 161-2 : dne o n f^ec^a' piv X«';^ovs I XP^^V H-' Krijaiv.

HOM. Only after interrogatives. Od. 15,423: elpara 8f] i'Treira ris eirj Koi TTodfv eXdoL. 17, 368.'

308. Aorist Optative (=Aorist Indicative):

dirii-yYeXXcv i>% to . . • o

DeM. [34], II : fXeyei/ oVt ovn ra ;^p77/iara evdoiro tls ttjv vaiiv ovros . , . aitTov eV 2" ovre TO xpvcloi' elXrjcpws e'irj Trap' Boa-iropco. [52], 1$ (see S^^). [59]- (see 311).

Xen. An. 4, 3, 1 1 : tXeyov oti Tvyxdvoiev (ppvyava (rvXkiyovTfs ass em Trip,

KUTTeiTO KaTibotev . . . yepovTa re Koi yvvaiKa ktL Hell. I, 7. 5 (^66 3^2).

. . . koko. Ar. Ach. 648-9: i]pa)Trj(Tev tovtov top ttoitjttjv norepovs enrol

TToXXa. Vesp. 283 : KaTeiiroi.

SOPH; Tr. : a)S Trodai ttoXis ivda-a. 431-2 rJKOvaev TavTr]s ] bapelr]

Find. O. 6, 49: e'ipero Tvaiha top Evd8va tckoi (where see note).

HoM. Od. 15, 423 (307). 17, 368 (307). 24, 237 : o)s eXdoi is to be con- sidered interrogative (how he had come).

309. Perfect Optative (= Perfect Indicative): irdvTa V cXeYov OTI £7u) eii] (= elfxi) Treirvtrixe'voSj Lys. I,l8; I said that I hadfound out everything.

22 : . . . Kf ttuXip . . . DeM. 18, eroKpa Xeyeiv ws cip' f'-yo) kwXvkoss e'ixfv rfjp

I I : TavTTjv (=^TT]v elprjprjp) noirjo-aa-dai. [34], (IXtjcjiass e'ir) (308).

' A. J. P. iv (1883), 4ig. FUTURE OPTATIVE 13^

Lys. I, 1 8 (see above).

Plato, Phaedo, 59 E : envdoneda on TO TrXotoi/ eK AfjXov d(f)iyfi€VOv ett}.

XeN. Hell. I, I, II : nvdofxevos Se on al tcop TlfXanovvrjcricov vrjes . . . avrj-

. . . Hell. yfifvai fifv fls Kv^iKov, ^Xdfp els 2i]

HDT. I, 83: TjXciKOl (307).

310. Future Optative (= Future Indicative): ir£iOE(rOai tois eXcYov oTi ...oi 8vvr](roivTo(^ov) 8vvT](r6(j.£0a) |at| 0T)Pa(oi9,

I said that would not be able to to the Xen. Hell. 6, I, ; They they refuse obey Thebans.

DeM. [50], 56: airtKpivaTo p.01 on ov8' aKaprj taveiaoi.

: ovk av en irai- ISAE. 6, 23 eiSdres S' oi dvayKaloi on e'^ fKfivov fiev yevoivTO en Sta- . 8' Tiv\ Ka\ eK tovtcdv ecrocvTO fies . ., (pavrjO-QivTO aXXw rpoTTW, fiel^ovs

Antiphon, I, II : fVf^i'ot/ii (19S). Plato, Euthyd. 283 A: eneaKoTrow riva TTOTe rponov a-^oivTO tov \6yov Koi onudev ap^oivro Kxe.

. . . tI ea-oiTo noXi- Xen. Hell. 2, 3, 17 : ttoXXoI S^Xot ^aav davpd^ovTes fj

. . . ecroiro Teia. Ibid.: 'ekeyev 6 Qr]papev7]s on d8vvaTov Tr)v oXiyapxiav 8iap.e- 6, I, I. veiv. 2, 3, 56: eiirev 6 '2,dTvpos on olp-a^oiro (^ olpa^ei.). iStwrtoi/ el ao\ Ar. Eq. 776 : ov (ppovrl^av Tcov oii^evos, x<''P'^oi[ir]v.

Pers. 7rai8i o-w ni8e, ws . . . ov AeSCHYL. 356-60: e\e$e Aep^rj \ "EXXr/j/er pevolev, dXkn . . . ^iorov e Kacoaoiaro.

. . . ns PiND. O. 9, I15-6: eKeXevaev SiaKplvai dvnva axh^oi fjpwcov (ear- liest example).

311. Retention of Imperfect and Pluperfect Indicative in Oratio Obliqua.—1\\& imperfect and pluperfect having no optative, the retention of the indicative is to be expected.

6 . . . on. 8 e i ovo-av oXX* eStiTo 06O76VT1S Xe'YWv ovk fj Neaipas aiiTT)v 9v7aT€pa, i-iro 81 that he did tla-iraxTjeeiT) ST£(j>dvov, Dem. [59J, ; Theogenes begged saying not hnoT-u that she was the daughter of Neaera, but that he had been deceived by Stephanus.

312. Present Optative representing Imperfect Indicative.— In the absence of an imperfect optative the present optative is not infre- quently found to represent an imperfect indicative. 8e 8iT]Y0vvT0 OTI aviToi (xev liri Toiis iroX€|j.io\ irXeouev (=: eirXeov), ttjv avaipe-

. . . ffiv Tciv vavaYwv Trpoo-Taleiav 0T|pa(Aev«u ktI., XeN. Hell. 1,7. 5 • Their story ivas that they kept sailing after the enemy and had assigned the picking iip of the shipwrecked to Theramenes etc. 132 GREEK SYNTAX

DeM. [52], 15* fToXfiTjirav fiapTvprjcrai as 6 fiev KdWimros opKov tco narpl 6 Sf = oiK boiT) (^eScoKf), TTarfjp ovk (6e\oi ( fjOfXev) opocrai.

fi' ri a'l LyS. I, 14- epop.€vov e/xoO Bvpai vvKTuip yp-o(pol.(v (cf. § 17 : dvap.i- p.vr}(TK6p,evos . . . OTi . . . e'^ocpei). I, 20: Karijyopei . . . w? fxera ttjv eacpopd]/ avrrj irpoaioi.

Xen. An. 4, 3, 1 1 : rvyxdvoiev (see 308). Hell, i, 7, 5 (see above).

See further on this whole su'^)ject Oratio Obliqiia and Object Sentences.

Tenses of the Infinitive

Infinitive as a Verbal Noun

313. The infinitive as a verbal noun is used chiefly in the present and aorist, more rarely in the perfect. The temporal relation is that of the kind of time.

Infinitive as a Subject* 314. Present:

a. Without the article :

' ira96vTa Alc. is paov TTopaivciv f| Kaprcpciv, EUR. 1078 ; T easier to preach than suffer arid be strong.

LyS. 8, 2: dviapov fifv ovv dvayKci^eadai Xeyeiv nepl rovrav, dbvparov be fir) Xeyfiv.

AnDOC. 1,8: KparicTTov ovv p.01 etVat fioKei e^ opx^ji v/xaf biddcKf iv navra rd yfv6p.fva Koi irapaXnreiv prjbfv. koL Plato, Rpb. 555 C: nXovrov rifidv (T(i)(j)po(Tvvr}v ap.a iKapas KTacrdai

. . . ahvvoTov.

ThUC. I, 5- 2 : Koafios KoXais tovto 8pdv.

Com. 2, ^s ddXarrav diTO & Archipp. 727' ^^^ ^"J" TTJs yijs opdv \ p-rjTfp

Eur. Alc. 1078 (see above).

Aeschyl. p. V. 751 : ndaxf^v (see 316).

THEOGN. 21 I : olvOV TOl TTlVeLV ITOvkvv KUKOV.

8' HOM. II. I, 274: irelBea-Qai cifieivov. 2, 453: Toiai a<^ap TroXe/Ltor yXv- veecrBai. Kiav yevtr' rje lO, 174'

315. b. With the article :

KaKov TO iriveiv, Ar. Vesp. 1 2 53; A bad thing this drinking, to pow-

I. Xeo-eai fi' £Kvit€, Eur. A. 330.

ISOC. 2, 2 : Tovs plv yap iSiaras e'crri TroXXa ra TraiSfuoi/ra, pdXicrTa pev to pff Tre tov nad' Tpv

' Or quasi-subject. See Infinitive. INFINITIVE AS SUBJECT 133

Ale. 11, E : kukqv o)S earlv roil Plato, 143 lip', i'oiKev, Tj ^eXriaTOv ayvoia (cat TO dyvoelv to ^£\ti(ttov.

Xen. Cyr. ^,1,11 : to . . . ipav i6e\ov(n6v (CTTip. Ar. Vesp. 1253 (see above), fr. 2, II33: t6 yap (^o^e'iaBai t6v davarov

"hripos TToXvs.

Eur. Ale. 693: t6 Se ^rjv p.iKp6v, dXX' ohms yXvKv. Bacch. 389-90: 6 Se

. . . /3ioroy KOL to c^pove'iv. Heracl. 240-: to crvyyeves re Kal to npovcpf iXfiv.

: Te Koi to I. 476 a-iyt] crox^povelv. A. 330 (see above).

Soph. El. 265 : to TrjTdadai (316). 770: 8(iv6i> t6 tIktciv ea-TLv (136). fr. aXKd Ta vovs Kol to iv d Set. 239: yqpa (piXel \ x,^^ ofiapTelv ^ovXeve

PiND. O. 9, 38 : TO Kavxdcrdai. P. 2, 56 : to nXovTflv. N. 5, 18 : to (Tiydv.

Simon. C. 100, I : t6 KaXios di/rjcrKfiv dpeTfjs fiepos eVri ^liyicTTov.

316. AoRiST :

a. Without the article :

davciv to.% aira

' AE.SCHYL. P. V. 750-1 : T is better oncefor all to die than suffer on forever andforevermore.

18 : . . . . . b' . . . Dem. 3, fv^aa dai fiev padiov ., iXicrdai ovKed' opolcos eijTiopov.

Andoc. 1,8: irapaXmflv (see 314).

Theaet. : eS Plato, 187 E Kpe'iTTOP ydp nov ap.iKpbv ^ iroXv pLT] iKavms TTt- pdvai. <

THUC. I, 22, I : ;^aXe7r6i' ttjv oKpi^fcav avTr)v twv Xf^dturcov SiafJLvr) p.ovfv- crat.

Ar. Vesp. 367 : Starpayt ti/ Toivvv KpaTiarov ia-ri poi to BIktvov.

Soph. El. • ToivBi 6' Kal to ntXei. 264—5 (^V poi \ Xa^elv Sfioicos TrjTdcrdai Aeschyl. p. V. 750-1 (see above).

PiND. P. 4' 272 : pa8iov peu ydp ttoXiv erf tcrat.

BaCCHYL. Ill, 47 : dave'iv yXvKiarov.

HOM. Od. 9, 241 : dpyaXeov, /3acriXeia, dirjveKeas dyopdcrai.

• II. 2, : be 01 kotu ni in' 5—6 r^be Ovpov dpiaTTj (paivfTo ^ovXrj | p'^at

ATpftbu 'Ayap.€pvovi. ovXov oveipov.

317. b. With the article :

TO . . . KaTaY«Xaa-0TJvoi i9 ovBev irpdY[J,a, PlATO, Euthyph. 3 C; To get laughed at is perhaps a matter of no great consequence.

Dem. I, 23 : TToXXaKtf boKii to (f>vXd^a(, Tdyadd tov KTr](Taadai. )(aX(TTU3T(poU (Ivai.

ANDOC. 2, 5 • pfydXrj be brjTrov Kal to e ^apapTeiv bvcTirpa^ia ((ttL

• '''o dv tov AnTIPHON, 5. 9^ ^biKws dnoXiaai oaiaTtpov e'ir) pLq biKaiai diToXf(rai. 134 GREEK SYNTAX

Plato, Euthyph. 3 C (see above).

ThUC. 3, 58, 2 : ^pa)(v yap to ra f]fi(Tfpa crapara bia<\)Qf'ipai. AR. Lys. 884: olov TO TfKe'lV. fori Com. Antiphan. 3, 150: to npo'iK uTiodavt'iv <^av€pa Oipia. Eur. fr. 854: t6 pev a-<^ayrjvai ^(ivov.

PiND. O. 8, 60: (iyvcopov 5e to pf] irpopadflv. AlCAE. TO koKov. 30: yap \ "Aptvi KaTddvr^v

318. Perfect :

a. Withold the arftc/e :

ir6X.ei . . . ti E avdYKT] ^ePovXevo-Oai xpT 8pav, PlaTO, Legff. 949 ; A city must needs have a settled policy as to what is to be done.

(iTroXwXei/ai. 120 : DeM. 19, 179: rjXcoKevai Trpo(TrjKei. Ibid. 282: 21, 8e8(OKfvai. dvT]p7rd

Plato, Legg. 949 E (see above). Soph. 222 B : tlpTja-dai.

HdT. 5, 18 : vopos . . . Tiplu yi e'cTTi . . . k( ^((opicrdai av8pas yvvaiKcov.

BaCCHYL. XIV, I : (V pev elpapdai Trapa 8al[pocriv dv]6pa>7rois apiaTov.

181-2 : THEOGN. Tedvdp.evai., (fiiXe Kvpve, Tr(vi.xp<^ ^eXTepov dvBpi, \ ^ ^aetv

)(a\f7r^ Tfipopevov TrevLtj.

HoM. Od. 3, 209: vvv 8e xP'i TfTXupfv i'pnris (cf. Hymn. Merc. 494-5 : ovSe tI ere xpf] . . . >ce;^oXaJ(r^atj.

319. b. With the article :

. • . . . . have been TO 8iKT)s d<|>eio-9ai iicycLXt] Swpcid tjv, Dem. 23, 185 ; To allowed to go free 0/ picnishinent was a great boon.

Dem. 23, 185 (see above).

: to tovtcov AeSCHIN. 3, 236 Tov yap TavT f^fpyaa-drjvai KaXws yeyepfja-dai a'lTiov p€i(a> KaTrjyopiav f;(et-

ISAE. II, 18 : ovK 'iaxv(Tf . . . TO irpoveviKtjKevai.

XeN. Hiero, 8, 6: avro yap to TfTiprjadai . . . (rvveniKoa-pd. to 8e aa-TLKTOV Hdt. 5, 6: TO piv fO-Tix^cii' fiyfVfS KtKpiTai, dyevvis. Ar. pi. TO 8' av bfboiKevai ov8iv ear 354-5: \ npos dv8p6s vyie's eipya- apivov. to eldia-dat fV Ictoktlv Eur. Med. 122-3: yap Cfjv \ Kpe'ia-aov.

Ant. : to avrov eK KaKcov Soph. 437-8 pev yap necpevyevai \ tj8i(TT0v.

Infinitive as an Object

320. Present :

a. Without the article :

otiTov Isoc. will under- vvv d8eX4>iE€iv eirtxtipTio'ovcriv, 19, 30 ; Now they " " take to brother him. IXFIXITIVE AS OBJECT 135

Isoc. 5, 87 : TToXf^eli/ (see 211). 19, 30 (see above).

Plato, Gorg. 474 A : ovk fjTnaTiifjirjv im'^Tji^l^eiv.

XeN. Hiero, 3. 3 tov? /jloi^ovs vo^i'i^ovai ttoXXoI tcoi/ ivakfatv vr}Tenivf\ airo-

KTflvdv. Ibid. 4, 1 1 : Tpi(f)eiv (see 324).

HdT. 3, 83 : oi'Te . . . (ipxfi-v ovre apxtcdai ediXco.

Com, Philem. 68 : atrw 8' elr' he 4, 56, vyUiav npSyTov, einrpa^iav, \ rpirov

)(aLpeiv, (It u(f)e iXe iv pr]8evi.

Ar. fr. 2, : aXX' ov ravr' ciXka 1038 yap epade epov ivipirovTos, paXKov \

TTiveiv, fneiT adeiv kokcos, '^vpaKocriav Tpdne^av.

Soph. El. • eXoi) KaKci>s, Tu 345~6 ye ddrfp', Tj (ppovfiv \ fj (piKoiv (j)povov

Find. O. 3, 36 : rois yap eVeVpaTrei/ Ov\vpTr6v8' lav BarjTbv ayoava ve peiv.

II. 8' o'ico HOM. 10, 116: (Toi 67rerpe'v//'ei/ irovie crdai.

321. b. With the article:

TO tovtwv 1 1 1 eXXrjvi^eiv irapo i-{i>f<((. Ifjiaeov, PlaTO, Alc. I, A ; I learned Speaking Greek from tJiem.

DeM. [33], 4: TO . . . TrXdu KaraXfXvKa (202). 57, 18: to ^(vl^eiv avTov

KaTrjyoprjKacnv-

Plato. Alc. i, in A (see above). Legg. 847 A: to ^rjp KTaa-Oa.

' Theaet. 185 C ovaiav Xeyeis (cai to prj elvai.

XeN. R. L. 2, 7 : f(j)rJK€v avTois to pri)(ava

Soph. O. C. I : t6 125-7 y ilae^is \ povois Trap' vplv evpov avBpanav iyio \

Ka\ TOVTTieiKes Kal to prj ^evdocTTopelv.

222. AORIST :

a. Without the article :

otiK Seo-iroivav not stick at uKvtio-e TT)v -yT) fxai, Dem. 45, 74 ; He did tnarry- ing his mistress.

Dem. 45, 74 (see above). [50], 57 : ovk TJ6iX( napaXa^elv ttjv vaiv.

Plato, Euthyph. 3 D : ou Trdw i-mBvpO) 7rfipadfjvai. XeN. Hell. 1,6, 10: ovk eSvvaprjv epavTov TveicraL (15^)-

Com. Pherecr. 2, 280: cru be Kal KvXiKa Tpdirt^av ficrcfxpf, \ Kavrpayelv. Eur. Alc. 669: pdTTjv ap' ol yepovTes fvxovTui Oaveiu.

PiND. O. 6, : Kflvai dXXdv 686u TavTav iirio'Tav- 25-6 yap e^ dyepovevcrai | Tai.

HOM. 11. I, 6eoi 8olfv 18-9: vplv pev 'OXvpnia dapaT e^ovTfs \ eKTrepaai npidpoio TToXiv, ev 8' oiKaS iKecrOai,

323. b. With the article : TO Aeschyl. I will endure the TXTi

KOI aSxrai . . . DeM. 18,93: TO XfppovTjcrov Bv^di/Tiov 17 7rpoaipf(ri9 rj ffxri Koi TToXtreia f) difTrpd^aro. iKeivov ISAE. I, 42 : ovToi yap to dveXflv avras (^Tas 8ia6rjKas) ^ovXofXfPOV ^ifKa>\v(Tav.

Koi . . . fV 'iaai,s eXjrla-i AnTIPHON, 2 y 6: TO p-ev aXwvai dTro(f>vyflv

6S>p.ev avrd eivai. Plato, Euthyd. 275 C: 6appel t6 d-rroKplvaa-dai.

ThUC. 3, 40, 3 : fK Toil ev elne'iv to nadelv fv duTiXriyj/ovTui.

: . . . TToXti/ Tode. HdT. 5, lOI TO Se pT] XerjXaTTJa-ai tt]v i'(r\€

Eur. Ale. 694 : av yovv dvaibcjs 8i(pd)(ov to prj davelv. Aeschyl. Ag. 1290 (see above). PlND. O. 2, 107: TO XaXayrjcrai df\(ov^

324. Perfect:

a. Without the article :

airoX wXe 1 1 avaYKtttovTai (TTpdrevfia Tp€'<|»£iv rj vai, XEN. Hiero, 4. .' They are compelled to keep an arviy or perish {be ruined).

. . . navra to iv noKei 8iKaia. Din. I, 112 : ^oiiKfrai criiyKe;^uo-^ai ttj Koi av tuvt DeM. 8, 49: Tedvdvai pdXXov rj etprjKevai (iovXoipr}v.

ovi> tt Oai TavT eaTiv. ISOC. 5, 29: a pev fj^ovXoprjv poi pof ipfj(T

: noXiv av aSiKov (ivai Kal (iXXas TToXeis eVi- Plato, Rpb. 351 A-B (j^airjs

ddinas Ka\ KaTadedovXaxrdai. /did. D : . . . vft-pfiv hovXavcrOai 406 d^iol e'^e-

. . . Kavaet piaai TO voarjpa ^ i) Toprj ^P^o-dpfvos dnrjXXdxOai.

: KeKXelcrdai. Hell. 2, I : XeN. Hell. 5, 4, 7 einop tt^v dvpav 6, 5 eKrjpv^ev Hiero, ii above). . . . TTfnpdadai. 4, (see f Com. Pherecr. 2, 262 : ^ovXolprjv yap kov aKaXr}(^aii top 'i(Tov xpo^O" fre-

<^ava>cr6ai. Aeschyl. Sept. 461-2 : Imrovs . . . dtXova-as irpds nvXais TT€7rT(i)Kevai.

325. b. With the article : iroXX' diroXuXeKc'vai Kara t6v av TO fiev Yap irdXciiov Tijs "^fxeTcpas dficXfCas 10 This losses dur- Tis eciT) 81K01WS, Dem. I, ; {thing of) having suffered jnany to our ing the war may justly be charged neglige7ice.

: . . . t6 Dem. I, 10 (see above). 23, 7 tovto 'Apia-TOKpdrrjs ^SiVet, toiovtov, top outu, olov e'yci) <^'?/xi bei^fiv XapiSrjpou Toaavrqv neTroirfaBai. irpovoiav.

of of creation 326. Future.—The future infinitive as the object verbs comes from the blending of the sphere of thought and the sphere of will. Some of the examples are much disputed.

irvp lvT7

See further the Infinitive.

• See A J. P. XV (1894), 509. infinitive for indicative 137

Infinitive as the Representative of the Indicative

327. The infinitive as the representative of the indicative takes all the tenses. See Accusative and Infinitive.

Present {= Present Indicative):

Tov Kai Com. /fz'fH is ciruxowTtt <|>pov£tv vo(JLito}J.£v, Men. 4, 354, 497 ; who lucky we think to have sense withal. <}>tio-iv liriXij

Present (= Imperfect Indicative) :

dvTiX.c7etv

' Aorist (= Aorlst Indicative) : ov 4>il(rw •n|Aas 6p9ws 6(xo\o7T)

Perfect (= Perfect Indicative) :

. . . Isoc. that he has written 4)T)(rl IykcSjiiov Ye-ypa<|>evai, lo, 14 ; He says an encomium.

Perfect (= Pluperfect Indicative):

Kal oSdv re [Xe'YCTai] ovirw iroXXTjv Sitjvvo-Oai avrois Kai tov Mr)8ov ^kciv ird- Xen. 28 It is said that not imich their Xiv, Cyr. i, 4, ; of journey had been accomplishedyet when the Mede returned.

Future (= Future Indicative) :

ovK Hell. ii eT) 6|i.ei

Futicre Perfect {=¥utuve Perfect Indicative):

viroXaiJiPdva) . . . (aoittjv ep pavl/uSt] kotus njAas eerccGai, DeM. 25, 2; / understand that we shall have delivered our screed to no purpose.

328. Articular Infinitive as the Representative of the In- dicative.—The infinitive as the representative of the indicative may take the article.

Present :

tv p.ev ovv 6)j,oXo7£iTai to Kpareiv twv KXT]povo|xi(i>v tovs oppevas, DeM. [44],

1 2 : One thing theti is agreed on, namely, the males' holding {that the males hold) the inheritance.

' On tlie aorist as a future, see Accusalive and Infinitive. 138 GREEK SYNTAX

Aoristi

th . , . dvoi^ai TTjv Ovpav ovx op-oXoyei, Dem. [42], 8 : The Opening of the door {the statemeftt that he opened the door) he does not agree to.

Future :

TO 8e ce airopii(r€iv, ovk otftat (sc. (lavriKus PlATO, Conv. to the statement that will be at a I don't think that 198 B ; As you loss, you have said that in a spirit ofprophecy.

8 ; S Dem. [42], to /xei/ d^eXeii/ rb (rrnifiov ojxokoye'i, to avol^ai ttjp Bvpav

ovx ofioXoyfl. [44], 12 (see above). 57' 63 : (< . . . yap tov opuov i^rfKei-^av to

yj/rjcfiieia Oai (='\|/'^(^toO/iat) yva>p,r] rrj BiKaiordTTj.

Plato, Conv. 198 B (see above). Phaedo, 61 D: nebs tovto Xeyfi? . . .

TO prj depiTov elvuL iavTov ^la^eaOai ; Phaedr. 244 A : to {the statement that)

to . . . eivai. fiaviau KaKov fivai. Soph. 231 C: fif) padiov

HdT. I, 86: TO tov ^oXaivos . . . TO firfbeva eivai Tciv ^aovTcov oX^iov.

Soph. Ant. • ^' . . . dfovs t6 264-7 W^^ f^oip-oi opKayiOTelv \ /aijtc 8pa

Tenses of the Participle Participle as a Verbal Adjective

329. The participle as a verbal adjective is chiefly used in the present, aorist, and perfect tenses. The temporal relation is that of the kind of time.' The sphere of time depends on the context.

Present Participle

330. Contemporaneous Action.—The present participle is generally used of contemporaneous action, either total or partial.

. . . tov vewTaTov €jjL€ Xc'yeis Xe'^cov, Plato, Parmen. 137 C ; Vou mean me when you speak of the youngest. SovXevovo-t 76 [xao-Ti-yovfievoi Kai o-<{>aT-

t6|16voi, Dem. 9, 66; They lead the hvrs of slaves, beitig scourged and butchered. Xoyovs '7rpoepwv airuXeo-ev ainjv, LySv 1,8; {By) making pro- posals he ruined her,

331. Leading Verb Present:

Dem. 9, 66 (see above). Plato, Parmen. 137 C (see above).

' This temporal element is deeply imbedded in the nature of the participle and the use is universal, so that it is not necessary to draw e.xamples from different ranges of classic Greek. TENSES OF PARTICIPLE 139

Eur. Andr. 373 : avbpb^ 8' ajxapravova duaprdvei ^iov (coincident

action), A wotnan failing- of a husbajtdfails of life.

332. Leading Verb Imperfect :

Dem. 54' 9- .'/^f • • • Tovs aXfKTpvovas ixip-ov p,evos tovs veviKrjKOTas {coin- cident action). Plato, Meno, 90 C: ire pnovres Tovde KoXcos av i'Trefnropev (coincident action).

HdT. 9, 21 : 01 Meyapees Trie^opevoi {finding themselves pinched) eirep-

nou eTTL TOVS (TTpaTrjyovs rav 'FjWrjvav KTjpvKa.

333. Leading Verb Future :

Dem. 12: oi8ev ovv dXX' ol 7r( 14, 17 pa-^MtTjaovcrip TrpecrlSeis piiovTfs.

XeN. Hiero, 11, 15: ev8aipoua>v yap ov (pdovrjdi^ae 1. (174)-

HdT. 4, 98 : TavTa be iroifvvTes fpoi /ieydXo)? ^apifla-Oe (coincident action).

334. Leading Verb Aorist :

Lys. I, 8 (see above).

XeN. Hell. 7. 5' 9- opS>v . . . rbv . . . xpovov TTpo^aivovra ivofiicrf npaKTeov

Ti fii'ai.

Hdt. 1,68: opvcro-cou f7reTV)(ou (ropa> eirrairrj^fi,

335- Leading Verb Perfect:

Dem. 8, 34: vvv hi. Srjpnyayovvres vpds Koi )(^api.^6p(voi Kad' vrrep^o-

\r]v, ovro) hiare 6i]Ka(T iv axrrf Kre.

336. Leading Verb Pluperfect :

21 : XeN. Hell. 6, 5. drjovvn TTju ^cipav ovSfis T)de}\.T)Kft pa)(fadai..

Ar. Ach. 10: K€)(^r]VT) TTpocrBoKatv tov Aia^vXov.

337. Prior Action. —The action of the present participle is some- times prior to that of the leading verb. An adverb of time often makes the relation plain. 01 vvv Kvpeioi. Trpofrdev ovv rwilv TaTTojievoi d4>ea'TT^Ka(riv, XeN. An. 3, 2,

17 ; The troops of Cyrus, who were formerly marshalled with us, have now deserted us.

Dem. 18, 61 : Ka\ nporepov KaiiS>s tovs "EWrjvas exovTas npbs eavToiis Koi.

(TTa(Tia

Plato, Rpb. 518 D: al . . . oXXai dpfToi KoXovpevai '^vx^js KivbvvevovcTLv

. . . ovK ivovaai. npoTepov vaTepov ('ixTroiflcrdai.

Xen. An. 3, 2, 17 (see above).

Hdt. 8, 62 : Se t(3 e'ff a-rj paivmv ravra Xdyo) Ste/3airf Evpv^idSrjv, Xeyav fidWov fTTi(TTpappiva. 9> 27' '^ci'' yap o.v xprjarol rdre eovres oiVTol vvv av fifp

(pXavpoTepot, Ka\ TOTe eovres (fiXavpoi vvv av eiev dfielvoves. 14° GREEK SYNTAX

AR. a v. 75 TTporepov avdpcoTTos ttot' cjv.

Ant. : Soph. II92 (ya>, (piXij Seanoiva, Koi ivapa>v epw.

MiMNERM. 3 : TO ecbi/ KoWiaTOS, enrjv oibe TTplv irapafidy^eTai wprj, | irarfjp iraicriv TLp.ios oi/Ve (ptXois.

: 5e rot HOM. Od. 13, 401 iivv^

338. Subsequent Action.—The present participle may imply cona- tive action, and thus simulate a future (see 193). So (jitpav and aywi/ are used almost to the exclusion of o'larwv and a^wu. Se •^ IlapaXos els ras 'A9i]vas [dire-irXe-uae] diraYYEX.\ov(ra to, y£yov(5to,

Xen. Hell. I, 7Vie Paralos sailed to Athens with a 2, 29 ; off report 0/ {^to report) what had happened.

AnDOC. I, 104-5 : rjKovcTL . . . ol fiev flcr6p,evoi . . . ot 8e diroTre ipa> pevoi. Xen. Hell. 2, i, 29 (see above).

Ar. Ach. : coi cnrovdds fcrnevBov. 178 eya) fxev 8evp6 (f>€ pcov | Eur. Suppl. 120: TovTovs Oavovras rfkOov e^airaiv ttoXiv.

PiND. O. 7. rav novriav TralS' P. I3~4- K-aTzjiav \ vp.ve

HOM. II. I, doas (TU re 37I~2: TJXde vfjas ^A)(aicov ;^aXKo;^ira)i/ci)i/ | XvcrofjLfvos dvyarpa (pepcov t dTrepeiat a-rroiva. (Here both resemblance and difference between present and future are manifest.') Compare II. i, 431 : "iKavev

idid...... aya>v with 442-3 ^po H' ^TrepLyj/ev naida dyefifv.

Aorist Participle

339. The action of the aorist participle is ordinarily prior, but it may be coincident, so especially when the leading verb is aorist or future.

els to v, LvS. 22 to the sec- dvaPdvTCS virepuov eSenrvovfie I, ; Going ttp o- o- we to u a s tovs a w o- e i s R. I . T. ond story, supped, o-u^a \670vs cfioi, E U 76 5 ; Saving thy body thou wilt save my words. a-iruXeo-as tov oIvov exix^c^s fr. iiSMp, Trag. Aristias, 4 ; You spoiled the wine by adding water.

340. Leading Verb Present :

Hdt. 6, 371 7TLTVS . . . €KKOTr€7(Ta (BXacTTov ovbfva pLfTLfi (134)-

Com. Men. 4, 340> 10 • dx^dpicrros ocTTLS fv naduiv dpvr) p.ove'i.

341. Leading Verb Imperfect :

Ibid. h' LyS. I, 22 (see above). 24: 7rapaXa/3a)i' is olov re rjv TrXeiaTovs

, . . €J3d8i^ov.

' L,. See B. G. , Introd. Ess., cxii. ' The examples cited for Homer do not seem to be very cogent. See Boiling, The Participle in Hesiod, Reprint from Catholic University Bulletin, Vol. ill, p. 439. TENSES OF PARTICIPLE 14I

to. ThUC. 6, 69, I : avaXa^Qvres oiiKa (v6vs avTcirfjo-av (206).

Eur. I. T. 27 : fxeTapa-ia Xrj(f)dei(T' eKaiv6fiT]v ^l(f>€i.

342. Leading Verb Future.

Prior Action :

DeM. 14,31 : ils ^pvy'iav i\6u>v 8ovXev(rei ;

HdT. 2, 5 : KaT(\s KaTaiTfiprjTrjpcTjv irrjXop re dvoiaeis KTe. (258).

343. Coincident Action :

Tols Eur. I. T. 765 (see 339). Med. 383: Qavovaa dria-oi e'/xois e;(^poTs yeXav.

344. Leading Verb Aorist :

Prior Action :

DeM. 54, 20: vytjj? f^f\6a)V ^opahr^v rjXdov o'lKaBt.

: once. Lys. I, 27 ir\T]ye\s KaTenecrfi' (v6vs. He was stabbed andfell at vii aiiTolv Plato, Euthyd. 273 C : fiTrinv oZv ravra KaTfCppovrjdrjv (I74)'

345. Coincident Action :^

ISOC. 19, 9 : QpaavWos . . . tovtovs fiovovs iraldas yvrjaiovs KaraXnroiv . , . Tov ^iov €TfXevTT]a-ev.

DeM. 18, 208 : ovK ecrriv ottcos r]p.dpTeT{f) . . . tov VTvep rrjs diraurav eXevde- pias Koi croiTTjpias klvSvuov apafifvoi.

: Ti av ravra ISAE. 7, 33 ^eXriov eirpa^fv fj ^ovXevadfifvos atrtp iiroij)(Tfv; Plato, Theaet. 185 E: tv (noiTja-ds ^e p.dXa a-vxvov Xdyov diraXXd^as.

XeN. Cyr. 1,4, 13: koXuh . . . eTroirjaas Trpofnrd)v. Ibid. J, 5.4^- xaXas

. . . fTToir] eras . . . cip^as roii Xoyov. irdproiv HdT. 3, 38: 6p6ws fioi BoK€fl nlvSapos TTOirja-ai vo^ov ^acnXea

AR. Pax, : Xldov e aTriiXea-av. 630-1 I fi^aXovres i^fxibip-vov KV>\rtXr]v Trag. Aristias, (Sat. Dr.) fr. 4 (see 339).

a-raStoi/ Ke'oj/ e s. X, I ; BaCCHYL. VI, 15: Kparrjaas | i/cXei'^a 5 avdrjad- fifvos . . . dfjKas.

I. : re are PiND. 5, 51 eiTTfv (j) covrjcraLS pdvris dvfjp.

HOM. II. 1,434: la-Tov S' 1(tto86kj] iriXaaav npoTovoKTiv v(j)(vres.

346. Leading Verb Perfect :

18 : ra ire t, a deter' vnb rovrov. DeM. 36, ypdfifiad' f] pTjrrip fj(j)dviKev

347. Leading Verb Pluperfect :

DeM. 36, 8 : o Yiauieav erer eXevrr] Kf i ravra diade fievos.

' " " On the adverbial group with (pOdvoj, Xav9dvi>i, rvyxdvoj, see Participle and

A. J. P. xii (1891) 76-79. 142 GREEK SYNTAX

Perfect Participle

348. The perfect participle expresses completion.

Leading Verb Present :

DeM. 24, 6 : Ti hi) itot' eyo) fifrpias . . . rbv aXKov xpovov /3 6/3 ((UK cor, vvv fv ayaxn Koi ypafpals hrjuoaiais e^erdfoyxai.

349. Leading Verb Imperfect :

Dem. 14, 36: Koivov i-)(6pov iKiivov vTrfiXrjCJioTes afiovoovv dXXijXotf.

: f ovk 23, 127 KoTvv evdvs an KT ov (OS dcr^aXej Tjydr' aTTfXBfiv onoi t(i)(oi.

350. Leading Verb Aorist •

10: ti k o) s ocr' Dem. 37, dcfuKOfirjv crxe86v ttovt aTroXcoXe e;^6)i' €^eTrXfV(ra.

351. Leading Verb Perfect :

Dem. 55> 23' ovhlv dTroXcoXe/ccby . . . TTfKiKavrrjv fioi BIkijv €iXi;;^e.

352. Leading Verb Future :

16: rd ttuvt' . - • Dem. 28, xP^H-'^'''^ aTretTTf pqKas fXtficrdai vvv v(f)' vp,S>u d^Loicrei.

353. Leading Verb Pluperfect :

Dem. I, 8: r^Kopav (=plupf.) El^oeva-iv ^e^oTjdrjKOTfs, We had re- turnedfrotn having reinforced the Euboeans.

Participle as the Representative of the Indicative

354. The participle as the representative of the indicative takes all the tenses, the future as well as the present, the perfect, and the aorist.

The participle represents the indicative only after verbs of intellectual perception and those that are causative of the same. For actual percep- tion, see Object Sentences.

355. Present Participle.—The present participle repre- sents durative action, regularly contemporaneous, occasionally prior.

Cofitemporaneous Action after a Principal Tense = Present Indicative :

Dem. 29, 25 ; ^ovkofiai . . . f^fXey^ai . . . avrov ylrfvBoiXfvov (=ort ylrevde- Tai), I ivish to prove him to be a liar, that he is a liar.

356. Contemporaneous Action after an Historical Tense = Imperfect

Indicative :

Dem. [34]. 13 • rjcrdofiTjv avTov biaKpov6p.(v6v p.f (=ori bieKpovtro fie, or, by that he was to repraesentatio, on hiaKpoverai /le), I perceived trying cheat me. MOODS 143

V 357. Prior Action = Imperfect Indicative :

oI8a o-€ OTU 6 that used Xe'YovTa(= €\£7€s), Xen. Cyr. I, 6, ; / know yoti to say.

DeM. 21, 12: MeiSt'af S' eV airai? ravrais rals fjixepais u^ia tov bovvai t^v

ecrxaTiju Siktjv ttoimv (= oti fnoiei) hfLxdrjo-eTai. 6 rSiv LyS. 10,4: (pa'ivofiai ovv TpicrKaiSeKeTTjs a>v ore izaTrjp virb TpiaKovra

2 : . . . koI 8ia- Xen. Cyr. I, 2, (f)vaLv Trjs fj.op(f)rjs TTjs "^vxrjs Toiavriji/ 'i^iitv

fivrjfiovevfrai. Ibid. I, 6, 6 (see above).

Hdt. 6, 121 : (f)aLvovTai ^ucroTvpavvoi eovres.

358. AoRiST Participle = Aorist Indicative.

tupTJcrcT* avTov ttjv . . . iroXiv 8ia AaKcSaiixoviwv aaOevr) iroiiicravTo, DeM.

15, 24; Vou will find that he vtad/? the city weak by means of the Lacedae- monians.

359. Perfect Participle = Perfect Indicative.

• • • Kai vvv olSd tre 6Y'i» ^ai ISiutt]V Y*Y<>''n |Ae vov Tvpavvov ovra, XeN. Hiero, 1,2;/ know that you have been a private citizen and are now an absolute ruler.

360. Future Participle = Future Indicative.

. . . 2 a 8 o-aus TJSei oX(i>a6)iEvoSi Antiphon, ; He knew clearly that he would be convicted.

Antiphon, 2 a 8 (see above).

ThUC. 3, 67, I ' "iva vpe'is . . . eidrjTf SiKalcos avTdv Karayvtoaopevoi.

• fv . . . iiriaraTO kot' avTos a

Soph. Ai. II55 • ^o'^i- ntifiavovpevos.

On the Future Participle after Verbs of Motion, see Index. MOODS Indicative Mood

361. The indicative mood represents the predicate as a real-

ity. It is sometimes called the declarative mood or mood of

direct assertion. ti|ii, / saj/.

362. Use of the Indicative.—The use of the Greek indicative is in the main the same as that of the Enghsh indicative. It must, however, be noticed that the English indicative and the English subjunctive (opta- tive) coincide to a considerable extent in form. Hence the apparent coin- cidence in syntax, where there is real diversity. In "/ had fainted, unhss 144 GREEK SYNTAX

" " " " I had believed," Ps. 27, 13, both I had fainted and I had believed are subjunctives, or rather optatives.

363. The differences to be specially noted are these:

I. Expression OF Possibility, Power, Obligation, and Necessity. — The Greek language expresses possibility and power, obligation and necessity, and abstract relations generally, whereas our translation often the failure to as facts ; implies realize.

. . . TO. . . . a eSei aiiTov 20 ovv^irXei dvSpaTroSa aTToXvo-ai, AnTIPHON, 5, ;

The slaves ivJiom he ivas to release were on board with him. oi . . . iv rais

T€

I in the whose business it was Thuc. 3, 29, ; The Peloponnesians forty ships rore to get {who ought to have got) there quickly, loitered on the way. |vva\- a' or Alc. tion dolere ^eiv x^r\v u»\Xi5[it]v I7W, EUR. 633 ; aequitts FUERAT/a/a cunt nie tollerent (Buchanan).

. . . 8e Din. I, 81 : oVe [liv k'dei fid)(fcr6ac w'xf"' anioyv oi/caSe, eVetSij irpoa-

. . . *'' TToXecof TjKfv o'lKoi KivbvvfVfiv ^X^"^' '''^^ aiToopai.

• ^'^f-- : TToXii KciXXiov . . . 8i

...... rols dbUu)! LyS. 12, 32 : XP^" ^^ (Tf e'lnep rjada \pr](rT6s p.fX\ov

a.TTodav('icr6ai prjvvTTjv ytvecrdai. 20: fKe'ivov eSet dirodave'iv, aid tnihi aut illi moriendutn AndOC. I, fj e'/ie ^ erat. hv Tiva Plato, ApoL 34 A : Kai aWovs ttoXXovs tya (x<^ V'" flTrdv, expfjv

. . . napacrxio-dai MeXrjTOv pdprvpa.

. . . tov vlou aTToXajXeKivai. HdT. 3, 66: 01) yap Tjv 01 d(T(paXes (fidvai Kvpov

8, 6. 8, 68, a) : dnTjXXa^av ovt(o cos Keivovs enpfirf. aKova-ai. Ar. Nub. 963; irpcoTov peu edfi rraidos ^0)1/171/ ypv^avros prjSfp'

Ibid. 973 : eSfi. Eur. Alc. 633 (see above).

HOM. II. I, 353 : Tipr]v irep poi o(f)eXX€v 'OXvpinos eyyvaXi^ai.

— ^"^ 364. eSci, €xpijv, ETC., OF THE PRESENT. When eBei, ixPV^^ sense the like refer to the present and not to the past, a modal is set up, and the dependent infinitive becomes unreal.'

' MSS and editors often fluctuate between tSit and StT, XP'I^ and xPn- The or dis- present indicative gives the simple statement, the imperfect indicative surprise have Blass Andoc. appointment. Cf. ANTIPHON, 5, Qi, where the codices xP')^ xP^^i [4], 16, wliere Blass has tSti for MS Sel. INDICATIVE MOOD I4S

• • • ofio" etvai tovto // to be ^XP'H*' irpaTreiv, LyCURG. 141 ; Oicght conso- nant with piety to do this (but it is not).

Lycurg. 141 (see above).

: . . . Stai/otai/ DeM. 15, 32 €)(pfjv TTjv avTTjv e;^fti' vficis (=aXX ovk e;^erf ) Trept

TTJs iv TJj TToXtrei'a ra^ew?, rjvnfp nepi ttJs ev rals (rrpareiais e'xere.

' Koi . . . vvv ThUC. 6, 78. 4 fiaXiara ftKos rjv vp,as fxt] paXaKcos Sxrirep ^vppa-

Xelv.

HdT. 3, 80 : KaiToi (wSpa ye rvpavvov a(f)dovov eSee eipai, (^^^''''^ 7^ navra ra

• dyadd. to 8e inrfvavriov tovtov is tovs TToXii^ras 7re(j)vKf (pdovift. yap Kre,

Com. Hermipp. 2, 399 : tovs fiev ap I'iXKovs oiKovpt'iv XP^"-

EUR. Or. 1030: ^Tjv expTJv a, or ovKfT ti.

365. 2. Indicative in Generic Sentences. — In generic sentences the Greek has a tendency to other modal construc- tions. In practical questions, personal argument, as in poetry and proverbs, the indicative may be used as in English and Latin.

et . . . cct' Tts clSus irpovSuKcv tj c^aTrara, ovtos €Voxos T'fj dpa, DEM. 23, one has is 97 ; 1/ any wittingly betrayed or wittingly deceives, he obnoxious to the curse, a didn't |ati KareOov, (it) dve'X'o, Prov. ; What you deposit, you mustn't draw, tw . . . do-Oevovvri iriKpd aiveTai a eo-Oici koI ecrri, PlaTO, Theaet. 166 the sick what he eats seems is E ; To man bitter, and bitter.

Prov. ^v tis tfia^e fid^av TavTTjv Kal eV^teVa). (See also above.) Dem. 23, 97 (see above).

AeSCHIN. 3. 196 • fi ydp Tis iv BrjpoKpaTia TfTiprjpepos . . . roXpa ^otjde'iv Tols

TTapdvopa ypd(f)ov(Ti, KaroKvei Ttjv TToXiTfiap. Ibid. 198 : octtis . . . a it el (bis). Plato, Theaet. i66 E (see above). 170 A: 7-6 8okovv eKd tovto kuI fivai ttov

HdT. 3, 127 : evda . . . (To(f)lT]s 8eei, ^irjs epyov ov8ev.

: ev Eur. Tro. 400 (pevyeiv jJLev ovv xph i^oKepiOV octtis (f)pove'i. AeSCHYL. Sept. 596: beivos OS deoiis (Te^ei.

PiND. N. 3, 41-2 : OS 8e bibdiCT e^ei, . . . fxvpidv . . . dperdv dreXel vow yeve- Tai.

HOM. Od. Kelvos 'A.ibao 14, 156-7- ix^pos yap pot opois irvkrjatv | yiyveTai,

OS Tvevirj e'iiKov aTraTTjXia /Safei.

366. 3. Non-use of certain tenses of the Indicative WITH Temporal particles.—As a rule, temporal particles are not used with the indicative in future relations. Here the sub- junctive with av is regularly employed, which becomes optative in oratio obliqua. 10 146 GREEK SYNTAX

Temporal particles with the present and perfect tenses of the indicative are regularly causal or conditional. See Temporal Sentences.

367. Indicative in Wishes.—The indicative of the past tenses is used in hopeless wishes. Here some introductory par- ticle, such as elQe, el yap, is used to show the baselessness of the wish. Or the form w(^e\ov {wjyeXkov), I ought, with the infini- tive, is employed. Here there is also, as a rule, an introductory

: eXde el is particle (aWe), yap, &>?. The negative /xi]. The imperfect indicative after eWe, el yap, denotes a wish for continuance, regularly in opposition to the present, the aorist a wish for attainment, regularly in opposition to the past. When M(f)€Xov is used, the tenses of the infinitive are em- ployed in the same way, the present infinitive like the imperfect indicative, the aorist infinitive like the aorist indicative.

i^ovXofjLijv av {Kev) and i'^OeXov dv {k€v) are not infrequent forms of indicating a hopeless wish.*

aXK' &^€\e . . . Kvpos t,r]v, Xen. An. 2, 1,4; A/t / Cyrus ought to he alive = would that Cyrus were alive.

LyS. 3. 21 : ( iSovXo firjv 8 av . . . ^ifioovn rrjv avrrjv yvwfxrjv ifioi e^eiv.

Plato, CritO, 44 D : d yap a>(f)(\ov . . . oLoi re flvai 01 ttoXXoi to, fieynrra

KQKa e^fpyd^fcrOai. Rpb. 432 C : d yap &5(^eXoi/ (sc. Idelv), e(p1-

Xen. An. 2, I, 4 (see above). Cyr. 4, 6, 3 : rj^jiapTev, w? p-rjiroTf cicfxXev.

III : : rod HdT. I, o(pe\oi'. 3, 65 fidov o\j/iv iv virvo), ttjv fir}8ap.a o(pfXov

Ide'iv.

AR. Nub. 24: eW e^fKOTTrjv npoTfpov rov 6(f)6a'Kp.6p Xi6

e'ide (rov eivai ovTa>a\ 6 \ wc^eXet', wXa^dyv, 6fpp.6s TrXeO/xcor (mock heroics).

Ale. ci'^' Eur. 536: fvpofifv a-', "ASyur/T-e, firj XvTTOVjxevov. Cycl. 186-7: TTore d EI. 283; fi^ IXTjBafiov yepos | (pvpai yvvaiKcov a>(peX', /xt) '/not fiovoi. rjv

Opearrjs irXr](Tiov kXvcov raSf. /did. 1061 : eW et)(es, S> TfKoiicra, (BeXrlovs ^pe- vas. I. A. 70: prjTTOT ui(f)eXfv Xa^elv.

Soph. El. 102 1-2 : eW TomSe a>(f)fXes TTjv yvafiriv irarpos | 6vr)(TK0VT0S

• tiio I Trap yap av KaTeipyd(ra> (ei rjo-Ba, hadst thou been).

PiND. P. Ke . . . rov 3, 1—3; TJdfXov Xfipwvd ^iXvpidav, | | ^axiv dnoi^^o-

fifVOV.

HOM Od. • <^^ 6av4eiv Koi eiria-ne'iv 5. 3'-'^~9 ^'1 ^y^ y' o(f>fXov TTOTp.ov |

OTt KTe. I ' ijpMT. TCO, I, 54^

^ In large stretches of prose literature, there is scant occasion for the expression of wish. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD 147

II. w? ddvaroi a8eiv KaKos, oirnoTe vlei (r(i 3, 173-4: o(f)f\(v fxoi Sevpo \ dXXd ere • wy ris d'XXof (nofiTjv. 4, 315-6: yijpas reipet Sfiouov oe\ov C. in(.

368. Indicative in other than Simple Sentences.— The following summary embraces the chief uses of the indica- tive as shown in other than simple sentences.

I. Incomplete Sentences : Questions. Indicative questions expect or anticipate' indicative answers.

II. Semi-dependent Sentences : 1. Object SentcJtces. —Sentences introduced by ort, that, and al- ft)9, hozu that, often retain the indicative after past tenses, as ways after principal tenses.— 2. Sentences of Result. Sentences of result with ware (sel- take the indicative as a statement. dom (1)9) III. Dependent Sentences:

1. Causal Sentences.—The indicative is the only mood used in causal sentences, except as in oratio obliqua. 2. Temporal Sentences.—The indicative in temporal clauses is used chiefly of specific actions. — in 3. Conditional Sentences. The indicative conditional clauses is used either as in indicative questions or as in hopeless wishes.

4. Relative Sentences of Design. — In relative sentences of design the future indicative is used, whereas other languages lean towards optative or subjunctive expressions.

On the Indicative with aV, see 428-33.

Subjunctive Mood 369. The subjunctive mood is the mood of anticipation. It anticipates the realization of the predicate, which anticipation' appears chiefly as an act of the will.

' Anticipation and expectation are not to be confounded. Anticipation treats the future as if it were present. Expectation postpones the realization. To antici- pate payment and to expect payment are by no means the same thing, even in popu- lar parlance, and grammarians should be at least as exact as the ungrammatical herd. See A. J. P. XV (1894), 399 and 523; Just. Mart. Apol. i, 2, 4. 148 GREEK SYNTAX

370. Name of Subjunctive. — The subjunctive derives its name from the notion of the old grammarians that it is always subjoined (sub- its ordinate). Such phrases as 'Icofifv, Let go, were explained by ^ovXei icoiiev,

371. Theory of the Subjunctive. — In certain spheres of early Greek, the subjunctive appears as a future with the negative of denial, ov. Hence the theory that the subjunctive was originally a simple future. But it is easier to make the futural subjunctive a deadened imperative than it is to get the imperative notion out of a simple future of prediction. fact that is the native of the The firj negative subjunctive (injunctive) seems decisive. Compare the larger use of sAa// in Early English. See

Matzner, II, p. 87.

372. Imperative Subjunctive.— In the standard language, the subjunctive is used only in an imperative sense. The tenses follow the general rule (301).

373. Imperative of the First Person.—The subjunctive is used as the imperative of the first person, positive and nega- is tive. The negative particle fiij.

Plural number :

o-KO-irwiAeOa, PlatO, Protag. 314 B (304). o-KcxI/cijJieea, Ibid. 330 B (304). Let us not the let us the ^iT) 8i,(aKW|ji£v, Hdt. 8, 109; keep up chase, give up pursuit (304).

• icai ravra DeM. 9> 71 Tovi oKKov^ f)br] TrapaKaXwfi.ev, tovs 8i8d^ovTas eKTrffXTTcofievTrpea^f , TravTaxol. 14. 36'. nt]8 a8 iKafxfv.

Plato, Legg. 683 C : ytvaiie da . . . rais 8iavoiais iv T(o t6t€ xpopca. 861 A : epo)Ta»/xez/ Tjpas avrovs (151). Protag. 314 B {quater). 330 B (see above). Hdt. 8, 109 (see above).

Ar. Vesp. 1 516: ^f'pe vvv r]fi€ls avTols oXiyov ^ vyp^wpjjo-o/iie y airapres.

Lys. 1096 : (fifpt TO eados dp^aXco peda.

: tl crov Sei irarSaV' 8' Ph. 1060-I ,• Soph. 8fJTa x^^P^ ''"'?'' ^Tjpvov \ fjpeis lapev.

Ion (El.), 2, 7 (Bgk.^): Trivapev, TTai^aypev, Xtu) 8ia vvktos a.oc8Tj.

ThEOGN. 1 1 33-4: Kvpve, irapoixTt, 0iXot(rt KaKoii KaTairaxxropev dpxr]v,\

: Ka\a. ^TjTwpe , 8' eX/cet (pdpfjiaKa (pvopeva. IO47 vvv pev irivovres repTTupt 6a, XeyovTfS. TeRP. fr. 3: cr7rfv8(ji>pe V rals Mvdpas iraLcriv Maxrais.

Od. I, : dX\' o18e navrfs voarov. HOM. 76-7 (iyed' ^pels 7rfpi(f)pa(o)pfBa |

II. I, 141-4 : vvv 8' aye . . . e pva(rop.ev . . . dye ipopev . . . deiopev

, . . ^TjCTope V.

374. Singular number: The first person singular is less common than the plural, and is usually instead of which uses preceded by (j)epe, Homer aV- IMPERATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE 149

Ti 21 <|>€p' tSo), 6(f>6i\(d; Ar. Nub. ; Let jne see, what do I owe?

: x^ai . DeM. 18, 267 0fpe §17 ras tS)v XrjTOvpyiav fiapTvpias . . vfiiv dvayvu.

19, 169 :

Plato, Phaedo, 63 B: (f>fpf 8rj . . . ireipadS) TnOavcDrepov . . . dTToXoyrj- fTacrdai.

: Ka\ HdT. 2, 14 (^f'pe be viiv avToio'i AlyvirTioKTi ws e)(ei cjipdau). Ar. Ach. 'i8(o 4: cf)(p' (very common). Vesp. 1497: 4>€pe vw di/eiVo)

KuQ) . . . KaXo). altb. (Aorist much more common than present.)

Eur. H. F. . . . Ti Kaivov . . . 529-30: ^ip fKnvdcopai \ rfkOe dwpaaiv Xpeos;

Soph. O. C. : 174' ^ ^flvoi, pf) 8iJT' d8iKr] dtb. Ph. 1452

: dXX' to. HOM. Od. 13. 215 aye 8r] ;cpj7/iar' dp idprjcrco Koi '18(1) pat.

II. I, 26: pTj ere, yepov, KoiXjjaip eyw napa vijval Ki^eid). 21, 475: p^

crev . . . aKOV(T o).

375. Imperative Subjunctive of Second Person Positive.—The second person positive as an imperative occurs just once in the Hterary language, and that in a disputed passage. riKvov vvv Kal <|)€p' w to tt)s vr^crov |j,aOT]s, SOPH. Ph. 300.'

376. Aorist Subjunctive in Prohibitions. — The sub- junctive is used as the negative imperative or prohibitive of the second and third persons in the aorist.

not . . . p.T) eav[Ad

Oratores Attici.— There are about 133 instances of the second per- son and 29 of the third. See A. J. P. xiii (1S92), 425.

Plato, Gorg. 470 C: oKka px) Kaprjs (piXov livbpa eiepyeroiu. Legg. 868 A; (pvyojv pT]K€Tt KareXdj], Rpb. 517 C (see above).

ThUC. I, 140, 4: vpcov 8e pr^8eis vopiaj] nepl (Bpa^eos av TToKepelv, el Kve.

3, 40. 7 '• MV ovv TrpoSorat yepr]

HdT. 3, 53 • pri 8as Ta aecovrov dyada oXAoicrt.

Ar. : Ach. 496: prj poi (pdovrjcrTjT', ai/8pes oi dewpevoi. Eccl. 588 pr] vvv

TTporepov pr)8e\s vpoov dvre 'nrrj pT]8' vtt ok pov arj.

Eur. Heracl. 271: prj nphs decov KrjpvKa ToXprjajjs develv. 273: Ka\ av

Tov8e prj diyrjs, ava^. Frequent in the tragedians.

ThEOGN. IOI : cr' pr]8eis dvOpanrav Treia-r] kukov avbpa (f)iXfj(rai.

' Nauck reads pd9e with inferior MSS, SeyflTert k&v to rrJQ vrjoov pdQoiq. The simple imperative optative (394) paOoig would also be possible, but ^ipt seems to re- quire an imperative or subjunctive, and ^epe pddyi; may have been generated by

HiPPON. 49: \vr]KiTi ypdyp-r/s.

AlCAE. 44 : fi-qbev aX\o cf)VTev(rris irporepov bivhpiov aptrfKa). eiri- HOM. Od. 3, 55. II, 251. 15, 263: eiTTe fioi elpop.4va vr)p.epTia fir)8'

in Prohibi- 377. Theory of p{j with the Aorist Subjunctive tions.—The shifting from imperative to subjunctive in the prohibitive is found in other languages, and some scholars have seen a certain urbanity in the change from the second person imperative to the second person aorist but it is that a like subjunctive in the pungent form ; noteworthy limitation is found in Sanskrit, in which the corresponding negative par- ticle mil is prevalently used with a form that answers to the Greek aorist subjunctive.'

378. Present Subjunctive Third Person as Negative Imper- ative.— In a few passages the present subjunctive is found as the negative imperative of the third person, when the third person represents the first.

...... o 861 E ; Lei no one |iT) Tis iTiTau (= K-T) oiw[xeeo), Plato, Legg. thiiiky let ics not thi)ik.

Plato, Epin. 989 B: pel^ov ph yap dperris pT]8e\s rjpds -rroTe TrddriT^i fva-e^fias fivuL ra> Ovtjtm yeVei. Legg. 8l6 E (see above).

379. Subjunctive Questions (Deliberative Subjunc- answer. tive).—The subjunctive question expects an imperative is in the first in the The question chiefly person ; second, only when the speaker puts himself in the place of the person ad- in the when it the first. dressed ; third, chiefly represents

380. J^/'rst Person :

Here jSovXa often precedes. BeXfis, thus used, is poetical. Ti 2i2. w Xatp«a)V, €pov avTov. XAI. epwjioi; PlATO, Gorg. 447 C; elireiv otov e

t'i ri Dem. 3, 22: "ri ^ovKfcrdf ; ypd-<\fa>; vfiiv yapia-wpai ;" 14. 27:

aX\a 6S) ^ovXtadf StoSe/carr^i' Tjpas dcroia-fiv ; [33l' 37-

v. eVl ela-io) ; ov ; Ibid. Plato, Con 213 A: prjro'is J) nrj rrvinrUtrOc fj

» P. xiii See C. W. E. Miller, A. J. {1S92). 422. S UNC TI VE UBJ _ 151

: o rt • . . o ri 214 B EP. Ti TroiS>[i€V ; AAK. av av KeXfvrjs fniTaTTe ovv /3ovXet. Gorg. 447 C (see above). Phaedo, 115 C: ddTrrcofiev 8e ere rlva rponov; Theaet. 149 B. 161 E. 197 A (see above).

Ar. Eq. 36: /3ovAei TO Trpdy^ia rols dfarala-iv (f)pd(TIA. ri aoi AYS. aioona. IIPO. f'fjLol I niOuifiai; Lys. 529-30: \

criooTrci) croi y', d) Kardpare, -yo) ; Eur. Cycl. 149. Ion, 758 (268). I. T. 1321. Or. 218: ^ovXei Olya

.• T I'co ; rio HOM. Od. 15, 509 TTrj up' e'-yo), (jiiXe riKvov, bmpad' tKOifxai;

: I'd) Be eKelvoi. II. 18, 18S Tras T lip' p-eTo. p-aiXov ; e\ov(n revxe

381. Seco?id Person: The second person of the deliberative subjunctive occurs only in echo-questions, and is virtually indirect. En. Ti o-oi mewjiee'; IIEI. o ti irieT)

Eur. H. F. 1417: ttw? ovv eV e'l-n-rjs otl avvearaXpai koko'ls ; (Variously ttcos ovv corrected : ttus ovv av e'lrrois ; irios ovk av f'lTTois ; i'p' elnas ;) Soph. Ph. 974: NE. ri Bpwpfv, avSpes; OA. w KdKiar dvbpav, rl 8 pas; {Dost ask) what thou art to do?^

382. Third Person : The third person of the dehberative subjunctive is used more commonly when the third person represents the first, or when an action of the first person is involved.

8 <3 . . . = tov toiovtovi 6 toioStos ... (XT) 8tKT]v ; ( (itj \dPb))Ji€V Trapa Siktjv ;) Shall not such an one his due? Shall we not Dem. 21, 35 ; get {^=^ punish him ?)

6 . . . Din. I, 8 : ttoI vvv iXdav 8ripos fvpT} TTjv dXrjdfiav;

ere tls vrdXeo)? elvai Dem. 18, 124: TvoTfpov AIctx^vt] ttjs ep^^poj/ t] epov Orj; ri (TOl (=7r6repoi/ . . . 6cb ;) 20, II7. 21, 35 (see above). 22, 64. 29, ^7:

7roiT](ra)

Ar. Pl. 438 : ("iva^ "AnoXXov Ka\ deoi, ttoI tls (pvyrj;

: Ai. : no! ns ovv > '^^^ ; O. C. 01. Soph. 403-4 (ji^yU I poXoiv peva 170-1

ttoI tis ; AN. w dorotf 'laa Bvyarep, (j^povridos eXdrj \ Trdrep, xp^ peXerdv. ThEOGN. 772: Ti a(piv ;(p7jcr7jTai (SC. Movamv depdircov ^Oeoyvis^eyo))

povvos (Tna-Tapevos ;

' More dramatic than as an indicative. Odysseus overhears Neoptolemos. 152 GREEK SYNTAX

HOM. Od. • ^ '"' Trd^o) ; t'i vv 5. 465 M°' fV"' fioL firjKiara y4vr)Tai ; (^=tI y(V(OfJ.ai ;)

II. Toi I, 150: ircbs Tis 7rp6(f>pa)v fTreaiv ireiQrjTai. 'A)(ata)v; (=7roJp

TTfidafXfda ;)

383. Substitutes for the Deliberative Subjunctive.— Instead of the subjunctive, we find the future also (268), or Set, xpi with the infini- tive, or the verbal in -reov.

Ti Sei Siixa o-Koirciv; SOPH. Ph. 428 (cf. O. R. 364). aye 8ij, ti xPT

xi evTcvOevl ir o t t e o v Spav; Ar. Av. 809 (cf. VV. 812. 814. 817). aye 8t], vwv t] ;

Ar. Pax 922 (cf. Av. 1640).

TI irdOo) — 384. ; Notice the frequent use of W Tradco ; What am I to submit to in order to a certain end? What is to become of me? is one side. What am I to do ? is another.

TO €l jieWov, xp>i> '"'cio-op.au ti yop irdOw; EUR. Phoen. 895; What is to come, I'll bear, if Jieed be. What's the odds? (Let fate do her worst.) 118: Ti HdT. 4. yap Trd6o)fJi ev firj ^ovXopfvcov vfiewv Tipcopefiv ; Ar. Av. 1432: Ti yap 7Td6o>; aKaTTTfiv yap ovk fnla-rapai. Lys. 884: olov TO TfK€iv Kara^aTiov. ti yap Trddo); 954. Eccl. 860. PI. 603. (Cf. Nub. TL 461: TTfla-ofiai ; Ibid.jgi. Vesp. looo. Eccl. 911.) Eur. Phoen. 895 (see above).

Soph. Tr. 973' I'lnddto; tl 8e priaop.ai; o'ipoi.

• ''"' TI HOM. Od. 5. 465 ^ M"' ^'y^' '"'ddoi ; vv poi fxrjKKrTa yfprjrai ;

II. II, '• ^ ''"' "i^dOoi ; kukov, at /ce 404~S M"' fy*^' fidya p,ev (f)e^a>p.ai \ ttXt;- 6vv Tap^Tjaas,

385. Subjunctive in Half-Questions.— In Plato, but rarely else- in find a of with where Attic, we number hesitating half-questions ^irj or ov and the These seem to on the state fif] present subjunctive. depend of apprehension engendered by the situation. The effect is that of a or as the case be. See and oi.' doubtful affirmation, negation, may /xij firj

TO ; it's rather |jiT) dvpoiKOTcpov ^ dX^Ots e'nreiv, Plato, Gorg. 462 E bad

to the truth. dXXd ov tovt* • • • OdvaTov form, I fear, speak fit) fj xO'^*''''o'' that's not the I the €K<})VY€tv, Plato, Apol. 39 A ; But trouble, apprehend, escaping death.

: elrre'iv : Xiav Dem. I, 26 ikx) \iav TTiKpov § (but Blass prj -rriKpov (lirtlv;). Plato, Apol. 39 A (see above). Gorg. 462 E (see above).'

• A. T. P- xvii (1896), 516-7. * According to Weber, Entwickelungsgeschichte der Absichtssatze, p. 192, there are in Plato 31 instances of this use, which are distributed as follows : Apol. i, Conv. 2, Cratyl. 8, Crito 3, Gorg. i, Legg. i, Lys. 3, Meno 3, Parmen. 4, Phaedo 2, or less Riv. 1, Theaet. I, Theag. i. This does not include four, more disputed, passages in which the sentence may be interrogative : Parmen. 163 D. Phaedo, b4 C. Rpb. 603 C. Sisyph. 387 D. (Weber, idid.) OPTATIVE MOOD 1 53

Xen. Mem. 4, 2, 12 : ^r\ ovv, ecpr] 6 Ev6v87]fios, ov 8vva)fjiai (Kiihner : 8v-

tci vafiai) f'yo) ttjs BiKaioavvrfs epya e^rj-yrjo-acrdai ;

• o^^« ov tovto to HDT. 5. 79 fiaXXov firj rj xprjarrjpiov. For the suppression of a verb of fear or apprehension, see Verbs of Fear.

386. Homeric Subjunctive.—The Homeric subjunctive is not so clearly defined in its use as the Attic subjunctive, and is often indistin- guishable from a future. In fact, it serves as a missing aorist future where prose would employ the optative with av.

ov Yap irw toiovs i8ov dvepas ovSe i8a>p,ai, HOM. II. I, 262; Never as yet have 1 seen such men, and 7iever shall see them.

Hymn. HoM. I, I : pLvrjaofiai ov8i XdOconai 'ATToXXoivos fKaroio.

HOM. Od. 6, 201 : ovK fcr6' ovtos dvTjp diepos ^poTos, ovSe yevrjTai. 16,

437 • "ifc fcrB ovtos dvfjp ov8 eVcrerai ov8e yevTjTai. II. I, 262 (see above). 6, 459: xal iroTe tis eiirrja-iv Idav kuto daKpv

: Kai • yiovaav. 7, 87 TTore tls e'mrjat Kal oyfAiyovoov dvdpoiiratv. 197 ov yap ris fi€ ^iji ye iKu>v deKovTa tirjTai. On av {Kev) with the subjunctive in simple sentences, see 451-6.

387. Subjunctive in Dependent Clauses.— All the uses of the subjunctive in dependent clauses may be referred ultimately to the imper- ative sense so conspicuous in the leading clause, but in prose the pure subjunctive is confined to the final sentence, which is necessarily impera- tive in its nature. In other classes of sentences av (k(v) with the subjunc- tive is the rule, though there are many exceptions in the older language and in poetry. See 456. Optative Mood

388. Optative in Wishes.— In principal clauses, the use of the optative, or wishing, mood in standard Greek is confined to the expression of wishes the fulfilment of which is still in is suspense. The negative /mi]. Ar. Av. bicrst in iravo-aio SiappaY^iTis, 2; May you two! p.T| (jiTjSeiroT' c(r6i(ov, Ar. Pax never ! 31 ; May you stop eating

389. Potential Optative.—The optative is the ideal mood of the Greek language, the mood of the fancy. The wish is father to the thought, " " and fancy has a double signification, moral as well as intellectual. But the intellectual use, the use in qualified assertions or the so-called poten- tial use, is confined to the optative with av, except in poetry. The prose examples are comparatively few, and are either doubtful or occur in fixed formulae. The negative of the potential optative is ov. For examples, see Optative with av. 154 GREEK SYNTAX

390. Optative in Questions.— As the mood of the question is the mood of the expected or anticipated answer, no direct question can be put in the pure optative of wish, inasmuch as no question expects a wish for an answer, though it may get one. Whenever, then, the optative is found in a direct question, it is a potential optative, and, Hke other poten- tial optative questions, implies a wish of the speaker. Corruption of the text is often indicated.

vv Ti II. = •Jj pd poi iriOoio; HoM. 4, 93 7, 48; Ah, wouldst thoii not yield to me somewhat? (=ei8£ m6oio).

See under Optative with av.

391. Tenses of the Pure Optative.—The pure optative is used in two tenses, present and aorist. Certain perfects and periphrastic perfects count as presents. See also 305.

Presejit 7'ense:

DeM. I, 28. 4> 5^ viKar^ h^ o Ti Tracriv /xc'XXft crvvoicrfiv (305)-

Plato, Legg. 923 B: iropevoia-Be rjivep Kara (j)va-iv vvv Tropevecrde t^p dvBpcoTTivrjv. 94' C: fVTvxoi.

Hdt. 3, 65; yr] re Kapirov fKC^epoi. Koi yvvaiKes Te Koi TToiiivai riKToiev.

6, 69 • TLKTOleV.

AR. Eq. 770 : e-^oiprjv. 772: fKKOLprjv. Nub. 520: ovT(0 viKTja-aipi t eyo)

Koi vop.i^oip-qv ao(f)6s.

Eur. El. 231 : fv8aifjiovolr]S. Hipp. II91 : Zev, p-qKir f'ir}v, ei kukos 7re

Soph. (\ C. 642 : w ZeO, diboirjs rotcTi toiovtoktiv ev. Pers. 228: ra l88: AeSCHYL. eKreXolro 8r) xpWrd- Sept. e'lrju.

PiND. II-2 : 6(6s p. I, Zev, riv Pavhaveiv. 0.4, fvcppcov I el'77. 29: f'lr), t'ir)

Solon, 19: vaiois . . . TrtpTToi . . . oird^oi.

HOM. Od. 13, 44"~6 : ipels fi' avdi pfvovTfS ev(ppaivot,Te yvvaiKas . . . Kal pr] Ti KaKov peraBrjpLOv e'lrj.

. . : 8' II. 2, 259; prjKer' . (TTflrj. 6, 480 (f){poi fvapa ^porotvTa.

392. Aorist Tense :

DeM, 3, 36 (see 305). 18, 324: pr) Stjt, S> napres 6eoi, prjbels raid' vp5>v fTTivfvcreifv, dWa paXiara pev koi tovtois /SeXTtco rivci vovv koi (fipevas evOfirjre.

LyS. 21, 21 : ovTOL pev ovv . . . Kare Inoiev vp'iv rd (T(}>eTep' avTav eTTiTT)- devpara.

ANTIPHON, I, 13: diKTj 8e Kv^e pvrjCT e lev.

Plato, Legg. 712 B : 6 be (SC. 6e6s) dKovaeie re /cat dKoixras tXeas eipevfis

Te rjp'iv eXOoi. 913 A: p-qb aiiKivrjcreie. Ar. Eq. 768: djroXoipqv koi bian picrOe'iriv Kararp-qde Irjv re XeTrabva. IMPERATIVE OPTATIVE IS5

771' KaTaKvrjadeiriv. Nub. $20 : i/tKi7(rai/Lii (see 39^)- Vesp. 630: diTo'Koifi.rjp e'l ere 8e8oiKa.

ae with their o)? Eur. Or. 130: deoi fxicrrfo-eiav {plast you hate), /a* aTTcoXftray.

Soph. Ai. 550: w Tral, yivoio irarpos evTvx4(TTfpos.

AeSCHYL. p. V. 864: T0ia8' eV €)(^dpovs tovs e/iouy eX^oi KuTrpis. PiND. P. Kf\a8evvav Xi'ttoi 9, 89-90: XapiTcou \ fir] pe Kadapov (peyyos.

Solon, 21 ^7;Se /xoi aKXavcrros davaros poXoi.

HOM. Od. 6, 180 croi 8e deoi Toaa dolev ocra (ppecrl ajjai pevoivas. I3>

45 • ondcreiav.

croicri : II. I, 42 ' TLaeiav Aavaol epa 8dKpva (ifkecraiv. 6, 481 ^apfit].

393- Perfect Tense:

THEOGN. • S', ei ri KaKwv 343~4 Tedvairjv prj apizavpa p€pipvf(ov \ (vpoiprjv.

MiMNERM. I, 2 : Te6vair]v, ore poi prjKtTt ravra pfKoi.

Hymn. HOM. I, 165: aXX' liy^ff IXtjkoi, pev 'AttoXXcoj/ 'ApTfpi8i ^vv.

II. 260: eVi Nor HOM. 2, /Lt7/S' IrjKepaxoio TraTTjp K€kXt)p.€pos f'lrjv. may I longer be calledfather of Telemachus.

394- Imperative Optative.—The optative at times comes very near the imperative.'

Tis cKao-Tos epSoi Tjv elSeiTj t€xvt)v (old saw), AR. Vesp. 1431 ; qitam quisque norit artem, in hac se exerceat, CiC. Tusc. i, 18, 41.

8e 6 Plato, Legg. 759 D: 'irx] prj eXarroji (^TjKovTa rjpiv e'lrj ytyovois

. . . -^ •" • • • . . . aii l€. ptWcov dyi(TT€ii(r(ti'. 9^3 M'?'''* dnroiTO pr]8' Kivijaf

916 E : pr]8f\s . . . Tvpd^eiev.

• XeN. An. 3. 2, 37 • f ' M^'' oiiv aXXo tis ^(Xrtov opa, aXXcos exeTco tl Se prj,

• Heipicrocfios pev rjyolTO, . . . crrparriyu) fTri peXoiadrjv 6iTicr6o(f)vXaKo'ipev

8' ripeis (imperative and optative parallel). 6, 6, 18 : a-diCoiade.

Ar. Vesp. 1431 (see above). Lys. 839: aov i'pyov el'7 tovtov omdv koi arpecfxiv.

AeSCHYL. '• oXX' el SoKet (rot ravd', iirai tis Xi^ot Ag. 944-5 dpjSvXas |

Td)(os. Cho. 889 : 8oir].

BaCCHYL. fr. : . . . aUv fTroTTTevois, TToXe'as 71 (Keny.) Trpocppcov xopov \

S' . . . and I Krji(o dp(f)iT[dei BaKxvXlSrj a-Tf(f)dvovs (optative imperative parallel).

PiND. O. 9, 40-1 : e'a iroXepov . . . (pepois 8e ktL (imperative and optative N. avToOev vn oa KanToi tls. parallel). 5, 19-20: paKpd poi \ aXpad'

HeS. O. et D. • ttovov 47*-*~I 8pa)os e;^o)i' paKfXrjv opvidfacri rideirj | airippa

KaTaKpvTTTOiv. 491 : pT]8€ ae Xrjdoi. 5^9 • ^'^1- ^9^ • ^'l^^oi . . . yapoiTO.

* This imperative use of the optative offers a solution for a number of passages where the optative with dv might be expected. See B. L. G. on Pindar, O. 3, 45, and P. 10, 21. 15^* GREEK SYNTAX

HOM. Od. d' I, 402: KTTjfiaTa avTos fx°^^ ""' 8a>fjia(Ti (To'ia-iv dva

II. vaioire. I : 3, 74: eV veecrBcd . . . Xittoito. : 59-60 vrjvai \ fxr)h{e) 407

ert . . . ' 01 .. . /j.7;S' viroaTpfyf/fias. 17. 34°-! 'iofiev, fj.r}8' yt nfXaa-aiaTo. 01 24, 139: Tjj8' f'ir]. 149: KTJpv^ TLS i'lroiTo yepairepos.

395. Optative with etOe, d yip—The optative may have, but does not require, eWe (aWe), el ydp (at yap), and the like.' Ar. €t9(€)...€KpdXots TTiv evdeuiv, Eq. 404 ; May you give tip the sop. «i yap Yevoifi.T)v, TCKvov, dvTi o-ov vcKpds, EUR. Hipp. 1410; If I could fall a corpse, my child, instead of thee. Ar. Eq. 404 (see above).

Eur. Hipp. 1410 (see above), fr. 360, 53-4: & TvaTpl^, t'LOe iravres ot vaiovai (Tf ovTQ} cos I (piXoltv iyca. Soph. Ph. 791-2: w ^eVe elde

HOM. Od. : et 4, 697 ydp 8rj, ^atriXeia, rode TrXeio-roi' KaKov elr]. 6, 244:

at roiocrdf ttoo-ls K€ : ydp epoL KXrjpfvos f'ir). 7, 331-2 Zd ndrep, a'i6' oaa €177f (re lev anavra 'AXkivoos. TfXfVTT] \

II. • at ...... 13, 825-7 ydp e'lTju TeKoi . . TLoiprjv.

Optative with d is In 396. and — poetry we find a simple el, the exclamatory w?, and in one passage an unriddled jBdXe.

ALCMAN, 26, 2: ^dXe 8fi ^dXe Kr/piXos elrjv.

HOM. II. III : dXX' el Tis Ka\ Toixrbe 10, peToixdpevos KaXeaeiev. 15, 571 :

ei Tivd irovTpmmv e^dXpevos av8pa ^dXoia-da. 16, 559-62 : aXX' ft' ptv deiKLa- eXovres t Kal riv \ avroi aaified' revxed Stpouv d(j)e\olpeda eralpcou \ dpvvo-

: its eK pevatv 8apa(raipeda vr]\ei ;^aX/cw. 18, I07 e'pis re decov eV r' dvdpaTTcov

286 : cos crc3 ev\ "'^'^ dnoXotTO. 22, 8t] piv XP^''- Koplcraio.

397. Pure Optative in Relative Sentences.—The pure optative seems to us strangest in relative sentences. Here the English idiom re- quires the expression of the notion of wish, if the relative form is to be retained.

ol' avTots Tvxoij Soph. Ph. 275; Which manner of things I wish

Fortune send to t> may them. Fortune send them the like! (irj ycvoito, Aeschyl. it to Sept. 5 ; May not co7ne pass. Heaven forbid! (a common formula).

Din. 66 : 6 I, /ijy -ye i;ot TO.

DeM. 8, 51 • <^ M'/'Tf yevoiT ovre Xeyeiu a^iov. 21, 209 : el yevoivd', o pj]

' Explained by many grammarians as elliptical conditional sentences. See Con- ditional Sentences. BOTAOIMHN AN 1 57

noXirfias. 21 : el h' yevoir' ovS' iarai, ovroi Kvpioi ttjs 2$, 3I. 27, 67. 28, 6 Vfiels aXXo Tt yvua-fcrde, fxr) yevoiro. [4°]' S^-

: 6 noXiv. LyS. 31, 14 fdv TTOTf, fXT] yepoiTO, Xd^atai rfjv Plato, Legg. 918 D: fVel

III ; TO HdT. 5, fJ-r] ytvoiTO.

AR. Vesp. 535: o pr] yevoiTO. LyS. I47. ttotL Phoen. Eur. Heracl. 512: a pri tvxoi- 714: y.r] yevoiro. 571: TTOTe. O fit] TV^Oi Soph. Ph. 275 (see above). 315-6: S ttqi, behpaKaa-', oV 'OXCjiinoi 6eo\\

ho lev iroT avTols avTiiroiv' efiov ivaBe'iv. a Aeschyl. Sept. 5 (see above). 426: /ii) Kpaivoi tvxtj.

HOM. Od. 4, 699: 6 pr] reXea-eie Kpovicov. — 398. pov\oiHit]v av. The optative is more or less passionate, and is little used in the conventional language of the orators. A favorite substitute is ^ovXoifirjv av (Lat. velini) with the infin- itive. Cf. e^ov\oyur)v av (Lat. velleni) 367.

DeM. 24, 8: (iovXoiprjv S' aj' epe re rv^f'" &>»' fBovXopai, Toiirov re nadelv av a^ios eari.

LyS. 7, 12 : vvv 8e Travras av vpdi ^ovXoiprjv nepl epoii TavTrjv ttjv yva>pT]v e^eiv. 8, 2.

AnDOC. 2, 28: ^ovXoiprjv pevT av . . . (SC. iipas) aTeXrj Tr)v yvwprjv airS)v

IT 0lfj(Tal. Plato, Apol. 19 A: ^ovXoiprjv pev ovv av ToiiTo ovTco yeveaOai . . .

oipai he avrb xaXenov eivai.

Aeschyl. Suppl. 787 : deXoipi S' av popa-lpov ^p6xov rvx^iv. BaCCHYL. 17, 41-3: OV yap av BeXoip' dp^poTOi epavvov doiis Ihelv

For TTo)? (iv with the Optative in Wishes, see Optative with av.

399. Optative in Semi-dependent and in Dependent Clauses.— Outside of the Ideal {Optative) Condition the main uses of the optative in semi-dependent (368) and dependent sen- tences are these:

I. Optative after Historical Tenses: the indicative and The optative is used to represent both tenses. the subjunctive in oratio obliqua after historical — the I. Optative for Indicative. V^h&n optative represents the indicative, it takes all the corresponding tenses of the in- dicative. For examples, see 307-10 and 312. 158 GREEK SYNTAX

2. Optative as Representative of the Subjunctive.—When the optative represents—the subjunctive, it is of course h'mited to the subjunctive tenses present, aorist, and perfect. For examples, see Oratio Obliqua. The optative is also said to represent the subjunctive with av in oratio obliqua, but in the class of sentences in which this is said to take place, av was not required in the early language, so that there is no violation of the rule.'

II. Optative in Complementary Clauses:

The optative is used in complementary clauses, often when we should expect a form of the subjunctive. For examples, see Relative Sentences.

400. Parallelism of the Optative and the Infinitive.—The optative may be called the finite form of the infinitive, and it is note- worthy that the two run closely parallel in wishes, in commands, in oratio obliqua, and in complementary clauses.

Imperative Mood

401. The imperative demands realization. The tone of the demand varies, and may appear as an order, an exhortation, a an an is permission, entreaty, assumption.^ The negative yur).

402. Tenses of the Imperative. — The imperative, like the infinitive, is used chiefly in two tenses, the present and the aorist.'

403. Present Imperative:

Isoc. 2. There are 55 present imperatives of the second person out of a total of 58 imperatives of the second person, exclusive of the - ed ones.

' See A. J. P. iii (1SS2), 441. "^ On the Imperative Mood, see C. W. E. Miller, The Limitation of the Impera- tive in the Attic Orators, A. J. P. xiii (1S92), 399-436. ' Out of a total number of 2445 imperatives in the Attic Orators, exclusive of the letters, the fragments, the law^s, the bracketed portions of the text, all —of Hyperides, and the Demosthenean collection of prooemia, there are only seven or, counting Ttdvdrio, eight— real perfects. The ratio of presents to aorists is that of 55 to 45. (See /. c, pp. 402 and 425.) AORIST IMPERATIVE 159

LYS. 1,18: yl^evaj] 8e firjdfv, aXKa iravra rdXTjOij Xeye.

€Tt, Plato, CritO, 44 B : dX\', a> 8atfj.6vif ^aKpares, Kal vvv tfioi weidov Koi

: . . . al (TQ)dr)Ti. Legg. 930 D-E t6 (yiyvofjLfvov, offspring^ Trjs yvvaiKos yvvalKes fls f'lWrjv x'^P^" e Kire fiTTovTOiy aw tS tTarpi {father and all). 946 E : dTrXoi?

: tov dXX' 6vr](TKfT(o. Theaet. 146 B /xi) dtpifcro Qeairrjrov, epara.

ThuC. I, 34, 3 : eWco. 42, I : d^iovTO). 86, 5 : ^r)^i(((T6e. 2, 44, 4 : 17761-

(t6{ . . . Kov(j)L^f(rd€. 46. 2 : d7ro;^a)p€ire.

8l' : efcd- HdT. 3, 78 : a>dee to $i(j)os Kal ufK^OTepav. 4, 98 Xvere ap.p,a ev

(TTTjs T]p.epr]s.

Ar. Ach. 400-479 : Only two presents, (j)deipov (460) and /cXete (479), against 19 aorists. Id/d. 1005-7 : dvajSpdrTfT, eloTrrare, rpeTrer', d0e'X- (cere ra roiis dve tovs kt€, | o^eXlaKovi | Xaywa Ta)(f(os, (XTfcpdvovs ipere. (f^epe

: (TV to Tas (TTadeve. : oTrrare. I040-I Kardxfi TTJs xop8fjs ptXi- \ arjnias I043 rd 1047 : oTTTare tuvtI koI koXws ^avOL^fTe. I054: dir6

Eur. Tro. 948 : ttjv 6fbv /cdXa^e Kai Aios Kpeicrcrcov yevov.

Soph. Ai. 497 : vofxi^e. 510: o'UTipe. 520: ta-xf- S8l : nvKa^e 6d(T(Tov.

AeSCHYL. p. v. 309 : ylyvma-Ke aavTov (303). 327 : av 8' fjcrvxaCf M^' ayav Xa^poaTope i. 334: TrdrrTaive 8' airos.

• PiND. O. I, 19: Xdp^av(e). P. 1,86: vu>pa 8iKai(o Tn/SaXt'w (TTpaTov dyfrtv-

Sci 8e TTpos (iKpovi ^fdXfceve yXuxrcrav,

^ ""ij/e Koi e'adie. TheOGN. 31: pi] npoa-opiXec. 32: e'xfo- 33 34: ifc

. . . dv8avf. 37 : opCXfi.

TyRTAE. II, 2: Bap(re7T{{). 3: /ij;8(e) . . . Sf t/xaij/erf, pT]8e (j^o^etade. 26: KivfiTco. 8i8a(rKfa6a. 4: e;(eT

HOM. Od. I, 271 : fl 8" aye vvv ^vvifi Kal epav ip-jra^eo pv6wv. 273: eaTcov. 281 : f'pxfo ireviTopevos. 305 : piXiTa . . . epird^fo. I'^t. II. 3, 82 : i(r;(f o-^VApye'iot, pr] /SdXXere, Kovpoi 'Axaiav. I30" SeCp'

159: ev vrjval veeada. 162 : l^ev. 282: €;(fTw. 4,412: tIttu, (Tioonfj tjao, epa 8' eTTtire idea pvda.

404. AoRiST Imperative:

1 1 : : DeM. I, 12 : ^pao-drw. 20 : eX6a-^(e). 18, 76 : Set^oi/. 2 Sft^dro). 144 dKou(raT(e). 265: e^eraa-ov. [58]- 70- iSorjdrjaov rjpiv 6 8elva, e'l ti exeis, Kal crvvenre. dvd^rjdi. Plato. Phaedo, 117 A: ttiOov Kal p^ SXXas noiei. Protag. 343 B: yvoadi aavTov (S^S)-

: : Kal vuiv XeN. Cyr. 4, 5, 42 Krjpv^dTa. 45 8iaveipaTe fjpels 7n

KaXas 8iavevepr]Kevai. 47 • f' M^*' ovv aXXovs exeTe olaTicnv av 8oir]Te avTovs, . . .

• eKeivois 8i8oTe el pevroi rjpds av ^ovXaiade napaaTaTas paXiaTa exeiv, >ipiv avTOvs Sore (notice contrast of present and aorist). i6o GREEK SYNTAX

2: I : I : ThUC. I, 33, (TKfyjraa-df. 34, fia06vT(t)v. 36, yvarco. 43, 2 : dvra- nodore.

: S>v S)8e ...... : HdT. I, 89 vvv TTolrjcrov Karicrov (fivXaKOvs. 3, 69 (neav

, . . fiaOjis avrov KaTV7rv(i>nevov, n(pa(rov avrov to. ara.

AR. Ach. 34: iivdpaKas TTplco. 188 : -yevtrat XajSav. 402 : fKKa\((Tov. 405: vnaKovaov. 408: fKKVK\T]dr]T{i). 4.1$ ef saepe : 86s. 449: tmiKQf. 451:

aKovaov. 1 : eva . . . yevox). 45^" a-no^aiprjaov. 467* 033-4 aToXayfiov elprjvrjs |

: ^eoi/ : Eur. Tro. 948 7171^ (cdXafe *cai Aiof Kpdaatov yevov. Ibid. 966 ^aai- Xei', lifivvov (Tois TfKvoiari.

Soph. Ai. 501: tdere. 506: ai'Seo-m. Ph. 473 : 6oi. 475: tA^(9i. 481:

: v(V(tov. : : ToX/iTiaov, ffi^aXov /i(e). 484 485 TrtiadrjTi. 488 (Kcraiaov. 501 : crv crv acbcrov, p,' eXirjcrov.

AeSCHYL. 1 : 262: Si Ag. 196 fKp,apTvpr)

iXovs 06/3ei. PiND. O. TTeSaaou 5' eVt 1,78-80: fyxos Olvopdov ;^dXKfoi', | fp.e ra;^u7-a- rav els 'AXiv, Se iriXaaop. TTopevaov dpp.drai' \ Kpdrei

Sappho, I, ' eXde kuI viv, 8e Xvaov c'k oaaa 25-7 p.01 xaXfndv | p,epip.vdv, 8e TeXeacrai reXeaov. p.01. \ 6vp.os lp.(ppei,

• : tol ndvTa (TV 8e Hymn. HoM. 2, 366 {'iprjTal (f)pf

HOM. Od. 4. : Ta>p vvv p.01 p.vrj(rai Kai via 765^6 p.oi (f)iXov adcoaov, \ p.vr]- arrjpas 8' dndXaXKe KaKas VTreprjpopeovTai.

II. : TTidea-de. : : : I, 274 302 TreipTja-ai. 338 Soy. 394 Xlcrai. 407 ; Xa^e.

'^'^'- ''''' ^^^ ''"°^ vvv Aavaolaiv dfiKea 455~^' V^' M°' fTTiKpTjTjvov e'ASwp, I ^'8rj Xoiyov a.p,vvov.

405. Additional Remarks on the Use of the Present and AORIST Tenses.—As a descriptive adverb is often associated with the imperfect indicative, so a descriptive adverb is often associated with a present imperative. So also adverbs denoting speed. Ar. Eq. 495 : o-TreOSe

Ta;^eaj9. Ibid. Vesp. 1 80: j3d8i^f ddrrov. 1 87 : v(p{XKf Bdrrov. The present imperative often produces the effect of an action that is watched. See the cooking scene in the Acharnians cited 403, and Pax,

842 : dXX' f'iaay' ojs rdxi-(TTa followed by KardfcXufe . . . 64pp.aiv{f) . . . crropw.

So also 960 sqq. : a-elov . . . nporeLve . . . xfp«"7rrov . . . plnTe, whereas in a prayer. Ibid. 987-98 : aTroCprjvov . . . Xvaov . . . iravaov . . . p.l^ov . . . Kepao'ov.^

406. Perfect Active Imperative.—The perfect active imperative little the is as is used, even when perfect employed a present, except 'ia-di,

toTo), t'o-Tf, from oI8a. Nor is the periphrastic common. " 6 . . . Kol aTU[Jios," <|>T]

' See Justin Martyr, Apol. i, 16, 6. PERFECT IMPERATIVE i6l

eorrw irXenSvwv Itutv adjective) t\ irtv-niKovTa, Plato, Legg. 951 C (but in the same breath of the same subject, eo-rto 76ycvt]|jieVos, Ibid. D).

Dem. 9, 44 (see above).

: Plato, Legg. 874 C vriTTotviX redvaTco (= passive) vno . . . rov v^piaBfv-

• *'*'' b\s to Tos ^Iq- 93^ ^ "^ (j)i\oviKiq Kpidfj toiovtov bpav, TeBvarw. 95 1 C (see above). Ar. Ach. evbov 133: Kexhvare. Vesp. 198: KfKpax^i rfjs dvpas KeKKei-

Eur. Ale. : S' . . . aWov Tiv' ... 1042-4 | Qeatra- ywalKa I (Tw^eiv avaxdc \S>v. [Rhes] 987 : ava>x6e.

Soph. Ant. 1063 : la-Oi. 1064 : aXX' ev ye Tot. Karia-di.

AeSCHYL. Cho. 772: ava>xd(i.). Eum. 598-9: OP. nf7roid(a) . . . XO. ve- |

Kpolai vvv iriirfKrOi p.r)ripa Kravatv.

• 18 : Koi HOM. Od. 20, TfzXadi 8r], KpaSiT] Kvvrepov SKKo ttot' eVXT^s. II. Koi dfiTTVov oirKeaOai. 23, 158-9: avoix^'- I — 407. Perfect Middle Imperative. A similar observation applies to the perfect middle.

(i,€Hvt]tro fxov, Ar. Pax, 719; Remember me.

: and so in Dem. 19, 171 p.('p.v7j(rde, 14 other passages of the orators.

24, 64 : ireTTavcro.

AeSCHIN. 162 : ecrrci) ... 6 I, peu /xiadcodfls fierpios Koi TroiStv to oofioXoyri- 6 fieva, 8e ttjv rjXcKiav wpoXa^av Koi jXKTQaicrdjXfvos e\lrev(T6a>.

ISOC. 2, 37 : p,ffivr](TO.

^ i^al o'v XeN. Cyr. 4, 2, 7 i?/^'" Trtcrra deav TTeiro'irja-o Ka\ be^iav bos. ' HdT. 5. 105 • beanoTa, /xepveo tcov Adrji/aicov. y, 29: €KTr)(ro . . . avros rd

avTos (249). 7, : kol ire- irep eKTrjcrao 148 (Orac.) TT(^v\ayp.ivos rjcro \ KecpaXr/v

HeS. O. et D. 797 : necfivXa^o bf dvp.a.

HOM. II. 226-8 : aXX' vvv Ka\ . S' ittttcov 5. aye pdariya rjv'ia \ be^ai, eyco

(rii rovbe S' arnoi,. iin^r](TOfiat ocfypa paxcop-ai \ rje bebf^o, fieXrjcrovcnv efioi 20, 377. 22, 340.

408. Perfect Imperative Passive. —The perfect impera- tive passive is not unfrequently used in judicial sentences, in harsh orders, in philosophical definitions, of something that is to be settled and to stay settled, but in the third person only. The second person is so rare that it is not safe to generalize.

Third Person :

avEppi({>Ou Kv^os, Com. Men. 4, 88 (303). ravra . . . irEiraicrOb) . . . tiixtv, II 1 62 GREEK SYNTAX

Let this he the end Plato, Euthyd. 278 C ; of your fun. tlprjo-ew, Let it be said atid settled, is especially common.

Pr. 18 : o)? fKaa-Tos DeM. /xr) Tvavd', e;^et yva>fiT)s ii(ia>v nepl ratv TTipovTOiv, opOSas iyvciKivai irene ia6(o.

AeSCHIN. 3, 24 : fJi^xpi' 8fvpo flprjO-Sa) poi,

ISAE. 5. 12: TotraiiTii pni elptjcrdoi.

ISOC. 4. 14 • TuvTci poi npoeipr] ado). ^l : ravra . . . dprjcrOa) poi,

LyS. 24, 4 '• foa'avra poi elprjada).

Plato, Cratyl. 401 D: etpijo-^to, which occurs frequently. Euthyd. 278

662 D: kuI ra . . . C (see above). Legg- p.01 i'pTrpoadev rjparrjpfva fj paTTfada).

: Tavra ovv K€ . . Phaedr. 250 C pev pvrjpj) xnpia-do). Rpb. 485 A: TOVTO .

oi o 6 oi Twv (f)LKoa6(f)a)v (^vcrcwj' nipi p o\ yrjcr i]plv. Theaet. 187 B: dTTOKeKpla-do).

197 D—E : TTOLTjaapev . . . TreTToiTjo-da) Sij. Tim. 89 D : XeXf';^^^.' '^^^ Tov8e ThUC. I, 7I1 4' M^XP' M^" (opi(j6(jd vpaiv rj ^paBvrrjs.

HdT. 3> 81 : XeXfx^'^ Kapoi ravra. 6, 55 • favra piv vvv ntpl Tovroiv flpTjadco. Com. Men. 4, 88 (see above).

HOM. Od. 12, 51 : TTflpaT dvr}(f)6a>.

11.8, 524- pvdos 8, OS piv vvv vyirjs, elpr] ptvos earco.

409. Second Person : Kara Kai Kai o-4>aK£\i5€ ir€irpT]

ISOC. Ep. 7, 13 : i'ppoiao.

Xen. Cyr. 4, 5, 33 : eppcoao. Com. Pherecr. 2, 287 (see above). — 410. aye, i9i, 4>€p€ WITH THE IMPERATIVE. In exhortations aye, Wit like or often the (f)ep€, and the (usually with 8r] wv) precede imperative.

Koreiire «p« 8t) irpos o-K£i{;a(r6e, DeM. 21, 58.

411. aye, ayere :

86 E : S' S> Phaedr. : Plato, Phaedo, dW aye, fj ns, Ke'^rjs, Xeye. 237 A

. . . tov Phileb. : ayere 8r), a Movcrai, ^vp poi \dj3e

. . . Kai ToSe dnoKpivai.

. . . eiire riva Xen. An. 2, 2, 10: aye 8t], yvoiprjv f'x^'^* 7- 6, 33" nyere hrj irpos 6ea>v Kai ra epa (TKe'<^a(j 6e a)s f'x^'* Apol. 14' aye 8rj dKovcrare Kai aXXa. 21 : 6 Kai Conv. 2, aye 8r], e(f)rj ^iXimros, epol avXTja-aTOi. Cyr. J, 5,

24: dXX' (iyere Xap^dvere ra onXa. ,

Ill : Ar. Ach. wye 8rj a-v (f)pd(Tov epol aafpcos npos tovtovL Nub. 478 (410), et saepe. ' A. J. P. X (1889), 439. PROHIBITIVE 163

Soph. Ai. 1097: ay', eiV air apxrjs avdis. Tr. I255: ay' eyKOvelr', mpecrdf.

Cho. : tSov TraXat Xva-a

TrpoacfxiTois diKais.

PiND. O. I, 77-80: ay{f) . . . TTeSacrov . . . nopevaou . . . TreXacTop. aXX' crvv KaBavi 8ia Koi koiKcov Archil. 4: aye, 6orjs (TeXp-ara vrjos \ (polra Kadcov. lTa>p.aT' a(l>eXKe w iroXiardv, Xaia TyRTAE. 15: ayer', ^Trdpras eidvbpov \ Kovpoi Trarepoiv \ p,ev Itvv Trpo^aXeaOe.

HOM. Od. 3, 17 : aXX' ayf viiv Wvs Kie l>}((TTOpos iTTTToSa/xoto.

II. I, 337 : dXX' aye, dioyeves HarpoKXefs, e^aye Kovprjv.

412. t0(, 'iTt :

DeM. 36, 56: 'i6i brj Xa/3e ras npos 'AiroXXobcopov ttjs Trovrjplas. [40]> 19*

161 8rj Xa^e . . . tov . . . vopov. Plato, Gorg. 489 E: dXX 'Idt. elne. Phaedr. 228 E: dXX' 161 BeiKwe.

tov Av(riov '161 262 D: 'Idi 8rj pni avayvfuQi tt)v Xoyov apxr}v. Soph. 239 B:

: ovv av . . . TTeLpadrjTi. Theaet. 195 E Wi 8r], airoKpivov.

Ar. Nub. 497: 'iOi vvv, Karddov Bolpdriov. Pax, 40 5 (410). PI. 255 : it'

Soph. Ai. 988: 'iff, eyxdi/fi. 1003: W, (KKdXv^ov. O. R. 46-7: W, S>

noXiv 'id, . alib. ^porcov apKTT, dv6p6a)

HOM. Od. 22, 157 : dXX' I61, Ki 'Evp.aie, Bvprjv eTTides daXdpoio.

• aXX' 'i6i Kal 'iSo- II. I, 32 : dXX' '161, prj p e pidi^^. lO, 53 vvv, AtavTa

p,evrja KdXecraov.

413. fipe:

. . . 6ed- DeM. 15, 26: (\>epe yap Trpos Bfav (TKOTTf^re. I9, 174" ^^P^ 8fj

: . . . kokcIvo (tK€- (racrBe. 251 (f)(p( 8rj (rKi\jracrBe. 21, 58: (^f'pf 8fj Trpbs Beav

Pr. : yjraa-Be. 25. 73 (/d.). 53, 3 (pepe 8fi (TKe-^atrBe.

: f Plato, Cratyl. 385 B <^f pe 8rj poi roSe tVe. Ran. Ar. Nub. 1088: (jiepe 8r] poi (j)pd(TOv. I417: ^^P^ TTvBea-Be p.ov

Ta8i. Eccl. yio: (j>epe pvv (ppdcrov poi, rayr dpeaKei (T

Soph. Ant. 534 : (pep' elne 8ri poi. El. 310. 376 : Cpep' elne 8t] rh 8eiv6v.

O. R. 390. 536. 1 142. Ph. 433. Tr. 890.

p. V. : o ri ''"o' AeSCHYL. 294-5 (pe pe yap \ (Tr)paiv xph crvpTrpdcrcreiv.

414. Negative Imperative (Prohibitive).—The impera- The tenses tive in prohibitions takes the negative fii]. employed are the present, the aorist, and the perfect, the perfect chiefly as a present perfect (303). The first person is represented by the

subjunctive (373). In the second person aorist, the subjunctive 1 64 GREEK SYNTAX

Is used practically to the exclusion of the imperative. In the third person aorist, the subjunctive is preferred in standard prose.

Difference between Present and Aorist in Pro- 415. — hibitions. ybT] with the present imperative has to do with a " of action and sometimes " from course means keep (resist !), sometimes ''cease to" (desist!). In the one case a negative course of action is prescribed, in the other the negative of a course of action. Compare with this construction the negative with the imperfect (resistance to pressure). the aorist or a total fir] with imperative subjunctive gives prohibition.

1 to (XT) \a\6i, Ar. Vesp. 135, may mean, according circumstances, "stop " iravcrai Kal and cease talkhig (compare iatj irorepi^c, Ar. Vesp. 652 ; Stop " " ' Kal Ikctcvo-ei, ''fathering nie) or keep mum." dvTiPoXiio-ei i|Ads jitj eXeeire, beseech hitn. Steel Lys. [6], 55; He will beg and you. Don't pity your ISOC. Don't be astonished of hearts against him. (at) eat)|j,d(ri[is, [l], 44; (one 8' Kal three aorists in a host of presents). 6av|j.a£w, •qv l-yw, otirds. aWd [itj

astonished . . . Well, GoTjfiat', e

416. Present Imperative in Prohibitions :

. II : . . Din. I, 109: /iij • axdeaOif). 113: /x') dnodfXfo-6(€). 3, iirj f]yfl(r6e.

: 8, 20 : IsaE. 3, 79 fif] dfivrjfiovflre. fxr) o'Ua-6(().

: o'Uade. : . . . Lys. [6], 55 (see 415). 12, 91 fir]8' 13, 83 /xijre dwoSexfcdf.

10 : . . . 19, /ijj irpoKarayiyvaicrKfTf.

: . . . danTeada). C: Plato, Conv. 205 B (see 415). Legg. 871 D imt] 936

. . . vroiet. Theaet. B: . A: . . dXX\ fjLTjbels ytyvea-doi. Phaedo, II7 /xtj 146 tov dXX' E: Troi'et ovTcocri • toa-TTep fjp^b), pf] d^iecTO OeaiTrjrov, epdora. 167 pivToi ev Tc3 fiT] dBiKfi epardv. owro) XeN. Cyr. 3, I, 35 : rrpos twv decbv, e(prj, S) Kvpe, fir/ Xeye. 8i8aa-Ke- Thug. I, 86, 4 : cos rjpds irpiirei. ^ov\evea-6ai d8i.Kovp.evovs fiT]8e\s e'are rovs Tw. /bid. 5: p.rjT( rovs 'Adrjvalovs pd^ovs yiyveadat prjTe ^vppdxovs

KaTaTrpo8i8a)p£v. Kal KTfivf HdT. I, 9: ddpaee, Tvyr), pr] (f)o^ev. 85: a)v0pa)Tre, prj Kpoi-

. III: aov. 5,40: pT] dvTi^aive. 8, 140,0): pr] ^ovXftrde. 9, yvuaiKi 8fj

a-vvoiKfe . . . 8e vvp TavTTj TTJ vvv (TvvoiKffis pr] ttjv e'xei-s ph i'x^ yvvaiKa. Traia-ai am . . . 8180V. Ar. Ach. 1054: pr] Vesp. 652: pf] iraripi^e (415).

1 135 : px] XdXet (415). AORIST IMPERATIVE 165

: a Com. 4, 341 , 39 nfj Trpoa-rjKei fxr^r uKovt firj6' opa. 4,356,578; p.r]8(-

TTOTf 8ov\ov aavTov ttoUi. Crat. 2, : fj8ovfis 231 ttiv X^^P^ MV Vi/3aXXf, jxff KKaav Kadrj.

Eur. : Ion, 257: p^ (ppovnCie). 367; fir) '^eXey^f- Med. 807 firjbfis /ie

l8 : (fyavXrjv Kacrdevfj i/o/iifeTco. Phoen. p.rj andpf. Ai. El. Soph. /x7?SeV. H. /L117 €KSt8ao-/ce ... X. 115: ^fi'Sou 395-6: /a' I aXX ow StSao-KO).

o-e : AeSCHYL. Eum. 133: firj rtKarco ttwos. P. V. 44 prj novfi. Sept.

262: at criyqaov ToKaiva, p.fj (f)i\ovs (pojBfi.

PiND. O. . . . (TKOTTet. : ivaTTTaive. I, 5: pr]KiT{i) Iiy prjKeri 4, 14: p.ff

XenOPHANES, 6, 4 (Bgk.): ira{>

ThEOGN. : (caKotcri Se dXX' atVt tojj' ^1-2 /ii) TrpocropiXei \ dvdpdaiv aya^tov fXfoi^l). 578 • /^V M* Si'SacTK- ov Toi rriXiKOs (lp.1 p.ad(iv.

HOM. Od. I, : ...... 315 p-fj KaripvKe. 4, 543-4: prjKiTi KXai(e). 594: /ii)

. . . f'pvKf. 7, 303 : pr/ . . , vfiKfe. 10, 266 : prj p' aye Kela deKOvra, 8ioTpe(f)fS,

Xin' : . . dXKa avroii. . • • • : . . . 14, 387 /xijre x^P^C^f' P-W^ dtXye. 19, 42 a-iya pTjb epttivf.

U. I, 210: . . . eX(C€0. 82 : prjbf 3, icrxfo-d', 'Apystoi, prj /SoXXere, Kovpoi 6 olvov 'Axaiav. 264: pr] poi cieipe (aS she had offered to do) pe\i(j)pova

TTOTvia prJTep. 23, 735 : prjKtr' fpddeadov (149).

AoRisT Subjunctive in Prohibitions.—For the aorist subjunctive in prohibitions, see 376.

417. AoRiST Imperative in Prohibitions :

Third Person :

DeM. 19, 77 : pr) . . . pr) bora SUrjv. [42], 31 : 6 prjSapas vwl yeve-

. I • [49]' prjtfvl vp(bv ani

AeSCHIN...... I, 19-20: p.r)8e crvv8iKr}adTco prj8e dp^dTco pri8e KrjpvKev- a-dro), pr]8e 7Tpe(rj3ev(rdT(o . . . prjSe . . . etVdro) pr]8eTT0Te (5 instances in the pro- visions of a law : quoted by Aeschines). 3, 60 oortv ovrat 8idKeiTai p.T}T diro- yvaro) pr]8ev p,r]Te KarayvcjTO) nplv dKova-rj.

IsAE. : Koi el 8vvaTai. 9, 35 Xeyeii" epov KXecov KdXXiov, tovto avra . . . prj8ev laxva-drco. (The above are about the only occurrences in the Orators. P. xiii See A. J. (1892), 425 f.)

Plato, Apol. 17 C : Tricrreva) yap SiKaia eivai a Xeya>, Km prj 8 els vp,av 7Tpo(r8oKr]a-dT(i> aXXcos. Legg. 924 C: Kal rovro eKXinerco prjSeiTOTe Kara bvvapiv.

XeN. : Ages. 10, 3. Cyneg. 2, 2 Kal pr)8e\s avrd (f)avXa vopia-dro) elvai.

• ""' ^y- 7> 5' 73 prjOe'is ye vpav ex(^v ravra vopitrdrcd aXXorpia exeiv. 8, 7,

26 : ei Tis ovv . . . vpav oppa rovpov ^uvtos eri irpovidelu edeXei, TTpoaiTco orav S* 1 66 GREEK SYNTAX

S) er fycb eyKaXvyj/cofiai, alrovnai v^as, Trai8(s, /mi; Set? avBpanrav Tol^ihv (rafia

tSerco, firjd' avToi i/ift?.

Soph. Ai. I180-I : o-f Tts. ff /xr^Se | Kivqa-uTa 1334" M*?^ V 3'*' f^Tjba- V O. R. S^ ToSe fiws tKijauTCL). I449~5'^- fVoi* fXTjTTOT d^icodrfToi I Tvarpoiov aCTTV ^(OVTOS o1kT]T0V TV)({'lll.

AeSCHYL. P. V. 332 • Koi vvv (aaov fiTjBf (Toi fxeXTjcraTO). 1002-3: eto-fX-

6eTcx) s . . . : firjirod' fya> drjXvvovs yevrjcrofiai. Sept. I036 [j,fj doKijcrdrco

Tivi, but V. 1040: fiT]8e TO) ^o^r] ndXiv. tc5 PiND. O. 8, 56: fiTj /3aXe'ra) fie Xidco Tpax^'i (jidovos. P. 5> 23: ae firj Xa6eT(o.

HOM. Od. 16, 301 : fiTj Tis erreiT 'Obvcrrjos aKovcrdTOi e'vbov iovros.

II. 16, 200: Mvp/xiSdz/es, fiT) Tis fioi dneiXdoiv XtXadfcrBco.

418. Second Person:

Oratores Attici : Apparently no examples. See A. J. P. xiii (1892), 426,

Ar. Thesm. 870: \ir] yj/^fva-op, a> Zev, rr/s e7nov(TT]s Att/So? (parody of Soph. fr. 453, cited below). to Porson's Com. Thugenides, 4, 593: p.f] vofiia-ov, according emenda- tion of Photius and Suidas. Eupol. 2, 464, is doubtful, and would be dis- posed of by the adoption of Elmsley's conjecture. fr. (ivev Soph. 453: /xj) y^reiaov, a Zev, fxi) fi eXrjs bopos. apud Bekk. is Antiatt. 107,30: ^i] vofjucrov avrl tov p.T] vop.L(rr)S. 2o0okX^s Ilr^Xei. (This probably a mistake on the part of the author of the Antiatt.)

: Si HOM. Od. 24, 248 c'lXXo 8e roi €p(co, (TV jui) ;(oXoi' k'vdeo dvfiS. dXXa av 11.4,410: rm p,ri p.oi narepas nod' 6p.oir} ev6eo Tipiij. l8, 134'

TTO) (lev fiTj KaradiKreo /xcoXov Aprjos-

419. Perfect Imperative :

THUC. 7> 77> 4 • M"? KaTairenXrjxde ayav.

: ci> Av. Ar. Vesp. 373 fxrjdev, rdv, 8e8i,di, fj.T]8ev. 415: pf] KtKpdyare.

206: prj vvv ecrradi.

Ai. re dvT irfKas , Soph. 1182-3: vpets pfj yvvaiKfS dvhpav \ Trapearar

aXX apr]yfr[e).

HOM. Od. 3, 313: pr) 8r]6d 86pa)V I'mo rrjX' dXdXrjao. 4, 825: prjbe . . .

8{i8idL. 16, 302 : pr)T{€) . . . lo-T-o). 18, 62-3 : pi] . . . 8fi8i6{i). 22. 488-9 : pr]8''

. . . ((TTa6{i.).

II. 4, 303-4 : p.T)8i TIS . . . pepdra. $, 827 : pfjre . . . 8fi8idi. 12, 272-

TLS OTTLCTCTco TTOTi • 8fi8idi. 20, 3: prj \ TeTpd(f)da) vi]as. 14' 342: p^Te 354-

prjKeTi . . . ecrrare. 366 : pr] SeiStTe.

420. Equivalents of the Imperative.—Equivalents of the imper-

ative are : REPRESENTATIVES OF IMPERATIVE 167

1. The Subjunctive. So necessarily in the first person, and regularly in the negatived second and third persons aorist. See 373 and 376. 2. The Future (familiar) and the Future Perfect Indicative. See 269 and 282.

oTrcor. 3. ot:(i>% with the future indicative, for which see under

4. Optative with av. See 443. See under 5. Infinitive (chiefly in poetry and legal language). Infini- tive.

6. The Optative. See 394. and 7. Impatient or Passionate Questions. See 198, 261, 269. with the infinitive, and similar 8. Sei, xpiji a|'oi/, Se'o/xat ii/iwj/, expres- sions, are often found as a more temperate or a more convenient impera- of in tive. See A. J. P. xiii (1892), 402 f., on avoidance imper. proems.

in Oratio 421. Representatives of the Imperative Obliqua. the — In continuous oratio obliqiia, the imperative may be represented by infinitive, but ordinarily the imperative notion is more explicitly conveyed Sen- through the medium of some periphrastic expression. See Object tences. For rare examples of the retention of the imperative, see 422.

422. Imperative in Dependent and in Interrogative Sen- with the tences.—As the im.perative is equivalent to Set or xpr] infinitive, Famil- it is occasionally used in dependent and interrogative sentences. iar is the phrase olaff 6 dpaa-ov,

(S . . . Kal rovro E ; Let US i^ia-Toi \t.rf, vopLO0€TT]

doKel. : ov8e d ttuvv ead , 6)S evfn vfj.'iv avp.(f>fpeiv 20, 14 yap ;(p7;a-T6s- ep.ov y

: 6 vvvl ea-Tco, ^eXriav eWt rfjs TrdXecos to rjdos. [42], 31 p.T]8ap(hs yevtadco (417)- avTov Ka\ rav LyS. fr. 75, 3 : eSerjdr} rJK€iv avTov iin Kap.ov-,Xiyav on ped' olKeTcbv TTleTU).

TrdXiv . . . el Plato, Legg. 800 E : t6 8e roaovTov rjpas avrovs (TravfparSi Kfiarda. Politic. A irpcdTov iv TovG" rjpiv api(TKov 296 (see above).

. . rolabe koi ThUC. 4, 92, 7 : a>v XP^ pvrjadevras fjpas opoae ^^wp^crai 8el^ai eniovTfS ols 8e oTi a)v p€V e(j>UpTai irpos rovs prj dpvvopevovs Kraadatv, yevvaiov

• • • air avTcbv ovk atnacnv. TTjv . . . avTuiv del eXevdepovv pdxf] dvavrayuivicrTOL 01 Hdt. I, 89: KaTiaov t5)v dopv(p6pa>v eVt irdaTjac ttjcti nvXijai (^vXaKovs, XeyovToiv Kri.

: b Av. 80. Ar. Eq. II 58 (see above). Pax, 1061 dXX' olad' bpda-ov ; 54. 1 68 GREEK SYNTAX

Hec. : ol.(s& oZv 6 Heracl. : dXX' oluQ' S Eur. 225 hpa(Tov; 451 fioi avfi- Ttpa^ov. O. C. *"' oicvflrf KUKov. Soph. ys'- M'5''"' fj-fjT' a(^r]T' enos O. R. 543 : olcrB' ioS TTOlTjUOV ; The Particle ov

423. The particle av is largely used to color the moods of the Greek language.

424. Distinctions in the use of ov. — Two sets of dis- tinctions are necessary as to the use of the particle av. 1. I. It may be used in the leading clause, chiefly with the indicative and the optative or their representatives. 2. It may be used in a dependent sentence, chiefly with the subjunctive. II. I. It may be used with a definite reference, contained in the same sentence, or implied in the context. 2. It may be used without a definite reference, in which case no definite ellipsis is to be supplied.

425. Shifting from Definite to Indefinite.—The shifting from definite to indefinite is not peculiar to the particle av. Other simple demonstratives change in the same way. Compare rbv koL t6v, ra koI ra, and notice especially rews and eas. reoos is used more frequently without its correlative ews than with it, so long being for a while, and etas is some- times employed after the same fashion.'

426. Kcv (k€), Ka. — A similar function is exercised in epic and lyric poe- try by Kiv (kc), and in Doric by Ka. The two particles av and k(v are some- times combined as av k(v. A common origin once suspected is now seldom maintained.^ The accented av may originally have been more clearly demonstrative, the unaccented k^v more surely indefinite, but the whole matter is obscure, and a sharp discrimination between av and k^v often attempted has never been successfully established, av is everywhere dis- tinctly preferred in negative sentences, enters more readily into close com- binations, and on common ground gradually thrusts i-.^v to the wall. So in Pindar liv nearly balances Kiv, whereas in Homer (cei/ greatly preponderates, Kiv being to av in the Iliad as 4 to i.

427. Etymology of av. — The etymology of av is still unsettled. With a definite reference it may be translated ilien, in that case, or, when oppo-

* ' iii foil. A. J. r. iv (1883), 418 note. See A. J. P. (1882), 446 INDICATIVE WITH w 169 sition is implied, else. (Compare Lat. ^w.) Without definite reference, it sometimes gives a potential coloring, and in combination with the sub- junctive and the optative is little more than a sharper future. k(v (ku) is also an unsolved riddle.

Indicative with av

428. The particle dv belongs to that which is other than the present, and is found only in past and future relations.

429. Unreal Indicative with av.—The past tenses of the indicative with dv may denote unreality (the most common use) in such a way that the imperfect denotes opposition to a con- action either in the or in the the tinued present past ; aorist de- notes opposition to attainment, chiefly in the past, very rarely in the and the indicative with dv denotes present ; pluperfect op- position to completion, more frequently in the present.

Imperfect in oppositioti to present :

. . . tl . . . l-yw vap |Aev |xtj w|jit]v rjletv irap' dvOpuirovs TereXevTrjKcSTas dp.eivov; T«v cvOdSe, TjSiKovv av [/ should be in the wrong (I am not)] ovk dYavaKTwv T<3 flovdrji), Plato, Phaedo, 63 B.

Imperfect in oppositiojt to the past :

(icvEiv •ydp €|t)v T« KartiYopovvTi twv dXXwv, el 8e tovt liroiei eKooros, ev£K

Aorist in opposition to the past :

el TO Kai TO oipk ov the kvoir]

Aorist in opposition to presefit :

el ovv ov Sei irdW dKoi)(rai Kai aviTo; oiik av [Jiev dvOpcdiros, KaKa, { TJv IvStiXos, dvSpbs e|ivi]o-0T]v <{>iXov \^I should not mention the name of a friend (as I am doing)], Ar. Eq. 1276-7.

Pluperfect in opposition to present completion :

el 8c' dv Y€ (ATiSeis dXXos 11 Zev^is eYpae, KaXu; aoi dirEKCKpiTO; PlaTO, But there no other Gorg. 453 D ; if were painter than Zeuxis, would your reply hold good?

Pluperfect in opposition to past completion :

el ... 6 dvTjp . . . dire'Oavev . . . SiKuius . . . dv eTe9vi]KEi,, AnTIPHON, 4, ^, the beett he would have been killed 3 ; If man had killed, justly {his death would have beett justifiable). lyo GREEK SYNTAX

For further examples, see Unreal Conditional Sentences.

For f^ovXofirjv (0(\ov) CIV with infinitive antithetical to the dependent verb, see 367.

430. Indicative with av as Potential of the Past. —The indicative of the historical tenses with av also serves to express potentiality, or guarded assertion, in the past, chiefly with the ideal second person or rt?, but by no means limited to it. Ellipses are often easily supplied, but are not necessary. The translation is freer than in an elliptical conditional sentence. The protasis is sometimes contained in a participle or otherwise intimated.

tyva Tis ov, Xen. Cyr. 3, 3, 70; One would {could, might) have known. 6Xi-yovs av elSes, Hell. 6, 4, 16; Few should you have seen.

DeM. 18, 225 : a \i.rff Trpo-^Sei firjdels firjT av a>t]dr) Tr]fifpov prjdrjvai. ovrai ISOC. 5. 64: Ka'iTOL Tis av tt poa ehoK-qafv vn dv8p6s raTreivais rrpd^av-

Tos dva(TTpa(^i]ae(Tdai. to. ttjs 'EXXdSos Trpdyfiara ;

Ibid.: oiire . . . oi/'re LyS. 1,27: TTcos yap civ (sc. KarfCpvye) ; criSrjpov

cS av : av . . . (iWo ov8ev e'xciiv, roi/s ftatXdovTas rj p.vvaTO. 8, y iiTrepeiSeTe.

Ibid. : av . . . vTTcoTVTfvov.

18 : . . . iv av eiricTTevaaTe. Plato, Apol. C iv ravrr] rrj ijAt/ci'a fj p.aKi

: top 5, 6 Tov XoiTTOv oi8e (Sovkopevos av fvpes pabiais vvKTa>p nopevopevov. 8, I, 33: eneyvcos S' av {Ke'i ov8iva ovre 6pyi^6p.(vov Kpavyrj ovre x^^povTa v^piCTTiKca

Hell. • '''oTe •yeXwri, dXka l8(ov av avroiis rjyriaco Tea ovti (Is KdXXos ^t]v. I, 7. 7

Koi av 1 6 yap 6yf/e rjv ras ;(6ipas ovk Kadfoipav. 6, 4, (see above).

Thug. 7, 55, 2 : 6 ovk av Sovto.

Ar. Ran. 1022 : 6 Beaadpfvos Tvas av tis dvfjp fjpda-dr] Sd'ios elvai.

S' I. : ktv- Eur. Andr. II35: Sdvds av eldes TTVpplxas. A. 1582 TrXr^yrjs TTOV yap nds tis rjaOeT av aacpas.

Soph. Ai. : n's av ttot cSed' 2)8' 430-1 e7ra>vvp.ov | Tovpov ^vvoiadv ovopa

Tols ipols KaKols ;

HOM. Od. 10, 84: fvda k' avirvos dvrjp hoiovs i^rjpaTo piadovs. oiS av €ti, 11.4,421 : VTTO Kev TaXctaicppovd tvep 8(os dXev. 16,638-9: 8lov ^pdhpcuv TTfp dvTjp '2ap7rr)b6va \ eyvcu. For av with the Optative as the Potential of the Past, see 437 and 439.

431. Indicative with av or Intermittent Action.— The indicative of the historical tenses with av is also used to INDICATIVE WITH av 17I express habitual or intermittent action in the past, av being used without definite reference (424. n, 2).

av . . . SiaXexOeis [loi wxcto diriwv, PLATO, Conv. 217 B ; He would have a talk with 7ne and then he was off.

: 6 Dem. 9, 48 (in oratio obliqua). 18, 219 ^ikv ypdcjicov ovk av inpio-^ev- crev, 6 8e npea^eiKOV ovk av '4y pay^ev.

ISOC. : ft rivl rav TroXfo)!/ 6, 52 TToXiopKovpLevr) rwv (rvpiJia)(i8(ii)v els fiovos Aa/ce- vnb mivTuv av haijxoviatv ^orjdrjcreiev, ap-oXoyelro napa tovtov yeveadai rrjv

(ra)T7]piav avTois.

22 : Plato, Apol. B SirjpaTcov av avrovs ri Xeyoiev, Hv' afia Ti Ka\ p.av6a- v. voifii Trap avTcov. Con 21 7 B (see above).

XeN. An. I, 9, 19 : et 8e nva Spar] . . . npoa-odovs TTOLOvvra, ov8eva av TrcoTrore d(f)fi\fTO, aXX' del TrXet'co 7rpo(r(8i8ov. Cyr. 7, I, 10 (di's). II. 14. Mem. 4,

: fl 8e avTU) . . €7rt 6, 13 Tis nepi rov dvriXeyoi ., t^v vwodeaiv fnavfjyev av iravra Tov Xoyov a>8e ttws. alid.

ThUC. • f' TivfS 'i8oUv Tovs 7. ?!> 3 M*'" TTTj (r

Ar. Ach. Nub. • "XX' n eKacrroTf, 640. 854-5 pddoip' \ fTreXavdavoprjv av evdvs vTTo nXrjdovs fTojv. Vesp. 278. 279. Pax, 70. 213. saepe.

: Trore eiV ovk Eur. Phoen. 401 pkv eV r\p.ap dxov, d^ov civ.

Soph. Ph. : avros av rdXas tuvt' av 290-1 I (lXv6pT]v. 294-5: i^ipTrav ToXas e elra av ov I p,rj)(^ava)pr]v irvp Traprjv. 443-'

For the Imperfect without av of Iterative Action, see 207.

432. av WITH THE FUTURE INDICATIVE AND ITS REPRESENTATIVES. —The future indicative with av, theoretically a legitimate construction, has been kept out of use by the optative with av and by av with the sub- junctive, and was counted a solecism even in antiquity.^ A number of in- stances occur, however, in MSS and editions, but most of them have been corrected, or are easily corrigible. The same is true of the representatives of the indicative—the future optative, infinitive, and participle. Sometimes there is an anacoluthon, as in Plato, Apol. 29 C. Some- times the future indicative is confounded with the aorist optative, as Plato, Euthyd. 275 A: irpoTpe^fre for TvpoTpi-^aire, the future infinitive

with the aorist infinitive, as Plato, Phaedr. 227 B : Troirja-fadat for iroirja-a-

a-dai, the future participle with the aorist participle, as Plato, Apol. 3c B :

' See R. C. Seaton, Class. Rev. in, 343-5. ^ LuciAN, Sol. in, 555 R. B. L. G. on [Justin Mart.], Ep. ad Diogn. 2, 4. 172 GREEK SYNTAX

TToiria-ovTos for iroiTja-avros. Sometimes uv is for dv- or dva- and belongs to the as Aeschin. : ri ttot av Cf. PiND. N. 68 verb, 3, 155 epel ; 7, and A.J. P. Ill (1882), 452. Sometimes there is confusion between present and fut- ure as in infinitive, Xen. An. 2, 3, 18: e^dv for i'xfiv. Sometimes there is confusion between tiv and Stj,' and easy corrections are almost always at hand.'' This being the case, it is not worth while to multiply examples, most of which have disappeared from critical texts.

II. o 8f HOM. I, 139: Kev K6;(oXcI)

268: 8a>(T(o. 15,215: TrefjubrjafTai. 17,241: Kopeei. 22,67: ipvovaiv. 71 : Kei

433. Non-use of av with Present and Perfect Indicative.—

The present and perfect indicative are not used with llv, but owing to the great variation in the position of av beginners sometimes make a mistake in this regard. In Andoc. r, 117 read ^ovXoio-df ior jSovXea-de. In Plato,

Legg. 712 E, read with Schanz dveparrfdeLs (cf. 793 A).

Optative with av

434. Potential Optative.—The optative with av is the potential' of the Greek language. It is used mainly in leading clauses. It expresses the opinion of the speaker as an opinion, and may be called the mood of qualified assertion. The verifi- cation of the opinion or assertion is postponed to another time

{av).

435. Time and Tenses of the Potential Optative.— Both action and ascertainment may be future, or only the ascer- tainment. The present is often used of the future ascertain- ment of a present action, far more rarely of the future ascertain- ment of a past state. The aorist is very seldom used of the

' Mus. 221 CI. Rev. vi See Cobet, N. L. 501 ; Blass, Rh. 36, ; H. Richards, (1892), 338. ^ Famous is Pl.ATO, Rpb. 615 D : ovx »?««, ^dvai, ovS' av ij^ti Sivpo, where i'/Koi cannot stand, and where ov6' av ijKoi would mean /le can't have come. Here Rich- if was needed with the future it ards applies his panacea ^17, but ever av indicative, is needed here. * better has been Objections have been raised to the term potential, but nothing not with and suggested. Potentiality has to do with character, possibility merely, the estimate of character goes back to the opinion of the one who makes the esti- mate. Compare A. J. P. xix (1898), 231. OPTATIVE WITH AN 173

future ascertainment of a past action. Tlie simple perfect opta- tive with av is found chiefly in those verbs in which the perfect is equivalent to the present. In the periphrastic perfect opta- tive with av, the participle is often treated almost like an adjec- tive.

436. av with the Present Optative not of the Past : used of what will be, or what will prove to be.

: It ivould be a tedious task to tell. Lys. 3, 5 iTo\v av epyov e'lr} Xeyeiv,

Plato, Charm. 161 A-B : ovk clpa auxppoa-vvr] av f'irj albas. Gorg. 507 A :

o to. civ Theaet. B: ev av KOL fifjv ye aa)(pp(i)v iTpocrr]KovTa rrpaTTOi (442)- 145

'* 1

XeN. Mem. I, 2, 11 : (Tvp.fiax<^v 6 . . . ^id^eadai To\p.a)v 8eoiT av ovk oXi- ymv.

ThUC. I, 38, 4 : ei Tols nXeioatv aptcTKOVTis €(rp,€v, ToTcrS' av jiovois ovk 6p6a>s dirapta-Koifiev, If ive are acceptable to the majority of our colonists, there must be soviething amiss in our being unacceptable to these alone.

HdT. 2, 6: ovro) av f'irjaav AlyvTrrov arddtoi i^aK6a:ioi Ka\ rpia)(iXioi, to

22 : atv civ 6 diro tcov napa doKacrcrav. kws hrjTa peoi (SC. NeiXos) ;^idi/os, dno

to. : ovk It can't be depixoTdrcov pecov es yj/vxporepa ; 6, 63 av efios e'lrj, my (son).

AR. Av. 127: TTolav Tiv ovv fj^icrT dv oIkoIt' av ttoXw ; iy2 '. ti av ovv

81 : av TTOiolp.ev ; Lys. kAv ravpov dy\ois. 97"^- Xiyoip. fjbrj. TrplvXeyfiv

8', ToSi ti 1 80. vpds I fTTfpT)(rop,ai piKpov. Lys.

Eur. Ion, 543 : ttSs av ovv e'lrjv (Tos ;

Solon, 36, 1-2 : v

OXvflTTLOiV.

: toi ovk dv Tis HOM. Od. 4, 78 T€Kva (^iX', rj ZtjvI ^pOTwv e'pi^oi.

II. I, : KflVOlCTt 8' dv OV TIS TCOV, 01 VVV slcTtV 271-2 I ^pOTOl fTTlX^OVlOl, fiax^oiTo.

437. f'ii' with the Present Optative of the Past :

No cogent examples in Attic prose.

Lys. 7, 16 : cocrre et kcli Ta fxeyiara els epe e^rjpdpTavov, ovk dv olov Te ^v 8iKr]v • ev dv oti eKeivois Ka\ fie Trap" avTa>v Xap^dveiv yap el8eir]v (perf. =:pres.) eV rjv epe Tipcopi]a-aadai Ka\ avTols prjvvcracTiv eXevdepois yeveadai.

Plato, Apol. 28 B-C : cfiavXoi ydp dv toi ye acp Xoyco elev {must have been

or inust be considered) toov TjpidecLiv oaot ev Tpola TeTeXevTi]Ka(riv.

' The Roman phrase si vales bene EST is modelled on the Greek tl ippdirjai, ev d v exoi. If you are well, it must be all right, according to Norden, Antike Kunstprosa,

I. 238. 174 GREEK SYNTAX

ThUC. : I, 9, 4 ovK av ovv vrjo-iov e^a twv irepi.oiKi8(ov, avrai 8e ovk av noXKai eifv have {can't bee/t^), Tjnfipwrrjs up eKparet, d pi) ti kuI vuvtikov fixf.

HdT. 2 : S' I, fiT](rap av ovTot Kprjres. 70: rd^a Se av Kal oi drro^opevoL (s as vttq Xeyoifv aiTiKopifvoi "EndpTrjv aTvaipedfir^crav ^aploiv (306). 2, 98: f'lr) o av Ka\ aXXos ov ris"Ap)(av8pos, pevTOi ye AlyvTTTiov ro ovvopa. 5, 59. 60. J, ^^ ravra ra ws kuI 184: crvveXtx^l nXoia, Trporepov elpedrj, rpio-;(tXta. fjbr] S)v av- av (lev fv avTolai 8p€S riaaepes pvpiabis Kal (iKocri. 7, 214: eldeir] . . . av. 8, 136.

438. civ with the Aorist Optative not of the Fast:

DeM. : S' . . . 21, 191 e'-yo) fa-Ke(f)Bai fifv ({)r]p\ kovk av dpvrjdelrjv.

E : nays avev tovtcov Plato, Meno, 78 yap dpeTT] ye voir' av ;

XeN. Mem. I, 2, 17 : iVwy ovv e'lnoi Tis av wpos ravra Kre. ThUC. Kal 2, 35, 2:6... ^vveibois evvovs aKpoar^s Td)( av ti evbeearepois irpos a. ^ovKerai re Kal cTrt'oTarat vofiicreie 8r)\ov(T6ai.

: ovTe HDT. 2, 41 dvTjp Alyinmos ovre yvvf] avbpa "'EXkrjva (})i\rj(reie av toJ

(rT6p.aTi.

Ar. Av. TTOiav S' 173: av olKia-aipev opvides ttoXiv ; I98. 20I. 370.

: av ris Kano T6v. 815 ^Trdprrjv yap av dei/Jirjv

TToXei ; ov ri e'yo) TT)p,^ Lys. 128-9: Trotijo-er', ; rj ; ovk av ^ TTOirjO-eT fieXXere \

TroLr)(raip\ dXX 6 TroXepos epTrerco.

Eur. Andr. • tI 84-5 0EP. over' eK ; AN. ttoX- 8rJTa (prjcro) xpovios doupdrcov \

• Xa? av evpois prj^avas yvvrj yap el. I. T. I007 : ovk av yevoifx-qv crov re Kal fi7]Tp6s (povevs.

AeSCHYL. Sept. 397~8 • , | eXKOTToid yiyverai ra (TrjpaTa.

PiND. O. '''^'^ ^f . . . . 2, 17-9'- neTrpaypevoiv dTTolrjTov ovb' av xpovos . . 8v- vaiTo depev epycov reXos. 20 : Xdda 8e noTpo) crvv ev8aipovi ye voir' av. Sappho, 62: W Ke Beip.ev;

Od. : nS>s av . . . : HOM. I, 65 e7reiT(a) Xadoip.r]v ; 4, 443 ris ydp k' elvaXia> irapa Krjre'i KoiprjOeir] ; 753- V y^P '^f M'" eneiTa Kal eK davdroio tr a oi a a i. II. I, 100: Tore Kev piv IXaacrdpevoi TreTriBoifxev. 2, I2-3: vvv ydp Kev eXoi iroXiv ris av Td8e ; evpvdyviav \ Tpoxov. 29. 9, 77: yrjOrjaeiev

439. av with the Aorist Optative of the Past:

: el Toivvv DeM. 20, 143 pev rjyvorjcre ravra (yevoiro ydp av Kal rovro), avri- Ka 8r]Xa)(reL (this tnay be the case, at any time, not necessarily of the past). Lys. 12, 34: Bavpd^a di ri av irore iroi-qcrais avvenrav, Snore dvrenre'tv

d(TKa)v dneKreivas UoXepapxov (Dobree reads e'Troirjcras, but there is no occa- sion to change the optative, as the question may safely be taken as a -

^ So Kriiger : mochten {geweseii) seiii. The example, however, is not cogent. ' Cant be considered many' would have reference to Homer's words, II. 2, 108: ttoX- X^CTii' vrjffoiai Kai 'Apyii ttuvtI dvaaauv. OPTATIVE WITH AN 175

neric question). 20, 2 : aXpi6e\^ vtto tcov cpvXfToiv, ol apia-ra Biayuolep av (at ondloi Tives elcrcv. any time) mpi (T

but Blass : irois av tl 6 ti vn avTOv ; (So the MSS ; eTre^ovXevcrd avra, fit) Koi fTTtlBovXevdrju vir avrov ;)

1 1 : Kov iv tco HdT. 2, ye 8rj Trpoaj/atcri/ico/ieVop ;^poi'a) nporepov 1] e'/xe yevidOai

koi ttoXXo) en tovtov 1 OVK av xooadfiT] koXttos fxe^av ; J, 80: r« 8e afpayia- Aecov • S' uv tl koi tov crdevTi Toi)T(o rovvofxa rjv Td)(a ovvojxaTos enavpoiTo (306).

9, 71 : eyvaxrav 01 napayevonevoc STraprtr/rewi/ 'Apicrrodrjixov fiev j3ovX6p.evov (pave- pS)S aTTodavelv . . . epya dirohe^acrOa jueydXa, TiocreibmvLov 8e ov ^ovkopevov aTvo- • to(tovt

Ka'i (pd6va> dv enroiev. Ar. dv to

(peirjv (briefer expression for perfect eKTedpappevos e'irjv).

Hymn. Hom. 4, 132: ol p.ev ydp Ke KOKol TOLovde TeKoiev (not necessarily of the past. The optative may be generic). Od. aXX' fVre Hom. 4. 63-4' dvbpav yevos 8iOTpe(f)e(ov ^aaikrjav \ crKrjTTTov- referred to xa>v, eTTei ov Ke kqkoI rotovcrSe TeKoiev (unnecessarily the past.

be the such : 8e Churls can't parents of men). 13, 86-7 r) (sc. vriin) fid\' da(f)a- Xeus Oeev ov8e Kev 6 lev. eixne8ov 'iprj^ | KipKos ixapTTja-e

11.4, 223: evd' OVK av ^pi^ovra 'i8ois 'Ayafxe'pvova 8iov. 5' ^5- Tv8ei8r]v

8' OVK av yvoir]s, noTepoKTi p.eTeiJ].

440. av with the Perfect Optative:

XeN. Conv. 3, 6 : XeXrjde ae . . . ; ... ttw? av . . . XeXfjdoi (/xe); Has it escapedyour observation ? How can it have escaped my observation (306) ?

Ar. : SKXins dv Ka\ Lys. 252-3 ydp \ dpaxoi- yvva'iKes fiiapal KeKXrjped^ (= present) dv. For examples of the Periphrastic Perfect Optative with dv, see 288, to which add the following examples :

Plato, Phaedo, 76 E: el 8e pr] ea-Ti Tavra, dXXws dv 6 Xoyos ovtos elprf-

Politic. ev dv I'crco? uevos e'i-q. 264 C: pev ydp Kpr]vais Ta^" e'lrjs Tjadr] pevos

(the reply is: Tedeapai). Soph. 261 C : vvv 8' eirel . . . tovto 6 Xeyeis 8iaTre7Te-

TO . . . dv IVe look the pavTai, peyLcTTov fjplv Teixos rj pj] pevov e'lr], may upon strongest redoubt as having been taken. — 441. dv WITH THE Future Optative. The future optative with dv is not in use. It could arise only from the future indicative with dv, and the future indicative with dv had gone out, if it had ever come in, before the future optative came in. Still it is found in many texts, and is not to be discarded in the later time.*

1 B. L. G, on [Justin Mart,], Ep. ad Diogn. 2, 4. 176 GREEK SYNTAX

'

LyCURG. eu S) . 15 (Bekk., Sch.): yap 'ivTi, Adrjvaloi, on . . tovtcov irXflo'TOv

a/ifXeij/ 86^oit' tip, d rrjv nnp' vfxcov ovros 8ta(pvyoi. TifKopiav. ISAE. I, 32 (Bekk., Sell.): koI npoarjTrelXTjcrev on drjXaxroL wot' av tovtco as SiaKeiTai npos avrov.

LYS. I, 22 etSwr S' on (Sch.): t'-yoj TrjviKavra d(j)iyp€Vos ov8ev av KaraXr]-

Y'otro oiKoi Totv eTTiTrj8fLCi)v, fKfXfvop crvvdfiTrvf'iv.

D-E : d Ka\ Plato, Legg. 719 f'-ym Be, pev ywi] poi Bia(^epov(Ta f'lrj TrXovrw oaiTTdv avTTjv 8iaK(\fvoiTO iv rm Troirjpan, tov invfp^aXkovra av Td(pov fnaivoirjv, (peiBcoKos 8' ail ns Ka\ nevrjs dvrjp tov /caraSfa, ptTpov hi ovcrias KeKTijpfVos Koi p4- Tpios avTos o)v TOV avTov av iiraivia-oi. (-ai Bekk. Schanz).

442. Translation of Optative with av— The optative with dv varies in tone from strong assurance {inust) to faint pre- sumption {inighf).^ May be is often a convenient rendering for the positive, caiit for the negative. Even shall and will some- times serve to reproduce the impression, while zvouId diwd should give the regular translation in formulated conditional sentences. So far from necessarily denoting uncertainty, it is the combina- tion most frequently used to indicate moral certainty, and some- times serves as a climax to the indicative. Especially common is the aorist optative with av to express total negation, which cannot be brought out so well by the future indicative.^

. . . av Tw o-i 28 (t>av\oi Y€ Xoyw elev, Plato, Apol. B-C ; T/iey must have been {must he constdered) sorry felloivs according to your account (437). "pa ov . . . irdXiv o-e Xen. 28 It must be time to €iT) 4>iX6iv \y.i, Cyr. I, 4, ; for you oiSev ov kokov kiss me again. €it) (sc. ©"Epw?), Plato, Phaedr. 242 E ; Eros oi can't be anythi7lg bad. -yap av oireXOoiiJi', aXXa Kotj/w tt)v Ovpav, Ar. Ach. I'm not but 1 tuill knock at tJie door. 403 ; No, going off,

ISOC. 8, 39: a\(Txvv6i'ir]v av (s/iou/d), ft (paveirjv kt€. II, 20; fl . . . piprj- aaipeOa . . ., evdvs av diroXoipe 6a (should).

LyS. [20], 15: TTCof av ovv ovK av 8fiva iraar )(^oipfv {must);

Plato, Apol. 28 B-C: (pavXoi . . . av tS ye aco Xoya elev {must, see 161 ovk. above). Charm. A-B: Spa a-axjipoa-vvi] av e'irj al8a)s {can, 43^). Gorg.

ft 8' aSi/cflf av a8iKeia6ai 469 C: dvayKalov e'lr] t) d8iKfladai, eXoiprjv pdXXov rj d8iKe'iv {shotdd). 507 A : kcli pfjv o ye aucfipcov to TrpoarjKovTa npaTToi av {)nust) • ov to. Ka\ Trepl deovs Ka\ nepX dvOpanovs yap av (ra)(f)povo7 {can) prj npoarjKovTu Trpdrrav. ^Avdynr) tovt eivai ovtuis. Phaedo, 76 E {must, 440). Phaedr. 242 6 see E : ov8ev av kukov e'lr) (sc. "Epcos) {can, above). StOB. Eel. TO eovTa ndvTa ire- PhILOLAUS apud 1,454-6: dvdyKa elpev rj

1 ^ A. J. P. xiv (1893), 499, xix (1898), 231. Justin Martyr, Apol. i, 4, 10. IMPERATIVE OPTATIVE WITH AN 177

re Kal 8e ov Ka paivovra fj aneipa, *] nepaLvovrd imeipa, "nreipa povov e'lrj. (Here avdyKci eipev, it mttst be, is opposed to ov Ka euj, it cannot be.)

2 : ov8 XeN. Conv. 6, pera^ii tov vpds Xeytiv av rpiy^a prj otl Xoyov liv Tis

Trapeipe le {coilld). Cyr. I, 2, 1 1 : drjpavTes . . . ovk av apiaTrjcr e lav {will).

1,4. 28 (jnust, see above). 2, 2, 15 : eV ye crov irvp olpai paov av tis e/crpt- e OX yj/eiev rj yeXcora ^aydyoiro (could inight).

fl . HdT. 3, 119: dvi]p piv pot av aXXo? yivoiTo {way), Saipaiv fdiXoi . . irarpos 8e kuI prjTpos ovk(Tl pev ^coovraiv d8fX(j)e6s av aXXos ov8(vl Tpono) ye voir o

{can). 6, 63 : em 8aKTvXo)v avp^aXXupevos tovs pfjvas, etVe dnopoaas ovk av epos

162: OVK av . . . f'irj {can, 436). 7, (f)6dvoiTf rrjv raxicrrrjv dnaXXaaa-opevoi {can).

Ar. Ach. 403 (see above). 1055 : ovk av eyxeaipi x'^i-^'' Spaxpav

{would). Nub. 1 19 : OVK av ni doiprjv, I couldn't do it.

Eur. H. F. 97 : eXdoi t €t' av Tral? ovpos {may). Ion, 543: TTws av ovv

elrjv (Tos {can, 43^)' 1388 : rd yap nfnpapiv ovx vne pjBalrjv ttot av {could).

1621—2 : el? riXos 01 e(r6Xo\ ol kokoI 8', yap pev rvyxdvovaiv d^icov, \ uicrTrep Trecfyv-

Kacr', ovttot' ev Trpd^eiav av {s/iall). It. 2o6 : w ttoi yevoivr' av ev XeXeypevoi eVwi/ Se KoXXeaiv viKmev dv Xoyoi I v//'fvSetr, \ TaXrjdes {may).

Soph. Ai. 88 : pevoip' av, I must stay, Jebb. 186 : t^koi ydp av 6eia v6(Tos

Ph. 20-1 : dv 'ibois ttotov {must, Jebb). rdx' \ Kprjva'iov {wilt, Jebb). 41-2:

. . . : ovk Thou canst TTws ydp dv Trpoa^aiT] {could, ]ehh) ; 103 av Xd^ois, not take, Jebb.

AeSCHYL. p. V. 758 : rj8oi' dv oipai Tr]v8' i8ovaa avpcpopdv {would). Sept.

375 '• Xeyoip' dv el8ais ev rd rcbv evavricov {will). 397- Kocrpov piv dv8p6s ovTiv av rpeaaip' eya {wzll). Find. O. 2, 20: Xd6a 8e Trdrpo) criiv ev8aipovi ye voir' dv {cannot fail to come). 13, 103: rd r eacropeva tot' (when the time comes) dv (pairjv aa(f)es

{will). P. 10, 62 : Tvxcov Kev dpnaXeav crxedoi (f)povTi8a rdv nap TToSdy {might).

N. 10, 87 : rjpiav pev Ke nveois yaias vnevepdev eoiv {may).

HOM. Od. 19, 598: ev6a Ke Xe^aiprjv {will).

o'l Kev noXees ts Kal eadXol ev Tzecroiev "J, 11.6,452-3: \ Kovlr]

8ia» ' ''"*' ''^'"^ eacrl, 8e Ke Koi ndis ottXo- ""EKTopi {will). 9, S7~^ V W'' epos elrjs \

TaTos yeverjipiv {mzght). 417-8 : Kal 8' dv toIs oXXoktiv eya jrapapvOTjcraiprjv

oiKaS' divoTrXeieiv (zuould). 13,741 : evQev 8' dv pdXa Trdaav eTricf)pa

443. Imperative Use of av with Optative.—dv with the optative is sometimes used to suggest a command. B lead Lead irpodyois av, Plato, Phaedr. 229 ; You may on. on, pray.

(Cf. 229 A : Txpoaye 8f).)

Plato, Phaedr. 227 C : Xeyois dv, Say on. 229 B (see above). 12 178 GREEK SYNTAX

Ar. I160-I ; ravra n-mrov . . . dtoir' av. Eq. hpav XP'l- I Vesp. 725-6: TTOV otTTis CLV ovk civ 8i.ica.aais. 7 fiiidov aKovcrrjs, | Eur. Ion, IIY. 8' ovs IQN. 1335-6: Trap' rjfxcdv eK\aj3' i'xui \6yovs. \ XeyoLS

I'lv evpovs 8' ova' (pfis oa' au Xfyrjs.

AeSCHYL. Eum. 94: evdoir' av (sarcastic), wr], Ka\ KaBevSovaav t'l SeZ ;

1 18 : b' : pv^oiT av (sarcastic), avr^p o'ixfTai (f)€vyu>v npoaco. Sept. 261 Xtyois

&v 0)5 rdxiCTTa, Koi rd^ e'iaofiai.

HOM. II. 2, 250 : TM OVK av ^aaiXfjas dva arop,' e^^v dyoptvois. 9, 141-2 : ft 8e Kev Kev eoi. Apyos iKoipeO' 'AxauKov, ovdap dpovprjs, \ yapfSpos poi

444. av WITH THE OPTATIVE COMBINED WITH THE INDICATIVE.— The optative with liv is often used in combination with the indicative, sometimes as a climax, giving, as it does, the warmth of personal convic- tion.

oijTe ovt' tovto. : ^' DeM. 21, 189: (f>vyoip' av dpvovpai rovvopa 191 f'y'''

iaKeCpdai . . .

ISOC. 15. 260: iyu> 8' ovbev tiv t'lnoipi toiovtov, dWa Ta7s a\T]deiais xp^co- pai nepl avTav. 288" ovx oTTcoi av ennrXr] ^e lav, dXXd Kai avyxa^povat rais daojTiais avraiv.

AnDOC. I, 4- TToXXav poi anayyeWovTcov on Xeyoiev 01 ex^poi ws apa eyw ovt' av vTTope ivaipi oix']v Plato, Gorg. 481 C: TjpSyv /3tos dvarerpappevos av e'lrj dvOpmTTcov

rd fvavTia i>s a Sei. Phileb. 1 6 B : ov i'ari Kai ndvra npdrTopfv, i'oiKfV, )} prjv KokXioiv 686s ov8' av yevotro. re ThUC. 3, 13, 6: ovTe yap dnoaTrjafTai aXXos rd fjpfTepa TrpoayevTjaeTai. ndBoipiv T dv 8€iv6Tepa ^ ol nplv 8ovXevovTfs.

HdT. 9, III : ovTe , . . av roi 8oir]v dvyarepa rrjv fprjv yrjpai, ovre iKeivrj irXevva xpdvov avvoiKrjaets.

Ar. Ach. 403 : ov ydp av diriXOoip', dXXa Koyf/^a rfjv Qvpav (442)- IIP. fr. Eur. I. A. 310: me. ovk dv pe de Iprjv. ov8' e'ycoy' dcprjaopai.

• : rd okvm rd 8' ovk dv 276 yvvalKes iapev pev vmdipeda, | fjpav Opdaos inep^d- XolTO TIS.

Od. : OVK dv aXXa ov8' HOM. 4, 347-8 eyco ye \ nape^ f'inoipi TrnpoKXtSoi/, dnarrjaa.

: ovroi . . . eV vwra II. \ 2, 158—61 8r] \ 'Apyeioi (f)fv^ovTai fvpfa daXdaarfS,

Kai XiTToiev ; Kab Be Kev evx(>3Xr]v Hpidpco Tpoxri \ 'Apyeirjv 'EXevrjv — 445. The Optative with av in Questions. The opta- tive with av in the question expects the optative with av in the answer. The speaker virtually answers himself, shows his own opinion, or his own desire.

eat -n-ws av Tpw-yois ov epePivOovs; Ar. Ach. 801 ; Would you pease? nOS AN WITH OPTATIVE 1 79

iroTc €v8a Hell. could ever to the d<()iKoivT6 Set; Xen. 2, 3, 31 ; Hmv they get right place? (^ovk av a<|>iKoivTo).

: rtf 6 ; ISAE. 3, 64 av lifj-eivov ij irarrip jiovXeixraiTO (OiSeif av.)

Plato, Gorg. 475 D-E : Se'^aio av ovv o-v /^laXXov r6 KOKtoi/ Koi TO aitrxiov

. . . ovk av avTi Tov riTTov ; dW de^aifjLTjv. to. Xen. Conv. 3, 6 : XeXrjde ere on Kal ol payjrabol Travrts (irla-TavTai ravra

TTcbs doL avrav av ; €Trq ; Koi av, i'4>r], XeXr] OKpowpevov ye oXiyov eKcicrrrjv rjfxepav

: 8e ris av rcov ottot Cyr. 5, 1, 28 avOpwnivrj yvoopj] ^ (pevyovrcov Tro\epi(t)v peTroi- ojrXa ovk av Hell. 2, above). TO 17 TrapaStSovrcDi/ Xap^dvoi; 3, 31 (see

HdT. 2, 57 : Tea TpoTTCO av jreXeuis ye dvdpanrrjir] (pavfj (pdey^aiTO ;

: 8' avev 801 Ar. Ach. 797 rjSi] TTjs prjTpos ea3ioiev av; (see above). Eq.

1 : o'lvov av 88: TTcos 8' av pedvav ;^pj;aTdi' ri ^ovXevaaiT dvrjp ; 9 yap evpois

Tl TTpaKTlKOiTepOV ; 773- ^3^4- 122: ncis tis ttws tis av diro tov ttotov iravcr eie, Com. Cratin. 2, ovtov, \ tov Xiav TTOTOV ;

eaTi aoi ; • «" " Eur. I. T. 505: ov8' av ttoXiv (fipdae las fJTis 5^3 ap' iov veXco fioi (f)pdcreias eyco ; O. Ka\ Kelvos oara aXXois tls av PiND. 2, 109-10: xdpfiaT edrjKev, | (ppdaai hvvaiTO ; [oiiBets.]

: irdmra HOM. Od. 4, 443 : r/s ydp k* elvaXia irapa KrjTe'i Koip-qOelrj ; 6, 57

; 7, w TeKos

'AXkivoov ; OVK av pot bopov dvepos rjyrjaaio |

— with 446. TTMS ov WITH THE OPTATIVE TO EXPRESS A WiSH. nws av a wish. the optative is frequently found in the dramatic poets to express Compare nt/nam in Latin.

Kci (re Ar. Ach. ; How COllld irws av e|ji€ Tts''Epws IvvaYavoi XaPwv; 99I an Eros {luoiild that an Eros might) take and bring its together ? Uiinam Si av EuR. me et te copidet amor aliqiiis ! yala iraTpis, irus ev6dvot(j,i o-oi; O would I could die breast. [Rh.] 869 ; fatherland, upon thy

Ar. Ach. 991 (see above). Eq. 460: vrtos av a' enaiveaaLpev ovTas

166: ttws av a' dwoKre ; nebs; 86Te ioa-n-ep fj86pe(rda ; Vesp. ivaipi poi ^i(f)os. EuR. Ale. 864: nws uv oXoipav; [Rh.] 869 (see above). Med. 97 : wus

av oXoipav ;

: . . . O. C. ircos Soph. Ai. 388-91 nas av ddvoipi KavTos ; 1457-8: av,

: tto)s av e'l TIS tov ttuvt' ; O. R. p6- evTOTTos, \ apiaTov 8evpo Orjcrea Trdpot 765

TrdXiv Ph. : nas av dvT top 'Icrov Aoi 8ri6' fjplv ev Taxei ; 531-2. 794-5 epov |

Xpovov Tpe(f>oiTe Tr]v8e ttjv vocrov ;

: TeXecreias HOM. Od. 15, 195-6 nws Kev pot, vnocrxopevos | pvdov epov; &s Ke 01 avdi 11.6,281-2: I yaia xdvoi. the on On the difference between ircbs av ov and nas av pi}, see chapter Negatives. l8o GREEK SYNTAX

447. Optative with ov in Dependent Discourse.—The optative with av is less frequently used in dependent discourse, chiefly in relative, interrogative, and conditional sentences. In these combinations, the optative with av is often a semi-quota- tion or reference to a known or imagined state of mind. •

ti o CKacrros vifiuv €x«i irpbs PovXoito av [xc irpciiTov diroXo'yeio'Oai, AnDOC. 1,8; Each of you Jias some point ivhicJi he ivould wish me to meet first in Viy defence. PovX€vo[a«voi GriPatoi oircos av tt)v riYeiioviav Xdpoicv ttjs 'EXXa-

Hell. The Thebans : 80s, Xen. 7, I, 33 ; platining how they could (saying irus av 7ue el ovv Xd^oifxcv ; ho7V can ?) gain the primacy of Greece, jiev dXXovs «x*''''

• . . . el olerTKTLv ov 8oiT]T€ aviTovs (sc. Tovs iiriro'us), cKCivois 8i8oT€ jie'vTOi Tjfxds dv avirovs PovXoicrOe iropao-TaTas p.d\io~ra ty^w, ^'^^'^ 86Te, Xen. Cyr. 4, 5, 47 ; If you have others to whom you would give the horses, offer thejn to them ; if, however, you would like most to have us as your stand-bys, give them to us.

For other examples, see Relative, Conditional, and Interrogative Sen- tences.

448. Adherescent dv. — Carefully to be distinguished from these semi-quotations are those instances in which the av adheres to the leading particle and yet the subjunctive is changed into the optative. This is really anacoluthic and does not count.

8e ews dv av oi TOVTOvs eiTUfjieXeio-Ooi, Tfjs iroXecos, (del. Dobr. ; W.) vd|j.oi 8i were to TcOeiev, Andoc. I, ; These take charge of the citizens until the laws should be made. (If dv goes with reOeiev : ttntil such time as in all like- lihood the laws would be tnade.)

Andoc. I, 81 (see above).

Ar. Eq. 1056 : icai K€ ywr) (f)€poi a-)(6os, eirei Kev avrjp dvadeir}.

Examples will be given under the different categories.

449. edv, orav, ETC., WITH THE OPTATIVE.—The particles which coa- their lesce with I'iv, such as eiiv, orav, onorav, tTTftddv, rarely forget belong- ings, and in good Greek the optative is more than suspicious.

450. Omission of dv with the Optative.—The Pure Optative AS A Potential.—The pure optative (optative without dv) is sometimes used in the early language as a potential, the negative being ov. The in- stances cited, however, are not all free from doubt, and outside of these early examples all pure optatives used as potentials are more or less open to suspicion. Sometimes dv has been dropped by haplography, sometimes

there has been a confusion with other words, an av (AY) or a 8rj (AH), some- times the dv is to be understood from a preceding passage, or anticipated from a succeeding passage, sometimes euphony may have prompted the POTENTIAL OPTATIVE PURE t8i omission, 1 although the Greeks generally are not very sensitive to the ca- cophony of recurrent sounds," or the ear may have been cheated, some- times the syntax of the editors may have been at fault, and the optative being equivalent to an imperative may be considered as an equivalent to the optative with ar.' Many passages once freely cited have been cor- rected by editors, sometimes unnecessarily, and the tendency is decidedly towards the norm. Similar is the case of the omitted xei/ (ice), and there are not a few passages in which the presence of a ye suggests a restoration of the regular modal construction.

Din. I, 66 : t'kjiv oCpdaXfj-ols fKaaros vfiav ttjv Trarpcoap ecrlav oikoS aTreXdcav

ISe'iu : et oiiv Set ToXfjiTjce lev (roX/xTjcret Blass, Bk. Turr.) ; I, 91 fjiev en rrjv

Bl. del. Fr. rois : ; ('irj Bait.] a-vfi^alpovaiu. 2, 3 Trovrjpiav yap dpxofifvrjv pev KoAvaai Td)(a (rax av mal. Bk. Dobr., rec. Turr. Bl.) ns Kokd^uiv bwrjOeir).

3. 19' pfTO. 8e 8(opo8oKLas /cat irpoboalas Koi rwf 6p.oL(ov tovtois kukuiv . . . ov8ep,ia

(oidepC av Bk. Dobr. Turr. Bl.) ttoXis crcodfirj.

LyCURG. 50: ovK {av Bekker) alaxw de irjv (iTrcov (TTe(f)avov ttjs Trarpldos fivai rds fKeivcov yjrvxds. 144 "• '

<7 o) o" f t e . . . ;

ISAE. 9. 5 • oiiS' {ovT Bekk.) airos {av avTos Scheibe) e^apvos yevoiTO pe-

re 1 : av d> papTvp-qrai vplv. 1, 38 eyw yap (f'-yo) yap Sch.) av8pes mivTcov opoXo- yi]

• o LyS. 5. 5 ovKeTi (TKi'<\rovTai ri dyadov {av dyadov Sch.) eipyaapfvoi tovs dfcrnoTas eXevdepoc yevoivro. II, 7 • ^V^ °^'' ^e^aip-qv {leg. 8e^a!prjv av) 7rd-

tov 1 aas aTTO^f^XrjKevai t] Toiavrrjv yvaiprjv Trepi Tvarepa e^eiv. 9. 35 opoXoyrj- aeiav {opoXoyrjafiav av Sch.).

10: fl 8e . . AnTIPHON, I, arrapvoi yiyvoivTo ., <.t] ^dcravos> dvayKa^oL Bl. ex aj/ {dvayKa^fi codd., dvayKa^oi em. Steph. ; leg. dvayKa^oi) ra yeyovora

KaTTjyopflv. I, 25: Kol yap diKaioTtpov . . . koi npoi 6(wv Kai irpos dvdpaTrav ylyvoiTO {ylyvoiTO Blass) vplv. $, 64.: fKeivov yap apiara {apicTT av Hi. J. Bl.) nvdoivTo.

: Kal Plato, Parmen. 145 A-B dpx^v 8r], as eoiKe, Ka\ TeXfvrrjv Ka\ p.io'ov exoi av TO iv. "E^oi {av to be supplied from the preceding). 148 E: ovtu> divToiT to ev avTov re /cai tcov ciXXcuv. pev 8r] av "Atttoito {id.). Phaedo, 87

B—C : epo\ yap 8oK€l opoias Xeyecrdai TavTa, axnrep av tis . . . Xiyoi . . , TfKprjpiov

8e Trape'^c'ro . . . Kai . . . dvf pa>TCOT] . . . dnoKptvapevov Se' Tivos . . . o'loiTo.

(One av suffices for four optatives in a very long sentence.) Rpb. 382 D : 8ia TO el8evai to TraXoLa av av TTOTtpov p,fj d(f)opoLa)v \/^evSotro ; TeXolov pivT e'irjy

' See A. J. P. xii, 387. Aeschyl. Cho. 595. Soph. Ant. 604-5. Theogn. 125: ovSe yap el S tit) g dvSpog voov, where edd. oil yap av flStiriQ.

''Pindar, I. E. cxiv. Ar. Nub. 776: birtiig dTroaTpk-^aig dv dvTidiKujv S'lKrjv. Still notice the rarity of compounds in dvav-.

^B. L. G. on PiND. O. 3, Kuvog a'iijv. P. 10, 21-2: dtog t'it] 45: \ aTrlipojv Kiap. 1 82 GREEK SYNTAX

iv evi. (

• pvpiwv 8paxpo)v oXiyoi yf pfju koi ev ttckti. to'is EXXt/cti yiyvoivro {av tO be supplied from preceding).

: 8' av Xen. An. 4, 6, 13 SoKovpev poi TavTTf] TrpocrnoioiipevoL npoa^aXt'iv fprj- poripa av rw «XXa) opu xpw^'^'- p-^voiev (av to be Supplied from above) yap

01 avTov fjLoXKov ddpooi. TToKepioi. Cyr. 2, 4. 17 n"e'/x'\|^ai/nt av aoi iKavovs 'nnreus

KOI . . . Ka\ . . . TTf^ovs ovs (TV Xa^ojv ev6vs dvlois avTos Se ireipco prjv pfj irpoao) vpHv fivai. 5> '» 23 • '^o' (f)o(ioipriv av avTovs Ka\ alcrxyfoiprjv dnoKnTcov ravra eiKr] direXdelv.

• Ar. Eq. 1057 • olXK ovk av iiaxfcrairo ;(€'(rairo yap, el paxfcaiTO.

Eur. Ale. 52 : eVr' ovv oTTa>s"KkK-qcms is yrjpas /xoXot;

Soph. Ant. • '''fdv, Zed, bvvacnv ris 604-5 dv8p(ov \ vTrepjSacrLa Kardcxot

: Kal tvot ov ri (45O) footnote l); O. C. I172 tIs eariv, y e'yw yj^e^aipi ;

: ea-d' ra KaXci. -KeiBoC AeSCHYL. Ag. 620 ovk onas Xe^aipi \j/ev8TJ IO49:

• av, el TveidoL aTreidoirjs 8' t'crcos. Cho. 172 : ovk eariv oaris ttXtjv evos Kei-

• ris paiTo viv. 595 a^^' vTte'proXpov dv8p6s cjipovrjpa Xe'yot (4S0> footnote I) ;

P. V. : OVK ecTTiv OTCO croi. 291-2 I pei^ova polpav veipaip rj

• PiND. O. 3, 45 : ov viv fitw^co Keivos e'lr^v (450, footnote 3). P. lO, 21-2 : 6e6s II, 6e66ev KaXcSv is not e'lT) I dnripav Keap {ibid^. 50: epaipav {epaipav is potential). N. 5, 20: vTvoa-Kdirroi not potential. ThEOGN. 125 (450, footnote l). 1187-90: oi/Vis anotva 8180VS 6dvaTov to be from what ov8e el <})vyoi {('iv supplied follows) fSapelav \ 8v(TTVxir]v, prj

ov8' av • • eVt \ palp' Teppa /3aXoi. | Svacjipoavvas OvqTos dvrjp 8a>pois (SovXopevos

7Tpo(pvyoi.. aacocrai. HOM. Od. 3, 231: pela ^ffj? y' e'deXcov koi r^Xo^fi'

Ka\ 1 : 01! ris Kelvov eXdwv Cauer) e'-yw KTTjpaTa 8oir)v. I4, 22-3 dvi]p dXaXrjpevos Treiaeie re Ka\ (piXov vlov. I dyyeXXwv yvva'tKa 11.4, 318-9: pdXa pev Toi (" libri plurimi et optimi, Kev duo, ye unus,"

Ka\ avros cos : 6 ov 8vo (libri fere Cauer) eyav e'deXoipi | e'pev. 5, 303 y

k 10, : tovtov omnes ; Heyne, Naber, Cauer) av8pe cftepoiev. 246-7 ye cmope- voio Kal eK • ^^os edeX(ov tvvpos aldopevoio \ ap(f)(o vocTTrja-aipev. 55^-7 P^^^ y Kai otSe, Ittttovs toi, kuI Ke'iva dpeivovas, f)e Trep | 8copr]aaiT{o). 15,45: avrdp

1 : re Koi vldai e iyu) TrapapvOrjcralprjv. 97-8 BvyaTepecrcnv yap ^eXrepov ir] |

: tl aXXo eKTTuyXois eTreeaaiv evicrcTepev. 19, 321 ov pev yap KaKarepov irddoipi.

20, 286 : 6 ov 8vo y {8vo K Cauer) av8pe cf)epoiev (=5, 303).

Subjunctive with av

451. The subjunctive with av is not employed as a form of independent statement in Attic prose. In dependent clauses it is either a future or good for all time. AN WITH SUBJUNCTIVE 183

452. Subjunctive with k€v or av as a Form of Independent Statement. — The subjunctive with k^v or liv is occasionally used in Homer as a form of independent statement. The negative is ov.

Se Kev aviTos II. / 7uz7/ take it ovik av iya eXwpiai, HOM. I, 137 ; myself, Toi the be. xpaio'ixT) KiOapis, 3, 54 ; 0/ no avail to thee shall cithern

453. I. Kt{y)\

a. Present :

HOM. Od. I, 39^' Twi' X-iV TLS rdS' f'xfJO'Lp, eVei Save 8ios 'OSvcrcreuy. 4>

aXXoi/ K (iWov Ke • ^^ ''* '"'" 692: e;^^aip»;cri ^poTwv, (ptXoirj. lO, 50? ''"'7'' trvotr]

• : tcu ae Koi Xaiov oXXoi (tltov Bopeao (pe prfcriv. ly, ^-^yS XP') Sd/xfi/at rje jrep |

€ya) df Ke (re KXeico.

II. : k' : rot I, 184 eye!) Se ayco BpttTJ^tSa KaXXnrdprjov. Cf. 9, 701-2 dXX' ^

Kelvop : toi rj Kev Ke neidev hi Ke fjiev edaopev, irjaiv \ rj p-evrj. 14, 235 eyw etdeco := Cf. 18, dXXd Ke (perf. pres.) X'^P'-^- 307-8: pd\' avTT]!/ I (TTr]aop.ai, rj Ke (fieprjat peya Kpdros rj (pepoiprjv.

454. b. Aorist :

PiND. P. • °' ''f rdvhe crvv 6ea>v pacrov eXdopres TeKwpTai 4, 5I~3 ripd \ (para TrebLcov Seanorap. in Pindar. KeXaipe(f)ea)p \ (Only example Semi-epic.)

HOM. Od. 4, 80 (possibly future). 388-9 : top y e'i nas aii dvpaio Xoxijcrd-

oy kcp toi 686p. '• '"^' ^^ '^^ ''"°' Cf. fievos XeXa^eadai, | e'lTrrjaip 29^ e'lTrrjai. dXX TOI Ke'ipop Kev Ke Kai Kep ol I4i 183—4: rj pep edaopep, rj dXcor), | ^' (f>vyr] vnepaxv X^'P'^ Kpoi/t'coj/.

II. I, 137 • f' hi Ke pi] hacoaip, eyu> be Kev avTos eXcopai, 324- f' ^^ '^^ 8i hoiolcriv pr] harjaiv, e'-yo) Kep avTos eXwpai. II,43I~3- O"i]pepov r) enev^eai

. . . vtto s. 1 hv- 'iniracridrjaiv rj Kev epa hovpl Tvnels dno dvpov oXi aar] 6, 129:

v, Kai Kev Xvcrios i^eiiTOL 'Ayapipvovi, TTOipipL \ dpd^Xrjais veKpolo yevrjTai {yivoiTo Cauer c. paucis codicibus).

455- 2. av:

HOM. Od. 4, 240 (=11, 328. 517. II. 2,488): ovK av eya pv6r]cropai ovh'

: h' be ovoprjvoy. 6, 221 avTrjv ovk ap e'yo) ye Xoiaaopai (may future). II. ovk I, 205: lis virepoTrXirjcn Tdx av ttotc dvpov oXiacrrj. 3, 54: av

TOI xP^-'-^i^ll Kidapis. 11,387: oiiK av toi xP'^'-'^ P-d^ ' /3'os. 22,505: vvv h av TToXXd irddrfCTi (f>[Xov dno iraTpos dpaprayv.

The aorist is the tense used in all the above examples, and all except two are negative.

456. Omission of av in Subjunctive Dependent Clauses.— Sub- junctive dependent clauses, outside of the pure final sentence, regularly take av except in the older language. The omission of up is sometimes 184. GREEK SYNTAX due to clerical error, sometimes perhaps to a sense of euphony, sometimes to a survival of the older construction. See Final, Temporal, Conditional, and Relative Sentences.

457, av WITH OTHER MoODS.—The imperative with av does not oc- cur. When av is used with an infinitive, or participle, the clause must be resolved by an indicative or an optative, according to the context. KaXXiov av oiei

€Tt ei ; Ar. 1 T]8€ r\ TToXis)) 1 firj (jjavtpus t||J.u)V virepeix* ttjv x^Tpav Eq. 175-6. opui

. . . tTraivcov koi . . . Toirov {subject) iroXXuv |i£v kuXuv irpd^euv yi\i.ovTa., iroOovvTa 8e dv Tov d^ius dv 8vvT)6€VTa (= oo-xis 8vvT]8eiT)) 8i,aXex6T]va(, irepi avTwv, ISOC. 5,

109. Further examples of av with the Infinitive will be found under Object Sentences with the Accusative and Infinitive, and additional examples of av with the Participle will be given under The Abridged Sentence.

458. dv WITHOUT A VERB.—The verb of av is sometimes to be supplied from the context. So especially in the combina- could it? tions TCi'^ av. Mayhap, Quite likely ; irw'^ av; Hoiv

Tas 6iri

DeM. 21, 199; Ti^ yap icrriv oaTis . . . ovk av . . . fiirpiov Trapecrxev eavrov

. , . ; ov8f\s o(TrLS ovk av (SC. Trapeaxev).

Plato, Euthyd. 284 A : ttws yap av, Legg. 629 A : rdx av tacos. 658 A :

: Phileb. : Tax av. 696 C TTcbs yap av ; Parmen. 149 E (see above). 23 D Tax «''• Politic. 258 B (see above). Rpb. 353 C : Ka\ nas av; 369 A : rax

: av : av. Theaet. 186 : av. Soph. 237 C TTwy yhp ; 255 C rax 257 D {id.). D

Ka\ 77 CO? I'lv ;

: ovv kclI ovto) XeN. An. I, 3, 6 as ip.ov lovTos oTVTj av v^ieis (sc. i'j/xe) ttjv yvw- lirjv fX^'''^- ere S' aXkos ris ovk av Ar. Eq. I251-2: Xa^oiv K(KTr]

• 01 S' olKerai peyKovaiv dXX' ovk av rrpo Toii (sc. fppeyKov). Pax, 907 : aXX* ov< eSet. av (sc. 7rapeSe'|co), e'l Ti Trpo'iKa Tvpocrayayfiv a 181-2: ere S' tis ovk av Eur. Ale. aXXj; yvvrj KtKTTjaeTai, \ (Tw(f>pu>v ptv

ovk av 8' t(rais. Med. fiaWov {SC.ovcra^^ e'irj), (vTvxrjS 1153- <^'^ov? vop.i^ovcr aidev. ovairfp av (sc. vopi^jj) Trotrt?

El. : 8' ovk ov8' av vv (Ta>- Soph. 364-5 ti^s a-TJs ipa rifxris Tvxe^v. \ {epcorjs),^

' and Jebb gives a choice between ip(in]g ijpag. POSITION OF AN (KEN) 185

ova-a. Ph. ^^- "^'^ ° ws OA. (ppcov y' 114-5- "p' irepcrav, ecfidaKfT, e'lfi' iya; \

'^^'^ aov. 1 : KovTra> ovT av (TV (SC. f'irjs) Kfivcov X^P''^ (Keiva Tr. 46 -3 ris avTwv (k KaKov ov8 ovei^os t' ov8 ap el (sC. \ y e/noO \6yov | rjveyKar' rjbf iviyKair') Kapr tvTaKeir] tS (piXe'iv.

Some of these elHpses have become mere formulae, such as as av and Kav, for which see Conditional and Concessive Sentences.

av — 459. Position of and Ke(v). av and Ke{v) are both post- positive. Both are apt to combine with some leading modifier, conjunction, relative, adverb, only certain monosyllabic particles, such as fxev, Se, jdp, re, being allowed to intervene, dv some- times goes so far as to coalesce sooner or later. So we find el et av {ffv, eav, ay), Ke{v), or av (later orav), ore Ke(y), Trpiv av, 09 av, ovk ov This to combine with 09 Ke{v), rd')^' dv, dv, k€{v). tendency some leading word sometimes removes both dv and Ke(v) to a considerable distance from the verb to which they properly be- long.

ctj' Verb : 460. [iceCi')] after

irws yap avev tovtwv apeTT) 76 voir' av; PlaTO, Meno, 78 E; Why, /lOTU ca7i there be virtue without those ? (438).

DeM. 3, 17 : et Se TOvr eVoi'et eKacrros, eviKcov av (429)- 20, 143 : yivoiro yap av Ka\ tovto (439)- -I> 1 89: oiire (f)vyoip' av ovr' apvovp.aL Tovvofia tovto (444)- vtto 01 LyS. 20, 2: aipedels rmv (PvXercbv, apiara Biayvolev av nepi i> avTOiv oTToioi Tives flcriv (439)-

: Ka\ S o-ta- Plato, Apol. 22 B (431). Gorg. 469 C (442). 507 A p-rjv ye Ka\ Ka\ v TO. TTpocrrjKovra Trpdrroi av irepX deovs nepX avOpcoTtovs (^^2). Meno, 78 E (see above). Phaedo, 63 B (429).

6 . . . Xen. Cyr. 3, 3, 70 (430). 8. i, 33 (430). Mem. 1,2,11: avppaxov ^id^eddai ToXpwv deoir' av ovk oXiyiov {43^)- I. 2,17: iVwr ovv e'iiroi tis av

Trpos ravra (438). 4, 6, 13 (431).

Thug. 3, 13, 6: ovre yap aTrocrTrjcreTai aXXos to re rjperepa irpocryevrjcreTat T av 01 dovXevovres irddoipev Seivorepa ij irpiv (444)- 7» 7^> 3 (43^)'

: "''• ~"- HdT. 2, II eyo) pev yap eXnopai ye Ka\ pvpiav evTos x^^^^"'^'-

Ka>s S)v 8f)Ta peoi av (SC. 6 NetXo?) dno xi-ovos (436); 41 (438). 98 (437)-

Ar. Ach. 797 (445). 801 (445)- Eq. 91 : o'lvov yap eZpois av TL npaKTiKQ}- repov (445); Nub. 854-5 (431). Av. 382 (438). Lys. 97-8 (436).

: av Eur. Ion, 1622 ol kukoI S', wa-Tt-ep TTe

I. A. 1582 (430). Phoen.401 : TTore pev err' rjpap eixov, elr ovk elxov av (43l)'

Soph. Ai. 186 : ^koi ydp av deia v6(Tos (442). 1 86 GREEK SYNTAX

P. • AeSCHYL. V. 758 T]boC av oifxai Tr']v8' idovaa (TVjJi(f)opdv (442). Sept, 375 (442).

PiND. O. 2, 20 : \dda Se iroT/xo) crvv evdaiiJiovi ye voir' av (438)-

HOM. Od. I, v( Kev ttoXA' 228-9: ^f a-aijcraiTo avrjp \ a'icrxm opdcoi'.

II. '• Kfv 22, 253 eXoini Kfv fj (ikoL-qv (442).

cii' : 461. ['v'f(»')] offer Negatives

Tois . . . Twv cTTTovSaicov ov8' av 6 iros alwv I ()>i\ia9 E|aX6iv|/€i,ev, ISOC. [l], ; Not even eternity itself can obliterate the friendships of men of character. 6 DeM. 18, 219: ^^.iv ypdcpau ovk av eTrplcr^fvaev, 6 df npea^fvav ovk av

: a "*' eypa'^fv (43^)- 225 prjTf Trporjdei fjLrjbfls M'7'''' ?'7^7 TTjfifpov prjdrjinu (430).

• f' '"o Ka\ 243 TO eTTolrjaev avBpumos, ovk av cnridavfv (429)- 21, 1 91 (438).

Isoc. I 260: [i], (see above). 15, e'-ycb 8'ov8ivav finoip.i ToiovTov (444).

ANDOC. 1,4- ^S apa eycb ovt' av vnop-eivaipi ol)(rj(ropai re (pevyuiv (444)-

• ^^ oTi . . . ANTIPHON, 5' 15 y^P S^f'S' ov8e\s av fjv aoi os epov KarepapTV- prjcrev.

Plato, Gorg. 491 E : ouSeis Sans ovk av yvoirj, oTi ov TovTo Xeyco. 492 B :

^ irws OVK av adXioi yeyovores e'lrjaav ; ^OJ A : ov yap av (roXppovol to. prj ivpocr-

TfKovTa Trpdrrcov (442). Phaedr. 242 E (442). Phileb. 16 B: ov8' av yevoiro (444)- Eel. Se PhILOLAUS apud StOB. 1,454-6: uneipa povov ov Ka fir) (sc. rot eovra) (442).

XeN. An. I, 9, 19 • f' Sf Tiva Spar] . . . TrpocroSou? noioiivTa, ovBeva av ttcI)-

TTore dfjifiXeTO, dW del TrXe/co Trpo(Tf8i8ov (43l)' Hell. 1,7-7 (430).

2 : ei ThUC. I, 9, 4 (437)- 3' 42. Sta^e'pet S' avra, ^ov\6p.€v6s Ti ataxpov nei-

eii Se (k- (rai fv pev elneTv ovk av t'jyelrai nepl tov pi) KaXov 8vvaaSai, 5ta/3aXa)i/

re Kal tovs , 2 TrX^^at av tovs avrepovvras aKovaopevovs. '] 55' (430)-

HdT. 2, II : OVK aj/ xwo-^etT; K6X7roy(439). 6,63(436). 7,162(442). 9,111

(444)-

AR. Ach. 403 : ov yap av dneXdoip', dWa ko'^co Trjv Bvpav (44^). I055 (442). Eq. 1276-7 (429). Nub. 119 (442). Lys. 129 (438).

Eur. I. A. 310 (444)- ^- T- 1007 • ovk av yevoiprjv croO re Ka\ prjrpos (jjovevs (438). fr. 276 (444).

Soph. Ph. 103 : ovk av Xd/3ois (442). 118 : paduiv ydp OVK av dpvoip.T)v to

SpaJ/.

AeSCHYL. Sept. 397 : Koapov pev dv8p6s ovTiv' av Tpeaaip' iya> (442).

PiND. O. 2, I7~9. 'wi' 8e TTCjvpaypivmv . . . dno'ir^TOv ov8' av ;^poi'oj . . . 8v-

vaiTO 6epev epycov TeXos {43^)-

Hymn. HoM. 4, 132 : ov ph ydp kukoI Toi6v8e TeKoifv (439)- rot HOM. Od. 4, 64 : ov Kf KaKol roioucrSe TeKoiev (439)' 7^'- TeKva 0tX', ^

: ov8' Zt]v\ jipoTcov ovk liv TLS eptfot (436). 240 ovk av eyw pv6riaop.ui ovoprjvco (455)- 347-8 (444). 6, 221 (455). 13. 86-7 (439)-

: evO' av II. 3, 54: ovk civ Toi xp<^^(^H) K-i-dapis (455)- 4' 223 ovk jSpifoj/ra POSITION OF AN (KEN) 187

tSois 'AyajJiefivova Stoi/ (439). 5, 85 (439). II, 387 (455). 16,638-9: ov8' av

. . . eyz/co (430).

462. (w [«(i)] q/fer Interrogatives : av ISAE. 20 Tis 7ap 7€voiTo TavTTjs [iavia jiei^tov; I, ; Why, ivhat greater madness can there be than this ?

20 : tis av 6 ISAE. i, (see above). 3, 64 afieivov Pj nuTrjp ^ovXeva-airo (445) >

ISOC. 5. 64 : icaiTOL TIS av TrpoaedoKrjaev vir' avBpos ovra raTTftvcis Trpd^avTos dva(TTpa(j)r]'

LyS. 1,45 • tI av ovv j3ov\6pfvos eyu) tolovtov Kivhwov fKivBvvfvov, el prj to piyiaTov tcjv ddiKrjpaTcov rjv vn avrov rjdiKrjpevos ; 12, 34 (439)- [-o]' ^ 5 (442).

Plato, Gorg. 491 E: eVet nais av evSaiixav yivoiro civdpcoiTOS 8ov\(v

OTCiOVV ;

Xen. Conv. 3, 6 (306), Cyr. 5, i. 28 (445). Hell. 2, 3, 31 (445).

8vvaiaTo . . . Ka\ . . . HdT. 7> 103: Kcos av ^iXioi i) irevTaKiapvpioL crTparm

TOcraSe avTLcrTrjvai ;

Ar. Ach. 991 (446). Eq. 88 (445). Av. 172: ri av ovv iroiolpfv (436);

' S' ttoKiv 173 TToiav av oiKKTaipev opvides (43^) >

Eur. Ion, 543 (436). I. T. 513 : ap' av tI poi (f)pd(reias S)v eyw ^e'Xo) (445)'"

Soph. Ai. 430-1 : tis av itot aed' ktL (430) ; Ph. 41-2 (442).

PiND. O. 2, no: Tis av (ppdcrai bvvaiTo (445) >' Sappho, 62: tI Ke delpev (438);

: k' HOM. Od. 4, 443 TIS yap dvaXlco napa ki]T(c Koiprjdfirj (43^) ;

: : Tode II. 9, 77 TLS av Tade yrjOrjareiev ; lO, 303 tls K€v poi epyov wtto- TeXeaeiev (Txop-fvos ;

463. «)' [^"{(i')] a/ter a Participle:

av . . . SiaXexOeis |j.oi wx«to diTKov, Plato, Conv. 217 B; He would have a talk with me and then he was off (431).

AnTIPHON, 5.62: yv(£)(jQe\s av aTreaTepei. p.ev epe Trjs TrarpiSos, aTretrrepei de avTov iepS)v ktL Plato, Conv. 217 B (see above).

Xen. Cyr. 4, 5,6 : tov Xoittov oiSe ^ovXopevos av fvp€s pa8ia>s tov vvKTcop avTovs T

HdT. 7' 38 : a> 8e(nroTa, xprjlaas av n aev ^ovKoiprjv Tvxfif- Ar. o t6v tov tcls Eq. 135-^3- piadov Xiyav \ Tpirjpeis (SC. Xeyovra) Trapa- 8papd}v av w^eTO. Soph. Ant. 94 (55)- O- f^- 446: a-vBtls t av ovk av dXywais TrXeov.

PiND. P. 10, 62 : Tvxoyv K(v dpnaXeav axidoi. (fipovTida rav nap ttoSoj.

HOM. Od. 4, 47 : ISoiau Ke 6vp6v Idvdrjs.

i^'ith are 464. av [tci(i'y] any Leading Modifier, under which head included copulative and disjunctive conjunctions. 1 88 GREEK SYNTAX

TO, aXXa o-iwirw, irdW av elireiv, DeM. The rest ykv ex'^^ 3, 27 ; I pass over in silence, although I could say tnuch.

avTi av Sy DeM. 1,1: TroXXwj' afSpes ^Adtjvaioi xprjfiaTUiv vp.as i\i(r6ai vofii-

€1 KT€. I ; 67rl av ris da fo), 2, TToXXav fiev Ibeiv avdpes 'AdrjvaLOi boKel fioi kt€.

et oZv 01 . . 3, 27 (see above). 18, 153: p-h fif] fifTfyvoia-av (vdf'ws Qrj^moi .,

SxTTTtp )(fip.appovs av airav tovto to Tvpayfi els tt/v ttoXiv etVeVfae. ISOC. II, 20: (vdiis av ano\oip.e6a (442).

LyS. '• TTo\v 16 : ev 3, 5 av epyov ('irj Xeyeiv (43^)- 7. yap av eldfirjv (437). AnTIPHON, 4^3: diKaias 8' av (redvfjKfi (429).

Plato, Apol. 28 B-C: (f)av\oi. yap av . . . ehv ktL (437). Charm. 161

: av aldo)S A-B ovK lipa (TOi(f)po(TVVT) e'ir] (43^)- Gorg. 453 D: KaXas av (roi

C : av an€K€

76 E: aXXws av (440). Politic. 264 C: Tax «''» ^s often (440). Theaet. 145

B: ed hv i'xoi (436).

28 : av : : XeN. Cyr. 1,4, &pa eXr) (442). 2, 2, 15 paov av (442). 7, 2, 25

elKaaai tovto. 16 : apiCTT^ av fioi doKels Hell. 6, 4, oXiyovs av eides (430)-

ThUC. I, 38, 4- f' TO'f irXe'iocnv dpecTKovTes £crp,ev, roicrS' av povoLs ovk

6p6cbs dirapeaKoipev (436). 2, 35, 2 : to-x dv (438). 6, 2, 4.

HdT. 1,70 (437). I, 196: ol b' dv . . . eXdpi^avov (431). 2,6: ovTa dv

(436). 3' 1 19- d8eX

Tavra p,ev Ka\ (f)d6v

AR. Eq.413: pdrrjv y dv (439). Av. 815: ^TrdpTrjv yap dv 6eipr)v eya

81 : : Tijpfi TToXei (436) ; Lys. Kav, and so often (436). 252 aXXcoj yap dv (440).

Ran. 1022 : Trds dv tls dvfjp rjpdadr] dd'ios elvai (430)-

Eur. Andr. 85 : TZoXXas dv evpois prjxnvds (43^). II35- beivds 8' dv fides TTuppixas (43O). H. F. 97 : er' dv (442).

Soph. Ph. 20: "" : avTos dv ToXas : Tax (442)- 290-1 \ elXv6p.r)v. 294-5

• tout' dv . . . eiVa dv ov \ efjiT]xava)p,r)v irvp Trapfjv (43^)-

PiND. O. 13, 103 : tot' dv (442). N. 10, 87 : ri^u.i(Tv pev Ke nveois yaias vne- vepdev ewv (442).

Solon, 36, 1-2 : a-vppapTvpoit] tuvt' dv . . . p']Tr]p p.eyi(TTr) baip-ovav 'OXvp.- TTicov (436).

• '^a't toi HOM. Od. I, 396: tS)v Kev Tis ToS' exijo-iv (453)- 4. 39^ 84 Ke

aXXoi/ k . . . Ke Kev elTTTja-i (454). 692: aXXov (453)- 753: '; ydp (438). lO,

: 8e Ke aXX' toi Kelvov 84: ev6a K(e) (430). 507 ttjv (453)- 14. 183-4: rj pev Kev Ke Kal Kev 01 eaaopev, fj dXcir], \ fj (jivyrj {jTrepaxi] X^'P" ^povicov (454)' ^9'

598 : evda Ke (442). II. I, 100: Tore Kev (438). I, 137: eya 8e Kev avTos eXcopai (452), and

SO elsewhere with eyS. 139; o 8e Kev (432). 205 : tox^ dviroTe Ovpdv oXeaa-T]

: KeivoiaL 8^ dv ov tis to)v, 01 vvv elaiv (455)' 271-2 \ ^poToi ernxdovioi, pax(- oiTO (436). 523: ep.o\ 8e Ke ravTU fxeXijaeTat, (432). 2, 12; vvv yap Kev (438). POSITION OF AN (KEN) 189

. . . • ^f l6o' Kab 8e Kfv XtVotfi/ (444)- 3- ^3^ '"'? ^^ viKfjO-avn (432). 4, 176:

a)S' 1 : vno Keu elXev KUL Ke Tis e'pe'ei (432)- 42 TaXaai(f)povd jrep 8eos (430)- 9.

• KOI • '^fl' 8' . . . 57 efios 84 Ke TTMS e'lTjS (442)- 4'7 av 7rapaiJ.v6r}(raifir]v (442).

: . . . K€ : kcv ' S" 701-2 rj Kev fj (453). II, 433 fj (454)- 13. 74I evdev av (442).

18, : K€ . . . Ke 22, : Kei/ rj Kev : vvv 308 I'j rj (453). 253 eTioi/Lit aXolrjv (442). 505

S' ai' : avTiK av . . . Kai Kev (455). 24, 654-5 \ (454)-

I' "it-lith Verbs : 465. a [^'£('0] of Saying and T/iifiking

olv iroiciv Tt XPT Toiis TOio-uTovs iTpotrSoKav (=£iroiovv av), cl ^t)8eis Itttjv

. . . KtvSvvos ; DeM. 21, 9.

LyCURG. 74: Ka'iToi o'U(rde civ, et . . . Travres €(f)vyov, tovt(ov av ri yeveadai tSuv Ka\u>v epyuiv. Dem. 21,9 (see above).

lOl E : a-v S ei tu>v iis Plato, Phaedo, , e'lirfp (f)i\o(T6(f)a)V, olfiai av eyw

iroLols. B : ov tis ert Xe'-yo) Theaet. 164 cru/x/3aiVet apa, eVicTTJ^^wi' tyevfro, p.ep.vri-

avTov iiriuTatjOaL . . o av eivai el 26 yttvov firj ., Tepas e(f)afi€V yiyvoiTO. Tim.

: ovk av oi8 ei ev B eyo) yupi a p.ev X^^^ rJKovaa, 8vvaip.r}v airavra p-v^fir] ttoXw

XajBelv.

Xen. An. I, 3, 6: avv vfuv pev av oipai eivai Tipios. 2, I, 12: oTrXa pev

Ka\ : ovv e'voirej olopeOa av ttj aperfi p^p^tr^at. 2, 5, 16 ap.a av pot 8oKeis Ka\

^2 : el . . . (ravTca KaKovovs eivai. Cyr. 5, 4> eiTai8oTVOLr)(rdpr)v, ovK 018' av el eKTTj- a-dprjv TraiSa toiovtov nepl epe. (The hyperbaton of the av is due to the at- traction of the verb 018(a).)

2 : ThUC. 2, 70>4* evopi^ov yap av Kparrjaai Trjs noXecos. 3, 42, ev pev elTrelv ovk av r^yelraL irepX rov prj KaXoii 8vvaa6ai (46l)' ?• 4^, 2: its ttjs ye

T]p,epas ravTqs ovkIti olopevoi av vavpaxTJcat. Ar. Tov 'lovXiov T av Eq. 407-8: o'iopai, yepovra irvpoiriTrrjv, \ rjcrOevT

IrjTraicoviaai Kal BaK^e^aK^ov dcrai.

Eur. Ale. 48 : Xa^av 'id'- ov yap oi8' av el neiaaip.i (re. Med. 941 : ovk 8i oi'S' av el Treiaaipi, TreipdcrdaL XP''!-

466. Rare position of av in Rdatrre Subjunctive Sentences : av oo-a 5wa IviAiravra irpdo-ifi* eKao-xois i^, Tpixij Smipeio'flwj PlaTO, Legg. 848 A.

(iv but this is Antiphon, 5, 38: Kaff hv prjvvn tis, changed by editors to KaG" hv av etc.

Plato, Legg. 739 C : oirov t6 iraKai Xeyopevov av ylyvrjTai. 848 A (see oira nXiov av D* to above). 850 A: j;. 955 oTTOTepa hrjp.ocnov av ;(p^(r^ai ^ovXr^Tai. Ar. Ran. dXXa ottoctov av 258-60: prjv KeKpa^opeadd y \ rj (pdpvy^ rjpatv \

)(av8dv]}. For examples of the normal position ol av in Temporal, Conditional, I go CREEK SYNTAX

Concessive, and Relative Sentences, see Temporal, Condittonac, Concessive^ and Relative Sentences.

467. Repetition of w> and k£(v). — dV is not unfrequently repeated in the same clause, sometimes in order to resume a distant av, sometimes for rhetorical emphasis, especially with the negative or equivalent interrogative. Keiv) is also repeated, though rarely, and both av and Keiy) are occasionally found in the same clause.

iroiav Tiv' ovv av oIkoit' av irdXiv 1 tjSio-t' ; Ar. Av. 27 ; What manner of

city, then, shouldyou like best to live in (436) ?

• ''"'''S' Tore Koi LyCURG. 57 ^v Kaipols kqt epyaaiav fKTrXeip, Tjviica ov8 av eis

7rpo(TKTT](Taa6ai ov8ev av e^rjTrjafv.

ISOC. 5. 71 • '"'^ ^ ovK av rmv Ka\ fierpiws Xoyi^opievav ravTas av

I '• TTcoy ovv ovk 8etva LyS. [20], 5 av av naaxoip-fv (44^) i Plato, Apol. 17 D. cocnrep ovv av, el rw (ivTi ^ivos irvy^^avov &v, ^vveyi- yva>

^ovTfS eyeLpopevoi, dpovcravres liv p.e, ireidopevoi 'Avvtco, paSt'coy av aTroKTeivaiTe.

2 6 . . . . tcd XeN. Conv. 6, (442). Cyr. 2, 3, yi-yi/coo-Ko) on i^ hv av iya e'/xo5

acifiari iroirjao), ov Kpidfirjv ovre av trpStros oiire av SevTepos, oip-ai S' oiib' av p^iXtooTOf, i'crcof S' ovb' av nvpioaTos. 5- 2. 23. Mem. I, 4, 14.

: S' ThUC. I, 36, 3 ^pa^vTUTca av Ke(f)aXaicp, tois re ^vp.na(Ti Ka\ KaS" fKacrrov,

TcoS' av prj TTpoea-dat r'jpas p-ddoiTe. 76. 4 '• aXKovs y' av ovv ol6p.eda ra ly/xerepa

el rt 1 ". . XajBovTas Sei^at av pakicTTa fierpid^opev. 4> 8, 4 Ka\ e'Xa;(iOT' av . . iv rco

(VTVx^'i-v av paXitrra KaraXvoiVTO. 4' I I4t 4- 5- '^5' -• 6, 10,4. II, 2.

HDT. 3' 35 • Se'cTTTora, ov8 av avTOV eyco-ye SoKe'o) tov 6eov ovtu> av KaXws /3a-

Xtlv. 7, 139' opiovres av . . . ofxaXnyhj av ixpTjcravTo Trpos Atp^ea.

: ovk ...... Ar. Ach. 214-7 av wSe (fiavXas av e^ecjivyev ov8' av (Xa(ppci)s av dnenXi^aTo. Nub. 118. 840. Av. 127 (see above). Lys. 252-3 (440).

Ale. : ttoXX' Eur. 72 av av X4^as ovhev av ttX4ov Xa/3otf. Andr. 934-5 : OVK av €v av av Heracl. y epo'n 86pois \ ^Xinova avyds Tt'ifi (KapirovT Xe^^- 8' 721 : (l>6dvois av OVK av To'i(T8f crov KpvnTciv Se'^ay. lon, 625-6. O. R. fr. • Soph. 446 (463). 673 ttws av ovk av iv 81k7] ddvoip.' av ;

PiND. N. . Kfv . . . av kiv8vvov 9, 34-5 Xpo/itio) vTTaa-iri^mv | fKpivas o^et'ay dvras.

HOM. Od. 4, 732-4 • f' 686v tw xe yap iy(^ md6pr)v TavTTjv opfialvovra, | jxdX' Kev Kal odolo, Ke eVi eXeiirev. rj ffifive eaavfifvos nep \ 7 fie reGvr^Kv'iav p-eydpoicrcv

: av Kev. 5, 361 o(Pp' p.fv 6, 259: o

II. II, 187: o(^p' av fiev Kev. 202 {id.). I3, 127-8: as ovt av Kev

ovocraiTO ovre k' Xaocrcrdoy. : crol S' "Aprfs p.eTeX0oiv \ 'Adrjvair) 24, 437 av eyat

iTOfiTTos Kal Ke kXvtov Apyos LKoipriv.

PA Gildersleeve, Basil Lanrie&u 367 Syntax of classical Greek G56 from Homer to Demosthenes pt.l

PLEASE DO NOT REMOVE

CARDS OR SLIPS FROM THIS POCKET

UNIVERSITY OF TORONTO LIBRARY